* A Distributed Proofreaders Canada eBook *

This eBook is made available at no cost and with very few restrictions. These restrictions apply only if (1) you make a change in the eBook (other than alteration for different display devices), or (2) you are making commercial use of the eBook. If either of these conditions applies, please check with a https://www.fadedpage.com administrator before proceeding. Thousands more FREE eBooks are available at https://www.fadedpage.com.

This work is in the Canadian public domain, but may be under copyright in some countries. If you live outside Canada, check your country's copyright laws. If the book is under copyright in your country, do not download or redistribute this file.

Title: Bering's Voyages: An Account of the Efforts of the Russians to Determine the Relation of Asia and America Vol. I

Date of first publication: 1922

Author: Frank A. Golder (1877-1929)

Date first posted: Mar. 15, 2021

Date last updated: June 16, 2022

Faded Page eBook #20210337

This eBook was produced by: Howard Ross & the online Distributed Proofreaders Canada team at https://www.pgdpcanada.net





cover

AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY

RESEARCH SERIES NO. 1

 

W. L. G. Joerg, Editor

 

BERING’S VOYAGES

 

An Account of the Efforts of the Russians to

Determine the Relation of Asia and America

 

BY

 

F. A. GOLDER

 

IN TWO VOLUMES

VOLUME I:

 

The Log Books and Official Reports of

the First and Second Expeditions

1725-1730 and 1733-1742

 

WITH A CHART OF THE SECOND VOYAGE

 

BY

 

ELLSWORTH P. BERTHOLF

AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY

 

BROADWAY AT 156TH STREET

NEW YORK

 

1922


COPYRIGHT, 1922

BY

THE AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY

OF NEW YORK

 

Reprinted 1935

 

CONDÉ NAST PRESS

GREENWICH, CONN.

 

Reprinted from plates by the

LORD BALTIMORE PRESS, BALTIMORE, MD.


TO

 

PROFESSOR EDWARD CHANNING

 

OF

 

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

CONTENTS

CHAPTERPAGE
Prefaceix
  
Part I
The First Expedition, 1725-1730, and Its Setting
IThe Geographical Knowledge of the North Pacific Ocean at the Beginning of the Eighteenth Century1
IIBering’s First Expedition, 1725-17306
IIIGvozdev’s Voyage to America in 173221
  
Part II
The Second Expedition, 1733-1742
IVBering’s Second Expedition, From Its Inception to the Beginning of the Sea Voyage25
VThe Log Book of Bering’s Vessel, the “St. Peter,” and of Her Successor, the Hooker “St. Peter”36
VILieutenant Waxel’s Report on the Voyage of the “St. Peter”270
VIIThe Journal of Chirikov’s Vessel, the “St. Paul”283
VIIIChirikov’s Report on the Voyage of the “St. Paul”312
IXThe End of the Expedition328
Note to Accompany the Chart of the Voyage of Bering and Chirikov from Kamchatka to the Alaskan Coast and Return, 1741, by the late Ellsworth P. Bertholf330
Bibliographical Note349
Index to both volumes (originally only in Vol. II.)
Errata to both volumes (originally only in Vol. II.)

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Fig.Page
1Section of a map by Guillaume Delisle, 1714, to illustrate contemporary knowledge of the North Pacific . . . facing2
2Facsimile of part of Peter the Great’s orders for the first expedition, with comments in his own handwriting . . . facing7
3Map showing route of the first expedition from St. Petersburg to Bering Strait10
4Facsimile of a manuscript map showing the route of the first expedition from Yudoma Cross to Urak near Okhotsk. (Drawing by Spanberg in the Russian archives.) . . . facing13
5Copy of the eastern section of the map accompanying Bering’s report on his first expedition. (After Dall’s facsimile.)14-15
6Facsimile of Berkh’s map, 1823, showing route of the first expedition from Okhotsk to Bering Strait and return. . . . facing20
7Facsimile of a manuscript map of the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul (Petropavlovsk), 1740. (Drawing by Elagin in the Russian archives.) . . . facing34
8The Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. (From an old engraving) . . . facing35
9Facsimile of signatures of Bering and his officers. (From the log book of the St. Peter: entry of May 4, 1741.)39
10Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by Yushin: entry of June 7, 1741 . . . facing52
11Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by Khitrov: end of entry of September 5, 1741, with map of the Shumagin Islands . . . facing148
12Upper: An Aleut in his baidarka, or skin boat. (Drawing on the chart of the voyage of the St. Peter by Waxel and Khitrov in the Russian archives.) 
Lower: A native of Unalaska in a baidarka. (Drawing by Levashev in the Russian archives.) . . . facing149
13Facsimile of a page of the journal of the St. Paul: entries of July 10-15, 1741 . . . facing290
14A man of Unalaska. (Drawing by Levashev.) . . . facing304
15Left: Inside and outside views of native hut, Unalaska. 
Right: A native woman of Unalaska. (Drawing by Levashev.) . . . facing305
  
Pl.  
1Chart of the voyage of Bering and Chirikov in the St. Peter and the St. Paul from Kamchatka to the Alaskan coast and return, 1741, based on the log books and other original records and adjusted to known physical conditions. Mean meridional scale, 1:5,500,000. By Ellsworth P. Bertholf . . . facing348

{p. ix}

PREFACE

The discovery of the northwest coast of America by the Russians deserves far more consideration than it has yet received. Our information on the subject is very fragmentary—a chapter here and a chapter there in the histories of the Russian Far East and the American Far West. This neglect is due not so much to lack of interest as to lack of material and to the peculiar problems which the handling of the material presents. But these difficulties are gradually disappearing, and it is now possible to undertake a task that twenty years ago seemed out of the question. In this work the author has made the actors tell their own story of the discovery of the northwest coast of America. It would have been worth while to bring together all the interesting material relating to the subsidiary voyages of Bering’s second expedition—the voyages of Spanberg to Japan and the explorations along the Arctic coast—but neither time nor space permitted it.

Volume 1 includes an account of the log books and reports of the navigators, and Volume 2 deals with the journal of Steller, which throws much light on the second expedition and furnishes valuable scientific data. In the translation the terminology of the navigators has been retained and their ideas faithfully rendered in so far as it was possible, considering that their penmanship was not always legible, nor their language grammatical, nor their expressions intelligible. With these original data before him the reader is in a position to form an independent conclusion respecting the controversies raging around this voyage. This book is not the last word on the subject, and it is hoped that other investigators will use its material to make further studies in the field.

The late Captain E. P. Bertholf, until within two years of his death in 1921 Commandant of the U. S. Coast Guard, and an authority on the waters and shores of Bering Sea and the North Pacific Ocean, has made a distinct contribution to science by plotting out scientifically the tracks and landfalls of the {p. x} St. Peter and the St. Paul. In addition he read the manuscript and suggested improvements. Lieutenant Raymond Burhen, U.S.N., and Captain Sam Hoyt, of Seattle, have helped in the matter of nautical expressions. To all these gentlemen the author is sincerely grateful. He takes this occasion also to testify publicly to the courtesy and genuine good will of the Russian archivists and scholars of the old régime with whom he had contact in Petrograd and Moscow in his search for material. They were ever ready to inconvenience themselves to help him in his work. Some of these men have been forced from their position and their country, and others, like Professor Lappo-Danilevski, have died of starvation. They were real scholars and true gentlemen, and it is with a feeling of reverence and gratitude that this tribute is paid to them.


{p. 1}

CHAPTER I

THE GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN AT THE BEGINNING OF THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY

The numerous naval expeditions of the sixteenth century in search of a short passage to Asia gave the geographers a fairly good idea of the waters and shores of the Atlantic and of those parts of the Arctic that were nearest to Europe and European settlements. Equally helpful in making the Indian and the South Pacific waters familiar to the educated world were the voyages via the Cape of Good Hope route to the Indies, China, and Japan, the annual voyages of the Spanish naval officers between Mexico and the Philippines, and the occasional raids of the English freebooters along the Spanish-American coast. From the early years of the seventeenth century onward more or less reliable maps existed for the Pacific Ocean south of the parallel which runs through Cape Mendocino and the northern part of the main island of Japan, but for the vast region north of that line not a single map that could in any way lay claim to accuracy was to be found before the time of the Bering voyages. It was not even known whether the North Pacific area was all land or all water, whether Asia and America were separated or united (Fig. 1).

There were many reasons for believing that islands or a continent were to be found in that northern region. When the Jesuits came to Japan in the middle of the sixteenth century they learned that north of Japan proper there was a body of land called Yezo, but they could not fully inform themselves as to its shape and size. A somewhat similar report reached Europe from another quarter. Richard Cocks, an English merchant in Japan, in a letter written in 1611, made mention of “an island called Yedzo, which is thought to be rather some part of the continent Tartaria.”

{p. 2}

But this was not the only vague information the cartographers had to go on. The credulous were as eager as ever to hear of islands with golden streets, and they accepted as a fact every baseless rumor which helped to confirm them in their belief. One of these rumors was that in the year 1582, or thereabouts, a Spanish vessel in going from Manila eastward ran into a storm which drove her to an island situated in latitude 37° 30′ N. and some 400 miles east of Japan. The inhabitants of this island were hospitable and rich to such an extent that even the pots and pans were made of gold and silver.

Vizcaíno and Vries

The Spanish government attached enough importance to current gossip to send Sebastian Vizcaíno from Mexico in search of the rumored El Dorado. He spent the autumns of 1611 and 1612 in cruising north, south, and east of Japan without, however, being able to locate the prize. In the meantime the Dutch traders heard the story, and they in turn became interested. In 1639 the Dutch East India Company instructed Mathijs Quast and Abel Janszoon Tasman to find the gold island, but all their efforts were in vain. Four years later the company sent another expedition in command of Maerten Gerritszoon Vries. He sailed north and east of Japan, sighting the island of Yezo without, however, being able to determine either its shape or its size, and came among (what are now known as) the Kurile Islands. The two southernmost of these, Kunashiri and Itorup, he thought were one island, which he named State Island and the other, Urup (which he thought to be part of the American continent), Company Land. But neither gold nor silver did Vries find, though he sailed north to Sakhalin, south to Formosa, and east 460 miles from Japan. The Vries discoveries were put on the map by Jansson in 1650. The preceding year (1649) another cartographer, Texeira by name, published a map on which he marked the discoveries (in the early part of the seventeenth century) of a certain Juan de Gama just about where Vries placed his Company Land, that is to say between latitude 40° and 45° N. (Fig. 1).

map

Fig. 1—Section of a map of the northern hemisphere by Guillaume Delisle, July, 1714, to illustrate the contemporary knowledge of the North Pacific. Note the “Terre de la Compagnie” and the “Côte découverte par Dom Jean de Gama.”

{p. 3}

Company Land and Gama Land

It is no wonder that these three reports, that of the Jesuits, Vries, and Texeira, of the three poorly described territories, Yezo, Company Land, and Gama Land, bewildered the cartographers. They were at a loss to know whether the lands in question were islands or continents, whether they were parts of America or of Asia, whether they were three distinct lands or one and the same. On the maps of the second half of the seventeenth and the early part of the eighteenth century all these views, and many others besides, found expression. Johann Baptist Homann of Nuremberg, on his map of about 1712, suggested that Terra Esonis was probably the northwest coast of America and the same land that Gama discovered; on the other hand Guillaume Delisle, in a memoir which he read before the Paris Academy of Sciences in 1720, made the statement that Yezo was a part of Asia and that Japan was a peninsula of it. The difference in the point of view of these two men gives an idea of the confusion on the subject that existed at the beginning of the eighteenth century. There was only one way of clearing up these difficulties, and that was by actual investigation.

The Russian Advance in Siberia

During the century and a half that the cartographers were losing themselves in their speculations and paper explorations of the North Pacific the Russian trappers, traders, tribute gatherers, and missionaries were wandering over the length and breadth of Siberia and pushing their discoveries to the “Eastern” Ocean. They had not, however, a clear idea of what they were doing; they had not even a very good mental picture of the land they discovered.

By actual navigation they had learned that the Ob, Yenisei, and Lena emptied into the “Icy” Sea, that the Amur, Ud, and Okhota flowed into the Eastern Sea; but they were ignorant as to whether there existed a passage between these two seas. They {p. 4} knew that one could go by water from the mouth of the Ob to the mouth of the Lena, from the mouth of the Amur to the mouth of the Okhota, but they did not know whether one could navigate from the mouth of the Lena to the mouth of the Okhota. They were not agreed among themselves whether there was land to the north and east of the two last-named rivers. Many of these Siberian hunters believed that not far from the mouth of the Kolyma River a large continent (bolshaya zemlya) extended northward and that the Asiatic mainland stretched out indefinitely to the eastward. Something was also said and known of the Anadyr and Kamchatka Rivers, but they were supposed to discharge their waters into the Arctic. According to some curious Siberian maps of the late seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries eastern Asia ended somewhere near the mouth of the Okhota River and northern Asia close to the Yana River, and the two parts together, where they joined, formed a right angle. The areas which now go by the name of Kamchatka and the Chukchi Peninsula were then unnoticed. This may have been due to the Siberians’ ignorance of the country or to their ignorance of the science of map making.

Peter the Great’s Interest

When Peter the Great came into power he took deep interest in the activities of his energetic Cossacks and tried to give them intelligent guidance. He sent many of his Swedish prisoners of war into Siberian ports to teach his subjects to build sea-going vessels, to use nautical instruments, and to construct modern maps. Between 1700 and 1715 Kamchatka and the Kurile Islands were discovered and explored, and the terra incognita in Asia was pushed still farther eastward. Reports of these discoveries reached the scientific men of Western Europe, and when Peter came among them in 1716 and 1717 they discussed with him the question of the North Pacific and urged him to settle once for all the problem whether Asia and America were united. Peter accepted for himself and for his country the honor and the {p. 5} responsibility, and carried the undertaking through successfully, although at the time his success was somewhat doubted. When Bering’s second expedition came to an end in 1749, Bering Strait had been discovered, the Arctic coast of Asia from the White Sea to the Kolyma River had been charted, and the North Pacific coast of America from Cape Addington to Bering Island had been placed on the map. This was Russia’s share in the work of discovery and exploration, and a very important contribution to geographical knowledge it was.


{p. 6}

CHAPTER II

BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION, 1725-1730

On his return to his capital in 1718 Peter the Great went to work at once on the problem of the relation of Asia to America. He ordered two of his officers, Fedor Luzhin and Ivan Evreinov, to proceed to Asia to make certain investigations for him and “to go to Kamchatka and farther, as you have been ordered, and determine whether Asia and America are united; and go not only north and south but east and west, and put on a chart all that you see.”[1] They left Russia in 1719, reached Kamchatka in 1720, cruised among and explored the Kurile Islands in 1720 or 1721, returned to St. Petersburg in 1722 or 1723, and made a verbal report to the emperor. Just what they reported is not known, but it is certain that they did not “determine whether Asia and America are united.”

Peter the Great’s Orders

This failure did not discourage Peter; it probably convinced him that in order to be successful the undertaking would have to be maintained on a larger scale than he had contemplated in 1718. The time was more favorable now than before for such work; the Peace of Nystad gave him the leisure and the peace of mind for planning great things. Unfortunately his health began to fail, and, as he realized that he had not long to live, he made more haste. On December 23, 1724,[2] he set matters in motion by drawing up the following orders:


Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 4. Doc. 3266.

In the present work the dates are according to the old style, at that time eleven days behind the new style.

Cyrillic text with handwritten notes

Fig. 2—Facsimile of paragraphs 3 and 4 of Peter the Great’s orders of December 23, 1724, for Bering’s first expedition, with comments in his own handwriting. For translation, see the text, p. 7. This document is found in the Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724, No. 29, Petrograd.

{p. 7}

Orders of Peter the Great for the Selection of Officers for the First Expedition[3]

Peter’s OrdersReports
1. To find geodesists who have been in Siberia and have returned.The Senate learns that the following named geodesists have been in Siberia: Ivan Zakharov, Peter Chichagov, Ivan Evreinov, who died,[4] Fedor Luzhin, Peter Skobeltsyn, Ivan Svistunov, Dmitri Baskakov, Vasili Shetilov, Grigori Putilov.
2. To find among the deserving naval lieutenants or sub-lieutenants such as could be sent to Siberia and Kamchatka.Admiral Sievers and Rear Admiral Senyavin recommend among the naval lieutenants Stanberg,[5] Zverev, or Posenkov; among the sub-lieutenants Chirikov or Laptev. It would be advisable to have over them as commander Captain Bering or Fonverd. Bering has been in the East Indies and knows conditions, and Fonverd has had experience as navigator.
3. To find among the apprentices or assistant master builders one who could build there a deck ship along the lines of the big ships here. For that purpose there should be sent with him young ship carpenters, such instruments as may be needed, one quartermaster, and eight sailors.The student of shipbuilding, Fedor Koslov, is able to build either decked or open ships if he is furnished with a plan.

It is very necessary to have as navigator or assistant navigator one who has been in North America.
4. Likewise to forward from here one and a half* sets of sails; blocks, cables, and such like; four falconets with the necessary ammunition; and one or two sailmakers.Rigging is being sent.
*Two sets.

The rest is all right.
{p. 8} 
5. If there are no such navigators in our navy, a letter should be dispatched at once to Holland that two men be sent who know the sea in the north and as far as Japan. These men should come by the admiralty post.Vice-Admiral Sievers has written that he has among our men navigators who know the sea and that he will send them without delay.

December 23, 1724.


Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724, No. 29, pp. 129-130. In the left-hand column are Peter’s instructions, in the right is the report of the Senate or the Admiralty Council. The lines in italics are comments on the report by Peter made in his own handwriting (see Fig. 2).

In 1720 or 1721 Evreinov and Luzhin, as stated above, went to the Kurile Islands at the order of Peter. Soon after their return Evreinov died.

I.e. Spanberg.

Ukase to the Governor of Siberia, Prince Dolgorukov[6]

We are sending to Siberia Fleet-Captain Vitus Bering with assistants to undertake a naval expedition and to carry out such instructions as he has from us. When he comes to you and asks help of one kind and another for the expedition you are to give it to him.

January, 1725.

Account of the Expedition

On the strength of the recommendations of the Senate and the Admiralty Council the tsar selected Vitus Bering[7] to lead the expedition and gave him as lieutenants Martin Spanberg[8] and Alexei Chirikov. In the early part of January, 1725, he also drew up and signed the instructions;[9] but, owing to his failing health, he had to leave the execution of them to his friend Count Apraksin.[10] The death of Peter on January 28, 1725, did not in the least {p. 9} disturb the plans of the undertaking. Catherine was determined to carry out all the policies and ambitions of her husband. Already, on January 24, the vanguard of the party had left the capital, but Bering and several others did not leave until February 5, the day the instructions were handed to him, as may be read in the report of Bering which follows.


Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724, No. 29.

Vitus Bering was born at Horsens, Denmark, in the year 1681. As soon as he was old enough he went to sea and in 1703 made a voyage to the East Indies. In 1704 he joined the Russian navy with the rank of sub-lieutenant. He rose gradually in the service, being made lieutenant in 1707, lieutenant-captain in 1710, captain of the fourth rank in 1715, captain of the third rank in 1717, captain of the second rank in 1720, and captain of the first rank in 1724, when he was put in charge of the expedition. For a fuller account of Bering’s life the reader is referred to Peter Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,” transl. by J. E. Olson, Chicago, 1889.

Spanberg was a Dane and Chirikov a Russian.

Printed below, pp. 10-11, in Bering’s report.

Nartov’s account of the last days of the monarch (Razskazi Nartova o Petre Velikom, edited by L. N. Maikov, St. Petersburg, 1891, p. 99) shows how important the latter regarded the expedition:

“In the beginning of January, 1725, Peter was realizing that he had not long to live, yet his unconquerable spirit was busily at work for the good of the country. With his own hand he drew up the instructions relative to the Kamchatka expedition, which should determine the relation between Asia and America. He also selected the officers for this work—Vitus Bering, Martin Spangenberg [this was the usual way of writing it at this period], and Alexei Chirikov.

“I was then almost constantly with the Emperor and saw with my own eyes how eager His Majesty was to get the expedition under way, being, as it were, conscious that his end was near. When all had been arranged he seemed pleased and content. Calling the general-admiral [Count Apraksin] to him he said: ‘Bad health has obliged me to remain at home. Recently I have been thinking over a matter which has been on my mind for many years, but other affairs have prevented me from carrying it out. I have reference to the finding of a passage to China and India through the Arctic Sea. On the map before me there is indicated such a passage bearing the name of Anian. There must be some reason for that. In my last travels I discussed the subject with learned men, and they were of the opinion that such a passage could be found. Now that the country is in no danger from enemies we should strive to win for her glory along the lines of the arts and sciences. In seeking such a passage who knows but perhaps we may be more successful than the Dutch and English, who have made many such attempts along the American coast. I have written out these instructions and, on account of my health, I entrust the execution of them, point by point, to you, Feodor Matveyevich.’ ”

Report of Fleet-Captain Bering on His Expedition to the Eastern Coast of Siberia[11]

To the Most Enlightened, August, and Great Empress of All the Russias [is submitted] a short account of the Siberian Expedition undertaken by Her Imperial Majesty’s humble servant. Fleet Captain V. I. Bering.[12]

On February 5, 1725, I received from Her Imperial Majesty the Empress Catherine Alexeyevna,[13] of illustrious and immortal memory, the instructions drawn up by the hand of His Imperial Majesty Peter the Great, of deserving and eternal fame, a copy of which follows:

1. Build in Kamchatka or in some other place in that region one or two decked boats.

{p. 10}

map

Fig. 3—Map showing the route of Bering’s first expedition. Scale 1:50,000,000. Of the land journey, between St. Petersburg and Okhotsk, both the outward and the return routes are shown; of the sea voyage, between Okhotsk and Bering Strait (overland across Kamchatka), only the outward route is shown. (Based, for the land journey, on the text herewith and the tables (see bibliography) of Bering’s report, and, for the sea voyage, on the map, reproduced in Fig. 6, accompanying Berkh’s work of 1823 (see bibliography), which is based on the log book kept by midshipman Peter Chaplin.)

{p. 11}

2. Sail on these boats along the shore which bears northerly and which (since its limits are unknown) seems to be a part of America.

3. Determine where it joins with America, go to some settlement under European jurisdiction; if you meet a European ship learn from it the name of the coast and put it down in writing, make a landing to obtain more detailed information, draw up a chart and come back here.[14]

In the orders given me by General-Admiral Count Apraksin[15] it was stated that I was to ask for mechanics and supplies from the provincial government at Tobolsk and that I was to make monthly reports to the Admiralty College.[16]

On January 24, before I received the instructions, there was dispatched by the Admiralty College in the interest of the expedition one of my lieutenants with 26 men and 25 wagonloads of materials. Altogether there were under my command 33 men, and they were sent by way of Vologda. From St. Petersburg to Tobolsk we passed en route the following cities: Vologda, Totma, Veliki Ustyug, Solvychegodsk, Kai, Solikamsk, Verkhotura, Turinsk (also called Epanchin), and Tyumen.[17]

On March 16 Tobolsk was reached and there we remained until May 15 because of the cold weather. During the stay I requisitioned the necessary material for the expedition. On May 15 we started down the Irtish to Samarovsk in four boats, known in Siberia as doshcheniki.[18] They were loaded with supplies brought from St. Petersburg as well as other things gathered at Tobolsk. In the last-named city there were added to my company, at my request, a monk, a commissar, petty officers, and soldiers to the number of 34.

From Samarovsk I sent ahead my marine guard,[19] who carried with him orders from the provincial government of Tobolsk to the towns along the way to have boats prepared at Yeniseisk and Ust-Kut,[20] but {p. 12} he himself was to proceed to Yakutsk. After leaving Samarovsk we went up the Ob to Surgut and to Narim, thence up the river Ket to Makovska Post.[21] Along the course that we followed from Tobolsk to Makovska live the Ostyaks,[22] who were formerly idolaters but through the labors of Metropolitan Philophei[23] of Tobolsk were converted to Christianity in 1715. We proceeded overland from Makovska to Yeniseisk and there went aboard four boats and worked our way up the rivers Yenisei and [Upper] Tunguska to the mouth of the Ilim River. On the Tunguska there are three rapids (poroga) and several rocky shoals (shkver). In the rapids there are large submerged rocks across the whole width of the stream so that a boat can get through in only one or two places; the shoals likewise have rocks above and below the surface but they [the shoals] are not very large. The shoals differ from the rapids in that the former have little water and continue for a verst or two at a stretch, which causes some trouble in getting over them. At Yeniseisk I took for my service, in accordance with instructions from Tobolsk, 30 carpenters and blacksmiths. The rapids and shoals made it impossible to go up the Ilim to Ilimsk, and on that account there were sent out from that town smaller craft. On these the heavier materials were taken to Ilimsk, but the lighter were transported to the same place in the course of the winter.

Lieutenant Spanberg with 39 men, carpenters and laborers, was sent overland to Ust-Kut, where, during the winter, they constructed 15 barges for taking the men and supplies down the Lena to Yakutsk. With the other members of the party I wintered at Ilimsk because there were not enough accomodations for all at Ust-Kut and we could not go through to Yakutsk owing to the snow and cold, the lack of teams, and the uninhabited country. According to orders from Tobolsk we were to receive our food supplies from Irkutsk and Ilimsk, as no grain grows at Yakutsk. During the winter I went from Ilimsk to Irkutsk to consult with the voivode[24] of that city, who formerly held a similar position at Yakutsk, about that country, of which we knew very little, and to find out the best way of going from there to Okhotsk and Kamchatka. Towards the end of the winter I took over to Ust-Kut {p. 13} my whole company, which included 20 carpenters and blacksmiths from Irkutsk and two coopers from Ilimsk.

hand drawn map

Fig. 4—Facsimile of map showing the route of Bering’s first expedition across the Stanovoi scarp from Yudoma Cross by way of the Urak River to Urak near Okhotsk. (Drawing by Spanberg found among the Bering Papers No. 24 in the Archives of the Ministry of Marine in Petrograd.)

Translation of key: Upper left (village of Yudoma Cross): A, powder house; B, warehouse; C, living quarters; D, barracks; E, underground room (cellar?); F, guardhouse; G, native huts; J, Yudoma River.

(Dotted lines indicate winter route. In summer goods were portaged from Yudoma Cross to the headwaters of the Urak.)

Lower right (village of Urak): A, warehouse; B, cemetery; C, barracks; D, tavern; E, pilot’s house; F, bathhouse; G, storerooms of employees; H, native huts.

Along the Tunguska, Him, and Lena Rivers, as far as the Vitim,[25] live the idolatrous Tungus who have deer for riding, but those who have no deer make their homes along the banks of streams and subsist on fish and get about in birch canoes.

In the spring of 1726 we left Ust-Kut in 15 barges and went down the Lena to Yakutsk. From the Vitim down along the Lena, on both banks, live the Yakuts and a small number of Tungus. The Yakuts have many horses and cattle which supply them with food and clothing, but those that have but few of these animals live on fish. They are idolaters; they worship the sun and the moon and, of the birds, the swan, the eagle, and the raven. They hold in high respect their priests, whom they call shamans, who keep in their possession small idols (bolvanov) known to them as shaitany. They claim to be of Tatar origin.

On arriving at Yakutsk I called for help to assist my men on the barges, and, as soon as they came, I dispatched Lieutenant Spanberg in 13 of the boats that were built at Ust-Kut and drew but little water down the Lena to the Aldan and from there up the Maya and the Yudoma. These barges were loaded with materials which could not be transported overland, besides other naval and land stores. I had hoped that this freight could be taken by water as far as Yudoma Cross,[26] a much cheaper way than sending it by horses. That same summer I, with a small number of my men, went from Yakutsk to Okhotsk on horseback, taking with us a pack train, each horse carrying only a five-pood[27] load, and in this manner we brought over sixteen hundred poods of provisions. It was impossible to make use of wagons owing to the mud and the hills. At Okhotsk Post there are only ten Russian dwellings. Lieutenant Chirikov was left behind to winter at Yakutsk with the understanding that he was to come overland to Okhotsk in the spring.

Towards the end of December, 1726, I received word from Lieutenant Spanberg that his boats were ice-bound in the Gorbea River,[28] about 450 versts from Yudoma Cross, and that he had made sleds and was hauling on them the most needed material. I made up a party from my own men and those of the ostrog and gave them dog teams and supplies, and sent them to the relief of the lieutenant. He arrived with his company about the first part of January, 1727, without, however, bringing in any of the material, which he left in four different places along the uninhabited trail. They had been on the road ever since November 4 and during that time had suffered greatly from hunger, having been compelled to eat the dead horses that had dropped by the wayside, the harness, their leather clothing, and boots. Fortunately they found at Yudoma Cross the 150 poods of flour which we had left behind when some of our horses gave out.

{pp. 14, 15}

map

Fig. 5—The eastern section of the map accompanying Bering’s report of his first expedition. Reproduced from W. H. Dall’s facsimile (Appendix No. 19, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept. for 1890, Pl. 69) of a copy of the map prepared for use in Sweden, with transliteration of the Russian names, in 1889 in the collection of Baron Klinckofström. Compare with Bering’s route and the coast outlines on Figs. 3 and 6.

{p. 16}

Along the Aldan and Maya live the same kind of Yakuts as those on the Lena; but on the Yudoma, that part which is near Okhotsk Post, are the wandering coast Tungus, or Lamuts, as they call themselves. They have many deer, on the backs of which they ride summer and winter and which, as well as the wild deer, supply them with their food and clothing. Here, too, are to be seen the pedestrian Tungus who live near the sea and along the banks of the streams and depend on fish for their sustenance. They have the same religion as the Yakuts.

About the first part of February I gathered 90 men and several dog teams and gave them to Lieutenant Spanberg with orders to bring in whatever was left on the Yudoma. He himself returned during the first days of April, but some of his men did not come in until the middle of the month. Even then they failed to bring in everything, and it was necessary to send another party of 27 men to Yudoma Cross, which stayed away until May but brought in all the material on pack horses. In these regions people never go in winter from Yakutsk to Okhotsk or other far-off places on horseback; they go on foot, dragging behind them sleds—the kind we used between the Gorbea and Okhotsk—with such things as are needed, each sled carrying from 10 to 15 poods. A trip like this takes from eight to ten weeks. The snow here is sometimes seven feet deep, and in places even deeper, and people who travel in winter dig their way through the snow to the ground and there pass the night.

On June 30, Lieutenant Spanberg sailed for the mouth of the Bolshaya River on his newly built ship[29] which was loaded with all the materials. He had orders to discharge the cargo, send one of the petty officers with carpenters to Kamchatka to prepare ship timber, and return himself to Okhotsk.

Lieutenant Chirikov came from Yakutsk July 3, bringing with him in accordance with my instruction 2,300 poods of flour. We loaded the flour on Spanberg’s ship, which had returned, and on an old boat,[30] which had come in from the Bolshaya River, and sailed with my company for Bolsheretsk Post on August 21. The supplies that were still in the boats on the Gorbea I sent back to Yakutsk in charge of the pilot and the men who had been detailed to watch over them, with orders to get a receipt for them and then hasten back with some part of the {p. 17} supply of iron and tar and join me in Kamchatka in 1728. At the mouth of the Bolshaya River we had to discharge the cargo into small boats and take it to Bolsheretsk. This post had only 14 Russian houses. The heavier materials and part of the supplies were loaded into small boats and sent up the Bystra River,[31] a stream with a swift current, to within 120 versts of the Upper Kamchatka Post. That same winter we left Bolsheretsk on dog teams for the Upper and Lower Kamchatka Posts. Each evening we made a camp in the snow and covered over the opening. This country has some bad blizzards, called purgas,[32] and if a person is hit by one of them in an open place without having time to construct a shelter he is in danger of being snowed over and freezing to death. In the upper ostrog there are 17 houses; in the lower, 50; and in the other place, where the church is, there are 15 more. In all three places there lived, during our stay, not more than 150 persons [Russian]; their chief occupation is collecting tribute. The natives who drove the teams that brought us over from Bolsheretsk prepared 300 poods of whale blubber from a whale that had been washed ashore in the fall. In place of money they [the natives] were given Chinese tobacco. In southern Kamchatka live the Kurils, in the northern the Kamchadals. They have a common language, but there are a few minor differences. A small number of these people are idolaters. The others do not believe in anything and are strangers to all good customs (i chuzhdi vsiakykh dobrykh obychaev). Neither the natives of Kamchatka nor the Russians who live there sow any grain. Of domestic animals they have only the dog, which is used for driving, hauling, and for furnishing clothing. The food of the natives consists of fish, roots, berries, wild birds, and sea animals in season. In the neighborhood of the Yakutsk monastery, which is about a verst from the Kamchatka church, there are raised at the present time oats, hemp, and radishes. Turnips are cultivated in all three ostrogs, and they reach such a size as is seldom seen in Russia, four of them making a pood. I took over to the monastery above mentioned some rye and barley and had it sown, but whether it matured or not I cannot tell, for sometimes early frosts kill the crop. In cultivating the soil the people are handicapped by lack of draft animals.

From all aborigines under Russian jurisdiction tribute in fur is collected. The natives have many evil practices. If a woman or a beast gives birth to twins one of them must be killed at once. Not to do so {p. 18} is a great sin. It is a practice among the Kamchadals, if one of them is very sick, even a father or a mother, to take him out into the forest and leave him there, be it summer or winter, with just enough food to last a week, and as a result many die. The homes of the dead are not again occupied, and the dead themselves are not buried but are thrown into the woods, where the dogs devour them.[33] The Koryaks burn their dead; this custom is now forbidden, but the law is not strictly enforced.

When I reached Lower Kamchatka Post the timber for our ship was in large part ready. We went to work on her April 4, 1728, and with the help of God had her completed by July 10.[34] The timber we hauled on dog teams. Tar, since we had not brought any with us and the natives had none on hand as they did not know how to make it, we manufactured out of a tree known there as listvennik.[35] For lack of anything better to take along on the sea voyage, we distilled liquor from grass by a process known in that country;[36] salt we boiled out of sea water; butter we made from fish oil; and in place of meat we took salt fish. We had on board enough provisions to last 40 men a year. On July 14 we sailed from the mouth of the Kamchatka River out to sea and followed the course laid down by the instructions of His Imperial Majesty Peter the Great and here marked on the chart.

On August 8, when we were in latitude 64° 30′ N., eight men who claimed to be Chukchi (a people known for a long time to the Russians of the country) rowed to us from the shore in a leathern boat and, when near, asked who we were and why we came. On being invited on board, they put one man over, who, with the help of large inflated seal bladders, swam over to have a talk with us. A little later the boat moved up to us and the men in it told us that large numbers of Chukchi live along the shore, that a short distance from here the coast turns to the west, and that not far ahead of us is an island. We located this island, which we named St. Lawrence, in honor of the day, and found on it a few huts but no people, although I twice sent the midshipman to look for them.

By August 15 we came to latitude 67° 18′ N. and turned back because {p. 19} the coast did not extend farther north and no land was near the Chukchi or East Cape and therefore it seemed to me that the instructions of His Imperial Majesty of illustrious and immortal memory had been carried out. Had we gone on and met with unfavorable winds we might have been prevented from returning to Kamchatka that season, and to have wintered where we were would not have been wise because there was no wood of any kind and the native population does as it pleases, is not under Russian control, and has nothing to do with the Russian tribute collectors.[37]

From the mouth of the Kamchatka River to the point from which we turned back the coast is mountainous, almost as straight as a wall, and covered with snow even in summer.

On August 20 there came to our ship four boats containing 40 Chukchi like those who had visited us before. They offered for sale meat, fish, {p. 20} water, about 15 red and white fox skins, four walrus tusks—all of which they disposed of to the crew for needles and such like articles. They told us that their relatives go to the Kolyma on deer and not by boat, that farther along the coast live some of their people, that they had known the Russians for a long time, and that one of their number had been at Anadyrsk Post to trade. The rest of their conversation did not differ greatly from what was said by those who had been to see us before. On September 2 we sailed into the mouth of the Kamchatka River and passed the winter in the Lower Kamchatka Post.

Having repaired the ship, which had been laid up, we left the mouth of the Kamchatka River on June 5, 1729, and set an easterly course, because the inhabitants of Kamchatka said that in clear weather land could be seen across the sea. We made a careful search for it over a distance of 200 versts but could not find it. We circumnavigated and charted the southern part of Kamchatka, which up to this time had not been surveyed, and then sailed to the mouth of the Bolshaya River and from there to Okhotsk Post. At the request of the authorities at Yakutsk I left with the government officials in charge of the posts of Lower Kamchatka and Bolsheretsk 800 poods of flour, dried meat, salt, and groats.

It was July 23 when we reached the mouth of the Okhota River, where I handed over the ship and all that went with it to the officer in command. We hired horses and went to Yudoma Cross, and from there we proceeded by boats and rafts down the Aldan to the portage (belskoi perepravy) and lower, where we again took horses and rode on to Yakutsk. From Okhotsk to Yakutsk it took us from July 29 to August 29 and to September 3.[38] On September 10 we went in two boats up the Lena and proceeded until October 1, when we were blocked by ice and therefore spent a part of the autumn in the village of Peleduye.[39] By October 29 there was sufficient snow on the ground, and the banks of the Lena were firm enough on account of the ice to permit us to go on. We followed the [Upper] Tunguska and the Yenisei to Ilimsk and Yeniseisk, passing Russian settlements on the way. From Yeniseisk to Tomsk we continued along the river Chulym,[40] meeting with more Russian settlements and villages of newly converted Tatars. Between Tomsk and Chauska Post[41] we passed through other Russian settlements. From Chauska to Tara we crossed the Barabinsk Steppe, from Tara to Tobolsk we followed the river Irtish and met with Tatar villages. At Tobolsk we arrived January 10, 1730, and left there on the 25th of the same month for St. Petersburg, going over the same country as on the outward journey to Tobolsk. On March 1 we reached St. Petersburg.


Zapiski Voenno-Topogr. Depo, Vol. 10, pp. 69-75, St. Petersburg, 1847. The original report in manuscript is in the Archives of the General Staff, Section X, No. 566. [A translation of the published version appeared (pp. 135-143) in W. H. Dall: A Critical Review of Bering’s First Expedition, 1725-30, Natl. Geogr. Mag., Vol. 2, 1890, pp. 111-169.—Edit. Note.]

Vitus Ivanovich Bering. Bering’s father’s name was Jonas.

Catherine I, second wife of Peter, who succeeded him to the throne on February 8, 1725, and reigned until her death on May 6, 1727.

Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 7, Doc. 4649.

Feodor Matveyevich Apraksin (1671-1728), one of Peter’s right-hand men. See also footnote 10.

The Admiralty College was created in 1718 and became a Ministry in 1802.

For the route of the expedition, see map, Fig. 3. Most of the towns named, from Kai eastwards, were posts and stopping places for Siberian hunters and traders. Verkhotura (Upper Tura) was founded in 1598, Tyumen in 1586, and Tobolsk in 1587. Turinsk was also called Epanchin because a Tatar chief of that name lived here before the Russians came.

A doshchenik “is built of boards without a keel, flat-bottomed, about 35 to 40 feet long; rows and steers with long sweeps, two men to each; is furnished with a mast, and one square sail, and named from dosok, a board.” (Martin Sauer: An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the Northern Parts of Russia, . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings . . . , London, 1802, p. 20, footnote.)

Peter Chaplin.

Ust-Kut (Mouth of the Kut), where the Kut falls into the Lena and marks the head of navigation.

Built as a palisaded fort (ostrog) in 1619.

In the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries they made trouble for the Russians, but they are of no importance now. In 1911 the total number of Ostyaks in Siberia was 20,000.

Philophei (Leszczynski) (1650-1727). In 1702 Peter put him in charge of the Siberian missions, and it is recorded that through his efforts 40,000 natives were converted to Christianity.

Mikhaelo Izmailov, voivode from October, 1724, to April, 1731. In the Annals of Irkutsk (V. P. Sukachev: Pervoe stolyetie Irkutska, St. Petersburg, 1902, pp. 133-134) it is recorded that Spanberg and “Ivan Bering” were there in the course of this winter.

The Vitim is a right branch of the Lena flowing into it in 113° E. (see Fig. 3) and is known for its fine sables. In 1911 the Tungus, including the Lamuts, numbered 75,204; the Yakuts 245,406.

At the headwaters of the Yudoma, where navigation ceases, there was erected a cross, hence the name Yudoma Cross. For this part of the route, see map. Fig. 4.

A pood is about 36 pounds.

A left tributary of the Yudoma near its mouth. Probably the Derbi River of today.

The Fortune.

The Lodiya.

The Bystra (Swift), a branch of the Bolshaya, is full of rapids and shoals and is difficult to navigate. From Bolsheretsk to Lower Kamchatka Post the distance is 883 versts.

“The poorga raged with redoubled fury; the clouds of sleet rolled like a dark smoke over the moor, and we were all so benumbed with cold that our teeth chattered in our heads. The sleet, driven with such violence, had got into our clothes and penetrated even under our parkas, and into our baggage.” (Peter Dobell: Travels in Kamchatka and Siberia, 2 vols., London, 1830; reference in Vol. I, p. 102.)

A fuller and better account of the natives is to be found in S. P. Krasheninnikov’s “History of Kamchatka,” St. Petersburg, 1755, and G. W. Steller’s “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” Frankfort and Leipzig, 1774.

She was christened St. Gabriel.

Larch.

According to Steller the liquor is made in the following manner:

“Der Brandtewein wird aber folgendermassen angesetzt. Man gieset auf 2 Pud süsses Kraut 4 Eimer warmes und laues Wasser, leget zum Ferment entweder was von der Destillation übrig geblieben hinein, wovon er aber einen üblen Geruch oder Geschmack bekommt, oder Beeren von Schimalost [“Shimalost” is the Kamchatka honeysuckle bush (Lonicera caerulea) which bears delicious blue berries.—L. Stejneger.] wovon er sehr stark, angenehmer wird, und mehr Brandtewein giebet, oder man fermentiret ihn mit eingesauertem Mehl; nach Verlauf 24 Stunden wird er destilliret, und bekommt man einen Eimer Brandtewein.” (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” p. 86.)

On August 13, having reached 65° 30′, Bering called his officers together to discuss the question whether to go on or turn back. He said to them:

“Since we have come to latitude 65° 30′ N. and according to my opinion and the statements of the Chukchi, we have reached and passed the most easterly point of their land, the question is now, shall we go farther north? If so, how far? When should we begin to look for harbors? Where does it seem best—looking at it from the point of view of best serving our country—to go for the winter in order to protect men and ship?” The officers were divided in opinion. Spanberg, the senior officer, said: “Having come as far north as we have, and since on the Chukchi coast there are no harbors nor wood . . . so that we could preserve ourselves in such winter weather as we have in this region; and since these natives are not peaceful . . . I suggest that after we have gone on the course we are on until the sixteenth of this month, and if by that time we are not able to reach sixty-six degrees, we should then in God’s name turn about and betimes seek shelter and harbor on the Kamchatka River, whence we came, in order to save men and ship.” Chirikov made this argument: “As we have no positive information as to the degree of north latitude Europeans have ever reached in the Arctic Ocean on the Asiatic side we can not know with certainty whether America is really separated from Asia unless we touch at the mouth of the Kolyma, or at least the ice, because it is well known that there is always drift ice in the Arctic Ocean. Therefore it seems to me that according to your instructions we ought to sail without questioning—unless we are hindered by the ice, or the coast turns to the west—to the mouth of the Kolyma, as your instructions demand [a place under European jurisdiction?] But should the land continue still farther to the north, it would be necessary on the twenty-fifth of this month to look for winter quarters in this neighborhood, and above all opposite Chukotski Cape, where, according to the accounts of the Chukchi through Peter Tatarinov, there is a forest. And if up to that time winds are contrary, then look there by all means for a place to winter.” (Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 8, pp. 550-552, St. Petersburg, 1850.)

[For details on the sea voyage, the most important part of the expedition, which Bering in this report deals with only briefly, the main source of information is the midshipman Peter Chaplin’s log book, an abridged version of which, with map (cf. Fig. 6), was published by Berkh in 1823 and translated by Dall in 1891. Polonskii’s discussion of the first expedition, from which the above quotation is taken, is likewise of value. A narrative based on Berkh and Polonskii will be found in F. A. Golder’s “Russian Expansion on the Pacific,” pp. 140-147. For the references, see the bibliography.—Edit. Note.]

Not clear. Possibly August 29 represents the break in the journey at the portage.

Peleduye is at the mouth of the river of the same name, a branch of the Lena.

A tributary of the Ob (see Fig. 3), lined with villages of Chulym Tatars.

On the Chaus River, founded in 1713. It is 223 versts from Tomsk.

map

Fig. 6—Facsimile of Berkh’s map of 1823 (see bibliography) showing the route of Bering’s first expedition from Okhotsk to Bering Strait and return. Mean meridional scale 1:16,000,000 (originally 1:9,000,000). The dates have been identified and added from Berkh’s abridged version of midshipman Peter Chaplin’s log book. On sea they represent noon positions. Berkh’s plotting of the ship’s tracks has been slightly modified for August 18-20 and August 29, 1728. It would also seem as if the position of the tracks on August 10, 1728 (Bering’s report implies that a landing was made on St. Lawrence Island, cf. p. 18) and June 10-17, 1729 (Chaplin’s log book) might be susceptible of other interpretation. But otherwise, so far as known, Berkh’s map is the standard, and only modern, reconstruction of the tracks of Bering’s vessels on his first expedition. It does for that expedition what Captain Bertholf’s map (Pl. 1) does for the second.

The vessels in which the several sections of the tracks shown were sailed are: August 22-September 2, 1727, Fortune (Bering and Spanberg) and nameless vessel (Chirikov and Chaplin; it is this vessel’s track that is shown); July 15-September 1, 1728, St. Gabriel; June 6-July 3, 1729, St. Gabriel; July 14-23, 1729, St. Gabriel.


{p. 21}

CHAPTER III

GVOZDEV’S VOYAGE TO AMERICA IN 1732

Shestakov’s Earlier Expedition

After the Russians had conquered Kamchatka they pushed northward and established trading relations with the natives of East Cape. While they were in that neighborhood the traders heard that across from the cape there was a large country (bolshaya zemlya), and occasionally they saw the inhabitants of that country who were held captive by the Chukchi. The adventurous Cossacks decided to subdue these people, as well as the Chukchi, and force them to pay tribute. One of their leaders, Afanasi Shestakov, went to St. Petersburg to persuade the government to let him undertake this task. On March 23, 1727, the Senate gave him the necessary authority[1] and force for the work in hand. It was Shestakov’s plan to attack by land and sea the Chukchi and other hostile natives on the mainland and when they were conquered to send a force to the land beyond East Cape. With that in view the Cossack leader took possession in 1729 of all the sea-going vessels Bering had left behind him at Okhotsk.

The campaign of 1730 ended disastrously for the Russians. Some of the boats were wrecked, the land forces were either waylaid or defeated in open fight, and in one of these Shestakov lost his life. Out of all this great undertaking only one important thing was accomplished—the sighting of new land opposite East Cape.


Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 7, Doc. 5049.

Gvozdev’s Expedition

Shestakov was succeeded in command by Dmitri Pavlutski, captain of dragoons and a well-known Chukchi fighter. In addition to the other information about the “large country,” Pavlutski had received in 1730 the report of one Melnikov on {p. 22} that subject which tended more and more to confirm him in the belief that such a bolshaya zemlya really existed. During the winter of 1731-1732 Pavlutski sent word to the officers of the St. Gabriel who were with the ship at Lower Kamchatka Post to bring him supplies to the Anadyr in the spring and after that go in search of the land opposite East Cape.[2] When the time came for sailing only one of the officers, Michael Spiridonovich Gvozdev was physically fit for duty, and he took command of the ship and set the course for the bolshaya zemlya. His achievement did not impress Pavlutski very much, and it was not until several years later that he was made to write out his report, which, with unimportant sections omitted, runs as follows:[3]

In May, 1732, we received orders from Major Pavlutski, who was at the time at the Anadyr fort, to go aboard the St. Gabriel with the pilot and underpilot and sail around Kamchatka Cape to the mouth of the Anadyr and opposite Anadyrski Cape to what is known as the “large country,” examine and count the islands there, and gather tribute from the inhabitants. On July 23 we left Kamchatka River, and four days later Kamchatka Cape was doubled. We came to Anadyrski Cape August 3 and from there went to the islands to collect tribute. Moshkov told us of an island Bering had discovered, and we sailed about in order to find it. By this maneuvering we reached the southern part of Chukotski Cape, where, on August 5, we anchored three versts from shore. It was calm, and I went on land to examine the coast and fetch drinking water. Close to the shore we observed a small fresh stream into which we pulled. The country seemed uninhabited; but not far from where we stood was a herd of deer, numbering about 150 or more, guarded by two men, who ran away on seeing us. I killed two of the deer, filled two barrels with water, and went on board.

The next day two Chukchi came toward the ship in two baidars but would not approach near enough so that we could enter into conversation with them. When they had looked at us for a time they pulled away. On the morrow I, with nine men, went to the spot from which I had seen the natives issue the day before, but all that we found there were two huts of earth and whalebone. As we started back we caught {p. 23} a glimpse of two men who ran away on seeing us. We got under sail on the 8th, steering for an island on the course suggested by Moshkov. On the following day Fedorov sent me a note saying that in his opinion we had not yet reached the place in question [large country] since we were still south of Chukotski Cape, and asked for my opinion. On the 10th we sailed back to the spot where we had been a few days before and took on fresh water. Two days later we ran into a calm and anchored. On going ashore we saw two huts and people, who, on noticing us, pulled away from the land in three baidaras. We managed to get into conversation with them and asked them for tribute, which they refused to give. Having a fair wind on the 15th we went on our way and on the 17th sighted an island, but on account of the head wind we could not approach it but had to keep close to Chukotski Cape.

Here we saw many Chukchi, with whom we tried to enter into conversation but without much success. When the wind shifted once more to fair we steered again for the northern end of the island [one of the Diomedes]. Our attempt to land was resisted by a shower of arrows, to which we replied with muskets. After a great deal of difficulty the natives told us that they were Chukchi and that some of their people had fought with the other Chukchi against Pavlutski. In cruising about the island, which is about two and a half versts long and a verst wide, we came across other natives, but all refused to pay tribute. We made a landing and examined their homes, and from the island we saw the “large country”. It was near one o’clock of the morning of August 20 when we left the first island, and six hours later we anchored off the second, which is smaller than the first, and about half a mile distant. A ship’s boat and a baidara were sent to the shore, but meeting with an unfriendly reception they returned.

About three o’clock of the afternoon of August 21 at we sailed for the “large country” and anchored about four versts from its shore. It was now Fedorov’s watch, and he, without consulting any one, gave orders to weigh anchor and approach the southern point of the shore. From there we could see huts, but in spite of our best efforts we did not come as close to them as we wished on account of the head wind and the shallow water. The breeze veering to north-northwest, we were obliged to stand out to sea on a southwest course and by doing so came to the fourth island on the 22nd. A strong wind was blowing, and when we tried to approach the shore the sails gave way. The sailors then came to me and asked that we return to Kamchatka because of the lateness of the season and the stormy weather. I referred them to the underpilot without whose consent I could not order such a move. In the meantime there came to us from the island a Chukchi in a leather boat which had room for but one man. He was dressed in a shirt of whale intestines which was fastened about the opening of the boat in such a manner that no water {p. 24} could enter even if a big wave should strike it. He told us that Chukchi lived in the “large country,” where there were forests, streams, and animals. We had no opportunity of going ashore, and from the distance we could not tell whether all that he told us of the “large country” was true or not. When he was gone the sailors spoke to me again about returning to Kamchatka, and I answered them as before. Then they held a council and drew up a petition addressed to me and the underpilot, enumerating many reasons why we should go back. Taking these arguments into consideration we decided to return and entered the mouth of the Kamchatka River September 28.

Outside of the islands enumerated we saw no others, and the reason for not indicating their exact position is that the log book Fedorov and I kept was sent to Okhotsk in 1733. Another reason is that Fedorov when on watch often failed to make any observations in the journal. On returning to Kamchatka I asked his aid in drawing up a map, but he refused to join me; and it was impossible for me to undertake it alone, for the reasons just enumerated.

From his own account it is quite evident that Gvozdev was not aware that he had sighted the American coast. He thought he had discovered an island. He says that after anchoring near the first and second islands he steered for the “large country” [third island] and from there to the “fourth island.” This is all that is known of Gvozdev’s voyage.


In the “Lettre d’un officier de la marine russienne,” 1753 (see bibliography), the statement is made that Pavlutski ordered Gvozdev to bring the provisions left by Bering to the country of the Chukchi, whom Pavlutski was fighting. Gvozdev could not find Pavlutski and therefore started back and accidentally ran into the American coast.

Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of Count Chernishev, 1762-1768, No. 367. See also Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9. pp. 88-103, St. Petersburg, 1851.


{p. 25}

CHAPTER IV

BERING’S SECOND EXPEDITION, FROM ITS INCEPTION TO THE BEGINNING OF THE SEA VOYAGE

When Bering returned to Russia he made his report to the Empress and to the officers of the Admiralty and the Senate and tried to persuade them that “the instructions of His Imperial Majesty . . . had been carried out.” Some clapped their hands while others shrugged their shoulders. The doubters maintained that as long as the coast and waters between the Kolyma River and East Cape were unexamined the problem of the relation of Asia to America was unsolved. They were not without arguments. They called attention to the numerous Siberian rumors that a large body of land (bolshaya zemlya) existed north of the Kolyma River and another east of East Cape. Were these two or more distinct continents or islands or were they one? Were they part of Asia or part of America? These and such like questions were asked. They were fair questions. Bering was expected to answer them but could not answer them satisfactorily.

Bering’s Proposal of a Second Expedition

He was not altogether discredited; for it was realized that he had done a good piece of work, even if he had not done it as well as he should. That he had ability no one doubted, and it was believed that with his experience and the lesson taught him he would do much better if he were given another chance. Bering, no doubt, desired another chance, and he submitted to the Empress the following propositions[1] which would tend to encourage her to send another expedition.

{p. 26}

1. According to my observation the waves of eastern Kamchatka are smaller than in other seas, and I found on Karaginski Island large fir trees that do not grow on Kamchatka. These signs indicate that America, or some other land on this side of it, is not far from Kamchatka—perhaps from 150 to 200 miles. This could easily be ascertained by building a vessel of about 50 tons and sending it to investigate. If this be so [the existence of such a country], a trade might be established between the empire and the inhabitants of those regions.

2. Such a ship should be built in Kamchatka, because the necessary timber could be obtained more easily. The same holds true in the matter of food—fish and game are especially cheap there. Then, again, more help may be had from the natives of Kamchatka than from those of Okhotsk. One other reason should not be overlooked; the mouth of the Kamchatka River is deeper and offers a better shelter for boats.

3. It would not be without advantage to find a sea route from the Kamchatka or Okhota River to the Amur River or Japan, since it is known that these regions are inhabited. It would be very profitable to open trade relations with these people, particularly the Japanese. And as we have no ships there (in the Okhotsk Sea), we might arrange it with the Japanese that they meet us halfway in their boats. For such an expedition a ship about the size of the one mentioned would be needed, or one somewhat smaller might serve the purpose.

4. The cost of such an expedition—not including salaries, provisions, and materials for both boats, which can not be had there and would have to be taken from here and Siberia—would be from 10,000 to 12,000 rubles.

5. If it should be considered wise to map the northern regions of the coast of Siberia—from the Ob to the Yenisei and from there to the Lena—this could be done by boats or by land, since these regions are under Russian jurisdiction.

The question of a second voyage must have been raised even in 1730, for early in 1731 arrangements for the undertaking were already made. The desire to determine the relation of Asia and America was not the only argument advanced in favor of the expedition. Some of the reports on that subject submitted to the Empress pointed out the benefits to be derived from territorial and commercial expansion, additional naval bases, and the discovery of precious metals. No doubt all these reasons had their weight with those in authority.[2]


According to Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,” Chicago, 1889 (note 40, p. 208), first published in V. Berkh: Zhizneopisaniya Pervykh Rossiiskikh Admiralov, 4 vols., St. Petersburg, 1831-36; later reprinted by Sokolov in Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, pp. 435-436, St. Petersburg, 1851.—Edit. Note.

Archives of State, XXIV, No. 8, 1732; No. 9, 1732-1743.

{p. 27}

Land Versus Sea Expedition

Another question that came up was how this expedition should be sent—by land or by water. There seems to have been a difference of opinion on that subject. Count Nikolai Golovin[3] and Admiral Sanders submitted separate memoirs to Her Majesty recommending that two ships with naval and other supplies be chartered to go from Russia to Kamchatka by way of Cape Horn and Japan. After discharging their cargoes and resting the crews the ships could proceed on their voyage of discovery in the North Pacific. Count Golovin even offered to lead the expedition in person if the proper support were assured him.

A number of reasons were given why the sea route was preferable to the overland route. In the first place there would be a saving of time. It would take from ten months to a year for the sea voyage from St. Petersburg to Kamchatka and a year or a little more for the work of exploration and the return to Russia; on the other hand it would require two years to transport naval and other stores overland to Kamchatka, two more years to build sea-going vessels, and two more years to make the voyage and bring back the results to St. Petersburg.

Why the propositions of these two prominent men were not accepted is not clear. Perhaps because by 1731 and 1732 the expedition had ceased to be regarded in the light of purely maritime and geographic discovery and had come to be looked upon as one of scientific investigation in the larger sense, both by land and sea, in the Arctic Ocean as well as the Pacific. It had been decided to send along scientists of the newly founded Imperial Academy of Sciences to make a study of the people and the resources and to secure other scientific data about Siberia and the lands to be discovered. Then, too, in order to settle beyond dispute the much-debated question of the relation of Asia to America, it had been determined to survey and chart the Arctic coast from the White Sea to the mouth of the Kamchatka River. It was assumed as a matter of course that the leader of the expedition {p. 28} could supervise its various activities, and therefore it would be necessary for him to be within land reach of the different parties. These may or may not have been the reasons, but the fact remains that Bering and his parties were ordered to proceed overland.


Archives of State, XXIV, No. 8, 1732.

Naval Preparations

Because of the great distance to the Pacific, the difficulty of transporting material, and the lack of laborers, skilled and unskilled, for the building of sea-going vessels, the naval part of the expedition needed most attention. On July 30, 1731,[4] Grigori Pisarev (who had been appointed commander of the port of Okhotsk on May 10, 1731)[5] was ordered to proceed to his post and make ready for Bering’s coming. Pisarev was told to take, from different regions of Siberia, Russians and Tungus and settle them in the neighborhood of Okhotsk and Yudoma Cross—the Russians to be put to cultivating the soil and the Tungus to watch the flocks of sheep and the herds of horses and cattle which Pisarev would introduce. For the peopling of Okhotsk Pisarev had instructions to pick up at Yakutsk 300 young and strong men from those who were in prison for debt or for other crimes. In addition he was to take from Russia 20 ship carpenters to build four or six ships, under the supervision of naval architects who were to be sent by the Admiralty College, and from Ekaterinburg a number of iron workers to smelt iron and forge anchors and such things.


Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 8, Doc. 5813. St. Petersburg.

Ibid., Vol. 8, Doc. 5753.

Official Order for the Expedition

The official order for the expedition, in which Bering is mentioned as commander, was announced by the Senate on April 17, 1732,[6] and this was followed up on May 2 of the same year by a general outline of the undertaking.[7] On December 28, 1732, the {p. 29} Senate issued the principal instructions,[8] and a summary of the main articles that relate directly to the voyage to America is here given.

1. The Senate approves of the expedition in the hope that it will really be for the benefit and glory of Russia. It has given orders to the governor of Siberia, to the vice governor at Irkutsk, and to Pisarev to assist Bering. It is sending members from the Academy of Sciences,[9] students from Moscow,[10] assayers from Ekaterinburg, mechanics, and others. It confirms the project to examine not only the waters between Kamchatka and Japan, Kamchatka and America, but also the waters along the Arctic coast.

2. In the instructions which Peter gave to Bering it was evident that Peter desired to determine whether Asia and America were united. Bering says that he went as far as 67° N. and found no connection between these two continents. It may be that north and west of the mouth of the Kolyma the two continents do not join, but no one knows whether this is so or not. In order to settle the relation between Asia and America the Admiralty proposes to send exploring expeditions along the Arctic shores from Archangel to the mouth of the Kamchatka River.

4. It has been reported that opposite the mouth of the Kolyma River there is a large land (bolshaya zemlya), that Siberians have been on it, and have seen the inhabitants. It is ordered that Bering should investigate this matter very thoroughly when he is at Yakutsk. If this is a true report, he should send a sloop to investigate. If it is found that Siberia really joins America so that it is impossible to proceed to Kamchatka, then the investigating party should follow the newly found coast as far as it can to learn in which direction it runs and return to Yakutsk.

If people are found there, they are to be treated kindly; they are to be given presents; they are to be asked the extent of their country and its resources, and they are to be invited to become our subjects and to pay tribute. If they are unwilling to do so, they are to be let alone; and no time should be wasted in arguing with them.

It is not at all likely, but it is possible, that by following the Arctic coast our explorers may come to some European settlement. In that case they should act according to the instructions given to Bering and Chirikov. If the explorers ascertain that Siberia and America are not connected, they should proceed to Kamchatka.

{p. 30}

5. In regard to going to America, it was ordered in 1731 that ships for this voyage should be built at Okhotsk. If they are ready, Bering should take two of them and proceed; if they are not finished, he should finish them. If they have not yet been started on, or if they are not seaworthy, the Admiralty College is of the opinion that the ships should not be built at Okhotsk. Bering recommends that Kamchatka, because it has more timber and a better harbor, should be selected as the place for shipbuilding. Bering desires to have two ships for the voyage so that in case of a misfortune to one of them the other would stand by. If one ship is completed at Okhotsk, it would be a good plan to take that and go to the Kamchatka River and there build the other one. Bering is to be in command of one of these vessels and Chirikov of the other. On the voyage they are to keep together, work together, and do all that is in their power to advance naval science. To help them a member of the Academy of Sciences [Louis Delisle de la Croyère] is sent along.

6. A late report of Captain Pavlutski, which was sent from Kamchatka, stated that recently Afanasi Melnikov with a small party returned from Chukchi Cape. This Melnikov was sent from Yakutsk in 1725 to bring the natives [Chukchi] under subjection and make them pay tribute. Melnikov says that in April, 1730, while he was on Chukchi Cape, there came over from an island in the sea two men who had walrus teeth fastened to their own [pieces of walrus ivory in their lips]. These men told Melnikov that it takes a day to go from Chukchi Cape to their island, and another day from there to another island ahead of them, which island is called bolshaya zemlya. On this bolshaya zemlya all kinds of animals are to be had—sables, beavers, land otters, and wild deer. All kinds of green trees grow there. There are many natives on bolshaya zemlya; some of them have deer, and others have not. Although such reports cannot be trusted, yet they should be followed up and a voyage should be made in the direction of the islands. If they are located and people found on them, they should be treated as the instructions in Article 4 indicate. Go on [from there] to America and learn whether there is any continent, or islands, between Kamchatka and America; for, aside from the information furnished by Pavlutski, little is known on that subject. On the map of Professor Delisle a sea is located between Kamchatka and the Spanish province of Mexico in latitude 45° N. If the American coast is discovered, Bering should carry out the instructions given him by Peter in 1725, that is to say, to go to some European settlement. If a European ship is met with, he should learn from it the name of the coast, write it down, make a landing, obtain some definite information, draw a map, and return to Kamchatka. Be always on your guard not to fall into a trap and not to show the people you meet with the way to [Kamchatka].

•          •          •          •          •

{p. 31}

9. Bering is to take with him 2,000 rubles’ worth of presents to be distributed among the natives. Chinese tobacco, known as “shar log,” is especially worth while because the natives are eager for it.

•          •          •          •          •

11. In these voyages search should be made for good harbors and for forests where timber for shipbuilding is to be had. Let mineralogists with a guard go ashore and prospect. If precious minerals are found in some place under Russian jurisdiction, the commander of Okhotsk and the principal officers elsewhere should be notified, and they shall send ships, miners, workmen, instruments, machinery, and provisions and begin working the mines.

12. Geodesists should be sent to examine all the rivers that fall into Lake Baikal from the east in order to find a nearer way to Kamchatka than by Yakutsk.

13. Captain Bering and all the officers in command of ships at sea should keep secret the instructions from the Admiralty College. For Bering, Chirikov, Spanberg, and the officers in command of the sloop which is to go east of the Lena to Kamchatka, special instructions are issued, and these may be made public. These public instructions are to state that at the request of the St. Petersburg, Paris, and other Academies the Emperor Peter the Great, of deserving and eternal fame, sent, out of curiosity, an expedition along his own shores to determine whether Asia and America are united. But the expedition did not settle that point. Now Your Imperial Majesty, influenced by the same reasons, is ordering a similar expedition and for a similar purpose. If you should come to settlements under European or Asiatic jurisdiction or if you should meet with ships of European or Asiatic governments, and are asked the object of your voyage, you may tell them what has just been said. If they demand to see your instructions, show them. This will allay their suspicions, because it is well known that European Powers have sent out expeditions and that the question whether Asia and America are united is still unanswered.

14. In order that the expedition may not be retarded on account of delay in getting provisions and supplies of one kind and another, the Admiralty College should send at once special officers to Yakutsk to build boats and expedite the transportation of materials.

15. Because this expedition is harder and farther than any that have ever preceded it, will not Your Majesty reward with money all those who participate in it and give them double pay during the time that they are engaged, promote to the rank of sub-lieutenant the geodesists who have formerly been in Siberia, and to the rank of ensign[11] those who go there for the first time? All officers should receive, either {p. 32} here or in Moscow, a year’s pay in advance and, if they desire it, another year’s pay in advance either at Tobolsk or Yakutsk, so that they may get their outfits and depart in a contented frame of mind. Bering should arrange with the governor of Siberia and the vice governor at Yakutsk how the men are to be paid after that.

16. Louis Delisle de la Croyère,[12] at the recommendation of the Academy, is to have charge of the astronomical, physical, and other scientific observations of that nature. Instructions for that purpose have been given him.[13] He is to have two geodesists to help him, Simeon Popov and Andrei Krasilnikov, who have been studying in the St. Petersburg Observatory. Professor de la Croyère requests that he have an interpreter who knows French or Latin and a mechanic who understands repairing his instruments. These two men are to be furnished him.


Ibid., Vol. 8. Doc. 6023.

Ibid., Vol. 8, Docs. 6041, 6042.

Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii. Vol. 8, Doc. 6291.

G. F. Müller. J. G. Gmelin, J. E. Fischer, Louis Delisle de la Croyère, and a little later G. W. Steller.

S. P. Krasheninnikov, author of the “History of Kamchatka,” was among the number.

Bering was made Captain Commander and Chirikov Captain Lieutenant.

Louis Delisle de la Croyère was the half brother of Guillaume Delisle and Joseph Nicolas Delisle, two well-known geographers of the first half of the eighteenth century. Joseph Nicolas was a member of the Russian Academy and was instrumental in securing this position for Louis.

A copy of these instructions, drawn up by Joseph Nicolas Delisle, is in the Library of Congress.

Advance Parties

Detachments of the expedition began leaving St. Petersburg in February, 1733, but Bering, who brought up the rear, did not get away until April, waiting apparently for supplementary instructions, which were issued in March,[14] permitting him to build the ships at Okhotsk or in Kamchatka. The route followed was the same as the one taken at the time of the first expedition. Spanberg was in the lead and had orders to hasten to Okhotsk to supervise the completion of the ships which Pisarev was supposed to have on the ways or perhaps launched. When Spanberg reached his destination early in 1735 he found no Pisarev, no ships, no quarters, no food, no Russian agriculturalists with full granaries, no Tungus with herds of fat cattle, nothing but the old cheerless and bare village that he had left behind him five years before. He was probably not surprised, for he must have heard on the way of the worthlessness and the evil deeds of Pisarev.


Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii. Vol. 9, No. 6351.

{p. 33}

Difficulties

Not only at Okhotsk but elsewhere in Siberia the well-laid plans of the Senate and the Admiralty College miscarried. Bering, in place of being left free to look after the important work of leader, had to tarry at Yakutsk and other such places to do the work of a petty officer. He had to recruit men, requisition horses and supplies, and start them towards Okhotsk. Either the local authorities in Siberia could not or would not help him. One blamed another; Bering’s own officers sided sometimes with one and sometimes with another; and as a result the mail carriers. especially provided for the expedition, were loaded down with charges and countercharges instead of reports of progress. The authorities at the capital were naturally greatly displeased. They tried to help Bering by relieving him of the control of the scientists and of the work of supervising the Arctic explorations. Notwithstanding this, month after month passed with comparatively little headway made. When the undertaking was planned it was assumed that in four years Bering would be ready for sea. According to Bering’s own estimates the cost would be 10,000 to 12,000 rubles; but at the end of that period he was no farther than Yakutsk and the cost had run up to 300,000 rubles. At the capital there was considerable dissatisfaction, which the Admiralty College was made to feel. In 1738 the Imperial Cabinet, after taking into consideration the cost up to that time, the burden it threw on the Siberian people, the little progress made, asked the Admiralty College “to look into the Kamchatka Expedition and see if it can be brought to a head, so that from now on the treasury should not be emptied in vain.”[15]

The Admiralty had to throw the blame on somebody and, justly or unjustly, blamed Bering and as leader held him responsible and even went so far as to cut his pay in half from the beginning of the year 1738 until July, 1740. Bering was caught between two millstones which slowly but surely crushed him. {p. 34} When the time came for his sea voyage he was pretty much discouraged and worn out, his physical strength was gone, and with it went the initiative and daring so necessary for a work of this kind. On his death bed Bering complained[16] that too much had been expected from him—a man already advanced in years—and that those who should have stood by him failed to do so. In that great Russian world he stood alone, the target of the malcontents and the envious. That he was not wholly to blame may be seen from the orders of the Admiralty College to the local authorities in Siberia threatening them with torture unless they gave Bering more help. Finally, in 1739, the Admiralty commissioned two officers on special duty to go to Siberia to take charge of the transportation of the supplies, and with their assistance most of the things needed for the voyage were deposited at Okhotsk in the autumn of 1740.


Opisanie Dyel Arkhiva Morskago Ministerstva, 10 vols., St. Petersburg, 1877-1906; reference in Vol. 7, p. 237.

See Steller’s account in Volume 2 of the present work.

Preparation for the Sea Voyage

Since coming to Okhotsk in 1737 Bering had been very busy supervising the building of the two ships for his voyage to America. In June, 1740, they were launched and named the St. Peter and the St. Paul. Each measured 80 by 20 by 9 feet, had two masts and was brig-rigged, and carried fourteen guns, two and three pounders. All the needed supplies were loaded on these two vessels and on two freight boats, and on September 4 this small squadron left Okhotsk for the Bolshaya River (Fig. 3) in Kamchatka, where they anchored on September 20. Here Bering left the two freight boats because they were not strong enough to weather the autumn storms, and with the St. Peter and the St. Paul he sailed away for Petropavlovsk harbor in Avacha Bay (inset on Pl. 1) and made that port on October 6. Petropavlovsk was a new harbor, having been surveyed and charted in 1740 by one of Bering’s officers; and, judging from the sketch which he made (Fig. 7), Bering and his company constituted the whole population of that village. At this uninhabited spot the winter was spent in preparation for the great voyage.

sketch map with houses, landscape shown

Fig. 7—Facsimile of a manuscript map of the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul (Petropavlovsk) by Elagin, 1740, in the Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd. No. 1957.

Translation of key:

1, traveling church

2, warehouse

3, powder house

4, Captain Commander

5, Captain Chirikov and Lieutenant Chikhachev

7, professor of astronomy and adjunct

8, higher and lower officers

9, Lieutenant Waxel

10, Lieutenant Plautin

11, fleet-masters and navigators

12, quarters for the crew and workmen

13, blacksmith shop

14, medical quarters

15, guard house

16, lower officers

17, native Kamchadal earthen hut

18, native summer houses raised on a platform and covered with grass

19, bath house

20, fresh-water spring.

[In lower right corner:] Depth is indicated in fathoms.

image rendering view of harbor

Fig. 8—The Harbor of St. Peter and St Paul, looking south toward Avacha Bay (cf. with Fig. 7). The ships in the harbor are probably the St. Peter and the St. Paul. (From an old engraving practically identical with an engraving in Steller’s “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtchatka.” 1774, opp. p.17.)

{p. 35}

According to Steller, one of the scientists who went along, it had been Bering’s original plan to depart from Kamchatka for America early in May, 1741, and, after discovering that continent, to winter on it and return to Asia in 1742; but owing to a number of unforeseen accidents he was unable to bring this about. While at Okhotsk he had prepared the sea biscuit for the voyage, and these were lost at the mouth of the Okhota River in 1740 as they were being taken to Kamchatka. Then, again, because the two freight boats were unseaworthy he had to leave them behind at the Bolshaya River and have the supplies transported by the natives in the course of the winter. This was such a huge task that even the much-abused natives revolted, and it was some time before they were humbled and forced to do the bidding of the officers. As a result of all these misfortunes Bering was late in starting and not oversupplied on his departure.

On April 23, 1741, the navigation officers began to keep their records, and from this date on we will let them tell their own story.


{p. 36}

CHAPTER V

THE LOG BOOK OF BERING’S VESSEL, THE “ST. PETER,” AND OF HER SUCCESSOR, THE HOOKER “ST. PETER”

The following is a translation, from the hitherto unpublished originals in the Russian archives,[1] (1) of the log book of Bering’s vessel, the St. Peter, covering the period from April 23, 1741, to August 9, 1742, and describing the preparation of the ship for sailing, the voyage from Kamchatka to the Alaskan coast and return to Bering Island (June 4-November 6, 1741), the wreck of the St. Peter and the death of Bering, the life of the survivors on that island, and the building of a replacing vessel, the hooker St. Peter; and (2) of the log book of the hooker St. Peter from August 10 to September 7, 1742, describing the return voyage to Petropavlovsk, the home port in Kamchatka (August 13 to 27), and the attempted continuation of the voyage to Okhotsk and final return to Petropavlovsk (September 1 to 6).


There are two log books, one kept by the assistant navigator Kharlam Yushin (Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: 1741-42, Nos. 642, 643, 644) and the other by the mate Sofron Khitrov. Of Khitrov’s there are two neat copies (Archives of State, Petrograd: 1732-43, XXIV, No. 9, and Archives of the Imperial Academy of Sciences, Petrograd. No. 120, 32:16:19), and it is almost certain that they were worked out from a third copy, whether Yushin’s or Khitrov’s is not clear. The Khitrov copies differ from one another in places, owing probably to the fault of the copyists; and they are not as reliable as Yushin’s, which has all the earmarks of an original. For that reason Yushin’s is here used and is supplemented by Khitrov’s wherever the latter contains additional material. Differences of more or less importance between the two logs are pointed out in the footnotes.

From April 23 to June 4. inclusive, Khitrov’s journal is used, however. “Journal” is used throughout in this chapter the same sense as “log book.”

The Log Book of the “St. Peter”

With the help of God this journal was begun this April 23, 1741, on the ship St. Peter by Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, under the command of Captain Commander Bering, in the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, which is in Avacha Bay, latitude 53° 1′ N; longitude, reckoned from St. Petersburg, according to the observation of the professor of astronomy, {p. 37} Delisle de la Croyère, 127° 31′; variation of the compass ½ rhumb easterly.[2]

In the Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul

April 23, 1741

Today with the help of God we began to load the ship St. Peter, on which worked eighteen men. The main shrouds were made fast to the mainmast, the preventer stay was also loosely secured; calked inside the ship, and near the mainmast hole nailed blocks for opening the cannon portholes; cleaned the hold, and in the afternoon took on ballast.

April 24, 1741

This day there were eighteen men at work, and they brought aboard the ship various rigging, also topmasts and yards; the cannons were secured on the port side while the starboard side was being calked. In addition we took on ballast.

April 25, 1741

Sixteen men were at work on board the ship. They rigged the mainsail and fore-topsail yards, worked about the rigging, and did some carpenter work.

April 26, 1741

This being Sunday there was no work.

April 27, 1741

There were seventeen men at work. Water and ballast were put into the hold. We rigged the fore and main yards; and other things were also done.

April 28, 1741

This being the coronation day of Her Imperial Majesty there was no work.

April 29, 1741

Twenty-one men at work, rigging shrouds, backstays, and stays to the main-topmast and fore-topmast and stowing casks of water in the hold.

April 30, 1741

A strong unsteady wind from the NE accompanied by rain. We put barrels of water into the hold, raised the best bower anchor clear off the ice and secured it to the port side of the ship, and made fast the shore anchor line to the anchor on shore.

{p. 38}

May 1, 1741

Put casks of water in the hold, broke the ice around the small bower anchor, and let go into the water. Took on wood.

May 2, 1741

Eleven men worked today. In the hold wood was stowed between the casks. To the mainsail and fore-topsail yards were secured ties and blocks. We hoisted on board the spritsail yards from the ice, put the jib boom in the hoop, hauled aboard the small anchor from the ice, secured the hawser on the port side, did carpenter work in the cabin. Four inches of water in the hold.

May 3, 1741

Sunday and no work.

May 4, 1741

A light wind from SW. In the morning there was frost and snow. Sixteen men were at work in the boatswain’s storeroom, on the port side of the caboose; doors were made; and on the starboard side beds for the lower officers were furnished. Other work was done also.

This day Captain Commander Bering with Captain Chirikov and all the higher officers and navigators held a council, to which was invited the astronomer, Professor de la Croyère, to decide what course to sail first after leaving Avacha Bay in order to locate the Terra de Gama, which is indicated on the chart of the above-named professor and which extends northward to latitude 47°. [The following decision was made.]

Decision on First Course to Sail

On May 4, 1741, there was a council made up of Captain Commander Bering, officers, the professor of astronomy, and navigators. After listening to the instructions given to Captain Commander Bering by the Imperial Admiralty College, especially the nineth and seventeenth articles and the sixth article of the general instructions of the Senate, it was determined in order to carry out the instructions to find the American coast, to sail first after leaving Avacha SE by E, true, and to continue on that rhumb. If no land is found by the time latitude 46° is reached to change the course to E by N steadily until land is discovered. If land is found either on the SE by E course or on the E by N course to coast alongside of it, depending on its extension from east to north or from north to west; if it should stretch between south and east, to leave the land and go east until we discovered more land and likewise to follow that land in a northerly direction, to latitude 65°, or as far as, with God’s help, time may permit. If we should reach latitude 65° in good time, then we should go west to the Chukchi Cape so that the distance between the American and Chukchi shores may be known, and from there we should return to this harbor. If on the above-mentioned rhumb the winds should be contrary we should keep as close to it as may be possible, and if with God’s {p. 39} help we should discover land then we should make explorations as the instructions to the Captain Commander recommend.

In making the voyage it should be planned to return to this harbor during the last days of September.

[Signed on the original:]Bering
Captain Alexei Chirikov
Lieutenant Ivan Chikhachev
Lieutenant Waxel
Lieutenant Plautin
Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov
Louis Delisle de la Croyère
For Fleet Master Avraam Dementiev
Navigator Andreyan Eselberg
Navigator Ivan Elagin
image of signatures in Latin and Cyrillic script

Fig. 9—Facsimile of signatures of Bering and his officers, probably from the “Decision on First Course to Sail” of May 4, 1741, which see for names.

May 5, 1741

Wind from SW. Seventeen men at work. On the main and fore shrouds the catharpings were fastened. Planed on the inside of the ship. Strengthened the foremast and nailed planks near the windlass.

{p. 40}

May 6, 1741

Wind from S. Gloomy weather. Seventeen men at work. On the fore-topsail the hoop was repaired, on both masts the chain plates were secured, and to the fore-topsail yards the gear was fitted. Water was brought from shore and stowed away in its place.

May 7, 1741

Variable and uncomfortable SW wind. From shore there were brought two cannon, two falconets, and three gun carriages. We did also other kinds of work.

May 8, 1741

Wind from the NE and unsteady. Seventeen men were at work; rigged the fore and main-topsail yards and topsail sheets and clew lines. Stowed barrels of water in the hold, made fast two cannon, stowed 90 poods[3] of strip iron under the commander’s cabin.

May 9, 1741

Unsteady wind from the E and gloomy weather. This being the day of Nikolai the Wonder-worker there was no work.

May 10, 1741

Wind from the S. Snowy weather. We hauled the ship farther from shore and let out the spare anchor from the port side of the stern and did other work about the ship.

May 11, 1741

Wind from the E. The sky was overcast, and it rained and snowed. Nineteen men were at work; they brought casks of water and ten barrels of salt meat which they stowed aft in the hold, and they did other work as well.

May 12, 1741

Easterly wind with gloomy damp weather. Nineteen men were working. They brought aboard ship’s stores. Scraped the foremast and worked on the rigging. There was in the hold 7¾ inches of water, and after pumping out there was 2½ inches left.

May 13, 1741

Wind from the S and unsteady. Seventeen men were at work bringing casks of water and stores from shore, polishing the foremast, putting in place the running rigging. Today we corrected the compasses with the meridian line—six of these compasses had a variation of ½ rhumb east, and one ordinary steering compass in a copper case had ¾ rhumb east.

{p. 41}

May 14, 1741

Wind from the E. Seventeen men at work, putting the rigging in order, stowing away the stores in the hold, greasing both topmasts with fat, and fastening bull’s-eyes.

May 15, 1741

Wind from S. Eighteen men at work. The anchor which was down forward on the port side was hoisted on board and put in the hold, and in its place was secured the spare anchor. Spare yards and topmasts were brought aboard and made fast. Ship stores were brought from shore.

May 16, 1741

Light wind from SSE. There were eleven men at work who bent on the mainsail and foresail, both topsails, and the skyscraper. Dried the spare sails in the wind.

May 17, 1741

Sunday and no work.

May 18, 1741

Wind from E. Twenty-one men are at work. The port side of the ship from the upper wales was calked and pitched. Stores were brought on board. Water in the hold 5½ inches.

May 19, 1741

Unsteady wind from ENE. Cloudy, but occasionally it lightens in the E. Twenty-two men working, putting chocks under the longboat, calking and pitching the starboard side, bringing aboard provisions and boatswain’s stores as well as the articles to be given as presents.

May 20, 1741

No wind, wet snow. Twenty-three men were working. At the order of the Captain Commander, Ensign Lagunov took out from one of the casks on board a bucket of vodka and gave it to Adjunct Steller. We floored the powder room, made a bed for Adjunct Steller in the Commander’s cabin. Examined the leak at the bow near the foremast and made repairs in the Captain Commander’s cabin.

May 21, 1741

Heeled the ship on both sides and greased the under side. Gloomy weather and still. Twenty-two men were working today.

{p. 42}

May 22, 1741

No wind, cloudy weather. This day the crew with its bags came aboard the St. Peter and did different kinds of work. Forward there was 8 feet 10 inches of draft, and aft 9 feet 4 inches, a difference of six inches.

May 23, 1741

No wind. The crew has divided itself into two watches. Jib, mainsail, fore-topsail, staysail, and main-staysail were bent on. The deck over the crew’s quarters was calked and pitched from below. Six inches of water in the hold.

May 24, 1741

This being Sunday there was no work. We hoisted the flag and the jack and dressed ship.

May 25, 1741

No wind, cloudy weather with rain. At ten o’clock in the morning Captain Commander Bering inspected the crews on board the St. Peter and the St. Paul, and as he left the last-named ship, of which Captain Chirikov was in command, the crew gave five hurrahs for the Captain Commander. From his boat the same number of hurrahs were given in return, which was answered by one more hurrah from the ship. The Captain Commander has moved his quarters to the ship. Powder, lead, and shells were brought aboard. This day Captain Commander Bering gave Captain Chirikov the signal code which is to be used on the voyage. What follows is an exact copy:

Signals for Use in Daytime

1. When we shall wish to speak to you, Captain, we will hoist an ordinary pennant from the main-topmast and crosstrees and fire one gun. If your lieutenant should be needed the same pennant will fly from the same place and in addition the ensign from the ensign staff, but no gun will be fired.

2. If we should desire that you should take the lead, then the ordinary pennant will fly from the fore-topmast crosstrees, and it will be accompanied by one gun.

3. If it should be necessary to anchor, there will fly from the flagstaff a tricolor flag of long strips of red, white, and blue, and one gun will be fired.

4. When religious service is to be held, a white flag with a blue cross will fly from the gaff and one gun will be fired.

5. If the Captain Commander should wish to talk to you so that you will have to bring your ship near his, then, in addition to the signal for calling you, there will fly a blue flag from the main yard, accompanied by a gun.

6. If we should sail close-hauled and you in our wake, and if you should see the jack flying from the gaff and hear a shot, that is a signal for you to come about first.

7. If in stormy weather it should be impossible to come about against the wind, we will signal to you to wear in succession, by hoisting a pennant at the stern and firing a gun.

{p. 43}

8. If in sailing close-hauled or free it should be necessary to sail with the wind then a blue flag will be hoisted on the flagstaff and one gun will be fired.

9. If on going with the wind it should be necessary to come about close-hauled on the starboard tack, having the sails on the port side, a red flag will fly from the gaff and one gun will be fired; if it should be necessary to come about on the port tack with the sails on the starboard side, a blue flag will fly from the same place and one gun will be fired.

10. If a boat with men should be sent ashore for the purpose of exploring or taking on water a wide pennant will fly from the gaff and one gun will be fired.

11. If on the way we should become separated, we are to look for one another and cruise for three days near the spot where we lost sight of each other; the latitude of the place shall be determined and, by calculations, the distance and the rhumb from the harbor or from whatever spot the reckoning is made. If during that time we should not find one another, from which misfortune may God preserve us, then we are to sail on the rhumb agreed upon with you and all the officers, a copy of which agreement, with instructions signed by me, was handed to you. If three days have passed without our finding one another and if, going on the course agreed, we discover land on the rhumb where we expect, we are to beat up and down the coast for a day in order to wait for one another. If [land should be found] on the northern rhumb, coast along it in a southerly direction for a day as long as it is on the rhumb agreed upon, but do not spend more than a day in going south. But if [the land comes to an end before the day is out] keep on the course until the end of the day and after that continue on your course. If it should be found farther south than on the rhumb expected, coast along in a northerly direction until the course agreed upon is reached and there wait a day, and, if we should not find one another there, then go your own way and act according to your instructions.

12. If after separating we do not soon meet again and we should be in a region where foreign vessels might be expected, in order to recognise one another you should fly a blue flag from the main-topmast crosstrees and fire one gun and we will fly a red flag with a straight white cross from the same place and also fire one gun.

13. Signals which you, Captain Chirikov, while at anchor should give in order to keep the Captain Commander posted:

14. If you should see ships or sea vessels of any kind, you should fly your flag from the main-topmast and keep it there until it is acknowledged by one gun from the Captain Commander’s ship. You should then dip the flag as many times as there are ships in sight.

Signals While Under Sail

How to identify one another is indicated above in the 14th [12th?] article.

If you see ships, you are to make the same signal as when at anchor and fire one gun. If the distance between us is so great that the flag cannot be seen, lower and hoist the topsail as many times as there are ships.

If the ship should spring a leak, from which misfortune God preserve us, or for some other reason it should not be possible to follow us, then stop and fire two guns.

Should you in the daytime desire to speak to the Captain Commander, put up the ordinary flag at the main-topmast or fore-topmast near the truck, hoist and lower the mainsail or foresail, according as to where the flag is flying, and continue to fire until you hear a gun in return.

{p. 44}

If you should see land fly both the flag and the jack and keep them flying until the Captain sees them and hoists his flag, and then lower yours. If, at the time, you have up the flag and the jack, lower them at once and fire from time to time until the Captain Commander hoists the flag and jack and fires one gun.

Signals for Daytime in Foggy Weather

If any one should in the daytime see breakers or reefs, the ship should put about, the jack should be hoisted at the main-topmast crosstrees, and the gun should be fired twice. If, may God preserve us, the ship should run aground, lower all sails, make the signal with the jack, and keep on firing until you make sure that the others are aware of the danger and are out of it.

When Sailing in Foggy Weather

If it should be decided to sail in foggy weather as before the fog set in, a gun will be fired every hour, and you are to keep for that purpose a half-hour and a minute glass, and as soon as you hear a shot turn your glass upside down and count the time between the shots and then do likewise [fire].

If it is desired that you should put on more sail, a gun will be fired every half hour, if to take off, every quarter of an hour, and you reply in like manner. During this time there should be ringing of bells and beating of drums on both ships.

If it should seem best to heave to on the starboard tack, three guns will be fired, if on the port tack, five; the beating of the drums and the ringing of the bells should go on.

If in foggy weather it should be necessary to lower the yards, four guns will be fired and the ship that is astern will in the meantime lower the yards.

If after drifting for a time we decide to make sail again, we should proceed as we did before we drifted: if we sailed with the wind before, we should do the same afterwards, each ship keeping in her position, so as not to become separated in the fog, and following the course agreed upon. If in the meantime the wind has shifted, keep on the course just the same, or if the wind is against you keep as close to the course as you can. Fire two guns, one after the other every six minutes.

If it is decided to anchor during the fog, the signal will be two guns, one after the other. Then after we have been at anchor a half hour we will fire two guns and, if you are far from us, will keep this up until you reply by a gun.

If in foggy weather it should seem best to get under way again, continue on the course held to the time of anchoring, that is, if we sailed close-hauled, then keep on the same tack on which we were until we anchored; if we sailed with fair wind, then continue on that course so that the two ships may keep on the same tack and not become separated in the fog.

Keep the course we sailed if the wind is favorable, if not, as near to that course as possible. Fire two guns one after the other every six minutes.

To fall off from close-hauled to with the wind, the signal is three guns, one after another every six minutes.

To head up from with the wind to close-hauled: if to the starboard tack, seven guns, if to the port tack, eight.

If we should be sailing with the wind aft or on the quarter and should decide to change course a few points, the following are the signals: for one point two guns, two points three guns, four points five guns, five points six guns, and so on; in each case {p. 45} the number of guns will exceed by one the number of points. If we are to go to the starboard the gun will be every twenty-one [two?] minutes, if to the port every three minutes. If, in thick weather, land or a reef should be sighted, make the same signals which the Captain Commander would make in such a case, that is, lower the yards and fire four guns. If, may God guard us from such a misfortune, you should run aground, fire one gun after another so that we may put about or anchor, and from the other ship acknowledgment should be made by four guns.

Signals To Be Made at Night While Under Sail

If it should be necessary to back the yards against the wind, then two lanterns will be hung on the flagstaff, one under the other, and one gun will be fired. If with the wind, one lantern will be hung on the gaff and the other on the flagstaff, and one gun will be fired. You should also have lanterns at these places and keep them there until we take ours down. That ship should put about first which is under the wind, and care should be taken that at nighttime we do not run into each other.

If in bad weather it should be necessary to shorten sail and lay to, one lantern will be hung at the mainmast and another at the foreshrouds at the same height and on the same side, and two guns will be given. At the same time you should hang out lights from the same places.

If after drifting for a time we decide to make sail again, three lights will be hung from the mainshrouds at the same height, followed by two guns. You should hang your lanterns in the same place, and do not take them down until ours are down.

If in sailing with a fair wind it is necessary to sail close-hauled: if on starboard tack, that is to say the sails on the port side, two lanterns will be hung from the foreshrouds accompanied by four guns; if on port tack, that is to say sails on the starboard side, six guns will be fired. You should put out two lanterns at the same place.

If with a good wind at night we should be sailing free or with the wind on the quarter and it should be decided to change the course and if we are in the lead, we will hang out from the flagstaff as many lanterns, one under the other, as the number of points in the course to be changed. If two guns are fired, change the course as many points to starboard as there are lanterns, if three guns are fired change the same number of points to port. Should you be in the lead the signals as above will be made from the jack staff, accompanied by guns.

Signals To Be Made at Night While Mooring Ship, Weighing, or Coming to Anchor

If at night it should seem best to anchor, three guns will be fired at short intervals apart, and two lanterns will be hung in the mainshrouds. You should then hang out one lantern from the same place. If the stream anchor is to go down, one light will hang from the jack staff while the guns are being fired. In that case you are to signal with a light from the foreshrouds and not from the mainshrouds.

To moor, or stand on two anchors, one light will be displayed from the mainmast and another from the foremast, and one gun will be fired. You are to show a light from the mainshrouds.

If at night it is necessary to raise one anchor, three lights will be shown from the main-topmast shrouds, higher than the light in the main-topsail, accompanied by two guns. You should hang out a light on the gaff.

{p. 46}

If at night the anchors are to be weighed, one light will be displayed from the mainshrouds and another from the main-topmast shrouds, followed by one gun. In this case you should show a light from the gaff.

If at night the yards should be lowered, a light will hang from each end of the yards and so long as they are down. You should show a light at the stern during this time.

If the topmasts are to be lowered, a light will be placed at the very top of each, and the topmasts with the lanterns will be let down at once. You are then to show a light halfway down the mainshrouds and keep it there so long as the topmasts are down.

When the topmasts and yards are to be put up again, two lanterns, one above the other, will be hung from the gaff, followed by two guns. You are to show one lantern at the same place. When our lights are taken down then yours are to come down too.

Signals at Night While at Anchor

If at night the anchor should not hold or the cable should part, two lanterns are to be lighted on the flagstaff and as many others as you have on the mainshrouds, and these are to be kept until the situation is righted.

If at night there should come near you a strange suspicious craft and if it should be impossible to notify us by the speaking trumpet or by sending the yawl, hang out all the lights that you have and fire, gun after gun, until the Commander replies with one gun.

Signals at Night While Under Sail

If you find it necessary to drop behind us, fire once and put up three lights on the foreshrouds.

If at night a ship should be seen, put up one lantern on the mainshroud and two on the stern and explode some powder or light a fuse and while heading for that ship continue to fire your gun, one shot after another. If we should also steer for this vessel and should fire one, two, or three guns, you are to follow us.

In case one of our ships meets with misfortune, from which may God preserve us, forcing her to return to the harbor, and conditions are such that it is impossible to talk over the situation, if she can make her way back without help of the other ship, a red flag should fly from the fore-topmast, followed by one gun. If, however, the situation is such that it is necessary that the other should follow to be of help in case of need, the same red flag should fly from the main-topmast crosstrees, and one gun after another should be fired until the other does follow. Should the misfortune happen at night or in foggy weather, eleven guns should be fired, and the other ship must approach until she is in sight.

If one of the ships should spring a leak or meet with some other harm so that she cannot continue the voyage, she should display two lights on the main-topsail yards at equal height and continue to fire until the other ship comes to help.

Whichever ship sees land or a shoal at night should hang out as many lights as she can, fire once, and steer clear.

[The original signal code was signed:] Bering

{p. 47}

May 26, 1741

No wind. We dried the upper and lower sails. At three o’clock we took in the sails. At six o’clock the wind was SSE. The Captain Commander went in the small boat to look over Rakovaya Bay.

May 27, I741

No wind, cloudy and sunshiny. Pitched the boat on both sides.

May 28, 1741

No wind, cloudy, thick weather. Members of the crew went ashore by watches to have a bath. At ten o’clock the wind was SSE. At two o’clock in the afternoon we hauled on deck the spare anchor, with the cable, which had been down at the stern on the port side, and put in its place the stream anchor with the hawser made fast at the stern. The best bower anchor was lowered in the water to be cleaned and, after that, was stowed away in the hold, and to it was bent a cable 150 fathoms long, which had been unwound and spliced.

May 29, 1741

At four in the morning a shot was fired to signal the St. Paul for religious service. Half an hour later another shot as a signal to get under way. (Main-topsail loose.) At six o’clock the small bower anchor and the stream anchor were weighed, and we were towed out of the Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul into the roadstead of Avacha Bay. After passing the leading buoy, leaving it to starboard, which was in 15 feet of water and had a white flag at the top, we entered the roadstead and let go the small bower anchor and played out 20 fathoms of cable. Took soundings and got 7, 8, 9, 10, 5, 3, 4, 9, 12, 13 fathoms and blue slimy mud. When the gun was fired we hoisted the anchor flag.

May 30, 1741

At one o’clock in the afternoon the wind was S by E; at four o’clock SE. Cleaned the small bower anchor cable. The Captain Commander issued a supplementary signal order for Captain Chirikov. In case it should be necessary to be towed, the ordinary jack should fly from the main-topmast-standing-backstays opposite the top. At four in the morning the signal was made for the lieutenant of the St. Paul to come to us, and in response navigator Elagin came and received the above signal order and returned to his ship. From six to nine in the morning we warped between S and W. During that time we made three tows of 390 fathoms each. From nine to ten we made two tows of the same length and then anchored in 9½ fathoms of water. The lighthouse at the entrance bore SE½E from us, and the native summer homes at the mouth of the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul NE by E. The winds were unsteady and shifted.

{p. 48}

May 31, 1741

Topsail SSE wind, cloudy weather, and occasional sunshine. Eight o’clock in the evening the wind was from the SE but changeable. The longboat, in charge of the quartermaster and six men, was sent ashore for water and returned at two o’clock in the night with the water. At six in the morning the wind was from the NE; we hoisted the prayer flag when the gun was fired, let out a quarter of a cable on the small bower anchor.

While the ship was in the harbor it was loaded with all kinds of supplies, materials, and provisions which were needed for our sea voyage. The table below gives the kind and quantity of the cargo which we took aboard the St. Peter. At the stern the ship drew 9 feet 5 inches, at the stem 9 feet 4 inches of water, difference of one inch. In addition there is the small bower anchor with a half cable, the longboat, and the small yawl, all of which are in the water.

Table of the Materials, Supplies, and Provisions Taken on Board the “St. Peter” for the Sea Voyage

UnitsPoodsRussian Pounds
Ballast800  
Strip iron90  
Groats{Sacks32}217  
Bags52    
Barrels{Beef15165  
Butter1180  
Pork870  
Salt618  
Flour100250  
Water(barrels, large)35}1434  
Water(barrels, middle and small)67    
Wood14½990  
Hardtack(sacks)382  
Powder103417½
Cannon balls6795737 
Cartels4912530 
Cannon(3 pounders)918420 
Cannon(2 pounders)59220 
Falconets31620[4]

June 1, 1741

At one o’clock topsail SSE wind, sun is shining. At five o’clock a very light wind from the E, which shifted to ESE by eight o’clock. We raised the small bower anchor in order to look at it and then let it go again. The lighthouse bears SE, the native summer huts in the harbor N½E. During the whole twenty-four hours the winds veered back and forth between S and E. In the hold there are four inches of water.

{p. 49}

June 3, 1741

At one o’clock the wind is SSE. At two o’clock we sent our boat ashore for water. At six o’clock we saw a ship under sail in the S heading for Avacha Bay, which proved to be the double sloop Nadezhda coming from the mouth of the Bolshaya River. At nine o’clock the wind was SE; our boat returned with water. At eleven o’clock we put out a lighted lantern at the gaff for the benefit of the above-mentioned ship. At two o’clock we took down the lantern. At eleven in the morning the Nadezhda entered Avacha Bay and fired five guns as a salute, we replied with three; when she had come abreast, those on board gave three cheers for the Captain Commander, and we returned the compliment by three cheers, and then they gave three more. At twelve o’clock the double sloop came to anchor astern of us, and the navigator Ptichev came aboard our ship to make a report to the Captain Commander, after which he left. At one o’clock topgallantsail NE by S wind.

June 4, 1741

At seven o’clock the double sloop weighed anchor and sailed into the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. At one o’clock calm. At two o’clock we had the anchor apeak and beat nearer towards the mouth; at four o’clock a gentle NW wind; we put up the fore-topsail and fore-topmast-staysail and steered for the mouth. St. Paul did likewise. At five o’clock the wind is WNW; we hauled up the two topsails and were being towed SE by S. The strong tide was the only obstacle to our going out, and we were, therefore, compelled to warp SE by E with the anchor in 13 fathoms. At eight o’clock set the sails and were towed SE by E into 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 fathoms. Lighthouse Vaua bore N½E, Vilyuchensk Volcano [SW¾W?], depth of water 30 fathoms. At twelve o’clock Vaua Lighthouse bore NW by N½W, 2½ miles, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, Burning Volcano N½W, Isopa Point S by W; carrying all sails except the spritsail.[5]


“Rhumb” is used in two senses in the log book: (1) in statements at the variation of the compass, as here and in the 24-hour summary at the end of each day’s log, in the sense of “point”, or 11¼° of angular measure; (2) in the 24-hour summaries and elsewhere, in the sense of “course,” i.e. the angle formed by the ship’s path and the magnetic meridian.

A pood is equal to 40 Russian pounds, or 36 lbs. avoirdupois.

A total of 4,907 poods and 24½ Russian pounds (40 pounds to the pood), or about 88½ tons.

Yushin’s journal gives these bearings: Vaua Lighthouse NW½N [the same as Khitrov’s NW by N½W] distant about 2½ German miles [15 German miles to a degree], Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, Burning Volcano N½W, Isopa Cape S by W, about 9 German miles.

Vaua Lighthouse was located on Lighthouse (Mayachni) Cape at the entrance of Avacha Bay. Vilyuchensk Volcano is south of Avacha Bay and about three or four miles from the shore. North of Avacha are three volcanoes close together. According to Steller (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” Frankfort and Leipzig, 1774, p. 44) the most northwesterly of the three was called Strelechnaya, the one next to it Gorelaya (Burning), and the third had no name. After reading the various descriptions of Kamchatka and the log books of the navigators one is forced to conclude that there was a great deal of confusion on the subject. Strelechnaya Volcano was sometimes called Koryatskaya. Burning Volcano was also known as Avacha Volcano, and occasionally one of the last two names was given to the third volcano, which was not supposed to have a name. At the present time the names given to these mountains are: Koryatskaya, Avacha, and Kozelskaya.

The term Isopa disappeared from the maps and the books soon after Bering’s time. Isopa Cape, or Hook, judging from Steller’s description (“Beschreibung,” etc., p. 18) and from early charts, is no other than Povorotni Cape of modern maps. (Mayachni Cape and the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, or, in its modern form, Petropavlovsk, may be located on Pl. 1 in the inset of Avacha Bay; Vilyuchensk [Vilyuchin] and Koryatskaya Volcanoes, on the main map of Pl. 1.)


{p. 50}

[Transcriber’s Note—Each page of the logs has the same format. The titles of the columns are too long to be presented properly, and so the following key presents the abbreviations used in each.]

Key:

H: Hour

K: Knots

W: Wind

C: Course

L: Leeway

VC 1½ (¾, 1¼, 2, etc): Variation of Compass 1½ (¾, 1¼, 2, etc) rhumb E

R: Rhumb

DK: Dist. in Knots

DL: Diff. Lat.

DiK: Dep. in Knots

DLo: Diff. Long.

Lat.: Lat. (as in original, not abbreviated further)

DGM: Dist. in German Miles

Long.: Long. (as in original, not abbreviated further)

BEGINNING OF VOYAGE

June 5, 1741. After Midday[6]

Key

HKWCL
1SESELight wind and clear.
2EHeavy fog. We beat the drum and rang the bell but received no response from the St. Paul.
3SE/SE½N
4E/N
5NNETook aboard the longboat and yawl and lashed them secure.
6CalmFog cleared a bit.
7Lowered topsails on caps, wind went down. St. Paul N by E, about [7¾] German miles.
8Lighthouse at the mouth of Avacha Bay WNW½W, 4 German miles. Isopa Point SSW.
9
10Cloudy, stars out, St. Paul not in sight.
11
12WSWSE/EHung out a lighted lantern over the stern.
1
2
3St. Paul NE by N 1 mile.
4
5
6WSWLight wind, drizzly, cloudy.
7ESE
8SWClear with passing clouds.
9
10One gun was fired from the St. Paul; the ordinary flag was hoisted from the fore-topmast crosstrees, and the fore-topsail was lowered, which was the signal that the officers wished to speak to us. We fired one gun in acknowledgment and started for the St. Paul about eleven o’clock.
11E
12Shipunski Cape NNE¾E, Burning Volcano NW by W, Isopa Point SW½S.

Unless otherwise indicated Yushin’s log book is used on and after this date. The log books were kept according to the astronomical day, which extends from noon of the previous civil date to the following noon, i.e. June 5 of the log began at noon, June 4, civil time, and ended at noon, June 5, civil time. In timing the events of the voyage this should be borne in mind; also that the converted civil dates will be those of the Russian calendar, at that time eleven days behind the Gregorian calendar. See also footnote 3, p. 332. The noon positions on the chart, Pl. 1, are, as in the log, those of the end of the astronomical day, and the dates therefore coincide with the civil dates.

The symbols preceding the date indicate the day of the week, as follows:

Sunday][MondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

{p. 51}

June 6, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SSWE½NTopgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy with occasional sunshine. The St. Paul fired three guns, we replied with the same number; we drew near and had a conversation with Lieutenant Chikhachev through the trumpet, about the reckoning from Avacha and other naval matters. Later we signaled for the lieutenant of the St. Paul by hoisting the ordinary flag from the fore-topmast crosstrees. Captain Chirikov said that it was not safe to send a man in the small yawl and that it would take too long to put over the large boat, and therefore the lieutenant did not come.
2ESE½E
3SWSE/E½E
4The compass bearing of Vilyuchensk Volcano W, Burning Volcano north of Avacha NW, Isopa Point SW by W. We are ESE of Vaua, 10¾ German miles, between these points the variation of the compass is ½ rhumb E. Latitude at four o’clock 52° 38′, longitude from Vaua 1°. This place is our departure.
52½WSWSE/E¾E
62½Topgallantsail wind, cool, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails, lower sails, jib, topmast-staysails.
72½
83Topsail wind, cold. By compass bearing the sun went down W31°30′N; latitude 52° 32′; true bearing 40° 48′; variation of compass 9° 18′ E, or ¾ rhumb.
92
101¾Topgallantsail wind, cold.
111SWClear.
122½
11¾SWStars shining.
21¾St. Paul N by W not far from us.
32¾
43Topsail wind, cold.
54Sky overcast.
64¼Sun shining.
74¼
85Reef-topsail wind, cold, weather as before.
94¼
105SSW
114½Clewed up the mainsail and foresail in order to wait for the St. Paul, which was astern of us.
124

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC ¾R[7]DKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/E62¼S 35′E 51.884.8′52° 03′25¼SE/E3°30′E2° 24′

For different significance of “rhumb” in the log, see footnote 2, above.


{p. 52}

June 7, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14SWESE½ETopsail wind, cold, cloudy. Signaled to the St. Paul to go ahead, which was done.
24
35ESE¼E
46½
55¾SSWWind and weather as before; carrying the topsails at ½ topmast.
65½
75SW/SESE
85
94¾Light rain. The St. Paul is seen in the E.
104
115
124
12WESE½ETopsail wind, southwesterly swell.
21½WNWESE
33NNESet the foresail, mainsail, trysail; hoisted staysail and jib.
44¾NE
56NNEReef-topsail wind, cold, weather as before.
65¾Reef-topsail wind, cold; hauled down jib.
76¼
86½Undersail wind, weather as before.
97Lowered the topmast-staysails.
107Reef-undersail wind; took three reefs in the main-topsail, two in the fore-topsail, and then furled.
116
124½Undersail wind, cloudy.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/E3°42′E[8]118S 59′E 102161′51° 03′55¾SE/E4°01′E5° 05′

Throughout the log of the St. Peter, the course from one noon position to the next and the rhumb from Vaua are expressed, as here, in whole points of the compass modified by that portion of a point (11° 15′) needed to define the course exactly to the minute. Thus, SE/E3°42′E, expressed in azimuth, would be 123° 45′ — 3° 42′ = 120° 03′.


image of log book handwritten in Cyrillic script

Fig. 10—Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by Yushin: entry of June 7, 1741 (for text, see opposite page).

The present reprint of the log book differs from the arrangement of the original in that the order of columns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in the body of the log has been changed to 1, 2, 5, 3, 4, and that, in the summary at the end, boxes 1, 2, 3 under “From Vaua” have been transposed to 2, 1, 3.


{p. 53}

June 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
16¼NESEUndersail wind, sky overcast.
26¼
35½
44¾
54¾
65
75NNEReef-topsail wind, weather as before; clewed up the mainsail.
84¼
94¾NE/N
104
113½Hoisted the reefed fore-topsail.
123¾
12¾NTopgallantsail wind, cold, sea from N.
22½
32½
43½Signaled to the St. Paul to take the lead.
54Let out one reef in the fore-topsail and two in the main-topsail.
64
73½
84¼
94¾NNETopsail wind, cold, cloudy and sunshiny in turn.
104½
114Set the jib and topmast-staysail, hoisted the mainsail.
123½Sun shining, took observation: zenith distance 26° 20′, declination of the sun 23° 27′, latitude 49° 47′ N.[9]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSE4°01′E116S 76′E 88137′49° 47′83½SE/E0°20′S7° 22′

Khitrov gives zenith distance 26° 59′, declination 23° 27′, latitude 49° 55′. This figure for latitude has been used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 54}

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND

June 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14NNEESE¼ETopgallantsail wind, cold, clear with passing clouds.
23¾Lowered topsails, mainsail, foresail, jib, main-topsail, staysail, and trysail.
33½
43½
53ESE
63¼NLowered main-topmast staysail, clewed up trysail.
73¾
83¼
92½Clewed up mainsail and foresail.
102¾
113NNWHoisted mainsail and foresail.
123The St. Paul is about ¼ mile away.
13½
23½Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, and rainy.
33¾ESE½EHoisted the jib, the main-topmast staysail, set the trysail.
44¼
54¼ESE
65¾Wind freshening.
76¼
85¾
96NNEReef-topsail wind, cold, clear with passing clouds.
105
114½
124½Same as before, clear. Took observation: zenith distance 25° 20′, declination of the sun 23° 30′, latitude 48° 50′, variation of the compass 1 rhumb, because in the course of the day and without interference the difference between the dead reckoning and the observation was 9 minutes of latitude N.[10]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSE/E1°04′S98.5S 57′E 82128′48° 50′108½SE/E0°28′S9° 30′

Khitrov gives the latitude as 48° 48′.


{p. 55}

June 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¾N/WESETopsail wind, cold, cloudy, light rain; carrying topsails, lower sails, and staysails.
25E/S
35
44¾Drew near the St. Paul and talked over our position and the distance from Vaua. Agreed that the variation of the compass should be taken as 1 rhumb.
53½ESE½E
65½ESE
75½
85Reef-topsail wind and cold.
95½Cloudy and rainy.
106The St. Paul had out two lighted lanterns as a signal that soundings are being taken; we shortened sail and sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom.
114½Got under way again, took two reefs in the main-topsail and a second in the fore-topsail.
125
13¾NNE
23¼Two lighted lanterns on the St. Paul as a signal that soundings are being taken.
34½NE½
43
53½
64
74¼Topsail wind, cold.
83½ENESE½Let out the reefs in the topsail.
92¼NE/ESE/E¾Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy.
102¾1Sunshine.
1121Carrying topsails, lower sails, staysails, and jib.
1211Air clear, sunshine, took observation: zenith distance 23° 58′, declination of the sun 23° 29′, latitude 47° 27′, variation of the compass 1¾ rhumb, because the difference between the dead reckoning and the observation is 28 minutes.[11]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSE0°34′S116S 83′E 81122′47° 27′137¼SE/E2°49′S11° 32′

Khitrov gives the latitude as 47° 29′.


{p. 56}

June 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾NEESE½Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails, lower sails, trysail, and jib.
24½
34½½Topsail wind, cold, weather as before.
44½½
54SE/E¾E½
63½½Signaled to the St. Paul to come towards us to talk over the position, the distance from Vaua, the variation of the compass. This was done. It was agreed that, if at night bottom should be found, a gun should be fired as a signal to heave to until the other ship came up.
72½ESE½E½
81¾SE/E½E½Took a reef in the topsails. St. Paul SE by S, two lights on it as a signal that sounding was going on; we also sounded in 90 fathoms but no bottom.
92NE/E½
103¼½
113½
122½NEESE½
12¾SE/E¼E½
23¼ESE½
33½½Topgallantsail wind, cold.
42¾½
53¼ESE½E½St Paul E by S, ½ mile.
62¾½
73½Wind freshening.
83¼½
94N/EE¼S½Topsail wind, cold, cloudy.
104¾E½S½Wind freshening; carrying reefed topsails, lower sails, staysails, and jib.
114½E/S
124½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/E2°54′S79½S 47.5′E 6493′46° 40′156½SE/E2°47′S13° 05′

{p. 57}

June 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14NE/NESE½ETopgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy; carrying all sails except the spritsail; let out reefs in the topsails.
24¼½
34½½
44½ESE¼E½Clear with passing fog.
54½E/S½
64½½Topsail wind, cold.
74½½
84¾½St. Paul E½S, not far away.
93¼NNEE½S1
103E1Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy; occasionally the moon and stars shine; foggy. Took a reef in the topsails, during the fog bells were rung on the St. Paul and on our ship.
112½E½S1
122¾ESE½E1
11¼NE/NE/S2Two lights on the St. Paul, which means that soundings are taken.
212
312We also sounded in 90 fathoms but found no bottom. Little wind, fog, wet, northerly swell.
4¾2
5¾NNE½
61½Let out the reefs in the topsails.
71¼½Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy and sunshiny and foggy.
81¼1½
911½
1011½
1111½
1211½Took an observation: zenith distance 22° 44′, declination of the sun 23° 30′, latitude 46° 14′ N.[12]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSE/E5°16′E57S 26′E 4869′46° 14′170½SE/E2°09′S14° 14′

Khitrov gives the latitude as 46° 09′.


{p. 58}

COURSE CHANGED FOR AMERICA

June 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1¾NNEE/S2½Little wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails, foresail, and trysail; northerly swell.
21¼NE/N2½
31½2½
412½
5¾NENEUnsteady wind and little of it, clear. Through the trumpet had a talk with Captain Chirikov about our position, course, and distance from Vaua. It was unanimously agreed to change the course and sail ENE.[13] Wind shifted at 5 o’clock, and, because of the night, we took a reef in topsails.
612½
7¾2½
812½
9½N/EE/N2½
10½NE/NE/S2½
11¾2½St. Paul NNE, ¼ mile.
121N/EE/N2½
1¼NENE2½Little wind, drizzly, foggy.
2¾2½
3¾2½Carrying lighted lantern at the stern as a signal to the St. Paul.
412½
5½ENE½E2½Wind as before, only unsteady.
6¼2½
7½2½
8¾
9¼ENE
10½2½Very light wind and calm, air clear, sky overcast.
11¼2½
12½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/E0°09′E17S 9.3′E 1420′46° 05′174½SE/E2°05′S14° 34′

E by N according to Khitrov. This is the change in course agreed upon on May 4 (see p. 38) in case Juan de Gama Land were not found by the time latitude 46° had been reached on the SE by E course from Vaua. See also the journal of the St. Paul, under June 13 (p. 286) and Chirikov’s report, p. 313.


{p. 59}

June 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1¼NENE2½Very light wind and unsteady, air thick, northerly swell; carrying topsails and lower sails.
2½2½
3½2½
4½2½
5¼2½
6¼2½
7¼NEESELight air, calm; took a reef in topsails; cloudy and drizzly; St. Paul NW by W.
8¼2½
9¼2½
10¼NE/ESE/E2½
11½ENESE2½
12¼E/SS/E2½Calm; lowered topsails on caps, clewed up mainsail and foresail, allowed for the swell which was running from N to S. St. Paul W by N, ¼ mile.
1¼ENESE2½
2¼E/NSE/S2½At times light wind and fog; set topsails, hoisted foresail and mainsail.
3¼2½
41E/NN/E1Topgallantsail wind, cold; tacked to starboard, let out the reefs in topsails, hoisted staysails and jib.
52½N½E
631Cloudy, drizzly, foggy.
72½1
82½1
93Topsail wind, cold, gloomy.
102½EN/E½E
112¼E/NN/E1Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, foggy, drizzly.
122¾1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNE2°46′N20N 18.5′E 6.59′46° 23′172¾SE/E0°40′S14° 43′

{p. 60}

June 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13ENEN¾Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, air thick; carrying upper and lower sails.
23¼¾
33¼¾Clewed and brailed up the mainsail and set the main-staysail because the St. Paul is dropping behind.
43½¾
54N½E
63¾EN/E½E¾Took a reef in the topsails. The St. Paul is by the wind, about 2 miles away. We steered for her about 8 o’clock, and when we had come closer we put about and sailed again by the wind.
73E/NN/E
84½NNW½W
93¼N/E¼E1¼
103¼1¼Clear with passing clouds.
113¼1¼Reef-topsail wind, cold.
1231¼St. Paul NW by W, 1½ miles.
131¼Easterly swell.
231¼
32¾1¼
43¼1¼
52½1¼The St. Paul is by the wind from us, about 4 or more miles distant.
62¾1¼
76NNW½WOn that account we changed our course so that the two ships might not become separated.
86
95When we had come close to the St. Paul we put about again and sailed by the wind.
103½N/E1¼
113½1¼
123¼1¼Reef-topsail wind, chilly, cloudy, drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN6°12′E84N 83′E 913′47° 46′161¾SE/E5°09′E14° 56′

{p. 61}

June 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½E/NN/E1½Topsail wind, chilly, drizzly, cloudy; carrying foresail, trysail, main-staysail, topsails with one reef in them.
22½1½
321½
44½NNWHauled around by the wind in order to get in touch with the St. Paul, and as we drew near we backed the fore-topsail.
52ENEN3½
61N½E1½Talked with Lieut. Chikhachev of the St. Paul and told him that in case the wind should shift to easterly and he should desire to communicate with the Captain Commander, he should fly the jack from the gaff and fire a gun.
73¼1½
81¼1½Made a port tack and gave the agreed signal to the St. Paul to do likewise.
93¼SE1½
102SE½S1½
1121½
122¼E/NSE¾S1½Topsail wind, chilly, cloudy.
12¼SE/S¼E1½The St. Paul is near our ship.
21½1½
31½ESSE¼E1½
41½1½Set the mainsail, hoisted the topmast-staysail.
53¼N/E½E1¼
6¾1¼Reef-topsail wind, chilly.
73½NNE¼E
82½1¼
91¾ESENETopgallantsail wind, cloudy, cold.
101½1¾Light wind, clear with passing clouds and fog.
111¼E/SNE/N
121NNE½ELet out reefs in topsails, carrying upper and lower sails.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNE3°47′E18N 16′E 8.512′48° 02′161¼SE/E6°51′E15° 05′

{p. 62}

June 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾ENNE¼E2Topgallantsail wind, chilly, cloudy, foggy, and wet; carrying topsails, foresail, trysail, and staysails.
22¼ESENE2
31½2
42¼NE½N2Clewed and brailed up the foresail.
52NE½E2Laid the main-topsail on the topmast, lowered the staysails and jib in order to wait for the St. Paul.
61NE¼E2
7½2
8¾2Took a reef in the topsails, set foresail, hoisted fore-topmast-staysail.
91½2
102SE/ENE/E½E1½Set jib and main-topmast-staysail.
113SEENE1½Hoisted mainsail.
122¾Lowered jib and staysails because the wind increased, clewed up mainsail and foresail, lowered fore-topsail, heaved the lead without finding bottom in 90 fathoms, filled fore-topsail, and set the foresail. St. Paul bears NNW.
12¾ENE½E1½
23½SE/ENE/E
32½SE1½
42¼1½
52½1½Set the mainsail.
63
72½SE/SENE¾E1½Topgallantsail wind, chilly, cloudy, damp.
82¼1½
91½E/N2
101¼Light wind, weather as before.
111SEENE½ECarrying upper and lower sails except the spritsail. The topsails have a reef in them.
121¾SE/ENE/E2

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E1°27′N44N 25.4′E 3654′48° 27′165¾ESE1°25′S15° 39′

{p. 63}

June 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½ESENE1¼Topgallantsail wind, chilly, damp, cloudy.
22½1¼
33½1¼
43¾NE¼E1¼
53¾SE/ENE/ETopsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
63¾1¼
73¾1¼
83¾1¼
941¼Reef-topsail wind, cold.
103½1¼
112¼1¼Lowered staysails, backed fore-topsail, sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom; filled fore-topsail. St. Paul NNW½W.
122¾1¼
12½1¼
22¾
331¼
43½NE/NSailed for the St. Paul, signaled her that we desired to talk with them. We discussed whether we should go to the 45th [46th] parallel on the SE/E course from Vaua, as was agreed upon at the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.[14] The wind being contrary, we decided to sail between N and E until the wind was more favorable.
54¼
64¼ESENE1
74¾1
83½NE¼E
931
103½1
114½1
124Reef-topsail wind, chilly, cloudy, foggy, wet.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E0°53′E77.4N 42′E 6599′49° 09′175½ESE3°48′E17° 38′

Khitrov’s journal: “When we drew nearer we inquired whether they still agreed to go on the northerly course since we had not yet gone in that direction as far as we had planned. They were of the opinion that this course should be followed when the wind was fair and, when it was not, we should keep more easterly.” See also the journal of the St. Paul under June 18 (p. 287).


{p. 64}

June 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15ESENE1Topsail wind, drizzly weather; carrying foresail, mainsail, trysail, staysails, topsails, and one reef.
251
35½1
441
541Lowered staysails.
63¼SE/ENE/E1½
72¾ESENE1½Took two reefs in topsails.
82½1½
92¼2½
1022Furled fore-topsail.
1122Clewed up mainsail.
122¼2Backed main-topsail; sounded in 90 fathoms and no bottom; filled main-topsail and hoisted main-staysail.
12¼2
23½1½
33¼1½
42½1½
52¾NE¼N1½At the end of this hour we set the fore-topsail with two reefs in it.
63E/SNE½N1½
72¾1½
83NE/N1½
92½1½
102¾S/E1½At the beginning of this hour we came about on the port tack;[15] no signal was made to the St. Paul because she was so close that she followed us without a signal.
1131½
123½1½[16]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE1°26′E57N 39′E 4163′49° 48′181E/S3°39′S18° 41′

Called “backboard” tack in the original.

According to Khitrov an observation taken at noon gave latitude 50° 13′, but owing to the haze on the horizon it was not used.


{p. 65}

SEPARATION OF THE TWO VESSELS

June 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13E/SS/E2Strong reef-topsail wind, wet; furled fore-topsail, lowered main-staysail, set mainsail, took three reefs in main-topsail.
22¾2
32½2
42½2
52½2Undersail wind, gale.
622½Furled main-topsail, carrying foresail, mainsail, trysail. Because the St. Paul is considerable distance from us, we clewed up mainsail and hoisted main-staysail.
722½
82ES/E½E3
92¼3
101½4½St. Paul NW, 2 miles; lowered main-staysail; clear with passing clouds; hauled up the weather clew of the foresail.
111½4½
121¼4½
11SE/E5½St. Paul not in sight. Clewed up foresail, set main-staysail, hove to; gale blowing.[17]
215½
31½5½
45NWGot under way, hoisted foresail, sailed with a view of finding the St. Paul which disappeared at 10 o’clock; failed to sight her; hove to under trysail and main-staysail.
51½SE½S5½
615½
715½
815½
915½Strong reef-undersail wind.
1015½
1115½Clear with passing clouds.
1215½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/S6°29′W34S 26.4′W 22.535′49° 22′178¼ESE5°12′E18° 06′

Khitrov’s journal: “At the beginning [of 10 o’clock at night] we lowered the main-staysail, made fast the fore-sheet [in order to wait] for the St. Paul because she is from us [?] and not near. At 11 o’clock she disappeared from sight. We carried the foresail with the fore-sheet fast; mizzen sail against the mast. At 1 o’clock at the change of the watch I learned that the St. Paul was out of sight and therefore clewed up the foresail and laid to under the mizzen- and main-staysails. At 3:30 we hoisted the foresail and sailed in the direction [?] in search of the St. Paul, because she had been seen on that course; at 4:30 we furled the foresail and laid to under the main-staysail and mizzensail. Undersail wind.”

On the separation of the two vessels see also Waxel’s report, p. 271; the journal of the St. Paul under June 20 (p. 287); and Chirikov’s report. p. 313.


{p. 66}

June 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11NE/ESE/E½E5½Strong reef-undersail wind, cloudy and sunshiny; carrying mainsail and trysail.
215½
315½
415½
515½
615½Lowered the fore and main yards to half-mast; took a reef in mainsail in order to be safe.
715½
815½
915½
1015½Clear with passing clouds.
1115½
1215½
115½
215½
315½
415½Wind going down a little.
51NNE5½
615½Hoisted fore and main yards to their places.
715½
81N/ENW/W4At the end of the hour we set foresail; in addition we were carrying trysail and main-staysail; sailed NW in search of the St. Paul but could not find her. When we hove to the St. Paul bore NW about 1½ German miles. According to our calculations we are now SW and about 11 miles from the place where we hove to, and the St. Paul is NW from us about 4 or more miles. We kept this course until noon; had a lookout at the topmast but could not see a sign of the ship.
92¼NNENW4
102¼4Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, cold.
112½4
122½4Sunshine; furled foresail and hove to. Took observation: zenith distance 26° 22′, declination of the sun 23° 08′, latitude 49° 30′.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationNW/W3°24′W16N 8′W 1421′49° 30′174¼ESE5°28′E17° 45′

{p. 67}

RENEWED SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND

June 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11N/EE½N5½Reef-undersail wind, cloudy and sunshiny; hove to under trysail and main-staysail.
215½
315½
415½
515½
615½Undersail wind, swell from NE.
715½
815½
9¾E5½Reef-topsail wind. We could have advanced on our course had we not been obliged to look for the St. Paul.
10¾5½
11½NENE½E5½Topsail wind, clear with passing fog and rain.
12½5½
1½5½
2½5½Heavy NE swell.
3½5½
4½N/E5½Looked in vain from the topmast for the St. Paul. It had been agreed that if we became separated we should go back to the place where we parted, which place is NNE¾E, 9 German miles from us; the latitude of that place is 49° 25′, and longitude from Vaua 18° 20′. We cannot reach that spot because of the wind. Taking this into consideration the Captain Commander, Waxel, Khitrov, and Eselberg decided to go to the 45th parallel, the place agreed upon, on the course SE by E from Vaua, since the wind was fair.[18]
53½N/WSSESet foresail and let out the reefs, hoisted topsails, let out two reefs in main-topsail; topsails on the caps, mainsail clewed up.
63½
74
84Reef-topsail wind, cold, drizzly, sunshiny.
93
102¾NW/NTopgallantsail wind, cold, weather as before.
113½Topsail wind, cold.
123¼

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/E1°25′E40S 38.7′E 8.713′48° 51′180¾ESE2°51′E17° 58′

Khitrov’s journal: 4 a.m. “We looked in vain from the crosstrees for the St. Paul. According to the understanding we were to go to the place where she was last seen by us, which place was by our reckoning NNE¾E, 9 German miles distant, but head winds prevented our doing so. On that account the Captain Commander decided to go to latitude 46° N, on the rhumb from Vaua SE by E. We cleared the foresail and steered SSE, lowered the foreyards, set both topsails reefed.”


{p. 68}

June 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¼N/WSSETopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying foresail and mainsail; NE swell.
22¾
32¾
43½
53¾SAt this hour the Captain Commander, Waxel, and Khitrov agreed to sail the course indicated.
64¼
73½
82¾NWTopgallantsail wind, cold; hoisted topsails.
93¼Set mainsail and foresail.
102½
114Hoisted staysail and jib.
123¾Sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom; let out reef in main-topsail.
13¾W/N
23½Drizzly, wet, clear with passing clouds.
34
44½Topsail wind and cold; all sails reefed; carrying lighted lanterns.
54½S/WLet out the spritsail.
65
74¾WStrong topsail wind, cold; let out the last reefs in topsails.
85
94½Cloudy, foggy, wet.
104½
113½Occasional sunshine.
125Reef-topsail wind, cold, weather as before.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/W4°10′W91S 87.5′W 24.536′47° 24′185¾ESE3°51′S17° 22′

{p. 69}

June 24, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15¼W/SS/W½Topsail wind, cold, cloudy; furled spritsail; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail; westerly swell.
26½
35½½
45S/W½W½Reef-topsail wind, cold.
54¾W½Took a reef in topsails; drizzly, damp.
64½½
72½SSW½W½Took two reefs in topsails.
82½SSW½
94¼½
103¾½Sounded in 90 fathoms, and no bottom.
113½½
124½Wind moderating.
13¾½
23½½Heaved the lead twice, and no bottom.
34½
44¼½Hoisted staysail.
54¼W/N½
64¾S/W½WLet out reef in mainsail.
74¾
84¼
94½
104WTopsail wind, cold, drizzly.
114¼W/NLet out the last reefs in the topsails.
125S/E¼ESky overcast.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSW3°04′W102S 92′W 4464′45° 52′190¼SE/E0°09′E16° 18′

{p. 70}

June 25, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼W/NSE½ETopsail wind, cold, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying the fore and main-topsails.
24
32¾Saw many ducks.
42½[19]
52½SE/STopgallantsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
62
72W
82¼
92½Little wind.
101¼Clewed and brailed up the mainsail; sounded in 90 fathoms, and no bottom.
111
121
11¼Warm, drizzly, wet.
21Now and then the moon and stars are seen.
3¾
41
51Hoisted the jib and topmast-staysail.
6¾
71½
83WSW
9calmCloudy, sunshiny; lowered jib and staysail, clewed up the fore and mainsail, lowered topsails on the caps. No wind.
10
11
12Weather as before, atmosphere thick.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/E2°25′E37S 35.8′E 8.712′45° 16′198¼SE/E1°33′S16° 30′

In Khitrov’s journal it is stated that at 4 o’clock in the afternoon Bering called Waxel, Khitrov, and Eselberg into consultation about the course to sail. At the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul it had been agreed to sail to the 46th parallel in search of land; but this parallel had already been passed, and, though birds were seen, indicating that land was not far off, land itself was not sighted. Taking all these points into consideration the officers decided to continue on the southerly course until noon of the 26th, and accordingly the course steered was SE by S.


{p. 71}

RESUMPTION OF EASTWARD COURSE

June 26, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SE/SENETopgallantsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying all sails except spritsail.
23
32¾
43
53¾SETopsail wind, cloudy.
64
74¼SSENE/E¾E[20]
84½
95Cold reef-topsail wind.
105½Fog; heaved the lead, no bottom in 90 fathoms.
116½
126½Heaved lead, no bottom.
15NE/E½E
24½Took a reef in the fore-topsail; sounded, no bottom.
34¾Took a reef in topsails.
45½
55¾
66¾Strong reef-topsail wind.
78ENEUndersail wind, drizzly.
85¾Clear with passing clouds; took another reef in fore-topsail.
94½S/EReef-topsail wind, chilly.
105NE/E½E
116½Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
128Storm, sky covered with clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/N0°17N122N 24.4′E 119.6171′45° 40′217¾SE/E3°52′E19° 21′

Khitrov’s journal: “Although on the 25th we agreed to sail south, yet we found no land, which proves that the map of Delisle de la Croyère, which locates Juan de Gama Land as far as the 24th [44th?] degree is not accurate. Under the circumstances we concluded not to go farther south but instead to carry out the original plan made at the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul and sail between north and east.”


{p. 72}

EASTWARD COURSE

June 27, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼SE/SENETopsail wind, cloudy, chilly; let out all the reefs in topsails; carrying all the sails except the spritsail.
24
35¼
45½Strong reef-topsail wind.
55½
65½
75½NE/E½E
86½Reef-undersail wind; took a reef in topsails.
95¾SSEHauled down jib and main-topmast-staysail.
105½Sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom.
115Cold reef-topsail wind.
125Heaved the lead.
15½SE/SENE
24¾Heaved the lead, no bottom.
34Cold topsail wind; set jib and main-topmast-staysail; let out all the reefs in topsails.
44¾
54½NE/E½E
64¾Wind as before, drizzly weather.
74½
84¼
94¼Took a reef in topsails.
103¼Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
113
123¼Carrying all sails except the spritsail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/N0°16′E113N 21.6′E 111.3163′46° 02′238¼ESE3°08′S22° 04′

{p. 73}

June 28, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¾SE/ENE/E½ETopsail wind, chilly, drizzly; carrying all sails except the spritsail. The topsails have a reef in them.
24¾
35
44½Thick fog, wet, heavy SW swell.
54¼
63Fog; sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
74ENE
84Took two reefs in topsails.
94½Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
103½
113Topgallantsail wind, chilly, wet, foggy.
122¾
12¾SSENE/E½E
22Fog; sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
32½Let out two reefs in fore-topsail and the second reef in main-topsail.
43¼
54¼
64¼Let out a third reef in the main-topsail.
74Set the spritsail.
83¾
93¼
102½Clear with passing fogs.
113¼
123½Carrying all sails except the main-staysail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/N1°21′N87N 19′E 85129.6′46° 21′253¾ESE0°17′S24° 07′

{p. 74}

June 29, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼SSWNE/ETopsail wind, heavy fog, chilly; carrying all sails except the main-staysail.[21]
24½
34Clear with passing clouds.
44Lowered mainsails and jib.
53¾Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
63½
73¼NE½E
83½Heavy and damp fog.
93½Took reef in topsails.
103¾
113¼Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
123½
13½NE/E
23¾Sounded again, no bottom.
34
44¼Topsail wind, chilly, foggy, damp.
54¼NE½E
64½Clewed up the mainsail.
74¼Occasional sunshine.
84
94¼Furled spritsail.
104½Reef-topsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
114½NE/E
124¼Carrying topsails; clewed up foresail and mainsail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningENE0°03′E94.5N 36′E 87.4127′46° 57′268¼ESE3°04′26° 14′

Khitrov’s journal: “Because we had gone too far southward we agreed with the Captain Commander to sail true ENE in order to strike the E by N course, as planned.”


{p. 75}

June 30, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14½SSWNE/ETopsail wind, chilly, thick fog; occasionally the sun breaks through; carrying reefed topsails; foresail and mainsail are clewed up.
24½
34½
44
54
64½
74½NE½ESky overcast, wind as before.
84¾Took two reefs in topsails.
95Fog, wet.
105½Reef-topsail wind, cold; sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
115½
125¼Sounded again with the same result.
14½SWTopsail wind, chilly, wet, fog.
24¼Heaved the lead a third time, no bottom.
34½
44¾Let out all the reefs in the topsails.
54NE/E
63¼Wet, fog.
73½
83¾
93Topgallantsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
103
113NE½EHeavy fog, clear with passing clouds.
123¼Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail clewed up.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningENE0°02′N102N 39.3′E 94.2138′47° 36′284¾E/S4°58′S28° 32′

{p. 76}

July 1, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾SW/WNE½ETopgallantsail wind, wet, fog, occasional sunshine; carrying topsails, foresail; mainsail is clewed up.
23¼
33½It was decided by the officers that the crew should have for dinner watery mush and in the evening thick mush, and because of the scarcity of water each man was to have a limited amount of it. Ensign Lagunov was commanded to see that the orders were obeyed.
43
52¾
62¼
71½NE/E
82¾
94Rain.
104½Set trysail.
114¼No bottom at 90 fathoms.
124
14NE½ETopsail wind, fog, heavy rain, high sea.
24
34¼Heaved lead, no bottom.
44½Hoisted mainsail.
55½NE/E
65Reef-topsail wind.
74
83½Clewed up trysail.
94¼Did the same to mainsail.
104¼NE½EWind and weather as before, light rain.
114¼Sighted a piece of driftwood about two fathoms in length, and this leads us to believe that the shore is near.
123½Sounded with two lead lines in 180 fathoms but did not touch bottom.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningENE0°09′N90.3N 34.8′E 83.4125′48° 11′299¾E/S2°24′S30° 37′

{p. 77}

July 2, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13SNE/ETopgallantsail wind, rain; carrying topsails, foresail, and trysail.
23
32¼
43
54Set jib and topmast-staysail, hoisted mainsail.
63½
72¾NE½ETopgallantsail wind, foggy, damp.
82Took reef in topsails, lowered staysails and jib.
91
101¾Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
111
121½Sounded again, no bottom.
1¾NE/ELittle wind, SW swell, fog, and wet.
2¾
3½Clewed and brailed up the foresail; did the same to mainsail; let out 180 fathoms of line, no bottom.
4½
5calmCalm; lowered topsails on the caps.
6½NENE1Light wind; hoisted topsails and let out the reefs in them, set jib and topmast-staysails.
71½1
82¼1
94N/EE/N1Topsail wind, drizzly.
1031Took two reefs in fore-topsail and one in main-topsail.
1141Lowered jib, took another reef in main-topsail.
1231Wind and weather as before.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/N1°36′E48N 7.8′E 46.970′48° 19′309½E/S1°35′S31° 47′

{p. 78}

July 3, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½N/EENE½E1½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
23¼1½Took third reef in main-topsail, furled fore-topsail and main-topmast-staysail.
33¼1½
431½
53¼NENE1½Wind increased.
63¼1½
72¼N/WNE/E½E1½Heavy sea from N.
82¼N/W2
91¼2½Furled main-topsail.
101¼2½
111¼2½
121¼2
11¼NE/E2Hoisted main-topsail and put three reefs in it, hoisted main-topmast-staysail.
21¼2
31¾2Hoisted fore-topsail and let out a reef in it, let out two reefs in main-topsail.
42½1½
521½
61¾1½Topgallantsail wind, sky overcast.
721½
82¼NNWNE½E1½Let out a reef in the topsails.
92¾NE1½Northerly swell.
101¾1½
112½NWNNE½E1½Topsail wind, cloudy.
122½NW/NNE/N1½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/S1°37′S52.3S 1.4′E 5276′48° 18′321¾E/S1°16′S33° 03′

{p. 79}

July 4, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾NW/NNE1Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
231
32½1Northerly swell.
42¼1
521
62¼1
72¼NE½N1Took reef in the topsails.
81¾NE1
91½1Occasional rain.
101¼1
111¾1Heavy fog.
122½
11NE½ELight wind, cloudy.
21¼1½
31½1½
41½1½
51¼
61E/N2Wind and weather as before, clear with passing clouds.
7½2
8½2
92SE3Clewed up lower sails, hauled down staysails and topsails.
1023Northerly swell.
1123
1223Cloudy and sunshiny. Took observation: zenith distance 26° 26′, declination of the sun 21° 38′ N, latitude 48° 04′, variation of the compass 1½ rhumb, because the difference in latitude by dead reckoning and observation is 21′ N.[22]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Observation (Yushin)ESE2°30′S34S 14′E 3045′48° 04′330¾E/S1°25′S33° 48′
By Observation (Khitrov)SE/E1°10′S36S 21′E 3045′47° 54′322¾E/S1°49′S33° 57′

As indicated in the 24-hour summary, Khitrov’s journal gives latitude 47° 54′. This value has been used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 80}

July 5, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1¼No windSE3Cloudy and sunshiny, northerly swell.
2¼3Leeway until 8 o’clock was at the rate of ¼ knot per hour.
3¼3
4¼3
5¼3
6¼3
7¼3
8¼SE/ENELight wind, sky overcast.
9½Hoisted topsails, staysails, and jib.
101Hoisted foresail and trysail.
111½
122NE/ETopgallantsail wind; set mainsail.
12¾NE½E
22½
31¾SSELight wind; lowered staysails and jib.
41
51½SE/EHoisted staysails and jib.
62
71½
81¾Topgallantsail wind.
91¾Cloudy.
102
111¾Carrying all sails except spritsail.[23]
122¼

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningENE3°08′E27N 9′E 25.638′48° 13′334¼E/S0°51′S34° 26′

Khitrov’s journal: “Filled 39 barrels with salt water for ballast.”


{p. 81}

July 6, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13SE/ENE½ETopgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails except spritsail.
23½
33½
43¼Let out the spritsail.
53¼Unbent the fore-topsail and bent on the one we had before and took three reefs in it.
63¼
73¼SE/E
83Furled the spritsail.
92½
102¼
112¼
122¼Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
12½
22½
34Topsail wind, weather as before.
42¾
52¾Topgallantsail wind.
62½
75Topsail wind, chilly, cloudy.
83½Clear with passing clouds.
93
103¼ESENE½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
113½
122½½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningENE1°13′N72N 29′E 6699′48° 42′347¼E/S0°48′E36° 05′

{p. 82}

July 7, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾ESENE½Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
23¼NE½E½
33½
42¾½
53½Topsail wind at times.
63½Weather as before.
72¾½
83½
92¾E/SNE/N½Took reef in the topsails.
103½Wind freshening; sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
112½½
123¼½
13½ESENE½N½
23½Let out reefs in topsail.
32¼E/SNE/N1
42ENNE1Topgallantsail wind.
511Light wind.
62¼E/SNE/N1
73ENNE1Topsail wind.
83¼1Let out 4 inches in the mainstay because we notice that when it was tight the vessel did not have a free movement.
931
1031¼
113½1¼Took reef in topsails.
123½1¼Topsail wind, cloudy and rainy.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE3°48′N67N 50.7′E 44.468′49° 33′353E/S3°04′E37° 13′

{p. 83}

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE

July 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¾ENNE1Topsail wind, cloudy and foggy, carrying reefed topsails, staysails, jib, mainsail, and trysail.
24¼1
341
44½1Reef-topsail wind.
541Took two reefs in topsails.
62¾1½Lowered jib.
731½
831½
92½2½Took three reefs in main-topsail.
102¼2½Furled main-topsail.
112¼2½
122¼2½Topsail wind.
123Foggy and wet.
21¾3
32½E/NN/E1½Hoisted fore-topsail with two reefs in it, let out three reefs in main-topsail.
43¼1½
52¾1½Sighted a good-sized piece of driftwood.
62¾1½
731½Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
82¾1½
93ENEN1½
102¾1¼Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
112¾1¼
122¾N½E1¼Topsail wind, drizzly, SE swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/E5°12′E68.8N 66′E 19.430.4′50° 39′351½E6°31′S37° 43′

{p. 84}

July 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½ENEN½W2Topsail wind, cloudy, wet; carrying reef-topsails and staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
22¾2
32½2
41¾NE/EN/W2Topgallantsail wind.
522Weather as before.
62N/W½W2
71NENNW2Little wind.
8½No wind2Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
9¼Lowered staysails, clewed up mainsail and trysail.
10¼From 9 to 12 o’clock we drifted about ¾ of a knot to NNW.
11¼
12½SSWNELight wind, drizzly.
11Cloudy, stars out, topgallantsail wind.
21¼SWFog, wet.
31½
42¼
51Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
61¼
71½Heavy fog, clear with passing clouds.
82
92½SW/STopsail wind, weather as before.
103
112½
122½Clear with passing clouds, sun shining. Took an observation: zenith distance 30° 34′, declination of sun 20° 46′, latitude 51° 20′.[24]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationNNE2°02′N44N 41′E 15.324.3′51° 20′351¾E3°50′S38° 07′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude 51° 27′.


{p. 85}

July 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾S/WNETopsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny, carrying all sails except spritsail and trysail.
23
32¾At times thick fog.
42½Thick, wet fog.
52
61½
73Cloudy, fog lifting.
83
93¾Topsail wind.
103½Stars out.
113¼Heaved lead, no bottom at 90 fathoms.
122½Lowered staysails.
12¾SW
21¼Topgallantsail wind.
31
4¾
51SE/S
61½
72¼Let out three reefs in the fore-topsail.
82½Hoisted staysail and jib.
92¼
102½SE/ECloudy and sunshiny.
112¾ESE
123¼Thick, wet fog.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E½E57¼N 27′E 50.581′51° 47′362¼E2°39′S39° 28′

{p. 86}

July 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14SE/ENEReef-topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny.
25
34Heavy fog on horizon.
43
52¾
63¼Sighted a dead whale afloat, and on it were many gulls.
74
84½Lowered main-staysail.
93¾
103½Topgallantsail wind.
114
124½Topsail wind.
15¼Carrying all sails except mainsail and spritsail.
24Hoisted main-staysail.
34¾Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, heavy fog, rain.
44¾Lowered main-staysail and jib, took two reefs in topsails; heaved lead, no bottom.
53½
63½SSELet out two reefs in topsails.
73½SLet out three reefs in main-topsail.
83¾Topsail wind, raw, damp.
94S/W
104
114Carrying topsails, foresail, and mainsail.
123¾SW/SClewed up mainsail, foresail, and trysail.[25]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E5°37′E95N 44.8′E 83.8137′52° 32′378E0°49′S41° 45′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52° 40′.


{p. 87}

July 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14½SWNEReef-topsail wind, cloudy.
24½
34½
45Passed much driftwood.
55
65Wind freshening; took two reefs in topsails.
74¾
84½
94½Took three reefs in main-topsail.
103¾
113¾
123½SW/SClewed up foresail.
11Furled foresail.
22SE½E6
34½NEAt 3:30 we clewed up trysail.
45Set main and fore-topsails with reefs in them.
54½Rain, reef-topsail wind, chilly.
65
74¾Let out a reef in main-topsail.
85Let out a reef in foresail.
95Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
105½Undersail wind.
116Set fore-topsail reefed.
123Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, and sunshiny.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E5°56′E104N 48.7′E 92.3154′53° 21′394¼E0°58′N44° 13′

{p. 88}

July 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15W/SNEStrong undersail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; took second and third reef in main-topsail.
25
35W
45Sighted a piece of driftwood three fathoms long.
54¾WNW
64¾Heavy sea running.
74½
84¾Sunshine. Took the amplitude of setting sun W24°N; latitude 53° 39′; true bearing 35° 38′, variation of compass 11° 38′ E, or one rhumb.
94½W
104½Sky clear, moon and stars shining.
113¾Furled main-topsail.
123Furled foresail because of darkness.
1½W/SN/W½W6½Hove to, let out trysail.
2½Sounded, no bottom.
33Got under way, set foresail and main-topsail and let out two reefs, clewed up trysail.
44½Set mainsail and fore-topsail.
54½
64½Undersail wind, wet.
74½Let out reef in mainsail, clewed it up and brailed it.
84½Sunshine.
95N/WReef-undersail wind.
106Clear with passing clouds; set mainsail.
114½
124¾Wind going down.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E101¼N 56′E 84142′54° 17′415E2°52′N46° 41′

{p. 89}

July 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼WSWNEUndersail wind, drizzly, sunshiny; carrying topsails reefed, foresail, and mainsail.
24½
34¾
44½The Captain Commander, Lieutenant Waxel, Master Khitrov, and Navigator Eselberg had a consultation and decided to steer N by E to the land sighted.[26]
55¼N/E
65Took two reefs in topsails.
75¼Reef-undersail wind.
85½
95½
105¾
115¼
125¾
14½WFurled topsails, lowered staysails on the yards because it was dangerous to navigate at night and in the fog.
24
35½Hoisted topsails with three reefs in each, hoisted staysails and trysail.
45¾
56½W/S
66Let out a reef in main-topsail, clewed up trysail.
75½Sun shining; let out a reef in fore-topsail, hoisted jib, let out two reefs in main-topsail.
85
94½
104½
114½Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
124½Reef-topsail wind, clear. Took observation: zenith distance 36° 11′, declination 19° 50′, latitude 56° 01′; but no correction was made [in latitude by dead reckoning]. Variation of the compass 1¼ rhumb E.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNE4°50′E119N 106′E 54.896′56° 03′423½E6°20′N48° 17′

Khitrov does not mention sighting land on this day. Steller says that he saw land on the 15th, but the officers paid no attention to him. It is possible that without Steller’s being told about it orders were given to steer in the direction he indicated.


{p. 90}

July 14, 1741.

 

Decision to Change Course[27]

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and Navigator Andreyan Eselberg had a meeting to discuss the decision reached on May 4, 1741, in the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. At that time and place it had been agreed after leaving the said harbor to sail SE by E, true, to latitude 46° N, unless land was found before; but if no land was sighted to sail from that parallel E by N steadily until land was discovered. If land should be found either on a SE by E or E by N course we were to coast alongside of it for as long a time as possible so that we might return to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul by the end of September. After we left the said harbor we kept the SE by E course not only to 46° but even to 45° without seeing any land. We then sailed E by N close to 9° of latitude and 35° of longitude, but on this course we equally failed to discover land. On that account we concluded to change our course one point and keep closer to N, that is to go ENE, which course we are now holding as far as the wind permits. By dead reckoning, we find ourselves at present in latitude 54° 34′ N, and longitude from Vaua near 48°, a distance of more than 400 German miles. We had on board 102 barrels of water of different sizes, and by today, July 14, half of it has been used up by the crew. What is left, even if the allowance were reduced, would not last longer than August 25 or at the most until September, for we do not know whether the barrels of water in the lower hold are full or whether some of the water has leaked out. Taking these points into consideration we have decided to sail northward by true compass on the rhumb ENE so that we might in good time examine those northern regions and see whether there is not some land, as we suppose there is, judging by various reports. If we were to continue on easterly courses we should be sailing farther and farther from Kamchatka and, not being able to replenish our supply of water, we should suffer great hardships and, may God preserve us, extreme misfortune. But in going northerly we stand a better chance of finding water for our needs.

Bering

Lieutenant Waxel

Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov

Navigator Andreyan Eselberg


From Khitrov’s journal. “The reasons for our action will be found in the exact copy of the minutes given on the next page.” (Entry under July 14, 4 p.m.)


{p. 91}

July 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15½W/SN/ETopsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; let out last reefs in topsails, hoisted trysail.
25
34¾W
44¾
53NWNE/E¾ETopgallantsail wind, weather as before.
63
72NNE/E½E½Took a reef in topsails; sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
81½ENE½
91½½
101¾E/NLight wind.
111
12¼No windNE/NLowered topsails on caps, took in all the other sails because of the calm.
1¼
2¼Sea running from SW. In 5 hours we drifted 1¼ knots towards NE by N.
3¼
4¼Amplitude of rising sun 59° 00′ N; latitude 56° 30′: true bearing 37° 30′; variation of compass 21° 30′, or 1½ rhumb, as we had a small sea.
5¾E/SN/ELittle wind, cloudy, sunshiny; hoisted topsails.
61½Let out three reefs in topsails, set mainsail, hoisted jib and staysails.
73½
84Topsail wind, weather as before.
94N½E
104N¾E
114N/ESky clear, sun shining.
124¾Overcast. Zenith distance 37° 08′, declination of the sun 19° 36′, latitude 56° 44′.[28]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationNE/N6°12′E53.5N 41′E 32.862′56° 44′429E/N3°30′E49° 19′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 56° 51′.


{p. 92}

July 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15EN½ETopsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying all sails except main-staysail.
24¾
34½
44¾Furled spritsail.
55¼
65¼Reef-topsail wind.
75¾Cloudy.
84½Took two reefs in topsails.
94¼
104¼E/N½Strong reef-topsail wind.
114½½Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
124½
13ENEN1
22¾NE/EN½W1Topsail wind.
33N/W1
43¼N½W1Let out two reefs in topsails.
53½N1
63½N1
73N¼W1
84N¼W1Reef-topsail wind.
93½N/W1½Cloudy, sunshiny.
103½1½Took two reefs in topsails.
113¼1½
122¾1½Drizzly, sunshiny. Took observation: zenith distance 38° 49′, declination of the sun 19° 23′, latitude 58° 12′. No correction made.[29]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationN/E0°18′N91.6N 90′E 17.432.4′58° 14′429¾E/N0°31′E49° 51′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 58° 17′.


{p. 93}

DISCOVERY OF LAND

July 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13NENNW1At 12:30 we sighted high snow-covered mountains and among them a high volcano N by W.[30] Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, and mainsail; sounded in 190 fathoms, no bottom.
24¼NE/NNW/N1
331Let out three reefs in topsails.
42½N/ENW/W1Topgallantsail wind.
521Cloudy.
61¼NWNW1Light wind.
71½N/WW/N18 o’clock took amplitude of sun W15°00′N, true bearing 39° 30′, variation of compass 24° 30′, or 2 rhumbs E. A point of the sighted shore which we named St. Aphinogena[31] bore N by E about 10 German miles; the mountains on it are lower than those we had sighted before. The volcano bears now N about 18 miles, and 5 miles inshore. At this same hour of 8 we sighted another point of the same shore in NW, about 12 miles from us, and this point we called St. Mariny.[32] From this point inshore there is a high elevation bearing NNW½W.
82NNWW1
91NWNNE½E1
1011Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
11¾NNE1Sounded again, no bottom. Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
12½NNWNE1Sounded, no bottom.
1¼No windLowered topsails on caps, lowered staysails because there is no wind.
2¼
3¼Easterly swell, forcing us NE at the rate of 1½ knots in six hours.
4¼
5¼
6¼
71¾E/SNNE½E1Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds; set topsails and mainsail, hoisted topmast-staysail and jib.
81¾ENNE1St. Mariny bears NW by W, about 10 German miles.
921
104ESEN/E
113½NTopsail wind; let out reefs in topsails.
122Clear with passing clouds, air thick, impossible to get a bearing because the shore is hidden by heavy clouds. In marking the above-mentioned points on the chart we took into consideration the variation of the compass as 1¾ rhumb easterly.[33]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/W0°08′N30N 29′W 5.710.9′58° 43′426¾E/N0°33′N49° 40′

Mt. St. Elias. (Identifications in this and the next chapter by E. P. B.)

The bluffs just west of the entrance of Yakutat Bay.

By the calendar St. Aphinogena day is July 16, and St. Mariny day is July 17. St. Mariny Point is Cape Suckling of today.

Khitrov’s journal: “Took observation of setting sun, W15°N, latitude 58° 30′; true bearing 39° 30′; variation of compass 24° 30′.”


{p. 94}

July 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1½N/ENW/W½W2Light wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, foresail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
2½2
31½1Heavy clouds, rain.
41½1
51¼1Topgallantsail wind.
61½1
7¾NE/NNW½W1Light wind, weather as before.
81½1Took two reefs in topsails, set mainsail.
92N/ENW/W½W1
101¼NWNW1Rain.
1111
121¼1Sounded in 190 fathoms, no bottom. Lost sight of land owing to fog and rain.
1½1
2½1Light and variable winds.
31NNEE1
41½NW1Tacked to starboard.
51¾1Let out all reefs in topsails.
61½1Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, rainy.
71½1Thick fog.
82¾N/ENW/W½
92¼½
102½NWNW½Passed a piece of driftwood 3½ fathoms long which we identified as pine.
111¾½
123¼N/ENW½W½Topsail wind, fog, rain. Though the land is not far away, yet because of the heavy fog and rain we could not see it.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW0°45N32.8N 23.5′W 22.943′59° 06′419¾E/N1°35′N48° 47′

{p. 95}

July 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾NNENW1Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
21¼NE/NNW/N7Took two reefs in topsails.
31SW/SNFog.
43¾Let out reef in topsails, hauled down staysails, clewed up mainsail and trysail.
54
63½NW/NSW/STacked to port, hoisted jib and staysail.
73½Fog; sounded in 190 fathoms, no bottom.
83½SESSW½W½Sighted a small projection of land SW by W;[34] near it another point, seemingly on the mainland, SW by W½W,[35] a second point W; a third point NW by W½W, about 3 or 4 German miles from us.
92¾E/SS/E½ETook two reefs in topsails, hauled down jib and staysails.
102¼2
1122Sounded and got 55 fathoms, bottom soft bluish clay.
122NE/N1½Tacked to starboard.
13½NNE½E1Set mainsail, let out a reef in topsails, hauled up jib and staysails.
22½1
32SE½E1
42¾S/ETacked to port, let out two reefs in topsails; depth 60 fathoms. The projection of land is now W½S, and the point of land near it is W about 6 German miles.
53SW/S
63½Topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny.
73ESWLet out three reefs in main-topsail, clewed up mainsail.
83¾WSW
93½WNWRainy and sunshiny. The projection bears N by W½W about 2½ German miles.
104¾NE/ENW/WTook three reefs in main-topsail and two in fore-topsail; depth 60 fathoms.
114
123¼Reef-topsail wind. Projection is now E½S; the point near it is E and is named by the Captain Commander Bering Cape St. Elias; of the two other points, one bears N by E½E and the other NE by N. They are about 7 German miles, or a little farther.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW2°20′N28N 11.8′W 25.548′59° 18′417¼E/N2°12′N48° 09′

Pinnacle Rock off Cape St. Elias.

Cape St. Elias.


{p. 96}

LANDING ON KAYAK ISLAND

July 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13ENEN½Topsail wind, cloudy, rainy.
22¾SE½E1
32¼1Let out third reef in main-topsail and second in fore-topsail.
43N½W½
54½Reef-topsail wind.
63½½Cloudy.
73½E/NSE/S½
84½NE/ESE/E½Took second reef in fore-topsail and second and third in main-topsail.
92N/W½W
102NENNW½W½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
113½NE/NE/S1Hauled up topmast-staysail.
121½NW/N½
11½NENNW½Light wind, cloudy.
21½ESE½
32½Let out two reefs in topsails.
41¾½
52NE/NE/SLowered the longboat and the yawl into the water.
61½At anchorOn our track we got 30, 26, 22 fathoms, bottom soft bluish clay. Came near the shore and dropped small bower anchor in 22 fathoms about ¼ mile from land, payed out ¾ of a cable. Khitrov, with the assistant navigator and several members of the crew, was sent ashore. The point of land near us bears S½W, ½ mile, second point NNE½E 1 mile; the island in the middle of the bay bears N ¾ of a mile.[36]
7
8Khitrov and I were sent to the island bearing N ¾ of a mile, to survey the channel; for from where we were it seemed as if there was a bay which would offer safe shelter in case of need.
9During the day we came about every two or three hours in order to get closer to shore.
10E/NSent the yawl ashore for water.
11The yawl returned with water, and the crew reported having come across a fireplace, human tracks, and a fox on the run. Adjunct Steller brought various grasses.
12Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds. Took observation: zenith distance 41° 01′, declination of the sun 18° 26′, latitude 59° 27′, which we corrected on the 22nd.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationNE/E16N 8.9′E 13.326′59° 27′416¼E/N2°24′N48° 35′

Khitrov’s journal: “At six o’clock we came within ½ mile of the island and dropped the small bower anchor in 22 fathoms of water. . . We called that island St. Elias. . . The Captain Commander sent me in the longboat to examine the strait and to find an anchorage among the islands seen by us in the N.” July 20 is St. Elias day. “The island in the middle of the bay [which] bears N ¾ of a mile” is Wingham Island.


{p. 97}

July 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1E/NTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
2
3
4The men who returned on the small yawl announced the finding of an underground hut, something like a cellar, but no people. In this hut they discovered dried fish, bows, and arrows. The Captain Commander ordered the boatswain to take to that hut a number of government things: 16½ arshins[37]of green material, 2 knives, Chinese tobacco, and pipes.[38]
5
6
7
8
9Khitrov returned and reported that he sounded on the way over to the island and got 20, 18, 15, 10, 8 fathoms; in the very narrowest place 3, 3½, and 4 fathoms; and from 4 to 4½ fathoms near the island; bottom sandy and in spots clayey. The island is sheltered from many winds. On the island was discovered a summer hut made of boards, and out of it was taken a wooden basket, a shovel, and a small copper-stained stone.[39] This island extends NW-SE. It measures 1 mile in length and ½ mile across.
10
11Clear with passing clouds.
12Stars out.
1
2Topgallantsail wind.
3Cloudy.
4Took on board 35 barrels fresh water, have 70 barrels.
5N/E
6Sunshine.
71½W½NWeighed anchor, set topsails and foresail, set jib and topmast-staysails.
83
93¼Took longboat and yawl aboard.
102Hauled down staysails and jib.
112½ENEWSW
123½E/NTopsail wind, clear with pasting clouds. Cape St. Elias bears SE½E, about 4 miles; of the two points sighted one, which I call A[40] bears WNW½W; and the second, which is marked B,[41] bears WSW. Between them is an island and near them a bay.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW4°54′W15N 4.6′W 14.528′59° 31′412½E/N2°40′N48° 07′

{p. 98}


An arshin is equal to 38 inches.

In 1790, when the Billings expedition visited this island one of the old natives said that “he remembered that when he was a boy a ship had been close into the bay on the west side of the island and had sent a boat on shore; but on its approaching land the natives all ran away. When the ship sailed, they returned to their hut and found in their subterraneous storeroom some glass beads, leaves (tobacco), an iron kettle, and something else” (Martin Sauer: An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the Northern Parts of Russia . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings, London, 1802, p. 194.)

Bering’s coming must have made quite a stir among the natives of Alaska. The inhabitants of one of the islands in Prince William Sound told Sarychev (one of Billings’ officers) that a ship came to Kayak Island and that the people came ashore and left some knives (Sarychev: Account of a Voyage of Discovery, London, 1807, Vol. 2, p. 25).

Khitrov’s journal: “I came aboard from shore in the longboat and reported to the Captain Commander that the channel to the island has a depth of 3, 3½, and 4 fathoms, that the bottom is sandy and in places slimy, and that it is sheltered from many winds. I reported also that I found on that island a hut made of hewn boards, the floor of the hut being also of boards. In place of an oven it had a kind of fireplace. From this hut I brought along to show Captain Commander Bering a wooden basket, a shovel, a small stone which had copper stains on it, and one common round stone with a hole. All of these things I gave to the Captain Commander. During the whole time that we remained at anchor we took in 35 barrels of water. At seven in the morning we weighed anchor, set the topsails, foresail, mainsail, jib, and staysails, took on board the small and large boats, and sailed away . . . That which happened to me on that island is noted down in the report which I made on the island of St. Elias.”

A point on the mainland.

Cape Hinchinbrook.


{p. 99}

July 21, 1741.

 

Report on St. Elias [Kayak] Island[42]

The island of St. Elias lies NE and SW. It is about 3½ miles from the mainland to the bay. It is about 3¼ German miles long and not more than 3½ versts across. According to my calculation it is in latitude 59° 39′ [or 49′—not clear] and 48° 42′ of longitude from Vaua on the course E by N¼N, distant 416½ miles from the northerly point. This island stands out alone in the sea like a stone column; extending from it a submerged reef of rocks may be seen in low water. From its northerly point about ¼ of a mile there lie, in the bay between the island and the mainland, other islands which offer shelter from winds. To one of these islands the Captain Commander sent me with several men in the longboat to examine the strait and to find a good anchorage. In going there between N and E, the depth of the channel was 25, 22, 18, 10, 7, 6, 4, and 3½ fathoms where it is possible to anchor; and in going to it one should keep in the middle between St. Elias and the island and watch out for the projecting cape of the island, because running out from the middle of the island of St. Elias and this island are submerged reefs. On this island there are many trees, namely, fir, larch, cedar, and other kinds, but little of it is good for shipbuilding because we had occasion to look for a piece of timber for the topsail yards but did not find it. We came across (on the island) a hut which was made of hewn boards; the floor was also made of these boards. In place of an oven there was in one corner of the hut a fireplace. Near the hut was found a wooden basket in which were shell fish, which showed that the inhabitants here used them for food. We did not see any people, but it was quite evident that they had been here shortly before our arrival. I brought from this island, in order to show our Captain Commander, one basket, a shovel, a small stone with copper stains on it. It was not possible to tell whether there was or was not suitable timber for shipbuilding on the mainland, which land is two miles from this island. The mainland has high snow-covered mountains and volcanoes, and, from this as well as from the fact that the material for the hut and floor was of good wide boards, we may assume that there may be good timber there.

On St. Elias Island there is also plenty of wood. On that island there was discovered an earthen hut containing dried fish which were cured this summer. On the beach were seen human tracks in the sand, a fireplace, and running foxes. From all this it may be reasoned that the natives, on seeing us, ran away and hid or that they have their habitations on the mainland and come to the island in summer to catch fish and other sea animals. The Captain Commander decided to send to that hut, in order to please the people, several of the things which we had to give as presents: namely, 16½ arshins of green material, 2 iron knives, 20 Chinese strings of beads, 2 iron pipes for smoking Chinese tobacco, called “shar.” All these things were left there. The attached sketch map gives the position of the bay and the islands and their relation to the mainland.


From Khitrov’s journal. Khitrov’s sketch map, mentioned in the last sentence of this report, was published by Sokolov in Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851, and reproduced by Lauridsen in his “Vitus Bering,” Chicago, 1889. In style of execution it resembles his hitherto unpublished map of the Shumagin Islands, our Fig. 11.


{p. 100}

SKIRTING THE ALASKAN COAST

July 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13E/NWSWTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails and foresail.
22¾SW/W½W
33¼Reef-topsail wind.
44
54
64SW/WPoint A[43] bears N½E, about 4 miles, point B[44] bears W about 4½ miles.
73½Took a reef in topsails.
83¾ENESW½SSighted a point of land opposite us SW½S[45] about 6 German miles; we see also a small bay[46] the middle of which is W½N about 5 German miles.[47]
94½Took second reef in topsails.
103½
113½Took third reef in topsails and furled.
122SE2½Set trysail and main-staysail.
11½NE/ESE/E2½Undersail wind, drizzly.
222½Sounded and got 40 fathoms, bottom sandy and rocky.
32½NEESE2½
422½Stormy, squally, rainy. The strait which we had seen at 8 o’clock is now NW by W; one of the points of the bay NW½W, and the other NW by W½W, about 6 German miles or less.[48]
51½NE/ESE/E3Took a reef in trysail and clewed it up.
61¾3
72ENESE3
823Set the trysail.
91¾SE½S2½Strong undersail wind, drizzly, rainy.
101¾2½Wind going down.
111¾2½
121¾2½Sounded in 45 fathoms, bottom sand and small rocks.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW0°44′S49.5S 34.6′W 35.568′58° 57′403E/N1°44′N46° 59′

Some point on the mainland. See log of July 21, last hour.

Cape Hinchinbrook. See log of July 21, last hour.

SE point of Montague Island.

The strait between Cape Hinchinbrook and Montague Island.

Khitrov’s journal: “Point E [easterly point] bears SW½S, 6½ [miles]; the strait W½N.”

Khitrov’s journal: “The strait bears NW/W, Point D NW½W, 6 miles.”


{p. 101}

July 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾ENESE½S2½Undersail wind, drizzly; set topsail reefs; depth 50 and 60 fathoms, sandy bottom.
222½
32E/NSE/S2½
422½
51¾2½Topsail wind, heavy swell.
61½2½
71¾ES/E½E2½
822½Let out reef in trysail.
922½Hauled up staysails.
102¼2½
112½2½Hauled down staysails, furled fore-topsail.
122¼2½
12½2½
232½Set the fore-topsail reefed, hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
32E/NSSE½E2Topsail wind.
422Drizzly, rainy.
52¼2
62¼2Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.
72½2
82½2
92½2Reef-topsail wind.
102¾2Drizzly, rainy.
113¼2Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
1232

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSW0°35′S54.6S 50.7′W 20.439′58° 06′400E/N0°02′N46° 20′

{p. 102}

July 24, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12ESSE2½Reef-topsail wind, sky overcast, rain; carrying the fore and main-topsail reefed, trysail, and fore-topmast-staysail.
222½
322½
41½2½Light wind, easterly swell.
51½2½
61½2½
72½E/SS/E2½
81¾2½
93ES/E½E2Strong wind and rain.
103E/NSSE½E2
113NE/ESE½E2
1232
122Furled topsails.
21¼SE3
31¼3
41½3Heaved the lead all night without finding bottom.
51½3Topsail wind, swell.
623
72¼E/NSE/S3
81¾3Reef-topsail wind.
91½ENESSE½E3Gloomy.
101½3Topsail wind.
111½3Easterly swell.
121½3Furled foresail and hove to under the main-staysail and trysail on account of the drizzly weather and wind. It had been our purpose to sail between N and W to observe more carefully the coast, but the fog prevented us from doing so. The land we saw [on the 22nd?] bears by true compass N by E, distant 27 German miles.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSW3°01′S45S 42.3′W 1528′57° 24′397¾E/N1°29′E45° 59′

{p. 103}

July 25, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¼ENESE/S¼E5Undersail wind, drizzly. We are hove to under main-staysail and trysail; set the mainsail reefed.
21¼5
31¼5
41¼5Coming up to SE½E, falling off to SSE.
51¼5
61¼5
71¼5
81¼5
915Wind going down, weather as before.
1015
1115
1215At times the stars are out.
115
2¾5From noon until 4 a.m. the course was held between coming up to and falling off to.
3¾5
4½E5Captain Commander had a consultation with his officers, and it was agreed, while the misty weather prevailed, to sail SW by compass, which would take us towards Kamchatka; but when the weather cleared and the wind turned fair to sail N and W in order to observe the American coast.[49]
52¼SWFurled mainsail, took two reefs in main-topsail and hauled up, set the foresail and let out a reef in it, hoisted the yards in place, clewed up trysail.
62½
72¾SEWSWSet fore-topsail with three reefs.
83½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
95½SE/SSWGloomy; set the main-staysail.
105Strong reef-topsail wind; furled fore-topsail.
111½SSE1½Took three reefs in main-topsail, furled reefed foresail.
1221½Undersail wind, drizzly, wet.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W5°31W39.9S 18.9′W 35.265′57° 01′389½E/N1°59′E44° 47′

Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way again. With the Captain Commander it was agreed while this gloomy weather lasted to hold the course SW in order to keep off the land about which we knew nothing, but in clear weather to hold a W by N course in order to see the mainland.”


{p. 104}

July 26, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼SE/SSW2Undersail wind, cloudy, wet.
22¼2Carrying main-staysail, trysail, and the foresail reefed.
322
41½2½Light wind, heavy SE swell.
51½2½
61¼2½
71¼2½
81½SE2½Drizzly, wet.
91¾2½Undersail wind, weather as before.
101¾2½
111¼2½Reef-topsail wind.
121¾2½
11½ESSE2Depth 40 fathoms, pebbly bottom. Hauled up topsails and let out the reefs, set mainsail, let out a reef in foresail, went on the starboard tack; depth 35 fathoms.
21¾2
32NNE2
42½SSE2Tacked to port; depth 40 fathoms; took second reef in topsails; depth 40, 45, 50 fathoms, bottom gravelly; took third reef in topsails. Sighted high land NE by N[50] about 4 miles or more, but soon lost sight of it owing to the mist.
52½E/NSE/S1½
63¾ENESE½S1½
74¾1½
85SE1½
94½SE/S1½Strong reef-topsail wind.
104¼1½
114ESSE1½Strong topsail wind.
123½1½Gloomy.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/S4°29′S41S 34′W 2453′56° 31′383½E/N3°07′E44° 12′

Black Point, the southern extremity of Sitkalidak Island. Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted land NE by N, about 8 miles away.”


{p. 105}

STANDING OFF SHORE

July 27, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13E/SS½E1½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, wet; let out a reef in topsails.
22¾SE/SS/W1½
33½SE/SSSW½W1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
42¾SW/S1½Set jib and fore-topmast-staysail.
53½1½
63½1½Sounded and got 70 and 60 fathoms.
73½1½
83½1½Topsail wind, cloudy.
93¾1½Took two reefs in topsails.[51]
102½SESSW2Depth 40, 35, 40, 45 fathoms, gravelly bottom; hauled down staysail, took three reefs in topsails.
112¼2
122ESES2Heaved lead, no bottom.
12S½W2
23½2Hauled up fore-topsail; depth 40 fathoms; furled fore-topsail; undersail wind; lowered foretop-staysail, furled main-topsail.
33½SE/ES/W2
42¾ESES½W3
52½SESSW3
62¼3Set main-topsail; reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
72SE/SSW/S2½
82½2½Looked from crosstrees in all directions for land but saw none. In clear weather land might be seen about 5 or 10 German miles from us. The lead line is all we have to go on.
922½Sounded and got 50 fathoms, bottom of sand and small rocks; set fore-topsail.
103½2
113½2Let out two reefs in topsails.
1232Reef-topsail wind and a head swell, drizzly, rainy.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW5°05′W67S 20′W 63.8114.7′56° 11′370¾E/N33°07′E42° 17′

Khitrov’s journal: “Sounded, but no bottom. We are in danger of running on sand banks and therefore cannot keep close to land, hence have kept off a few points.”


{p. 106}

July 28, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½S/EE/S1½Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly; tacked to starboard.
22½1½Carrying reefed topsails, reefed foresail, trysail, and main-topmast-staysail.
32¾1½
43E½S1½
53½1½
63¼1½
73¼E/S1½Wind freshening, drizzly, wet.
83¼1½
93½1½Took three reefs in topsails, hauled down main-topmast-stay sail.
103½1½SE swell.
113½SESE½E1½
123¼S/EE/S1½Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
12¾1½
231½
33½1½Sounded again with the same result.
44½1½Tacked to port, let out a reef in main-topsail.
52¾SW/W1½
62¼1½Let out one reef in main-topsail and two in fore-topsail.
72¾1½
82¾1½Topsail wind; hauled up staysails.
93SW/W½W1½Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
103½SWSW1½
112½ESE½E1½Tacked to starboard, took two reefs in main-topsail; southerly swell.
122¾S/EE/S1½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 2RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningESE2°39′E38S 12.8′E 35.465′55° 58′380¼E6°57′N43° 23′

{p. 107}

July 29, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¼SESE½E1Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out two reefs in topsails.
23¾1
33½1S swell.
431Drizzly.
52¾1
62¾S/EE/S1
72½1Wind and weather as before, wet.
82¼1
921Took two reefs in topsails.
101¾1
111¾1Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
121¾1Sounded a second time, no bottom.
11¾E½S1Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
21¾1Set the jib.
31½1
41½1Topgallantsail wind, let out third reef in main-topsail.
51SE/SE/N1At 4:30 we came about on the port tack.
1SESSW
621
72½1Topsail wind, drizzly.
82½1Took a reef in main-topsail.
94SE/ES/W½W1Reef-topsail wind, weather the same.
104¼1Took another reef in fore-topsail, hauled down jib.
1151Took another reef in main-topsail.
125½1Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSE7°02′E34.5S 30′E 1730′55° 28′387½E5°42′N43° 53′

{p. 108}

July 30, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾E/SS/W½Strong reef-topsail wind, rain; hauled down staysails, took three reefs in fore-topsail, furled fore-topsail.
24½
35S½Undersail wind; took three reefs in main-topsail, furled main-topsail and foresail.
43½
51¼SSE5½Hove to under main-staysail and trysail on account of the gale. Coming up to SE by S, falling off to S by E.
61¼5½
71¼SE/ES/W3Strong reef-topsail wind; set foresail and mainsail.
81½S/W½W3
91½3Hauled up the main-topsail reefed and main-topmast-staysail.
102½2
113SESSW2Set the fore-topsail.
122¾SSW½W2
12SE/SSW/S2Topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
21¾2
322Heaved the lead all night, no bottom.
42½1½
52¼1½Let out a reef in topsails.
63SW½S1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
73½1½Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain.
83¾1½
92¾SW/S1½Took two reefs in topsails.
1031½
112½1½
123SW½S1½Tacked to starboard, let out a second reef in fore-topsail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W2°47′W58S 31′W 5090′54° 57′375¼E4°42′N42° 23′

{p. 109}

July 31, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½SESE1¼Topsail wind, clear.
231¼
33½1¼
43½1¼Wind as before, overcast.
531¼
631¼Chilly, damp.
72¾1¼
82¾1¼Took an observation: amplitude of setting sun W7°0′N, true bearing 27° 30′, variation of compass 20° 30′, which is accepted as 1¾ rhumb.
92½1½Reefed fore-topsail and trysail.
102½ESE½E1½Hauled down staysails.
112¾1½Stars out.
122½ESE1½
131½
22¾1½Topsail wind; set the staysails.
32½ESE½E1½
42¼ESE1½Drizzly.
52¼ESE½E1½
62S/E1½Let out a reef in topsails.
72½1½
82½1½At the end of the hour tacked to port.
91¾SWSW2Let out two reefs in main-topsail, set jib.
101¾2
112½S/WW/S2Clear with passing clouds; let out third reef in main-topsail.
122¾2Topsail wind. Took an observation: zenith distance 39° 23′, declination of the sun 15° 26′, latitude 54° 49′.[52]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationE/S0°02′S41S 8′E 40.370.5′54° 49′385½E4°16′N43° 33′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54° 46′.


{p. 110}

August 1, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13SEW¼NTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying all sails; the fore-topsail has one reef.
23
33Lowered two cannons with their carriages into the hold.
42
51½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
61¼
71¼Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
81¼Took two reefs in main-topsail.
91¼WHauled down jib and topmast-staysail.
10½Light wind, thick mist on the horizon.
11¼
12Calm, stars out.
1Clewed up trysail.
21ENEW¼NLight wind, cloudy.
31¼
41¾WNWTopgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails.
52¾NESet the trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
64
73NW/W½WTopsail wind: let out third reef in main-topsail, hauled up spritsail.
85Let out third reef in fore-topsail.
94¾Reef-topsail wind.
105Let out reefs in foresail and mainsail.
114¾Drizzly.
124¼Fog, damp.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/W7°29W54N 33′W 4375′55° 22′373¾E5°41′N42° 18′

{p. 111}

LANDFALL: CHIRIKOV ISLAND

August 2, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15¼NENW/W½WTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying all sails.
25
34¾
44½
55Furled spritsail.
64½Hauled down staysail and jib, took two reefs in topsails.
73¾ENE
81½Thick, wet fog; sounded and got 35 fathoms.
94½E/NSE/S¾Tacked to port; depth 30, 35, 28 fathoms, sandy bottom.
104ENESE¾
113¼E/NSE/S¾
122½¾Sounded and got 30, 28 fathoms.
11¾Light wind, fog, wet. Sighted land SE by E, but, owing to darkness and mist, it was difficult to determine whether it was an island or a part of the mainland. Tacked to starboard, furled the sails, and dropped the small bower anchor in 18 fathoms.[53] Tide was running from N to S.
22ENNE¾
3No windAt anchor
4
5
6
7
8Decided it was an island, extending from E to W. It was about ¾ of a German mile in size and 1 mile from us. The W point of the island bore S½E, the E point ESE; near it is a reef about ¾ mile long.[54]
9
10Heavy, wet fog.
11Clear with passing clouds.
12Warm.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/W4°56′W23N 11′W 2035′55° 33′368E6°12′N41° 43′

Northern end of Chirikov Island, so named by Vancouver on April 4, 1794, in honor of the commander of the St. Paul (George Vancouver: A Voyage of Discovery to the North Pacific Ocean . . ., 3 vols. and atlas, London, 1798; reference in Vol. 3. p. 87). For the names given by Bering and his officers, see footnote 56, below.

Khitrov’s journal: “8 o’clock in the morning. One point of the island bore S½E, 1½ miles, another point ESE, 2 miles. From the first-mentioned point there is a rocky reef to the N, 1 mile.”


{p. 112}

August 3, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1No windClear with passing fog.
2
3Weather as above, wet.
4
5SWLight wind, weather as before.
6No wind
7
81S/WNNETopgallantsail wind, cloudy. 8:30, weighed the anchor, set topsails, foresail, and got under way, having 18, 20 fathoms of water on our track, bottom sandy and shelly.
92
102
112N/EDepth 20, 24, 26 fathoms, bottom as above.
122
1½SNNELight wind, 25, 22 fathoms, bottom of small rocks. Topgallantsail wind, cloudy. Depth 20, 21, 19, 18; bottom as before, in places shells.[55]
22N/E
32
43SWNNW
53¼WNW1½Fog, wet; 17 fathoms of water.
63½1½20, 23, 25 fathoms of water, bottom of small rocks.
73¾WNW½W½The island where we stood, and which we named Archdeacon Stephens,[56] bears now, the center of it, S about 7 German miles. From the crosstrees we could see no other land because the air was not clear. 28 and 30 fathoms.
83½½
93WNW½Topsail wind, cloudy, foggy.
102½½35 and 40 fathoms, sandy bottom; carrying trysail, staysail, jib, mainsail; sounded, no bottom.
112½½
122¾½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/W6°06′W33.5N 32′W 1017.8′56° 05′364¼E/N3°43′E41° 25′

Khitrov’s journal: “The going out of the tide as well as the fog and rocky bottom made our situation critical. On that account we changed our course to NNW.”

Archdeacon Stephen day is August 2. This island, the modern Chirikov Island, would, according to Khitrov (see footnote 60, below), seem to have been named Tumannoi (Foggy) Island. Cf. also Waxel’s report, p. 272.


{p. 113}

LANDFALL: SEMIDI ISLANDS

August 4, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SWWNW½Light wind, fog.
22¼½Clear with passing fogs and clouds. Sighted a high volcano[57] in WNW½N, about 15 German miles away.
32½S/WW/S½Have all sails set except spritsail.
43¼½Topgallantsail wind.
52¾SWSW½W½Let out three reefs in topsails.
63½
72½WSW½
82¾S/WW/S½Went on the starboard tack.
91¾SE/E½Took reef in topsails.
102SE/E½EHauled down jib.
111½SESELight wind, stars out.
12CalmCalm, wet, fog.
12SE/SE/N½Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.
21½½
31¼½Topgallantsail wind.
41¾
52SESSW½Came about on the port tack, set jib, let out reefs in topsails.
62½ESES½
72½Heavy, wet fog.
84ES/ETopsail wind, clear with passing clouds. Sighted two points of the shore; one bore NNW about 8 miles, the other WSW½S about 9 miles; between them was an island W½N about 4½ miles from us. About noon we sighted five islands[58] not far from the above-mentioned island. These five islands bear SSW¾W about 5 miles; the most northerly bears WSW 4 miles, and we named it Theodosius Island.[59]
94¾
103¾S½ELight fog.
113½S/E½EEvery hour of the day we sounded but found no bottom.
122¼E/NSSE½EThe island Archdeacon Stephen bears E by S.[60]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSW6°11′W26.7S 23.4′W 12.822.4′55° 42′362E6°41′N41° 03′

Mt. Chiginagak.

Semidi Islands. Named the Eudoxia Islands according to Sokolov, Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851, p. 388.

Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted five islands; the southern one SSW¾W 5 miles, the northern WSW½W 5 miles.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Foggy Island where we stood at anchor bore E by S.”


{p. 114}

August 5, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾ESSE1Topsail wind, fog, wet, rain.
23½1
34¼1Took two reefs in topsails.
431Reef-topsail wind.
53½S/E½E1Fog, rain.
63½1
74E/SS/E1Strong reef-topsail wind.
84ESES1Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, and staysail.
93¾1
101¾SENE/E½E110:30, tacked to starboard.
113¼1
123½
12¾1Topsail wind.
22¾1Wet fog.
32¾SSW1At the end of the hour came about on port tack.
42½1
541From noon to this hour we sounded but found no bottom; let out a reef in main-topsail.
63SE/ES/W½W1Sounded and got 40 fathoms, bottom of gravel.
72¼SE/SE/N2Came about on starboard tack.
82½2Heavy S swell.
92ENE½E2Topgallantsail wind, heavy fog.
1022
1122Clear with passing fog. Since 12 o’clock we have sounded but found no bottom.
123SE/SE/N

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/E3°58′E30½S 29.4′E 814′55° 13′364¾E5°28′N41° 17′

{p. 115}

KEEPING OUT TO SEA

August 6, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12SE/SENE½ETopgallantsail wind, wet, fog.
22¾SEENESet jib; carrying topsails and staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
33ESES¼W1½Came about on the port tack.
431½
52SESSW1½Sighted sea otters, whales, and sea lions.
61¾SE/SSW/SLight wind.
71½SSESW
81¾SSW/W½W2
912½Tacked to starboard.
1012½Light wind, heavy fog, wet.
1112½Stars out.
1212½S swell.
1¼E/S3Heavy, wet fog.
2¼3
3¼3Clewed up mainsail, foresail, and trysail.
4¼E3Hauled down staysails because of lack of wind.
5¼3
6¼ENE3Lowered topsails on the caps.
7¼3
8¼NE3Sounded in 120 fathoms, sandy bottom.
9½3
10½3From 1 o’clock in the morning until noon we took into consideration, in making our calculations, the heavy swell from S to N.
11½
12½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE3°49′E2S 1.4′E 1.62′55° 12′366E5°22′N41° 19′

{p. 116}

August 7, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SE/SE/N1½Light wind, clear with passing fogs and rain.
21¾1½
31¾SEENE1½Set the jib; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail; let out three reefs in topsails.
421½
52¾1Topgallantsail wind, wet fog.
63½1Topsail wind, took a reef in topsails.
74½1
831Hauled down jib.
94SE/ES/W½W1Tacked to port.
1031Took two reefs in topsails.
1131
122½
12¼SE/SSSW½WTopsail wind, drizzly.
22¼
32½SSEE½S1½Tacked to starboard.
42½1Let out two reefs in topsails.
53S/EE/S1
63S/EESE½E1Let out third reef in main-topsail, set the jib.
73½1Topsail wind, drizzly.
831Clear.
931Heaved the lead all day but found no bottom.
103½
113Saw a small dead whale.
123SSE/E½E1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningESE1°04′S39S 15.7′E 3664′54° 55′376E4°37′N42° 23′

{p. 117}

August 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14S/WSE/E½E1Topsail wind, cold, wet.
23SE/E1Carrying all sails except sprit and main-staysail.
32¾1
431
53¼1Topgallantsail wind, weather the same.
62¾1
721
81¾1Took two reels in topsail.
91½1
101½1
1121
121¾
12¾Topsail wind.
22¾SSWSE½ELet out two reefs in topsails.
32½Heavy wet fog.
42¾SW/SSE/S1
52¼1
61¾1Topgallantsail wind, drizzly.
71½Sunshine.
81¼SWSSE
92SW/SSE/SSounded all day, no bottom.
102¾SWSSE½E1
112SSETopgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
122Took an observation: zenith distance 41° 24′, declination of the sun 12° 57′, latitude 54° 21′.[61]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSE0°23′S47.8S 34′E 33.558′54° 21′386¾E3°12′N43° 21′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54° 11′.


{p. 118}

August 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾SW/WS¾E1Light wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
21¾1
31½1
41¼1Fog, wet.
511
61½1
71½WSWS½E1
81½SW/WS/E1Took a reef in topsails.
92S/E½E1
101¾S/E1Topgallantsail wind.
111¾1Fog, stars out.
121½1
11¼WSWS1Light wind.
21¼1
31½1
41¼W/SS/W1Let out reefs in topsails.
51¼1Cloudy.
61¼1
71¼WSWS½W1
8¾S1
9Calm1Calm, foggy.
10½SWSSE1Light wind.
111½WSWS1Fog, wet.
122W/SS/W1Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS4°25′W30S 29.8′W 2.33′53° 51′386¾E2°04′N43° 18′

{p. 119}

DECISION TO HASTEN RETURN

August 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾W/NSSW½WTopgallantsail wind, cloudy.
22SW/S1Carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, and mainsail.
3½
41NW/WSW½WWet, foggy on the horizon.
51W/NSSW½W1Light wind, weather the same.
62¾SW/S½Topgallantsail wind.
72½
82½½Took a reef in topsails.
93WNWSSW½Cloudy.
104½Topsail wind.
113½Moon and stars out.
124
14¼W/NReef-topsail wind.
23¾
34
44¼
53SW/S½WTopsail wind, cloudy.
62¾WNWSW½Let out reefs in topsails.
72
81½Topgallantsail wind.
91NW/WSW/W½W1½
10¾1½
111¼W/SS/W½WTopgallantsail wind, cloudy.
121¾S/W1Variation of compass 1½ rhumb easterly.[62]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW3°12′S58.3S 43.5′W 38.964.6′53° 08′381¼E0°32′N42° 13′

Khitrov’s journal: “Captain Bering with the rest of us signed the decision we came to, an exact copy of which is here attached.” (See next page.)


{p. 120}

August 10, 1741

 

Decision to Hasten Return[63]

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and Navigator Eselberg met to discuss the agreement reached by us, together with Captain Chirikov and the officers of the St. Paul, on May 4, 1741, in the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. It was then agreed that while at sea we should keep in mind to return to the above-named port towards the end of September. Now it is August 10, which is regarded as already autumn, and according to all calculations we are not very far short of 400 German miles [from our destination]. Although, according to our former decision, we should still spend some time in examining the discovered American coast, yet we find this to be dangerous because of the violent autumn storms and continuous heavy fogs. It is not safe to approach the land, for we do not know the lay of it. There are many sand banks and islands, as may be seen from the chart which we have drawn up. We do not even know where to look for shelter. The assistant surgeon, Betge, has submitted a report in which he says that there are five men on the sick list, totally unfit for duty and that, of the others, sixteen are badly affected with scurvy and if we continue at sea until the late autumn these men too will be unfit for service.

On examining the log book we notice that up to now the winds have been easterly, and we fear lest the westerly winds may set in soon and prevent us from reaching port before the late autumn. We summoned before us Ensign Lagunov and all petty officers, namely, Assistant Navigator Yushin, Assistant Skipper Khotyaintsov, Assistant Constable Roselius, Boatswain Nils Jansen, Boatswain’s Mate Alexei Ivanov and read to them our arguments just mentioned. They agreed with them; also in the idea that we should steer for the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul along the 53rd parallel of latitude, or as near to it as the winds will permit, because the last we saw of the American coast was on the 55th parallel and by going to the 53rd we may learn if the coast extends that far.

Bering

Lieutenant Waxel

Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov

Navigator Andreyan Eselberg


Khitrov’s journal.


{p. 121}

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rd PARALLEL

August 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11W/SS/W1Light wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail, and main-staysail.
211
311
411
511
6½SWSSE1At times no wind.
71WSWS1
811
9¾S½E1½Moon and stars out.
10½SW/WS/E1½
11½1½
12¾SWSSE1½Light wind, cloudy.
1½1½
2¼1½
3¼1½
4¼No windWSWWeather as before. Clewed up mainsail and trysail, hauled down jib because of lack of wind, sounded in 180 fathoms without striking bottom; heavy passing clouds overhead.
5¼
6¼
7¼
81½S/ESW/W1Set the jib and hauled up foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
91½EWSW
102Topgallantsail wind.
112¼Cloudy.
122½[64]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW2°57′S16½S 12.2′W 1118′52° 55′379E0°02′N41° 55′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52° 40′. This value has been used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 122}

August 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼EWSWTopgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast-staysail.
22¼Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
32
41¾
51½SE
61¼
71¼Light wind, drizzly, wet.
8½
9¼No windSW2Clewed up foresail, lowered topsail on caps because of little wind.
10¼2
11¼2E swell. From 9 o’clock until 3:20 we allowed ¼ knot to S.
12¼2
1¼2
2¼2
3¾WSWS½E1½Light wind; set topsails.
4¼1½Cloudy, atmosphere heavy.
5½SSWW1½
6¾SWWNW1½Set foresail and trysail.
71SW/SW/N1½Hauled up mainsail, set jib and staysails.
81½SSWW1
91½W½N1
102SWWNW1Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
111¾1Clear with passing clouds.
121½SW/WNW/W1Light wind, weather as before.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW9°32′W22N 4.9′W 21.336′53° 0′373½E0°12′N41° 19′

{p. 123}

August 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1¾SWWNWLight wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, foresails, mainsail, trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
21SW/SW½N
31¼SSWW1½
41W½S
51¾SW/SW½NTopgallantsail wind, weather as before.
62½W/N1½Topsail wind.
73SSWW½NTook a reef in topsails.
82¾
93SWWNWSounded in 150 fathoms, no bottom.
104½WNW½W1½Reef-topsail wind, wet.
112¼S½EMade a starboard tack at 11:30.
122¾
13SW/WS/EDrizzly.
22¾Hauled down jib.
32½Wind going down.
42½S½E1½Set jib.
541½
62WNW½WCame about on the port tack at 6:30.
72½
82½Clear with passing fog.
92¾
103WSWNW½WAt the end of the hour tacked to starboard.
113W/SNW/W1½Let out reef in main-topsail.
122¼WSWS

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/W8°56′W19.5N 8′W 17.728.7′53° 08′372½E0°32′N40° 50′

{p. 124}

August 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12W/SS½W1½Topsail wind, cloudy.
22¼1½Carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
321½
42½1½
52½WS/W½W1½Foggy and wet.
62¾1½SW swell.
72½W/S1½
82Took a reef in main-topsail.
92½1½
102S/W1½
112½1½Cloudy.
122½1½Stars out.
12½1½
22½
32¼WS/W½WTopsail wind, drizzly, wet.
42½1½
52SSW1½Let out reef in main-topsail.
61½2
71¼S/W½WLowered jib.
81WSWSThick wet fog.
92¼WS/W½W2Clear with passing clouds.
102¼2
111¾SSW2Lowered two cannon with their carriages into the hold; topgallantsail wind.
122Drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/W1°13′W51S 49.8′W 1118′52° 18′372¾E1°23′S40° 32′

{p. 125}

August 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WSWS1½Topsail wind, cloudy, wet.
22¼SW/WNW/W½WTacked to port.
32¾1Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
42½NW/W
52¼WSWNW½WFog, wet.
63NW1
71½NW½W
84½WS/W½WStarboard tack.
92¼1
103Light wind.
112¾SSW
122¾1Drizzly, wet.
13¼
22¾
32½
42½1½Let out a reef in topsails.
52½
62¼
71¾Topgallantsail wind.
81¼2
91½
103W/SNW½NTopsail wind, fog, wet.
112¼1
122½SW swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W3°21W26S 13.2′W 22.535.8′52° 05′366¾E1°56′S39° 56′

{p. 126}

August 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½WSWNW1Topsail wind, cloudy, wet; carrying all sails except main-staysail and trysail.
231
33SW/WNW/W1
43¼1
53¼WNW½N1Hauled down jib.
63¼1
721
831Reef-topsail wind.
92½
102¼1½
112WSWNW1½
122½1½Sounded but did not strike bottom.
12½NW½N1½
22½NW1½Hauled up jib.
32¼SW/WNW/W1½Let out a reef in main-topsail.
42SWWNW1½
52WNW½N1½Topsail wind.
63¼1½Reef-topsail wind, fog, wet; took a reef in main-topsail.
731
82½1
93WNW1Hauled down jib.
1031Clear, chilly.
112½W½N1
122½W/N1½Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNW7°06′W62.3N 54.2′W 30.850.3′52° 59′353½E0°12′N39° 06′

{p. 127}

August 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SW/SW/N1¼Reef-topsail wind, fog, wet.
23¼SWWNW½W1¼Carrying reef-topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and staysails.
33½1¼
43¼SW/SW/N1¼
52¾1¼
62½SWWNW½W1½Took two reefs in topsails.
721½Hauled down staysails.
82WNW1½Furled topsails, strong gale.
91SW/WS/E½E5Reefed foresail and mainsail and hove to under mainsail, trysail, furled foresail.
1015Coming up to S, falling off to SE by S.
1115
1215
11¼S½W5Real storm.
21¼W/S5Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
31¼5
41¼5Cloudy.
51¼WSSW5
61¼5Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by W.
71¼W/NSSW½W5Coming up to SW, falling off to S by W.
81¼5
91½WNWSW½S5Coming up to SW by W. falling off to SSW.
101½5Gale, cloudy.
111½5Clear with passing clouds.
121½5

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW7.00′W 7.011.7′52° 59′351¾E0°12′N38° 54′

{p. 128}

August 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11WNWSW½S5½Gale, clear with passing clouds; carrying mainsail.
215½
315½Reefed trysail.[65]
4½5½Coming up to SW by W, falling off to SSW.
5½5½Wind falling off, heavy SW swell.
6½5½
71½WSSW½W3Hauled up fore and main-topsails reefed.
81½3
91¼SSW3Topsail wind, cloudy.
101¼3
111¼W/SS/W½W3Moon out.
1213
11¾2Set fore-topsail.
222Hauled up topmast-staysail.
322
41¾2Topgallantsail wind, heavy swell.
51½S/W2Cloudy.
61¾1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
721½Set jib.
81½1½
92SSW1½Five men on the sick list.
102¼SW1Clear with passing clouds.
112SW½W1Lowered into the hold two cannons with their carriages.
122The assistant constable, Roselius, reported that all is well in the powder magazine. Took an observation: zenith distance 42° 40′, declination of sun 9° 37′, latitude 52° 17′.[66]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationS/W2°20′W42.7S 42′W 8.514.4′52° 17′353¼E1°30′S38° 40′

Khitrov’s journal: “Hove to.”

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52° 07′.


{p. 129}

August 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WNWSW1½Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
21¾1½Carrying topsails, foresails, mainsails, trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
31½1½
41¼W/NSW/S1½Let out reefs in foresail and mainsail.
51½1½N swell.
61¾WNWSW½S1½
71½WSSW2Took a reef in fore-topsail
8½W/SNNW½W2Tacked to port at 8:30.
91WNNW2Hauled down jib.
1012
11¾WSWNW2Light wind.
12¾SW/WNW½W2Drizzly and rainy.
1½2
2¼
3¼Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
41EW/SLowered staysail.
52½WTopgallantsail wind, rain.
63½WSet mainsail.
75¼Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail, set trysail.
85½NE
95½Reef-topsail wind; let out reef in fore-topsail, hauled up spritsail and jib.
105¾
115½
124NNEClear with passing clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/N1°21′W43.6N 7.4′W 4366′52° 24′342½E1°16′S37° 34′

{p. 130}

August 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½NNEWTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying all sails.
21½
31¾1Topgallantsail wind.
41¾NW/NW/S1
51¾1Furled spritsail.
61¼WSW½W1Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
711½
8½No windNNW2Heavy SW swell.
9¼2
10¼2Sounded, no bottom.
111SW/WNW/W1½
121¼1½Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
12WSWNW1½Topgallantsail wind and unsteady.
22¼WNNW1Passing clouds.
31¾1
41½W/NN/W1
51¾WNNW1½Wind and weather as before.
61½NWSW1½Tacked to starboard.
71NW/WSW/W1½
81¼1½
91½WNWSW½W1½Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
101¼1½Passing clouds.
111SW1½SW swell.
121¾W/NSW/S1½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/N2°23′N21N 4.9′W 20.233.8′52° 29′337¼E1°04′S37° 0′

{p. 131}

August 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11WSSW1½Light wind, cloudy, heavy SW swell; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast staysail.
21¾1½
32SSW½W1½
41¾W/NSW/S1½
51¾WSSW1½Topgallantsail wind.
61S/W½W1½Drizzly.
71¾WNWN1½Tacked to port.
82½NWWSW1½Tacked to starboard.
92¼WSW½S1½Took reef in topsails.
101¼1½
111W/NSW/S1½Light and shifting wind.
12½WSSW1½Sounded, no bottom.
11S/W½W1½
22½N/W½W1½Tacked to port.
341½Hauled down jib.
41½SSW½W1½Starboard tack at 4:30.
51¾W/NSW/S1½
61WS/W½W1½Light wind and unsteady, drizzly, wet.
72½W/SNNW½W1Port tack.
82½NW/N1Topsail wind.
92½WSSW1½Starboard tack.
102½NNW½W1Port tack.
111¾W/SNW½N1
1221Topsail wind, cloudy, SW swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW4°16S13.5S 1′W 13.421′52° 28′334½E1°07′S36° 39′

{p. 132}

August 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾WSWNWTopsail wind, drizzly, wet.
22¾Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and staysails.
32½SW/WNW½W1
43¼SW swell.
52¾NW/W
62¾SWNW/W½W
73SW/WNW½W1Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
831½
941½
101½W/SS½W1½Light wind, sounded but no bottom, starboard tack.
111S/W5½Furled sails and hove to under mainsail and trysail because of darkness and danger.
12 Coming up to SSW, falling off to S.
11W5½
21½WSWNW½NSet topsails, foresail, and staysails; tacked to port.[67]
32NW/N1
42¼NW½N1Sounded, no bottom.
52½1
61¾W/SNW/NTopgallantsail wind, cloudy.
71
¾
WNWN/W½W
SW
1½Came about on starboard tack at 7:30.
81¾NW/WSW/W1½Let out reefs in topsail.
91¾WNWSW1½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
102NW/WSW½W1½
111¾1½SW swell.[68]
122½WNWSW

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/N1°47′W32.7N 26.6′W 1931′52° 55′326¾E0°03′N36° 08′

Khitrov’s journal: “At the beginning of this hour we got under way again and tacked to port.”

Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list, two sailors, two grenadiers, two marines, one Siberian soldier.”


{p. 133}

August 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½WNWSW1¾Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; took a reef in topsails.
22½1¾
32½1¾
42½1¾
52½NW/WSW/WW swell.
62½1¾
72¾SW½W2Took two reefs in topsails.
822
91½2Topgallantsail wind and unsteady.
101½WNWSW2Heavy SW swell.
112½W/NSSW½W1¾
122WSSW2Clear with passing clouds.
11½W/SNNW½WTacked to port.
21¾WSWNW½N1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
31¾
42SWTopgallantsail wind, cloudy.
53SW/SNW½WTopsail wind, drizzly, wet.
62½NW/W
72½SSWLet out third reef in topsails.
82¾
93¾WNW
104¼Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
114SW/SWNW½W½
124SW/WNW/W Took a reef in topsail, weather as before.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/N4°59′W38N 6.1′W 37.461′53° 01′317¼E0°19′E35° 07′

{p. 134}

August 24, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼SW/WNW/W1Topsail wind.
24½1Took two reefs in fore-topsail.
34¼NW/W½W1
441Reef-topsail wind; reefed mainsail and foresail, hauled down jib.
54½1
64¼1Took two reefs in main-topsail.
73¾SW1Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
84
91½SSE2Starboard tack.
101¾2Because it was not safe to go fast at night we clewed up the mainsail and hauled down the staysails.
111½2
121¾Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
13
23½SSE½E1½At end of the hour tacked to port.
33¾SSWW1Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
43¾1
53¼1Heavy rain.
63½SW/SW/N1Reef-topsail wind and unsteady.
74SW/WNW/W¼W1
841Took two reefs in main-topsail.
93½NW/W1Sun out; took three reefs in topsails.
103¾SWWNW1
111NW½W5½Reef-undersail wind, furled sails and hove to under mainsail and trysail.
121 From 11 to 12, coming up to WNW, falling off to NW by N.[69]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/N5°22′W49.6N 38.5′W 31.353′53° 39′307E2°06′N34° 14′

Khitrov’s journal gives an observation for latitude, 53° 37′.


{p. 135}

August 25, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¼WSWS½E5½Gale, clear with passing clouds.[70]
21¼5½Carrying trysail and main-staysail.
31¼5½Heavy squalls and waves wash over the deck.
41¼5½
51¼5½Coming up to S by W, falling off to SSE.
61¼5½
71¼W/SS½W5½
81¼5½
91¼5½Gale, squalls.
101¼5½
111¼5½Clear and chilly.
121¼5½Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
11¼5½
21¼5½Rain.
31¼5½
41¼5½
51¼WS/W½WGale and heavy sea.
61¼5½Hauled down main-staysail, set up mainsail.
71¼5½Wind going down.
81¼5½
91¼5½Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S.
101¼[71]
111¼Strong reef-undersail wind, clear with passing clouds; began to count 1¼ rhumb as the variation of compass.
121¼

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/S4°40′E29.6S 23.2′E 18.430.6′53° 16′313E1°01′N34° 45′

Khitrov’s journal: “Hove to.”

Khitrov’s journal states that nine were on the sick list.


{p. 136}

August 26, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11WS/W5½Strong undersail wind, squalls, clear with passing clouds.
215½Carrying mainsail and trysail; coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by E.
315½
415½
5¾W/SS½W5½Wind falling off, passing clouds; coming up to SSW, falling off S by E.
6¾5½
7½5½
8½5½Topsail wind, cloudy.
9½5½
10½5½
11¾WSWNWAt 11:30 hauled up topsails reefed and foresails and made a port tack.[72]
121¾NW½W2
12¼2
22½2
32SW/WNW¾W2Drizzly; let out second reef in main-topsail and first in fore-topsail.
42½1½Hauled up topmast-staysail.
52¾WSWNW1½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
631½
72½1½Light rain.
82½1½Took second reef in main-topsail.
93½W/SNW½W1½Took three reefs in fore-topsail.
103½NW/N1Hauled down staysails.
113WNNW1Hauled up main-topmast-stay sail; clear with heavy passing clouds, SW swell.
123¾1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN3°53′W29.6N 29.5′W 23′53° 45′311E2°21′N34° 42′

Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way again.”


{p. 137}

LANDWARD FOR WATER

August 27, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13WN/W½W1Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds, wet.
23½
32¼NW/WSW/W1½Starboard tack, squalls.
41¾WNWSWTook third reef in main-topsail.
51½SW½S2½Hauled down staysails, topsails, and furled.
61¼2
72SW2Hauled up main-topsails reefed.
81½W/NSW/S2Reef-topsail wind.
91¾2½Squalls and heavy passing clouds.
101¾2½
112¼2½
122¼2Stars out.
11½2½Furled main-topsail.
21¼3½
313½
413½
51¾2Set main and fore-topsails reefed.
622
73WNWSW½S2Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
831½Hauled up topmast-staysail, let out reef in topsails.
92½N/W½W1Tacked to port.[73]
104N½
114½N/E½
124½½Let out another reef in main-topsail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW2°07′S11.5S 8.4′W 7.812.5′53° 37′310E1°59′N34° 30′

Khitrov’s journal: “Together with the Captain Commander we signed today that which we agreed upon, a copy of which is here attached.” (See next page.)


{p. 138}

August 27, 1741

 

Decision To Land In Order To Take On Water[74]

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and Navigator Eselberg met to talk over the decision, which we with our petty officers came to on August 10, relative to our returning to Avacha harbor. Our decision at the time to start back, though it was yet early, was based on the fear that west winds would begin to blow and hinder us. Since then this has happened, and now we have of the water taken in America only 25 barrels, which is not enough for returning to Avacha if the contrary west winds continue to blow.

The American coast which we last saw was between latitude 55° and 56° N, and according to our reckoning it is not more than 60 German miles from us. Therefore we, the undersigned, have unanimously agreed for safety’s sake to go nearer the land with a view to finding good anchorage where we might take on water enough to last until our return so that in case of head winds we should not suffer extremely.

Bering

Lieutenant Waxel

Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov

Navigator Andreyan Eselberg

   and petty officers.


Khitrov’s journal.


{p. 139}

August 28, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾W/NN/E½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
22½WNWSW½S½Tacked in succession.
35W/NN/E1½
45½Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and staysail.
54½½Took all the reefs in topsails.
64½Clear with heavy passing clouds, squalls, rain.
74½
83¾W½
92NNW1½Furled topsails.
101¼1½Strong and cold topsail wind, squalls, passing clouds and rain.
1113
1213Heavy passing clouds and rain.
11½N/W½W2½
21¾2½During the night we heaved the lead but struck no bottom.
31¾2½
41¼W/NN/W2½Topsail wind, cloudy.
53N2½Set topsails, hauled up staysails and jib.
63¾½
73½½Let out all reefs in topsails.
841½
94W1Clear.
103¾½
113½Hauled up spritsail.
124½Clear with passing clouds. Took an observation: zenith distance 48° 14′, declination of the sun 5° 51′, latitude 54° 05′, variation of the compass 1½ rhumb easterly because at noon the observation was S by E½E.[75]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationNE2°55′E41.7N 28′E 3152.7′54° 05′314½E3°14′N35° 23′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54° 07′.


{p. 140}

August 29, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾WNTopgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails, staysails, and lower sails.
23
33¼SW
44Light rain.
53Squalls, rain; took a reef in topsails, furled spritsail.
61¾
73¼SSW
83Wind freshening; took two and three reefs in topsails.
93
10½Heavy passing clouds; furled foresail and topsails and hove to under trysail and main-staysail because of the night time.
111½
122Clewed up trysail.
11½
21½SWDuring the night we sounded with a 90 fathom lead line but found no bottom.
31¾
4½Sounded in 75 fathoms, bottom of sand, clay, and in places gravel.
51½NW/NTopgallantsail wind, heavy passing clouds.
63¼WSWNWSounded and got 73 fathoms, set the foresail and topsails, and let out a reef in each.
73¼
83¼SWLet out two and three reefs in topsails, sighted many islands of which the most easterly was NE about 6 German miles.[76]
93Depth 65 fathoms. The easterly island bore NW by N about 4 German miles.[77]
104½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; depth 55, 50, 45 fathoms, sandy bottom.
111½WN/E½E
122Light wind, weather as before; depth the same. The easterly island bears NE by E 5 German miles, the westerly island WNW½W 2½ German miles; between them are 5 or 6 islands which seem to be neither very high nor very large.[78]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN3°57′E54N 53.7′E 3.75.8′54° 59′314½E5°50′N35° 29′

Shumagin Islands. Khitrov’s journal: “Saw many islands of which the southernmost bore NE.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Looked for islands toward the N; the last bore NW by N.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Southernmost island NE by E. Northernmost WNW¼W.”


{p. 141}

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS

August 30, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½W/SNNELight wind, clear; carrying all sails except spritsail and main-staysail. On sounding we got from 40 to 15 fathoms.
21¾
32NI was sent in the yawl into a small bay about ½ mile from us.[79]
41½W[80]
51That bay does not offer safe anchorage because of the rocks and gravelly bottom.[81]
62N½EI was sent again on the same boat to find anchorage in the strait between the islands.
71NNE[82]
8At anchorDropped the small bower anchor among the islands in 20 fathoms of water. It was not safe to go farther because of the darkness. For the same reason we could not get our bearings. I returned to the ship and reported that I found a good place for anchoring which was secure from many winds and had a good bottom and was less than ½ mile from us.
9
10
11We made ready the spare anchor in case of need.
12Clear with passing clouds.
1WLight wind, cloudy and chilly.
2
3Fire on an island NNE about 1½ mile away.[83]
4
5We sent the longboat in charge of the navigator with 10 casks to bring fresh water.
6
7The navigator returned and reported that he found a lake about 100 fathoms from shore. We took on board the 10 full casks and sent back 16 empty casks. At this hour we took the bearings of the island where we were at anchor;[84] one point of the large island bore S½W 2 miles, the second point N by E 1½ mile, the small island with its projections NE½E 1½ mile. The small but high island near us bore E by S ¼ mile or ½ mile. The boat returned from shore with 10 barrels of water.
8
9
10
11Khitrov went in the boat to the island on which fire was seen, and with him went the constable, one sailor, one cannoneer, one interpreter, one armed soldier. The Captain Commander gave them instructions what to do and in addition gave them various articles such as tobacco, small bells, boxes, needles, red cloth, mirrors, and knives.[85]
12

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNE4°33′E10.6N 9.4′E 4.87.7′55° 08′315¼E6°06′N35° 37′

Khitrov’s journal: “Lowered the small yawl and sent the assistant navigator in search of good anchorage.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Took in all sail, dropped the anchor in 24 fathoms, and payed out ¼ cable. The assistant navigator returned and reported that he failed to find a good place to anchor. Put over the longboat into the water.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Weighed anchor, set sails, and steered between the islands into the bay, getting as we went along 24, 25, 20, 15 fathoms, bottom gravelly and shelly.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Went in tow; and, when we came within ½ mile of one of the islands, we anchored in 20 fathoms and payed out ½ cable. Because of the fog we could not get our bearings.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Saw a fire on one of the islands about 2½ miles away on the rhumb NNE.”

Between Near Island and Nagai Island. This anchorage is marked on Khitrov’s map, reproduced in Fig. 11, by an inverted anchor at the 19 and 20 fathom soundings. Khitrov’s journal: “When fog cleared it was possible to get bearings: the southern point of the large island bore S½W; the northern point of the same island bore N by E; the small island with its projections N by E½E; the southern point of the island where we are at anchor bore E by S.”

Khitrov’s journal: “Captain Commander sent me to the island on which fire was seen and which is from us NNE. In case I found human beings I was told to be kind to them and was given for distribution various presents, namely ½ pound Chinese tobacco, 5 copper bells, 160 beads, 20 needles, 2 arshins red material, 5 small mirrors, and 5 knives. I went in the small yawl and took with me 1 assistant constable, 1 sailor, 1 cannoneer, 1 soldier, 1 Chukchi, and 1 Koriak interpreter.”


{p. 142}

August 31, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1S/WLight wind, clear with passing clouds; 10 more casks of water brought on board; the sick were taken ashore.
2
3
4SE/SLight rain.
5The boat returned with 10 more casks of water.
6
7SE10 empty casks sent ashore.
8
9
10SThe quartermaster returned to the ship with 10 more casks and reported that the sailor Nikita Shumagin died on shore. He was buried on the island, which was named Shumagin after him.[86] The small boat was tied astern.
11
12
1
2
331 casks were filled.
4During the night we had a lantern on the gaff so Khitrov could see it.
5SESent the boat for more water.
6S
711 more casks were brought from shore.
8
9Sent 10 empty casks ashore.
10Wind freshening, payed out ¾ of a cable.
1110 more casks taken on board with which we filled the casks in the hold.
12

Khitrov’s journal: “He was buried on the island, and over his grave a wooden cross was erected.” The name Shumagin is now given to the whole group of islands, and the island which used to be called Shumagin is now known as Nagai.


{p. 143}

September 1, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1E/NTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
2
3Boat sent ashore with empty casks.
4ENEWind freshening; tightened the topmast shrouds because they were weak, greased the topmasts, overhauled the ropes. The boat returned with the water.
5
6Altogether we have taken on 52 casks of water. The boat was sent back for the sick and others who were ashore, and when it returned we took it on deck and lashed it secure.
7
8
9
10Storm; made ready the best bower anchor.
11
12
1NEGale.
2
3
4The yawl on which Khitrov went has not returned, probably because it could not get off shore.
5
6Heavy fog, wet; had a lantern on the gaff all night.
7
812 men on the sick list.
9Gale blowing.
10Took two reefs in topsails; and furled on the yards, reefed foresail, and made ready for whatever might come.
11
123 inches of water in the hold.

{p. 144}

September 2, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NEReef-topsail wind, cloudy and rainy.
2
3
4Wind going down.
54 inches of water in the hold.
6
7
8Wind comes in gusts.
9
10Squally.
11
12
1
2
3EUnsteady wind.
4Began to warp the anchor because it was dangerous to remain where we were.
5SE
6Weighed anchor, set the sails, and started for the island in order to protect ourselves from the wind. From 6 o’clock until 8:20 we sounded as we went along and got 20, 17, 15, 13 fathoms: rhumb E by N½N; advanced ¾ of a German mile.
7Thick wet fog.
8Dropped anchor in 16 fathoms,[87] took in the sails, payed out ¾ of a cable; bottom sandy. Because of the fog could not get the bearings.
9
10Put over the boat into the water, sea going down.
11
12SSESent the boat ashore for Khitrov.[88]

This second anchorage is the one marked on Khitrov’s map (Fig. 11) by an anchor lying on its side at the 16 fathom sounding.

Khitrov’s journal: “The longboat was put into the water and sent for me on Shumagin Island because I could not get on board in the small boat, owing to the gale. High sea going down. Bearings from anchor: S point Shumagin Island S by W, N point of the same island N½E, the N point of the two islands from Shumagin NNE.”


{p. 145}

September 3, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SSETopsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let go the spare anchor and payed out ¼ of a cable.
2SE/S
3
4Fog, wet.
5Put the anchor which we raised in its proper place.
6Wind has shifted, squally; saw two fires on shore not far from one another, and we decided that one was made by Khitrov and the other by the party sent to him. Heavy sea running; lowered the main and fore yards, payed out ½ of a cable on the small bower anchor and on the spare anchor, made ready the best bower anchor. A regular gale blowing.
7
8
9
10
11SSWTerrific squalls.
12Payed out ¾ of a cable on spare anchor.
1
2Wind going down a bit.
3
4Topsail wind.
5SW/SWeighed the spare anchor, heaved in cable of small bower.
6SWMade fast the best bower anchor at ¾ of a cable as before.
7WSWKhitrov and his party returned, but the yawl was left ashore. He reported that he could not bring it because of the heavy surf. He also made a report of his expedition to the Captain Commander.[89]
8W/S
9
10WTook the boat on deck, weighed the small bower anchor.
11Hoisted the sails and made for the open sea, for we were afraid to remain here longer waiting for fair winds. We sounded and had 16, 18, 19, 20 fathoms; course ENE; bottom small rocks, sand, and shells.
12

Khitrov’s journal: “I reported to the Captain Commander that while I was on the island to which I was sent I saw a fireplace and many other signs of human beings but no human beings themselves. I sighted the mainland back of the islands about 12 miles away.”


{p. 146}

September 4, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SWLight wind, clear with passing clouds.
2
3Reef-topsail wind, weather as before.
4
5Realizing that we could not get out and that it was not safe to remain under sail during the night, we dropped the small bower anchor in 20 fathoms[90] and payed out ¾ of a cable. Bottom sandy and shelly.
6
7SSW
8
9
10CalmCalm.
11
12Light wind; took all the reefs in topsails to be ready for whatever might happen; but, in the meantime, furled topsails.
1S
2Heaved in the small bower cable to ½.
3
4Put the boat into the water, and I was sent to examine what seemed a bay in NE in order to find shelter from whatever wind may come along.
5SSE
6
7SEI returned to the ship and reported that what we sighted was not a bay but an open passage and that the depth was 15 and 16 fathoms.
8Weighed the small bower anchor, set the sails, and steered W; let out all the reefs in topsails. From 8 to 11 o’clock we sounded as we went along and had 15, 20, and 25 fathoms.
9SSE
10Topsail wind, clear.
11
12Came about on the starboard tack, because we could not get around the island with the wind as it stood, and went easterly.

Off Bird Island. This third anchorage is marked on Khitrov’s map (Fig. 11) by an anchor at the end of the arrow pointing north.


{p. 147}

FIRST MEETING WITH NATIVES

September 5, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SSETopgallantsail wind, sunshine; carrying topsails, staysails, and lower sails.
2On our track we get 16, 13, 26, 30, 38, 25, 22 fathoms; gravelly bottom, in places shelly; rhumb E by N.
3It is clear that we cannot get out to sea because of the contrary and shifting winds.
4We sailed back to the island where we were the night before and let go the small bower anchor in 21 fathoms, bottom sandy, and payed out ¾ cable. We heard the shout of human voices, and a little later two baidarkas,[91] one man in each, paddled towards us and shouted as before.[92] Our interpreter called to them in Chukchi and Koriak, but they could not understand him and pointed to their ears. After this they went ashore, and we followed them in the ship’s boat in charge of Waxel, who took with him different things to give as presents. When he returned he reported that they would not accept his presents and that they tried to drag our boat on shore and detain our interpreter, but Waxel did not know the reason for their actions. Under the circumstances he gave orders to fire from two guns. At the discharge they fell on the ground and let go of the interpreter. One of the natives was offered a drink, and after tasting it he spat it out. Because of the heavy surf our men could not go ashore. In the end our men had to cut the cable in order to get away.[93]
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12Fire is seen on the island.
1E/SOf the two men who were near the ship one stood closer and the other farther from the ship. The Captain Commander ordered that they be given 4½ arshins of red cloth, 2 mirrors, 3 strings of Chinese beads, small bells. These things were tied on a board and lowered into the water. He accepted these presents with pleasure. He threw on deck 2 polished rods; one had tied to it falcon’s feathers, and the other a bird’s claw. After this they left us and waved their hands to shore. Waxel followed them at 7 o’clock as has already been noted.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8ESEHeavy squalls so that we were obliged to lower the main and fore yards.
9SETopsail wind.
10Drizzly.
11SWarped the small bower to ½ cable, put the yards back in their places.
12SSWLight wind, foggy.

{p. 148}


A baidar (Russ. baidára) is a large open skin boat able to accommodate a number of passengers and a considerable amount of freight. A baidarka (Russ. baidárka) is a small skin boat covered all over, except the round openings at the top to admit the paddler or paddlers (cf. Fig. 12). The baidar is related to the Eskimo umiak, the baidarka to the kayak. Baidars may be seen today in the Bering Sea and baidarkas in the Aleutian Islands. When the Russians first came in contact with the Aleuts the baidarkas were all of the “one-hatch” type, that is, large enough for one person. This type has almost entirely disappeared and has been succeeded by the “two-hatch” baidarka, and occasionally one may even see a “three-hatch” baidarka. These little boats are very light and strong, and the Aleuts are very skillful in handling them.

Sauer, who visited Unalaska in 1790, has left a full description of these skin boats: “The baidars, or boats, of Oonalashka, are infinitely superior to those of any other island. If perfect symmetry, smoothness, and proportion constitute beauty, they are beautiful; to me they appeared so beyond anything that I ever beheld. I have seen some of them as transparent as oiled paper, through which you could trace every formation of the inside, and the manner of the native’s sitting in it; whose light dress, painted and plumed bonnet, together with his perfect ease and activity, added infinitely to its elegance. Their first appearance struck me with amazement beyond expression.” (Martin Sauer: An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the Northern Parts of Russia . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings, London, 1802, p. 157.)

This was a form of greeting more or less common to all the natives of the north-west coast of America. Cook met with it in Nootka Sound. “On their first coming, they generally went through a singular mode of introducing themselves. They would paddle, with all their strength, quite round both ships, a Chief, or other principal person on the canoe, standing up with a spear or some other weapon in his hand and speaking, or rather hollowing, all the time.” (James Cook: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, London, 1784, Vol. 2, p. 273.)

Khitrov’s journal: “At 4:30 we heard shouts of human voices from the island alongside of which we were at anchor.

“At 6 o’clock two baidarkas were seen coming towards us, one man in each boat, and when they were within 50 fathoms of the ship they stopped and called in their own tongue, but our Chukchi and Koriak interpreters could not make out what they said nor could they make themselves understood when they shouted to them [the islanders], because they pointed to their ears and to the island. On the island people were also calling. One of the two men just mentioned paddled up close to the ship but not quite alongside. At the order of Captain Commander Bering we threw overboard a piece of board on which were tied a number of presents, namely, 5½ arshins of red material, 2 small mirrors, 2 strings of Chinese iron beads, 20 small copper bells and 5 [knives?]. The American received these things with pleasure and in return threw to us as a present two thinly shaped rods to one of which were tied bird’s feathers and to the other bird’s claws with feathers on them. The feathers we identified as those of the falcon. When we had taken these things they paddled away for the shore and called to us and pointed to the land. We lowered the longboat into the water for the purpose of going ashore. In the boat was sent, by the order of the Captain, Lieutenant Waxel, who took with him several members of the crew, (who were armed), a few presents, and Russian liquor. He was gone about two hours, returning at 8 o’clock and reporting to the Captain Commander that when he came to the island on which were the Americans he offered them presents but they would not take them. He offered one of the islanders a glass of liquor, but as soon as he tasted it he spat it out and returned the glass. The lieutenant allowed several of the men, among them being the interpreter, to land; but he himself remained in the boat which he anchored out a little distance from shore, for owing to the strong wind and submerged rocks near the beach it was dangerous to approach it. The Americans led the interpreter to their camp and gave him whale blubber, but when he attempted to leave them to return to the boat, nine of the Americans seized him and would not let him go, which shows that they regarded him as one of their own people even though he is a Kamchadal by origin. In order to free the interpreter an order was given to fire off several guns in the air, and when that was done the Americans fell down on the ground, letting go of the interpreter, who hurried to the boat. When our party was ready to leave the Americans seized the painter and started to haul the boat ashore. Seeing this, the order was given to cut the painter and leave the anchor and pull for the ship. In the drawing attached is given the position of the bay and the island [Fig. 11], and a sketch of the Americans and their hair-seal skin boats.” (See Fig. 12, upper.)

handwriting in Cyrillic script with map

Fig. 11—Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by Khitrov: end of entry of September 5, 1741. with map of the Shumagin Islands (for text, see opposite page, footnote 93).

sketches of Aleuts

Fig. 12—Upper: An Aleut in his baidarka, or one-hatch skin boat. From an unpublished drawing on the chart of the voyage of the St. Peter, by Waxel and Khitrov, 1744, in the Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd, No. 1940.

Lower: A native of Unalaska in a baidarka. From a book of unpublished drawings of Alaskan scenes by Levashev, 1767-1768, in the Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd.


{p. 149}

September 6, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SSWLight wind, fog.
2
3WSWTopgallantsail wind; weighed anchor and tacked with a view to finding shelter from the wind. When we had come to 17 fathoms we took in the sail and let go the small bower anchor, bottom sandy, and payed out ¾ cable. Seven baidarkas, one American in each, came near the ship, two of them quite close. The Captain Commander ordered that they be given an iron kettle and needles. They gave us two wooden hats, on one of which was fastened a small ivory image resembling a man.
4
5
6
7W/S
8
9
10
11W
12
1Light wind.
2Cloudy.
3
4Began to heave in the cable.
5
6SHeaved anchor and set the sails.[94]
7W/SSSELet out all the reefs in the topsails and got under way. having under us 18, 20, 23, 25, 30 fathoms.
8S
9WSW
10S½E
11
12Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. At noon we were by cross bearings, from Shumagin Island, where we stood on the 30th, NW½N about 7 German miles.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSE28S 26′E 1118′54° 42′319¼E4°51′N35° 55′

Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way.”


{p. 150}

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE

September 7, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¼SW/WS/E1¼Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying lower and upper sails; SW swell.
23¼WSWS½E1¼Took two reefs in topsails.
331¼
43¼1¼
53¼1¼Wind and weather as before.
63¾1¼
731¼
83Wind comes in gusts, moon and stars out.
92¾
102½SW/WSE½E1½Westerly swell.
112½1½Hauled down staysails.
121½SWSSE1½Changeable wind, squalls, rain; furled topsails.
12½SW/WS/E3
22SWSSE½E3Heavy passing clouds with squalls.
32½WSWS3Stars out.
42½3
51¾W/SS/W1¼
62½1¼Set topsails.
731¼Took three reefs in fore-topsail, hauled up topmast-staysails.
83¼S½W1¼Reef-topsail wind, cloudy; lowered staysails.
93½WSWS1¼
1032Undersail wind, squally; took three reefs in main-topsail, furled both topsails.
112½2
121¾2

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS5°57′E61S 60.5′E 6.311′53° 42′322¼E2°08′N36° 06′

{p. 151}

September 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾WS/W½W2½Reef-undersail wind, clear with passing clouds, westerly swell; reefed foresail, furled foresail and mainsail, and hove to under main-staysail and trysail.
222½Coming up to SW by W, falling off to SSW.
31½W/NSSW½W
41½5½
51½WNWSW½S5½Heavy storm.
61½5½
71½5½Cloudy, air thick.
81½5½Stars out.
91¼
101¼Wind decreasing.
111¼W/NSSW½WComing up to SW, falling off to S by W.
121¼5½
116Undersail wind, weather as before.
216
316
41Topsail wind.
51½SW/S1½Hoisted topsails, let out a reef in topsails.
62¾WNWSW½S1¼Hoisted topmast-staysails, set foresail and mainsail.
73W/NSW/S1¼Wind unsteady and in gusts.
82½1¼
92¾1¼
1031¼Clear with passing clouds.
112¾
122¾SW½S1¼Westerly swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/W2°37′W39S 37.7′W 915′53° 04′323¼E0°24′N35° 51′

{p. 152}

September 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾W/NSW/STopsail wind, cloudy; let out two reefs in topsails: carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
22¼
32½WSSW1½
42½
53W/NSSW½W1½Wind comes in gusts, westerly swell.
62¾1½
72¼SW/S1½
821½Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
92SSW½W1½Took two reefs in topsails.
1021½
111¼WSSW1½Light wind, cloudy.
121¼1½
11W/SS½W2Drizzly, rainy.
21WSWS½E2
3¾SWSSE2
4½SW/SSE/S2Hauled down staysails.
5No windClewed up mainsail and trysail.
6
72ESEW/STopgallantsail wind, weather as before.
82Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
93Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
104½Reef-topsail wind, wet; took two reefs in fore-topsail, set trysail.
115¼
125½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W1°42′S41.7S 24′W 3455.8′52° 40′316¾E0°38′S34° 55′

{p. 153}

September 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15½ESEWSWUndersail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying reefed topsails, foresail, and trysail.
25½
35SE
45SE/SSW/W1½Set mainsail and topmast-staysails.
52S/ES1½
61¾SWSW1½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before, damp, heavy swell from SE.
72¼1½
82¼S/ESW/W1½
92¼1½Drizzly, wet.
1021½
111½SWSW1½Southerly swell.
121¾2
11½2Light wind, weather as before.
21½2
31S/WW/S1
42½SSWW1Topgallantsail wind.
521Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
62¾1Set the jib.
72¾1Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
83½1
93¼SWSW1¼Southerly swell.
103¼1¼
112½1¼Wind decreasing.
122¾WSW½W1¼Fog, wet.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/N3°02′W6.1N 8.7′W 6098′52° 49′301½E0°14′S33° 17′

{p. 154}

September 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13S/WW½STopsail wind, foggy, clear with passing clouds: carrying reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, and staysails.
22½
33SSWW½NWind unsteady and in gusts.
43
53½Reef-topsail wind.
63¾W
73S/ESW/W1
82½SWSWTopgallantsail wind, wet.
91¼S/ESW/W1
101ENESWLight wind, weather as before.
112NNESW/WSounded, but no bottom.
122½Topsail wind, cloudy.
13Occasionally the stars are seen.
23½NLet out two reefs in main-topsail.
33¾Drizzly, wet.
44NW/N
55NNWWSWWind unsteady.
65½N
75Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
85
95Strong reef-topsail wind.
105
115NNWDrizzly.
125Wet.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/S5°13′W83.7S 8.8′W 83140′52° 40′283¼E0°43′S30° 57′

{p. 155}

September 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¾NWSW1Topsail wind, drizzly, wet; carrying topsails, staysails, foresails, mainsail, and trysail.
23½1
33NNW1
41½NWSW/W1Northeasterly swell.
53NNWWSW1
62½1Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
71¾1
81Light wind, weather as before.
9¾Northerly swell.
10CalmCloudy.
111½W/SS½W1Took two reefs in topsails.
1221
12½S/W1
221Weather as before, moon and stars out.
31½WSWS1
42WSSW1Heavy clouds from the west.
521
62W/SS/W1Topgallantsail wind.
71¾S½W1Changeable wind, cloudy.
82¾WSWS½E1Clear with passing clouds.
91½SW/WNW½W1Let out second reef in topsails, tacked to port.
1021
1121Topgallantsail wind.
122WSWNW1Cloudy, wet.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W3°06′W31½S 16′W 2744′52° 24′276¾E1°34′S30° 13′

{p. 156}

September 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11SW/WNW½W1½Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, wet; came about on the starboard tack.
21WSSW1½
3¼3
4¼3Drizzly, wet.
51SW/WS/E1½Light wind.
62¾S/E½E1
71WSWNW½W1½Came about on the port tack.
8½SW/WNW/W½WCloudy.
91½1Moon out; took two reefs in topsails.
1021Topgallantsail wind.
112¼1
122NW/W
11½S/E1½Made the starboard tack.
21¼S/E½E1
31SWSSE2
412
5½WNW3
6½3Light wind.
7¾SWSW½W1½Let out second and third reefs in topsails.
8¾1½
92¾S/EWSWTopgallantsail wind.
103¼Clear with passing clouds.
113¼
123¾Topsail wind, weather as before.[95]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead Reckoning (Yushin)W/S6°29′W18.3S 1.5′W 1828.8′52° 23′272¼E1°38′S29° 44′
By Observation (Khitrov)SW/S2°38′W29.8S 24′W 17.728.8′52° 01′271¼E2°48′S29° 35′

As indicated in the 24-hour summary, Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52° 01′. This value has been used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 157}

September 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14½SSEWSWTopsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
25
35¼Let out a reef in main-topsail.
45¾Took three reefs in main-topsail.
55S/EReef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
64
72¼SSWW1Topsail wind; reefed mainsail; foggy, wet.
81¾WSWNW1½
921½Clear with passing clouds.
101¼WN½N1½
11½WS½E2Light wind and unsteady; came about on the starboard tack.
121½S/W½W2
1½W/NSW/S2Clear with passing clouds.
21¼Let out two reefs in topsails.
33WNWSW½Topsail wind, wet.
43½½
53½½Hauled down jib; westerly swell.
63¼½
72¾NW/WSW/W½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
83¼NWSW/W½W1Took second reef in topsails.
92¾NW/WSW/W1½Clear with passing clouds.
102½NWWSW1½Took third reef in topsails.
112½1½Reefed foresail, furled fore-topsail.
122¼2Gale; furled main-topsail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW5°52′W60S 17′W 57.692′52° 06′258E2°40′S28° 12′

{p. 158}

September 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12NWWSW½S2½Reef-undersail wind, clear with passing clouds; hauled down staysails: squally; furled foresail, hove to under mainsail and trysail; coming up to W, falling off to SW by W.
22½2½
31½NW/NWSW½W2½
41½5
51½5
61½5Lowered the foreyard.
71¼Stormy.
81¼5½Furled main-staysail.
91¼5½
101¼5½Clear with passing clouds.
111¼5½At times light rain.
121¼
11Wind decreasing.
216
316Stars out.
416Chilly, damp.
51½Undersail wind; hauled up foreyards.
6¾NWWSW3Set foresail and mainsail.
71½3
8½3Sun shining.
92WSW½S2½Topsail wind, cloudy; set main-topsail and let out two reefs.
101½2½Set fore-topsail reefed.
112WSW2
122½2Northwesterly swell. Took an observation: zenith distance 52° 20′, declination of the sun 1° 06′, latitude 51° 14′.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationSSW1°28′S56S 52′W 2032′51° 14′256¼E5°36′S27° 40′

{p. 159}

September 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12WNWSW½W1½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out a reef in fore-topsail.
22½1½
32SW1½Sea running from NW; carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
42½1½
51¾1½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
61½1½
71½WSSW1½Took three reefs in fore-topsail.
81½WSWS1½
91NWLight wind, made the port tack.
101½SWWNW2Drizzly, clear.
112¼SW/SW½N
121¼1½
11½SSEW/SLet out two reefs in fore-topsail.
22
33½ESELet out a reef in main-topsail.
44½Topsail wind, drizzly.
54½
64¾SE
75¼Reef-topsail wind, weather as before.[96]
85¾SE/SLet out a reef in foresail, set jib.
95½SSE
103½SW/SW/NTopsail wind.
113¾SWWNW½Took reef in main-topsail.
124½SW/WWNW½NReef-topsail wind, drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW600′W 6096′51° 14′241¼E5°57′S26° 04′

Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: . . . 12 men.”


{p. 160}

September 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14SWNWN½N1Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain.
23¾SW/WNW/W1Took second and third reef in topsails.
33WSWNW1Hauled down jib.
43¾SWWNW½N1Let out reef in topsails.
53¼WNW1
64SW/SW/N1
73½SWWNW1Took third reef in topsails and in foresail.
83¾1
93½SW/WNW/W1Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, clear with passing showers.
1041
113¾NW/W½W1Wind comes in gusts.
122½WSWNW1Rain, southwesterly swell; tacked to starboard.
12¾S2
22¼W/SS/W2Heavy rain; let out a reef in main-topsail.
31½WSSW2
41¾W/NSSW½W2Topsail wind; let out two reefs in main-topsail.
51½2
61½2Let out a reef in fore-topsail.
72SW/S2Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
81½2Heavy sea, light rain.
92WSSW2Let out third reef in main-topsail and second in fore-topsail.
101¼2
112¼W/NSW/S2Wind freshening; took first and second reefs in main-topsails and second and third reefs in fore-topsail.
121¾WSSW½W2

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW1°03′N33N 13′W 3048′51° 27′233¼E5°21′S25° 16′

{p. 161}

September 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12WNWSW1¾Strong reef-topsail wind, westerly swell; carrying reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and staysails.
21¾1¾
32¼1¾
42¼NW/WSW/W1½Took three reefs in topsails.
53¼1½
62¾NWWSW1½
72WSW½S1¾Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.
822¼Gale, heavy passing clouds.
91½2¼Wet; furled fore-topsail.
101¾2¼Wind decreasing, air chilly.
111¾NW/WSW/W2¼Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
121¾2¼
11¾WNWSW2¼Set fore-topsail.
21¾W/NSW/S1¾
321¾Topsail wind.
42WSSW½W1¾
52½SSW1¾Let out a reef in main-topsail.
62W/SS/W1¾At the end of the hour we made the port tack.
72WSWNW½N1½
82¼W/SNW/N1½Topsail wind.
93½1½[97]
103½WSWNW½N1½Reef-topsail wind.
113½1½Drizzly.
123NW1½Wind comes in gusts.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW1°19′W27S 10′W 25.641′51° 17′227½E6°07′S24° 35′

Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: 14 men”.


{p. 162}

September 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13¼WSWNW2Reef-topsail wind, squally, drizzly; took three reefs in main-topsail.
22NW½N2
32½2Squally; furled topsails; heavy westerly swell.
41¼W/SNW/N3
51½W/NSW/S3Topsail wind and unsteady: came about on starboard tack, set topsails reefed.
61½WNWSW3
71½SW½S3Gale, cloudy.
81½W/NSW/S3
9¾WSSW6Furled topsails and lowered sails, hove to under trysail and main-staysail; coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by W.
1016
1116
121W/NSW/S6Coming up to SW. falling off to SSW.
11WNWSW½W6Coming up to WSW, falling off to SW by S.
216Clear with passing clouds.
31NWSW/W½W6
416Coming up to W by S, falling off to SW.
516Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
61½WSW2Set foresail and mainsail.
72½1½Set topsails and let out a reef in them.
82½1½
92½NW/NW/S1½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
103¼NWWSW1¼
113½1¼Clear with passing clouds.
1231¼

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W0°04′W21.5S 12′W 1828′51° 05′224¾E6°58′S24° 07′

{p. 163}

September 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13NWWSW1½Topsail wind, cloudy.
22¾1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
33NW/WSW/W1½At the order of the Captain Commander there were shifted from the hold aft to the bow 31 sacks of provisions and 3 jacks because the bow was not sufficiently down in the water.
431½
52¾1½
63¼1½
72½NW/WWSW½S1½Gusts of wind and rain.
821½Topgallantsail wind, heavy passing clouds from the west.
93NW/WSW/W1½Took two reefs in topsails.
103NWWSW½S1½Light topsail wind.
112½NW/WSW/W1½In the south was seen something that looked like flashes of lightning.
122½SW½W1½
12¾SW/W1½Chilly, clear.
22¾1½Squally and rainy.
33NWWSW1½
431½
53¼WSW½S1½
63WSW½W1½Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
731½
831½Sunshine.
92¾NW/NW/S1¾13 men on the sick list.
102NNWW1¾
112NW/NW/S1¾Topsail wind, cloudy.
122NWWSW½W1¾Clear with passing clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W4°47′W62S 30′W 5585′50° 35′213½E/S1°53′E22° 42′

{p. 164}

September 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½NW/NW/S1½Topsail wind; let out three reefs in main-topsail; air thick.
22½WSW½W1½
32¾NWWSW1½Wind in gusts.
42½SW/W½W1½Heavy westerly swell.
52¼WSW1½
62½1½Took one and two reefs in main-topsail, a second reef in fore-topsail.
72NW/NWSW¾W
82¼1¾
921¾Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
1011¾
11¾1¾
12¾NNWW1¾Let out the second and first reefs in main-topsail, hoisted jib.
1½NW/NWSW2
2No windClewed up trysail, hauled down topsails and staysails because there was no wind.
3
4
5Northwesterly swell.
6
7
8Unbent trysail because it needed repairing and in its place bent on another.
9
1013 men on the sick list.
11
123S/WW/NTopsail wind; set topsails, staysails, and lower sails.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/S5°0′S25S 7′W 2437′50° 28′208½E/S1°10′E22° 05′

{p. 165}

September 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾SW/NTopgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
21¼
31SELet out three reefs in fore-topsails.
4¾
5¾ENEHauled down staysails and jib, clewed up mainsail and trysail.
61¼
71¼
81¼Took two reefs in fore-topsail and one in main-topsail.
91¼NNESet mainsail, trysail, and staysails.
101
111¼N
12¾Light wind.
12N/W
21½
31½NNWW1Hoisted jib, let out a second reef in fore-topsail.
41½1Moon and stars out.
52¼NWSW/W¾W1Chilly and damp.
62¼1Let out third reef in main-topsail.
73WNWSW½W1
82¼1Topsail wind, squally.
92½NW/WSW/W1¼Took a reef in main-topsail.
102¾NNWW1¼
112¾1¼Hauled down jib; reef-topsail wind.
122½NW/NW/S1¼Took second reef in fore-topsail.[98]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW36.50′W 36.557′50° 28′200E/S0°44′E21° 08′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 50° 27′. The noon position for this day is therefore indicated on the chart (Pl. 1) as based on observation.


{p. 166}

September 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾NW/NW/S1½Topsail wind, clear; carrying reefed topsails, staysails, and lower sails.
21¾NWWSW1½
321½Westerly swell, reef-topsail wind.
42¼SW/W½W1½
53WNWSW½W1½
62¼1½Took a second reef in main-topsail.
72SW1¾
821¾Came about with the wind and made the port tack.
91¾WNNW½W2
101¾2
112¼WSWNW½N1½Took three reefs in topsails.
122½1½
12SW/WNW/WFurled topsails; wind freshening.
222½Squally.
31½NW½W2Set the main-topsail reefed; reef-topsail wind.
41¾SWNW/W½W2
51¾SW/WNW/W2Set fore-topsail.
62½1¾
71¼NW/W½W1¾Topsail wind.
82½1¾Drizzly.
91¾NW/W1¾
1021¾Wind freshening.
112½NW/W½W1¾Undersail wind.
122½Heavy swell from SW; furled topsails.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW6°11′W30N 19′W 23.537′50° 47′192¾E/S14°06′E20° 31′

{p. 167}

September 24, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾SWNW/W½W2½Strong undersail wind, drizzly, wet; furled foresail and mainsail, hove to under the main-staysail and trysail; coming up to W½N, falling off to NW.
21½SW/SNW/W¾W5½
31½5½
41½5½Gale.
51½WSWNW¼N5½By the will of God died of scurvy the grenadier Andrei Tretyakov.
61½5½Coming up to NW by W, falling off to NNW.
71¼NW½N6
81¼6Wind going down a little.
91¼6
101¼6Drizzly.
111¼6
121¼6
11¼6Undersail wind.
21¼6
31WNNW½W3½Set foresail, mainsail, hauled down staysail.
42¼1¾Set main-topsail with three reefs in it.
521¾
621¾
731½Set fore-topsail with three reefs.
82½1½Hauled up topmast-staysails.
931½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
102¾W/SNW/N1¼Let out reef in topsails.
112¾1¼Lowered the dead body into the sea.
123½WSWNW1¼Clear with passing clouds.[99]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/E1°06′E40.7N 39.7′E 8.714′51° 27′199¾E6°30′S20° 45′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 51° 30′. The noon position for this day is therefore indicated on the chart (Pl. 1) as based on observation.


{p. 168}

LANDFALL: ADAK AND ATKA ISLANDS

September 25, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾WSWNW1¼Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out two reefs in main-topsail.
23¼1¼
32½SW/WNW/W1¼Sighted land W by S and ENE about 7 miles. We take them to be islands,[100] and between these islands are other islands. On the land in sight there is a high snow-covered volcano WNW½N 12 German miles.[101] We think the volcano is on the American mainland.[102]
42½SWSSE1½Sounded but did not find bottom, made the starboard tack.
52¼SW/SSE½S1½
62¼S/WSE/E½E1½
72¾S/EE/S1½Took two reefs in main-topsail.
83½1¼Undersail wind, drizzly, wet; we were obliged to carry topsails because of the land sighted in the far distance.
93¼SESE1¼
103¼SE/E½E1¼Took three reefs in topsails.
112¾S/WSE/E1¼
122¼SE/E½E1¼Heavy rain.
12¾1¼
22½SE/E¾E1¼Squally, rainy, gale blowing; furled topsails.
32½SESE1¾
421¾
51¾3Strong undersail wind and a heavy swell.
61¾3
71¾3Clear with passing clouds; looked for land from the main-topmast but did not see any though we could see 5 or 6 German miles away.
81¾S/WSE/E2½
92SESE2½
102¾S/WSE/E2½
113SESE2½
122½SE/E½E2½Wind freshening, heavy swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningESE8°07′E40.5S 10.4′E 34.362.7′51° 17′202½E6°53′S21° 48′

Probably Adak and Atka Islands.

Probably the volcano on Great Sitkin Island.

Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted land, W point W by S, and E point ENE about 8 miles, which seems to be an island; a snow-covered mountain, which we think is on the mainland, WNW½N 12 German miles.”


{p. 169}

September 26, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼SWSSE½E3Reef-undersail wind, squally; carrying foresail, mainsail reefed, and trysail.
223
31¾3
41¾3
523Heavy storm.
623Furled foresail and mainsail, hauled up main-staysail, and hove to.
71¾WSSW5½
81¾5½
91¾5½
101¾5½Wind going down a little, drizzly and chilly.
111½6
121½6
11½6
216
316
41½3Set foresail and mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
51¾W/SS/W3Reef-topsail wind, set reefed topsails with all reefs in them.
61¼S2
71¼2
81½SW/WS/E½E216 men on the sick list.
91¾SWSSE¼E1½
1021½Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
112½SW/SSE/S1½
122¾1½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/S0°04′S49S 34′E 22.636.7′50° 43′210½E/S2°18′S22° 25′

{p. 170}

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS

September 27, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾SSWSE1½Topsail wind, cold, cloudy; carrying reefed topsails, staysails, and lower sails.
22¾SE½E1½
32¾1½Took three reefs in topsails.
42¾1½Lowered staysails.
52½S/WSE/E3Gale, squalls, heavy swell; furled topsails.
61¾3
71¾3
81½3Wind going down a little.
91½SSWSE3¼Reef-topsail wind, cold.
101½3¼
111½3½Rain.
121½SWSSE3¼Shifting winds, drizzly.
11¼SSE½E3¼
21¾SSWSE3¼
32SW/SSE/S3Squally, stars out.
42¼3Set topsails with three reefs in them.
52¼SWSSE½E1½
62¾1½Strong reef-topsail wind, cold.
731½
82¼1½Furled fore-topsail; clear with passing clouds; furled main-topsail
91¾5½Heavy storm; furled foresail and mainsail; hauled up main-staysail, and hove to.
101¾5½Coming up to S by E, falling off to SE.
111¾5½Strong gale blowing, heavy sea running, clear with passing clouds; carrying trysail and main-staysail.
121¾5½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/E2°23′E46.7S 24′E 4060.4′50° 19′221¾E/S1°11′E23° 25′

{p. 171}

September 28, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12WSWS½E5½Heavy storm, clear with passing clouds; carrying main-staysail and trysail.
225½
325½
425½Coming up to S by W, falling off to SSE.
525½Wet.
625½
72S5½Lowered fore and main yards on account of the storm.
825½
925½Squalls, rain and hail.
1025½Coming up to SSW, falling off to SSE.
1125½
1225½Stars out, chilly.
12W/SS½W5½Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
22WS/W½W5½Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S.
325½
42W/NSSW½W5½Coming up to SW, falling off to S by W.
52SSW¼W5½Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S½E.
625½
725½
825½
92SSW5½Coming up to SW, falling off to S.
1025½Heavy storm, occasional rain.
1125½
1225½Carrying main-staysail and trysail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSE/S4°48′E46.5S 36.6′E 29.246′49° 42′231¾E/S0°42′S24° 11′

{p. 172}

September 29, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12W/NSSW5½Heavy storm, squalls, rain, and hail.
225½
325½Carrying trysail and main-staysail.
425½
525½Coming up to SW, falling off to S.
61¾5½Heavy clouds overhead, chilly, clear with passing clouds.
71¾5½
81¾5½
91¾5½At times the wind comes in gusts.
101¾5½Clear with passing clouds.
111¾5½Occasional rain.
121¾5½Strong reef-undersail wind, weather as before.
11½WNWSSW¼W5½
21½5½
31½5½Coming up to SW½W, falling off to S.
41½5½Squalls.
51¼WS/W¼W6Undersail wind, clear with passing clouds.
61¼6
71¼6Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S½E.
81¼6Clear with passing clouds.
91W/SS5½Wind going down; set mainsail, hauled down staysail.
1015½Coming up to SSW, falling off to SSE.
1115½Wind in gusts, heavy passing clouds.
121WS½W5½Coming up to SSW½W, falling off to SE½E; heavy swell from W.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSE6°08′E36S 31.5′E 17.226′49° 11′238½E/S2°16′S24° 37′

{p. 173}

September 30, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11SW/WSSE½E5½Topsail wind, cloudy; carrying mainsail and trysail.
215½
315½Wind tore the catharpings of the shrouds on the right side of the two main shrouds, on which we made a shroud with knob.
415½
515½
615½Westerly swell.
7¾5½Wind going down.
8¾5½Weather as before; from noon until midnight we laid the course on the average between coming up to and falling off to the wind.
9¾SW/SSE¼E5½
10¾5½
11¾SESE5½
12¾SWSE/S5½
11½SSESW2½Undersail wind; set foresail, made the port tack, set mainsail.
222½
32¼2½
42½2½Reef-undersail wind, squalls, wet.
54SW/SSW½S1
65SW/S1Heavy storm, rain and squalls.
71¼SESW¼W6½Furled foresail and mainsail, hove to under trysail; coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by W½W.
81¼6½
91½SW/S6½Coming up to S by W, falling off to SW by W.
101½6½Because of the gale the fore and mainyards were lowered to half-mast.
111¾S/WW6½Reefed trysail.
121¾6½Terrific storm and squall.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW110′W 1116.8′49° 11′236E/S2°25′S24° 20′

{p. 174}

October 1, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12SSWW6½Frightful storm, heavy squalls, waves washing over the deck.
226½
326½
426½Clear with passing clouds.
52SW/SW½N6½Heavy clouds, squalls.
626½
72SWWNW¾W6½
826½Terrific storm and great waves.
926½
1026½
1126½Heavy rain.
1226½Drizzly.
126½
22WNW½W6½
326½
426½Heavy clouds, wet, stormy; one of the lanyards to the main shroud on the left side tore loose; also the main-topmast stay, which we repaired.
52SW/SNW/W½W6½
626½
726½
826½
92SW/WNW½W6½On the right side the gun port bulwark was carried out to sea, and we nailed boards in its place.
1026½
1126½Heavy gale, wet, squally; all day the waves from both sides washed over the deck.
122SWNW6½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/E5°13′E46N 44.2′E 1320′49° 55′230½E/S0°16′E24° 40′

{p. 175}

October 2, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12WSWNW½N6½Terrific storm, heavy squalls and high seas, drizzly; carrying trysail.
226½
326½Unbent the sprit and took a reef in it and made it ready in place of the trysail, because in this storm it was not likely that the trysail could hold out.
426½
526½
626½
71¾W/SNW/N6½Sea going down a bit.
81¾6½Weather as before.
91¾6½
101¾6½Heavy clouds, rain.
111¾WSWNW½N7
121¾7Strong sale, stars out.
11½7Cloudy, chilly.
21½7
31½7A regular storm.
41¼7
51¼7Cloudy.
61¼SW/WNW¾W7
717Clear with passing clouds.
81SWS/E½E6Gale blowing. At 8:30 set fore-staysail, came about with the wind, and hove to on the starboard tack; examined the damaged shrouds on the left side and repaired them.
91SSE6
1016
1116
1216Clear with passing clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNE/E0°23′E34½N 19′E 28.744′50° 14′240¼E/S1°40′E25° 24′

{p. 176}

October 3, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11S/WSE/E5½Undersail wind, heavy SW swell.
215½Drizzly, rainy; carrying trysail and main-staysail.
3½5½Wind going down; set mainsail, lowered main-staysail, patched the trysail which had been damaged.
4½5½
5½5½
6½5½Set trysail.
7¾S/EE/S5½
8¾5½
9¾5½Undersail wind.
1015½Wind freshening.
1115½
1215½
14½ESESW5½Set foresail, came about with the wind on the port tack, and went our way; heavy rain.
23½7
31SWSSE½E7Undersail wind; starboard tack, hove to under trysail, furled foresail.
417
51½SSWSE¼E6
61½6Heavy clouds, rain; set main-staysail.
71½6
81½6Very chilly and damp.
91½6
101½SWSSE6Gale.
111½6This day while we were hove to we laid the course on the average between coming up to and falling off to the wind.
121½S/E½E6

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/S7°21′E15S 1′E 14.723′50° 13′243¾E/S1°45′E25° 47′

{p. 177}

October 4, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SW/WS/E6½Strong undersail wind, rain; carrying trysail and, main-staysail.
21½6½
31½W/SS½W6½Squalls.
41½6½Storm; hauled down main-staysail.
51½WSSW6½
61½6½Wind as before, drizzly and very chilly.
71½6½
81½6½
91½W/NSSW¾W6½
101½6½Light rain.
111½6½Clear with passing clouds.
121½6½
11½6½
21¼SW/S7Reef-undersail wind, heavy sea, drizzly and rainy.
31¼7
41¼7Wind comes in gusts.
51SSW½W6Undersail wind, chilly.
616Hoisted main-staysail.
715½Set mainsail, hauled down main-staysail.
815½At the end of the hour set the foresail.
91¼W/SS/W1½Hoisted topsails with three reefs in each.
101¼WSWS1½
111¼1½
121½SW/WS/E1½Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSE7°29′E30S 26′E 1523.3′49° 47′249¾E/S0°28′E26° 10′

{p. 178}

October 5, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½SWSSE½E¾Reef-topsail wind, westerly swell; carrying foresail, mainsail, reefed topsails, trysail, and top-mast-staysails.
23SSWSE¾
33¾
42¾S/WSE/E1½Lowered staysails; rainy.
53SWSW1½At the beginning of the hour made the port tack.
63S/WWSW½W1½
73½SSESW½W1½Strong reef-topsail wind and rain.
83S/ES/W1½Squalls.
93¼1½Furled fore-topsail.
103SSESW2½Furled main-topsail; reef-undersail wind, heavy downpour.
1122½
121½2½Furled mainsail, hauled up main-staysail.
11½SWSW2½Light rain.
22SSWW2½Set main-topsail reefed.
32SWWNW½W2½Chilly, clear with passing clouds.
42½2½
52¾SW/WNW/W2½Storm, furled main-topsail.
61WSWS4Made starboard tack.
71¾S½E4
81½4Strong reef-topsail wind.
91¾SW/WS/E½E4
101¼4
111¼4Storm; furled foresail, hove to under main-staysail and trysail.
121WSWS½E5½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW0°39′S16S 6.2′W 14.522′49° 41′246½E/S0°02′S25° 48′

{p. 179}

October 6, 1741. Alter Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WSWS½E5½Stormy, clear with passing clouds, wet; carrying trysail and main-staysail.
21½5½
31½SW/WS/E½E5½
41½5½Reefed trysail.
51½6Squalls.
61½6Heavy clouds, chilly.
71½6Waves from both sides washing over the deck.
81½6
91½SWSSE½E6Heavy storm, wet.
101½6½Hauled down main-staysail.
111½6½
121½6½Clear with passing clouds.
11½6½
21½6½
31½WSWS/E6½Wind going down a bit.
41½6½
51½6½Light rain.
61½6½
71½W/SS½W6Stormy, set main-staysail.
81½6
91¼6Clear with passing clouds.
101¼6
111¼6Weather as before, wet.
121¼6Heavy westerly swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningESE0°08′E33S 12.5′E 30.445.7′49° 29′255¼E/S0°21′S26° 34′

{p. 180}

October 7, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½W/SS½W6Heavy storm, clear with passing cloud; carrying trysail and main-staysail.
21½6
31½6Chilly.
41½5½Rain.
51¾5½Terrific storm.
61¾5½
71¾5½Squalls and rain.
81¾5½
91½6
101½6
111¼6Storm going down a bit.
121¼WSWS½E6
11W/SS½W6Undersail wind.
215
31½WS/W½W5Set mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
41½5
51½WNWSW½S5Reef-topsail wind, cold.
62¼NW/WSW/W1¾Set foresail and reefed topsails.
72¼1¾
82SW½W1¾Hauled up topmast-staysails.
92¼SW/W1¾Rain, heavy westerly swell; during the day the course was kept between coming up to and falling off to. Took an observation which gave latitude 48° 43′, but on account of the swell no account was taken of it.
102½SW½W1¾
112½1¾
122¾1¾

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS8°36′E30S 29.8′E 4.56.8′48° 59′259E/S1°52′S26° 41′

{p. 181}

October 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾NW/WSW½W1½Topsail wind, cloudy, chilly; carrying reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast-staysails.
22¾1½
32¾1½Heavy clouds, squalls.
42¾1½Strong westerly swell.
52¾1½The trysail stay parted, which we repaired.
62½1½
721½
822
92¼2Squalls and rain.
101¾WNWSW2
111½2
122SW½S2
11½W/NSW/S2Topsail wind and unsteady.
21½2
31½2
41½2
51¼WSSW2Light wind, cloudy.
6½W/SNW/N2At 6:30 we wore ship and made the port tack.
7½SWWNW1½Let out two reefs in topsails.
82SSWW½N1½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
92¼W1½
103S/WW½S1Reef-topsail wind.
114½1Took two reefs in topsails.
124½W/S1Wind freshening; hauled down topmast-staysails, took three reefs in topsails.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW2°43′S41.7S 17.8′W 37.858′48° 41′251¾E/S2°18′S25° 43′

{p. 182}

October 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14½S/EWSW1Topsail wind, cold, drizzly; carrying reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail.
23½1Furled fore-topsail because of the gale.
33¼1½Furled main-topsail.
41¼1½
52SW/W½W6At 5:30 furled foresail and hove to under main-staysail and trysail.
61½6
71½SSWW½N5Heavy swell from south.
81½5Set mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
91½5Drizzly and rainy.
101½5Wind freshening.
111½6Furled mainsail, hauled up main-staysail.
121½SW/SWNW½W6
11½6
21½SWNW/W½W6Terrific storm.
31½6
41½6Heavy squalls.
51½WSWNW½N6
61½6
71½W/SNNW6The lanyard of the main shroud on the left side parted, which we repaired.
81½WN/W½W6
91¾W/NN½W6½Terrific gale blowing; hauled down main-staysail, carrying only the reefed trysail.
101¾6½
111¾6½
121¾6½Heavy squalls, and the lee side of the ship is under water.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN8°39′W22N 21.7′W 3.35′49° 03′249E/S2°10′S25° 38′

{p. 183}

October 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WNWN½E6Storm and squalls, clear with passing clouds.
21½6
31½6Carrying reefed trysail.
41½6
51½6Thick clouds, rain.
61½6
71½W/NN½W5½Storm.
81½5½Hauled up main-staysail.
91½5½Hail, squalls.
101½5½
111½6Terrific storm, lowered main-staysail.
121½6
11½6
21½6
31½6Have difficulty in carrying trysail because of the strong wind.
41½WNWN½E6
51½W/NN6Frightful squalls.
61½6Hail.
71½6Snow, cold.
81½6
91½6Clear with passing clouds.
101½6
111½6Heavy sea running, washing over the deck from both sides.
121½6

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningE/N1°14′E34N 6′E 33.451′49° 09′256E/S1°27′S26° 29′

{p. 184}

October 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½W/NN½W6Storm, squalls, clear with passing clouds; carrying trysail.
21½6
31½6
41¼WN/W½W6Storm.
51¼6Hoisted main-staysail.
61¼6
71¼6
816Reef-undersail wind.
916Cloudy.
101N/W6Gusts of wind, heavy clouds.
1116
1216Stars out, chilly.
1¾6½
2¾6½Undersail wind, westerly swell.
3½N/W½W5½Set mainsail.
4½5½Hauled down main-staysail.
51½W/NSW/S1½Reef-topsail wind, set foresail.
62¾NW/WSW½W1½Came about with the wind and lay on the starboard tack.
72½W/NSW/S1½Set topsails reefed, hauled up topmast-staysails.
82¾WNWSW1½
92½1½
102½1½Let out a reef in topsails.
112½1½
122¾1½Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; from noon to 5 o’clock in the morning we kept the course on the average between coming up to and falling off to the wind. Took an observation: zenith distance 59° 14′, declination of the sun 10° 59′, latitude 48° 15′. From the 10th until this observation we kept the course by reckoning.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSSE4°03′E11S 10′E 58′48° 59′26° 31′
By ObservationSSE4°03′E61S 54′E 27.541.7′48° 15′268E/S3°50′S27° 11′

{p. 185}

WESTWARD AGAIN

October 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼NW/WSW½W1¼Topsail wind, cloudy; carrying topsails and lower sails reefed and topmast-staysails.
221¼
321¼
42SW/W1¼
51½WNWSW1½Topgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails.
61½1½
71¼SW½S2Took two reefs in topsails.
81½2
912Light wind.
10No windClewed up mainsail and foresail.
11Northwesterly swell.
12Lowered staysails.
1¾SW/SLight wind; set foresail and mainsail, hoisted topmast-staysail.
22SSE
34½Let out second reef in topsails.
44ESECloudy, rainy.
55¼
66SEReef-topsail wind.
77¼Hauled down topmast-staysails.
87½SSETook second reef in topsails.
93½SSWW¾Drizzly, rainy.
103½¾Reef-topsail wind.
113½¾Weather as before.
123¾S/WW/SHoisted fore-topmast-staysail.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW4°47′S60S 5′W 59.8′89.7′48° 10′254¾E/S4°56′S25° 41′

{p. 186}

October 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SW/SW/N1Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying topsails and lower sails reefed.
23¼SWWNW1
33½WNW½W1
43¼SW/SW/N1¼Strong reef-topsail wind.
52½1¼
62¼1¼
71¼WNW½W6½Hove to.
81¼6½
91¼SW/WNW½W6
101¼6
111¼WSWNW½N6
121¼6Storm.
11¼SW/WNW½W6
21¼6
31¼W/SNNW½W6
41¼6
5½WN/W½W6½
6½6½
71½NNW½W2Hoisted mainsail and foresail.
81½2Hoisted main-topsail.
91¼WSWNW221 men on sick list.
101WNNW2
112½W/SS/W¼W1½Tacked to starboard.
122½1½Westerly swell.[103]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/W5°40′W24N 23′W 710′48° 33′250¾E/S3°50′S25° 31′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation, 48° 37′, used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 187}

October 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12W/SS¾W1½Reef-topsail wind, heavy passing clouds, westerly swell.
221½
32¼SW/WNW½W1½Carrying topsails and lower sails reefed.
42½1½
52SWWNW½W1¾Rain and hail.
62SW/WNW/W1¾Squalls and rain, hail.
71¾WSWNW2½Furled topsails.
822½Storm.
92¼2½Moon out.
1022½
1122½
121½NW½N3Undersail wind.
11½SW/WNW/W3Wind varying.
21¾3
31¾WSWNW3Thick clouds, heavy squalls, rain and hail.
42SW/WNW/W2½
52¼WSWNW1¾
62NW½N1¾Set topsails reefed.
71¾SW/WNW/W1¾Let out reef in main-topsail.
82¼1¾24 men on sick list.
91¾WSWNW½W1¾
101¾SW/WNW/W1¾Let out reef in fore-topsail.
1121¾Topsail wind
122½WSWNW½W1¾Cloudy, heavy westerly swell.[104]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN/W3°55′W39½N 37.7′W 10.315.6′49° 11′244½E/S1°56′S25° 15′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation, 49° 17′, used on the chart (Pl. 1).


{p. 188}

October 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½WSWNW½N1½Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying reefed topsails, lower sails, and staysails.
231½
32¾SW/WNW/W1½
42¼WSWNW1¾Thick clouds, squalls, hail.
52¼1¾Southwesterly swell.
62¼1¾Took three reefs in topsails, lowered staysails.
71¾1¾
82¼1¾Clear with passing clouds.
92½NW½N1½
101¾SW/WNW/W2Squalls, rain, snow.
112½WSWNW1¾
1221¾Topsail wind, cold.
11½1¾Topgallantsail wind and changeable.
21¼1¾Thick clouds, wet.
31¼WNNW½W2Squalls, rain.
41¾NNW2
522Topgallantsail wind.
62NNW½W2Wind in gusts.
71¾WSWNW½N2Wind shifting.
82WNWN1¾Clear with passing clouds.
91WSWS½WMade the port tack, let out two reefs in topsails.
101½WNWSW½S2
111WSWS½WLight wind, clear with passing clouds.
12½WS/W½W3Westerly swell. Took an observation: zenith distance 62° 18′, declination of the sun 12° 22′, latitude 49° 56′.[105]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By ObservationN5°20′W46N 45′W 4.26.3′49° 56′239½E/S0°33′E25° 09′

Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 49° 58′.


{p. 189}

October 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1½WNWSE/ECalm, chilly, clear with passing clouds.
22SW½S1½
32NW/WSW/W1½Topsail wind, thick clouds, snow, squalls.
42½NWSW½W1½
521½Variable.
621½Took second reef in topsails.
72½NW/NW/S1¼Reef-topsail wind; took third reef in topsails.
82¾1¼
92¾1¼Squalls, snow.
102½1¼Moon and stars out.
112¾NWWSW1½Squalls, snow.
1221½
11¾1½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
21½1½
31¼NNWW½S1½Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
421½
51¾NWWSW1½
62¾NW/NW/S1¼Let out all reefs in topsails.
721¼
82NWWSW1½Clear with passing clouds.
92¼WNWSW1½Topsail wind.
101½SW½S2Topgallantsail wind.
1112Light wind, clear, sunshine.
121½SE¼E2Took observation: latitude 49° 34′, but made no change in the dead reckoning because of the slight difference.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W8°35′W44S 18.6′W 39.659′49° 37′232E/S1°0′S24° 10′

{p. 190}

October 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1No windClear with passing clouds.
2
3At times calm; repaired various damages caused by the storm.
4
5
62SW/STopgallantsail wind; took second reef in topsails.
73½S/E
84Topsail wind.
94Drizzly.
105Reef-topsail wind, thick clouds, wind freshening.
116½
126¼Hauled down main-topmast-staysail.
16½
26½Cloudy, rainy, wind in gusts; hauled down fore-topmast-staysail, topsails on the caps.
36¼SE
46¼
56½Gale, rain; took third reef in fore-topsail.
66¼
75¼EFurled main-topsail, clewed up foresail because it was torn in one place.
85
94¼Strong reef-undersail wind.
104
113¾Wind going down.
123¾Let out reef in fore-topsail; reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW¼N95N 4.7′W 94.8142′49° 42′210E/S1°58′S21° 48′

{p. 191}

October 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13E/NW/SReef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
24NE/EWSWFurled fore-topsail, set foresail and main-topsail, clewed up mainsail.
34½
44½NNEW/SGale.
51½N/ENW/W6½Furled the sails and hove to under reefed trysail.
61½6½
71½NWNW½W6½Storm.
81½6½
91½6½
101½6½Drizzly, wet.
111½N/WW½N6½
121½6½At times the moon is out.
11¼6½Stormy.
21¼6½
31NW/NWSW½W7Strong reef-undersail wind, cloudy.
417
517
61½W/S2Undersail wind; set foresail and mainsail.
71¾2
82¼2Examined main-topsail shrouds which were damaged.[106]
92¼WSW½W2
1022Northerly swell.
111¾2Repaired main-topsail shrouds, set both topsails, and let out a reef in each.
121¾NWWSW2

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW/W7°25′W43S 19′W 38.457.6′49° 23′203E/S3°49′S20° 50′

Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: Captain Commander and 32 men.”


{p. 192}

DEATHS FROM SCURVY

October 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼NW/WSW¾W1Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails and lower sails and staysails.
22¼1
32¾WNWSW½S1
42½W/NSW/S1Thick clouds, squalls, wet; hauled down staysails.
51¾SW½S1½
62¾1½
7¾1½Light wind, drizzly, wet.
8¾1½
91½SWWNW2With the change of wind we made the port tack.
102SW/SW/N1½
113¼SSWW½N1Topsail wind, cloudy.
123¼SSWW
13¾S/WReef-topsail wind.
23¾Drizzly, rainy.
34S
44½
55Strong reef-topsail wind.
65½Weather as before.
75By the will of God Alexei Kiselev died of scurvy; 29 men on the sick list.
85
94Wind going down; let out reef in topsails.
104
115Rain.
123½Southerly swell; hauled up topmast-staysails.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW5°44′N70N 7′W 69.8107.6′49° 30′186E/S4°40′S19° 02′

{p. 193}

October 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½SW/S½Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; with the change of wind we made the port tack.
23NWWSW1
33¼1Undersail wind; lowered staysails.
43WSW½W1
52½NW/WSW/W1¼Furled topsails.
61¼1¼Thick clouds, squalls, wet; furled foresail, hove to under the mainsail and trysail.
71½
81¼5Storm.
91¼WNWSW½S5Clear with passing showers.
101¼5
111¼5Thick clouds, hail, rain.
121¼5
115Wind going down.
215
31W/NSSW½W5Undersail wind.
41WS/W½W5Cloudy.
515Heavy northerly swell.
61W/SS½W5
7¾WSWNW4Reef-topsail wind, set foresail.
81¾SW/WNW/W2Set topsails reefed; Nikita Kharitonov died by the will of God.
92½S/WW/N
104SWClear with passing clouds; took three reefs in fore-topsail; heavy squalls which obliged us to ease up on the lanyards to the topsail shrouds; tacked to port.[107]
115½
123½SSW1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWSW2°51′W29.7S 10′W 2842′49° 20′180½E/S5°59′S18° 20′

Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: Captain Commander, petty officers and men to the number of 32.”


{p. 194}

October 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SW/SWNW½W2Topgallantsail wind, wet, sunshine.
21¼2Took three reefs in main-topsail.
31¼SW/WNW/W2
42½W/NN½W1Thick clouds, squalls, rain; made the starboard tack.
52¾NWWSW1½
62¼1½Stormy, wet.
71¾3Furled topsails.
81½3Cloudy, rain, hail.
91¼NW/WSW½W5Gale; furled foresail, hove to under the mainsail and trysail.
101¼WNWSW½S5Stormy.
111¼5Squalls, rain and hail.
121¼W/NSSW½W5Stars out.
11½WSSW3½Reef-topsail wind; set foresail.
21¼3½Clear with passing clouds.
31W/SS½W3½Came about with the wind and made the port tack.
41¾SW/WNW½W2½
51¾WSWNW2½Set the topsails reefed.
63¼SW/WNW/W1½Hauled up topmast-staysails.
72¾NW¾W1½Thick clouds, hail, snow.
82½1½Clear with passing clouds, reef-topsail wind.
92¼NW/W½W1½
102½NW/W1½Thick clouds, squalls; at times we were obliged to ease up on the lanyards to the topmast shrouds; westerly swell.
1121½
122½NW½W1½Took an observation: latitude 49° 27′, but because of the small difference from the dead reckoning it was not considered.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/W3°49′N16½N 9.8′W 12.920′49° 30′176¾E/S5°32′S18° 0′

{p. 195}

October 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¼WSWNW¼W1½Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds, thick clouds, hail; carrying topsails and lower sails reefed.
221½
32WNNW1½
41¾WNWSW2Made the starboard tack.
51¾WSSW½W1¾
621¾Topsail wind.
72SSW1½
82¼1½
921½Thick clouds, squalls, and wet.
102½1½Undersail wind, weather as before.
111¼S/W½W6Furled topsails, foresail, mainsail; hove to on the main-staysail and trysail.
121¼6
11¼6
21¼W/NSSW½W5½By the will of God died the marine Luka Zaviakov.
31¼5½
41¼5½Storm, squalls, hail.
51WNWSW½S5½Very chilly.
615½Wind going down a bit.
715½
815½Undersail wind.
91½NW/WSW/W2Set foresail and mainsail.
101¾2Clear with passing clouds.
111½2Set topsails reefed.
121¼2We wrapped the dead marine and dropped him into the sea.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS/W7°11′W22S 21′W 710′49° 09′172¼ESE4°0′E17° 50′

{p. 196}

October 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾NWNNE1¼Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. At the beginning of this hour made port tack. It was agreed that we should keep close to the land because we had only 15 casks of water.[108]
22¼1¼
32¼NW/WN/E1¼
42WNWN½E1¼
52NWNNE1¼
61¼1¼At the end of this hour we came about on the starboard tack because the wind was unfavorable for going ahead.
71½NW/NW/S2
81¼2
912Light wind, clear with passing clouds, thick clouds overhead, wet, westerly swell.
10¾NWWSW2
11No windIn 4 hours we made leeway at the rate of half knot per hour E by S.
12½Clewed up mainsail and foresail.
1
2
3
4½
5
6½SEWNWLight wind.
7¾Cloudy.
82½S/ETopgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails.
93¼W/N
103¼SETopsail wind, cloudy.
113½Very chilly.
123¼Today I became ill with the scurvy but am not counted among the sick.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/N0°04′N18N 15′W 1015′49° 24′173½ESE4°53′E17° 35′

Khitrov’s journal: “We and the petty officers had a consultation with the Captain Commander. The winds had continuously been contrary and of water we had only 15 casks. It was dangerous either to go on or to wait for a change of wind, and we therefore unanimously agreed to sail N in the hope of finding a place to take water, without which a great misfortune would overtake us.”


{p. 197}

October 24, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14SEW/NTopsail wind, chilly; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail reefed.
25
34
44½E/SStrong reef-topsail wind.
55Took second and third reefs in fore-topsail; heavy clouds, wet.
64½
74½W
84½Clewed up mainsail.
95
104¾Rain, heavy passing clouds.
114½
124¾Snow.
15½Clewed up mainsail.
25½
36EUndersail wind, drizzly, rain.
46
56
67½ENEW/NStorm, gusts of wind.
76¾
86½
95¾NEWNWSqualls, rain, snow.
105Took three reefs in main-topsail.
114½Set mainsail.
124½Reef-topsail wind, weather the same.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW0°34′W123N 46′W 114.3177′50° 10′142¾E/S5°28′S14° 38′

{p. 198}

October 25, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
14¼NEWNWReef-topsail wind, drizzly; carrying foresail and mainsail.
24Squalls, snow.
33
43¼NSet mainsail, hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
53½
62½Northerly swell.
72½¾Stars out, chilly.
82½¾Heavy passing clouds.
92¼¾
102¾¾Reef-topsail wind.
113¾
123¾Strong reef-topsail wind, cold.
13¾
23¾
33¾At times the moon is shining.
43¾Northerly swell.
53N/WW/N1Large hailstones coming down, cold, heavy passing clouds.
631
72¾1
82¾1Clear with passing clouds. At 8 a.m. sighted land covered with snow in NW by N.[109]
92½1Reef-topsail wind, gusty at times.
102½1
112½NNWW1Clear with passing clouds. Took an observation: zenith distance 66° 24′, declination of the sun 15° 34′, latitude 50° 50′.[110] The land which we sighted in the morning bears now N by W¼W about 8½ German miles. We take this land to be an island and named it St. Markiana.[111]
123¼1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW3°04′N69.6N 29.7′W 62.798.6′50° 40′12° 59′
By ObservationNW/W1°20′W69.6N 40′W 56.989.6′50° 50′125¾E/S3°02′S13° 09′

Khitrov’s journal: “Saw land in NW by N, 8 miles distant, which we took for an island.”

Khitrov’s journal: “The island we sighted is high, rocky, treeless, and covered with snow. Latitude 51° 11′ . . .” This refers to the latitude of the ship at 8 a.m., when the island was first sighted (see Waxel’s report, p. 275); on the chart (Pl. 1) the October 25 noon position has been plotted accordingly, as this brings the subsequent landfalls into better agreement with the actual conditions than the observed latitude of 50° 50′, which was probably a poor observation, and the recorded day’s run of 69.6 knots, which probably underestimated the current and was too low.

Kiska Island. [Sokolov (Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851, pp. 394-395) identifies St. Markiana Island as Amchitka and St. Stephen Island, sighted on October 28 (here interpreted as Buldir), as Kiska. If the arc of visibility be plotted of the highest point of each of the two islands (Amchitka: height 1,008 feet, visibility radius 32 knots; Kiska: height 4,050 feet, visibility radius 70 knots) with reference to the probable course of the St. Peter as adjusted to the latitude of 51° 11′ and the bearing NW by N at the time of sighting, it seems probable, however, that the island seen was Kiska and not Amchitka. This would also seem to be indicated by the characterization of the island as high. “Amchitka is . . . low . . . The offshore navigator can not expect to see Amchitka at all as there are no commanding elevations” (United States Coast Pilot: Alaska. Part II, 1st edition, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C., 1916, p. 222).—Edit. Note.]


{p. 199}

LANDFALL: KISKA ISLAND

October 26, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾NNWW1¼Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, squalls, snow; carrying staysails, topsails, and lower sails.
231¼
32¾1¼
42¾1¼Northerly swell.[112]
52¾N/WW/N1¼
62½1¼
73NNWW1¼Heavy passing clouds and snowstorm.
82¾1¼
92¾1¼Clear with passing clouds.
102½1¼
112½N/WW½N1½Wet.
122¾1½
12¾W/N1½
22¼1½Heavy passing clouds and rain.
321½
42¼W½N1½Heavy passing clouds, wind in gusts.
52½NNWW1½
62¼1½Snow.
72¼1½
82¼1½Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. 30 on the sick list.
92¾1½
102½N/WW/N1½Chilly.
112½1½Topsail wind, weather as before.
1221½Topsail wind.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW25°06′N58.6N 2.9′W 58.292.6′50° 53′111½E/S4°29′S11° 36′

Khitrov’s journal: “4 o’clock in the afternoon sighted an island; southern point of it bore true N.” [The “island” sighted was probably the southern end of Kiska Island, 1,200 to 1,500 feet high and with a radius of visibility of about 40 knots, and was not recognized as part of the same island of which it was the northern peak, 4,050 feet high and with a radius of visibility of about 70 knots, that had been sighted eight hours before. —Edit. Note.]


{p. 200}

October 27, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½N/WW½N1½Topsail wind, drizzly; hauled up main-topmast-staysail; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail reefed, staysails, and trysail.
221½
32½NW/NW/S1½
422
51NWWSW2Light wind, drizzly.
612
71NW/WSW/W2
812
9½2Clear with passing clouds.
10½2
11Calm2
121¾SW/WNW/W2Topgallantsail wind; made the starboard tack.
111½
22SWNW/W½W1½Stars out, heavy passing clouds, rain.
31¾1½
41¾1½
53SW/WNW/W1¼Topsail wind.
64SW/SWNW1Rain.
741I have such pains in my feet and hands, owing to the scurvy, that I can with difficulty stand my watch. 32 on the sick list.
841
93¾1
104½1Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly; hauled down topmast-staysails.
114¼1Clewed up trysail.
1241Reef-topsail wind, heavy passing clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/W1°36′[?]N57.6N 27.1′W 38.261′51° 20′100¼E/S2°18′S10° 35′

{p. 201}

LANDFALL: BULDIR ISLAND

October 28, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SW/SWNW1Reef-topsail wind, heavy passing clouds; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
23½1
33½1
43½1
541Undersail wind. Owing to the squalls we were obliged to ease up on the lanyards to the topmast shrouds; furled topsails.
641
72SSWW/N3
81¾3
91½3Drizzly.
101¾W½N3½Wind as before.
111¾3½Reef-topsail wind.
1223½Southwesterly swell.
11¾W3½
21½3½Wind going down a bit, drizzly, rainy.
31½3½
41½3½By the will of God Stephen Buldirev,[113] naval cooper, died of scurvy.
51½3½
62½3½Set topsails and topmast-staysails.
7At 7:30 sighted high land,[114] one point bore N by W½W 2 miles, another point NW½W.
8
9Clewed up foresail, mainsail, and trysail because there was little wind.
10
11Drizzly, wet; sounded and got 63 fathoms.
122½SSEW/NSet foresail and mainsail; topgallantsail wind. Of the land sighted earlier, the first point bears ENE 2 miles; near it are three small islands to the east not far apart; the second point NNE¾E 1 mile. We named the island St. Stephen.[115]

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/N5°40′W45N 34.8′W 28.643′51° 55′91½E/S1°58′E9° 52′

Another reading is Stepan Bogdriev. See. however, next footnote and entry under 12 p.m.

Buldir Island.

Khitrov’s journal: “Land sighted proved to be an island extending WNW-ESE, the western point bearing NNE, the eastern ENE. From it were seen three small islands, distant 3½ or 4 miles. The longest seemed to be 4½ German miles.”


{p. 202}

October 29, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SE/SW/NTopsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying topsails, foresail, and mainsail.
24
34½
45¼Gale.
55¼Took three reefs in topsails.
65½
75WDrizzly, rainy; furled topsails on account of darkness and heavy gale.
84¼
94½
104¾W/S
114¾Sounded 70 or 80 fathoms but did not strike bottom.
124¾
14W
23¾Wind going down, clear with passing clouds.
34
44½Sounded in 60 fathoms, no bottom.
54¾SSEW/N
64¾Gale, drizzly, wet.
73½
83Topsail wind, cold, air thick.
9135 fathoms of water; because of the fog we could not see anything and therefore hove to; clewed up foresail and mainsail.
10½SSighted a low island the middle of which bore W 1½ miles.[116]
114½WN½WWhen the fog lifted we sighted land in the west; set topsails and foresail.
124NReef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. The island[117] sighted at 10 o’clock bears now WSW 2½ German miles: we named it St. Abraham. Near it is a projection like a cape.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningWNW0°50′W90N 35.7′W 82.8135′52° 31′69¾E4°44′S7° 37′

Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted an island; northern point W by N, Southern point W by S 3½ miles. At noon the northern point of the island bore WSW.”

Easternmost of the Semichi Islands.


{p. 203}

THE LAST STRETCH

October 30, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13WN/W¾W1¼Reef-topsail wind, drizzly; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail.
231¼
32¼W/NN/W1¼Topsail wind, weather the same.
42½1½Rain.
52¼1½
621½Rain.
72¼WNNW1½Southwest swell.
821½
92¼W/SNW/N1½Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing rains.
102½1½
112½1½Sounded in 70 fathoms, no bottom.
122¼1½
12¼S½W2¾Made the starboard tack.
22½2¾
32½2¾Clear with passing clouds.
41¾WSWS3
51SW/SW/N2Light wind, weather the same; made the port tack.
6¾2
72SSWW1¼[118]
831¼Reef-topsail wind.
92¾1¼Hauled up topmast-staysails.
103¼1Drizzly, wet.
1141Strong reef-topsail wind.
122¾1

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNW1°18′N35N 33′W 12.821′53° 04′65½E2°11′N7° 16′

Khitrov’s journal gives observed but discarded latitude 52° 27′.


{p. 204}

October 31, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½S/WW¾S1¼Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain; carrying topsails, foresail, trysail, and staysails.
23½1¼
32¾SW/SW/N1¼
42¾WNW¼W1½Hauled down main-topmast-staysail.
52¾1½
62¾SW/WNW/W1½
72½1½Wind as before, heavy passing clouds.
82¼NW½W1½
92½1½Stars out.
102½1½
112NW/W1¾Topsail wind.
122¼1¾
12¼SWNW/W½W1½Squally clouds; occasionally the stars are seen.
22¾1½At 2:30 made the starboard tack.
31¼SW/WS/E3
423
52¼WSWS2¾Squally clouds, snow, cold.
622¾
722¾
812¾At 8:30 came about with the wind and made the port tack; unbent the foresail because it was no longer seaworthy and bent on a new one. By the will of God died the Yakutsk soldier Karp Pashennoi, and we lowered him into the sea.
91½SSWW1¾
102½S/WW/N1
1141
123½SW½Reef-topsail wind, snow, squally clouds; at times the sun is seen.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNW/N1°23′W37½N 30.7′W 21.636′53° 35′60¾E/N1°32′E6° 40′

{p. 205}

November 1, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WSWNW2Furled topsails; gale blowing, squally clouds; hove to under the main-staysail and trysail.
21¼W/NN½W5½
31½5½Reefed foresail.
41¼5½
51½WNNW3½Undersail wind, cloudy; set foresail and mainsail, hauled down main-staysail.
61¾3½
72W/SNW/N3½Squally clouds, snow; occasionally the stars shine through.
82WNNW3½
91¾3½Squally clouds, hail.
101½W/SNW/N3½
111½SW/WNW/W3½
121¼W/SNW/N3½Undersail wind.
11¼WNNW½W3½Clear with passing clouds.
21½3½
31½NNW3½
41½3½Reef-topsail wind, at times comes in puffs.
51¼3½
61¾N/W½W3½
72¼NNW3½Set main-topsail.
82¼3½Squally clouds, snow.
91½WNWN½W3½Clear with passing clouds; unbent the main-topsail in order to mend it.
102W/NN/W½W3½[119]
111¾WNNW¼W3½
121¾3½Reef-topsail wind; the sun is barely seen.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNE7°24′E37N 32′E 18.431′54° 07′66½E/N4°39′N7° 11′

Khitrov’s journal: “On the sick list: the Captain Commander and 36 men. With great difficulty the others manage to run the boat.”


{p. 206}

November 2, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½WNNW3½Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
22½1¾Set topsails reefed; carrying foresail, mainsail, and trysail in addition.
32¼W/NN/W½W1½
43½1½
51¼WSSW1¾Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; made the starboard tack.
61¾1¾
71¼SW/WS/E2
81SW/SW/N2Light wind, stars out; made the port tack.
91¾SSEWSW½
102¼½
112¼½Stars shining.
122½½Westerly swell.
12½S/EWSW½W¾Topsail wind.
22¾¾
33½SSEWSWReef-topsail wind, chilly, drizzly.
44
54SE/SSW/W
64I am altogether exhausted from scurvy, and I stand my watch only because of extreme necessity.
74
84
94Southerly swell. By the will of God Ivan Petrov, the naval carpenter, died.
104½
113Strong undersail wind; furled topsails; lowered the dead body into the sea.
123

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/S5°07′W48.7S 5.2′W 48.482′54° 02′54½ENE4°22′E5° 49′

{p. 207}

November 3, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13½SSESW/W1Reef-undersail wind, squally clouds, rain; carrying foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
23½1
34SE6½Gale, cold, rain.
446½
546½
61E/SS½E6½Furled foresail and mainsail: hove to on the trysail because of the strong wind. It is dangerous to go on our way especially at night.
716½
816½
916½
1016½
111ES/E6½Wind going down, drizzly, rainy.
1216½
116½
21E/NSSERain.
31
41ENESE/S½E6½Undersail wind, clear with passing clouds.
516½Drizzly, rainy.
616½
73¾WSWSet fore and main-topsails.
83½Strong reef-topsail wind.
94
104Clear with passing clouds.
114½Undersail wind.
124½Drizzly, heavy easterly swell.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW/S2°17′S55½S 13′W 5491′53° 49′40¾ENE2°50′E4° 18′

{p. 208}

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND

November 4, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
15ENEWSWStrong reef-undersail wind; carrying main-topsail and foresail. The drummer Osip Chentsov, of the Siberian garrison, died.
25¼
34¾NE
44
53½Lowered the dead body into the sea. Furled main-topsail because it was dangerous to have it up at night. According to our calculation the Kamchatka shore is nearing.
62½
72½
82½
92
102NE/N
111¾Topgallantsail wind.
121Light wind; set main-topsail; drizzly, rainy. By the will of God the Siberian soldier Ivan Davidov died of scurvy.
11
21
31
41¼Changeable wind.
52ESEThe grenadier Alexei Popov died of scurvy.
63
73½Set fore-topsail and mainsail.
84Let out reef in main-topsail. Sighted land,[120] bearing by compass SW by S, 4 German miles.[121] On this land there is a mountain ridge covered with snow. We think this land is Kamchatka; it lies, however, between N and W, and it seems as if the end of it is not far. On the sick list are the Captain Commander, several officers, and 32 of the crew.
94WNW
104¾
114Let out two reefs in main-topsail, clear with passing clouds.
123½Took an observation: zenith distance 72° 59′, declination of the sun 18° 29′, latitude 54° 30′. The daily record was adjusted to this observation.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningW4°21′N66N 5′W65.7111.7′53° 54′2° 26′
By ObservationNW6°36′W66N 41′W 51.788′54° 30′34¾NE1°20′E2° 50′

Copper Island (Medni Island).

Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted land with high snow-covered mountains SW by S 7 German miles.”


{p. 209}

November 5, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
13E/NSSE¾E1Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
231
33ENESE1Let out reef in fore-topsail.
431
52½E/NN/E1½Tacked.[122]
62½1½Took second reef in main-topsail.
72½ENEN1½Clear with passing clouds.
82½1½Took all the reefs in topsails, furled fore-topsail.
92¾2Stars out; furled main-topsail; squally clouds, snow, undersail wind.
102½2½
112¾2½
122½2½Squalls; lowered the dead body of the soldier into the water.
12½2½
22¼2½Drizzly, rainy.
32½NE/EN/W2½Raw, chilly.
42¾N½W2½Grenadier Ivan Nebaranov died.
52ENEN2½Squalls, snow; sighted land; S point SE½E about 3 German miles.
62¾2½[123]
72½2½Cloudy. On the sick list are the Captain Commander, several officers, and 33 members of the crew and none of the others are in very good health.
82¾N½W2½Captain Commander Bering, his officers, and the crew met to discuss the question of going to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. We had few men to manage the ship; 12 of our number were dead, 34 were totally disabled from scurvy, only about 10 were able with great difficulty to get about at all and they were not fit for all kinds of sea duty. Among them was Lieutenant Waxel. We have little fresh water. Taking all these factors into consideration it was decided not to go to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul but to take advantage of the wind and steer for the shore in sight in order to save the ship and the men. At 9 o’clock we set the course WSW for the shore.
93NEWSW
102NNE
113Examined the main shrouds on the right side which had been damaged, and on that account we were obliged to lower the main yards.
123NIn the same way we examined those on the left side and lowered the main-topmast.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningNNW6°32′W30N 26.3′W 14.625′54° 56′37¼NE/N1°14′E2° 25′

Khitrov’s journal: “Came about with the wind to get away from the shore. The S point of the sighted land bore SE½E.”

Khitrov’s journal: “The Captain Commander, officers, and crew had a meeting and decided to make for the land ahead of us. We could not go on because we had no able-bodied men, our rigging was rotten, and our provisions and water were gone. When this had been agreed upon we came about with the wind and sailed WSW.”


{p. 210}

November 6, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½N/ESW/STopgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
21½Hoisted the main-topsail on the cap.
31½
41½Sounded and got 37 fathoms; sandy bottom.
5At anchorCame into 12 fathoms; sandy bottom; furled sails; dropped small bower anchor and payed out ¾ of a cable.
6Cable broke at 80 fathoms, and the ship was carried by the surf into 5 fathoms and less; we dropped quickly the spare anchor, the cable of which also parted, and the ship was taken through the surf into 4½ fathoms. We put over the best bower anchor and payed out ¾ of a cable. Because of the darkness we could not get our bearings.
7
8
9
10Calm
11
12N/E
1N
2WTopsail wind, chilly.
3Clear with passing clouds and snow.
4S
5Clear with passing clouds.
6One point of the land bears E by S ¾ mile; second point NNW 8 German miles.
7
8
9NNWThere were no able men to send for water, and in addition a heavy swell was running.
10
11NW/WPut over the longboat into the water.
12Light wind, clear with passing clouds.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Vaua[124]
VC 1½RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningSW½W6S 3.8′W 4.67.8′54° 52′35¾SW/S0°38′W2° 17′

The rhumb here seems to be stated exceptionally as direction to Vaua from the ship; from Vaua it would be NE/N0°38′E. The value for the difference in longitude between Vaua and the scene of the St. Peter’s stranding on Bering Island, 2° 17′, indicates the extent of the error in the reckoning of the ship’s position. The true value is about 8° 20′. On the general question of error in longitude, see also Waxel’s report, p. 276; Chirikov’s report, p. 322; and footnote 22, p. 308.


{p. 211}

November 7, 1741. After Midday[125]

Key

HKWCL
1NW/WLieutenant Waxel went ashore in the yawl to find fresh water and a suitable place for landing the sick.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Hung a lantern over the stern.
9
10NLieutenant Waxel returned and reported that there was plenty of fresh water but no wood other than driftwood and little of that.
11
12
1N/W
2
3
4N/EHigh wind; 6 inches of water in the hold.
5
6
7E/N
8
9ESEWarped twice with the best bower anchor to E; heaved the anchor in order to clear it of the spare anchor cable, which had wound itself around the best bower. After clearing we took it on deck. On the sick list are the Captain Commander and 48 others.
10
11
12

Khitrov’s journal. From November 7, 1741 to August 9, 1742, inclusive, Khitrov’s journal is used. During this period Yushin’s journal consists of a general account of happenings. These have, in the following, been inserted in their proper places as footnotes to Khitrov’s journal.


{p. 212}

November 8, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SE/SWarped into 3½ fathoms and dropped the best bower and payed out ½ cable. We put out one grappling NE on N and another one E; lowered the foreyards for fear of the wind.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8SE
9
10
11
12S
1
2
3ESE
4
5Boatswain Nils Jansen died.
6
7
8Went ashore and took with me 10 of the sick and the body of the boatswain for burial.
9
10
11
12The boat returned from shore.

{p. 213}

November 9, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1High wind.
2NETook the Captain Commander ashore.
3
4
5
6NNW
7
8Boat returned from shore; took out of the hold a spare anchor, put it in place of the other spare anchor, and dropped it NE.
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5Light snow, chilly.
6
7
8Lowered topmast, topsail yards; did not unbend the sails.
9
10
11
12

{p. 214}

November 10, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NNWHigh wind.
2Lieutenant Waxel, I, and six of the crew went ashore to set up tents for the sick.
3
4
5
6
7
8Assistant Constable Roselius, with two men, followed the beach N in order to see whether there are any people living here.
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8N
9The boat returned from shore with the same men who went in it except the assistant constable. Heaved in the hawser of the best bower on the right side.
10
11
12

{p. 215}

November 11, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NNEModerate breeze, drizzly.
2
3
4NEBoatswain’s Mate Ivan [Ivanov] was sent ashore with five men to put up tents out of the sails for the sick.
5
6
7
8
9
1010 o’clock died the trumpeter Mikhail Toroptsov.
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6Snow.
7
8
9
10Hail and disagreeable weather.
11
12NNEChilly.

{p. 216}

November 12, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NLight wind.
2
3
4
5
6NNW
7
8
9
10N
11
12Chilly, snowy; at times moon is seen.
1
2
3
4N/E
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12At times sun is visible.

{p. 217}

November 13, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1N/ECloudy.
2
3
4NE/EFresh breeze.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12Hung out two lights on the main shrouds as a signal for the boat to come from shore.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Frost, snow. Signaled with ensign for the boat to come for we have only one barrel of water on board.
9
10
11
12

{p. 218}

November 14, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NDrizzly, snow, fresh breeze.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Hoisted two lanterns as a signal for the boat to come.
9
10
11
12N/W
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Signaled from ensign staff.
9
10
11
12Wind as before.

{p. 219}

November 15, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NWLight air. Boat came with a barrel of water, returned to shore with 7 sick men. Sailor Ivan Emelianov, the cannoneer Ilya Dergachev, and the Siberian soldier Vasili Popkov died on board before they could be removed ashore. Sailor Seliverst Tarakanov died as he was being landed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6NNW
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 220}

November 16, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NFresh breeze.
2
3
4NNEStrong wind and heavy sea which frequently washes over our deck.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8NE/NOn account of the frost the boat and the rigging are iced. The Siberian soldier Savin Stepanov, who died on board, was taken ashore.
9
10
11
12

{p. 221}

November 17, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NEWent ashore in the yawl.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8During the day the sea poured into our ship over the sides and near the forecastle.
9
10
11
12A strong wind blew, and the air was chilly.

{p. 222}

November 18, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NE/EStrong wind.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12Wind died down a bit near midnight, stars shining, cold.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12Signaled with ensign for the boat to come.

{p. 223}

November 19, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SLight air, drizzly, uncomfortable weather.
2
3
4The boat has not yet returned from shore, and there are only four buckets of water on board.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4NNE
5
6Spare anchor is fouled; and we stand on one anchor, the best bower. Fired three guns; flew a red flag from main shrouds to call the boat. Sailor Nikita Ovtsin died.
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 224}

November 20, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SELight air, drizzly.
2
3
4E
5
6
7
8Snow.
9
10
11
12Lowered into the sea the dead bodies on board.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Light air. Sailor Mark Antipin died ashore.
9
10
11
12

{p. 225}

November 21, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1This day Lieutenant Waxel and the other men who were ill left the ship and went ashore. There remained on board Assistant Constable Roselius and the Siberian soldier Ignatius Ivonik.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6Captain Commander ordered that Lieutenant Waxel with all the members of the crew should hold a consultation as to the best way of saving the ship.
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 226}

VAIN ATTEMPTS TO SAVE THE SHIP

November 22, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1This day there died on shore the navigator Andreyan Eselberg. On account of sickness I had to stop keeping a regular journal and am just making notes like this.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 227}

November 23, 1741. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1This day we handed to the Captain Commander a report on the saving of the ship. It is signed by Lieutenant Waxel, by me, and by all the lower officers and crew. An exact copy of the report follows.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 228}

November 23, 1741

Report on Saving the Ship

To His Highness Captain Commander Ivan Ivanovich Bering:

On November 21, 1741, your highness ordered me, the undersigned, to consult with the higher officers and the crew as to the best way of saving the St. Peter with the provisions and material on board and also as to a place where she might be hauled up for the winter. In accordance with your order I, Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, all lower officers, and members of the crew met on November 22 to discuss these points.

1. The St. Peter has one anchor out, the best bower, and its cable is not very dependable. We have no other anchors or grapplings aside from the 8-pood grappling. As you know, the ship lies out in the open sea and if a strong wind should come up from the east, southeast, west or northwest, one anchor would not hold. On the east, north, and west there are rocky reefs. If a strong wind should blow up from the south, or from between south and west, the ship would be driven out to sea.

2. We therefore agreed that at high tide the boat should be hauled up on the sandy beach facing it and made fast with hawsers. The water casks should not be emptied, the ballast should not be taken out, and the cargo should not be disturbed now; all these things can be done later in the winter, if nothing interferes. In order to save the provisions from the water in the ship, cables should be put under them.

We have no other suggestion to make, and we leave the matter for your highness’ decision. Something must be done at once to save the vessel because of the winds, which may cause us to lose both the ship and supplies.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov

Assistant Navigator Kharlam Yushin

Assistant Skipper Nikita Khotyaintsov

Assistant Constable Boris Roselius

Boatswain’s Mate Alexei Ivanov

For the quartermaster, Luka Alexeiev, for all the crew, and for himself the sailor Timofei Anchiugov signed.

On the above written report on the saving of the St. Peter, I received, this 23rd day of November, an order from the Captain Commander to carry out the recommendations of the report at the very first opportunity. I am now waiting for favorable weather to do so.

November 24, 1741

Strong wind, impossible to go aboard.

November 25, 1741

Strong wind, impossible to go aboard.

{p. 229}

November 26, 1741[126]

Today I am quite ill with scurvy and can barely stand on my feet. Nevertheless, this morning I went to the boatswain’s mate, Alexei Ivanov, and [told him to go] to the Captain Commander and say that I am ready to go aboard the ship in order to lay it up if this can be done. The Captain Commander told Ivanov that in case the ship could not be hauled up we should at least bring ashore as much of the provisions as we could. When I walked down to the beach to go on board I was told by the above-mentioned Ivanov, who was on watch that day, that he had only five able-bodied men. In pushing out the yawl one of them, the soldier Elizar Zaikov, got wet and had to go back to the tent; and this left four men, namely the sailor Timofei Anchiugov, the soldier Grigori Izmailov, the Kamchatka servant Ivan Partinyagin, and the Chukchi and Koriak interpreter Alexei Lazukov. They were so weak that I realized that they could never weigh the best bower anchor. In addition, the wind was between north and west straight on the rocky reef which lay from the ship between south and east not more than 150 fathoms away.

The shrouds and yards were also down. Although we might have enlisted a few more men, yet because of the reef and the wind it did not seem safe to try to lay up the ship as we had recommended in the report. When I saw the impossibility of carrying out the task I went to Lieutenant Waxel and verbally explained the situation. He told me to report to the Captain Commander, which I did at ten o’clock in the morning and gave him the reasons already mentioned. When I left him I went to see the sailor Dimitri Ovtsin who acted as the captain’s adjutant, and told him to make a written statement of what has taken place and enumerate the reasons I gave.


Yushin’s journal:

Various Happenings in 1741 After November 6

This month from the 6th to the 22nd we had at times fair wind and weather, but at other times the winds were so strong that it was impossible to come ashore. The sick were landed, and huts were made for them by digging holes in the ground and covering them over with sails. After the 22nd we were all ashore and the St. Peter was at anchor without a man on board, for there was no one well enough to stand watch or to unrig the ship; some of the men could not even move from their places and others were at the point of death.

According to our reckoning we were in Kamchatka, and therefore the assistant constable Roselius, with two men from Kamchatka, was sent north to examine the shore. Roselius returned in six days, after having walked more than 50 versts, because he and his men were so exhausted that they could not go farther.

November 27, 1741

Today I was so ill that I could not leave the tent for any reason. In the same tent are Lieutenant Waxel and a number of the crew.

{p. 230}

DEATH OF BERING

November 28, 1741

I was told this morning that during the northeast storm the anchor cable broke and the St. Peter was driven ashore on the spot where we had planned to lay her up.

December 1, 1741

Captain Commander Bering sent the sailor Timofei Anchiugov with two men to examine the shore and to determine whether we are on the mainland or on some island. They were also to keep a lookout for forests.

December 4, 1741

The calker Alexei Klementev died.

December 8, 1741

5 a.m. Captain Commander Bering died, and Lieutenant Waxel succeeded to the command.

December 9, 1741

Assistant Skipper Nikita Khotyaintsov died.

December 17, 1741

Grenadier Ivan Tretyakov died.

December 27, 1741[127]

Cannoneer Prokofei Efintsov died.

The sailor Timofei Anchiugov returned without bringing any information about the land [we are on].


Yushin’s journal:

The Month or December, 1741

By the will of God a strong NE wind broke the cable and drove the ship ashore near us. Its left side below the water line was badly damaged, the rudder was lost, and it suffered other injuries as well.

The sailor Anchiugov, with the two men from Kamchatka already mentioned, were ordered south to obtain information. He was gone about four weeks but did not learn anything definite. He said that he thought that we were on an island. He could not follow the shore for any considerable distance because of the cliffs. He reported seeing many herds of sea otters. At the end of December I began to recover somewhat from my illness.

January 2, 1742

The soldier Fedor Panov died.

January 7, 1742

11 p.m. died the petty officer Ivan Lagunov.

{p. 231}

January 18, 1742

Statement on the Condition of the Ship

Lieutenant Waxel, Master Khitrov, the lower officers and crew of the St. Peter met on this day to inspect the ship and determine whether it is fit for the continuation of our voyage. The condition of the ship was as follows:

1. The bottom, keel, sternpost and stem were all damaged, and the rudder was carried out to sea.

2. There was not a single anchor for the voyage, and there was no hope that we could recover one of those lost.

3. The rigging, shrouds, cables are not to be depended on; they snap and tear, and some are already torn.

4. It is impossible that the ship could be moved from its present position because it is already deeply buried in the sand.

5. Below the water line on the left side there is a crack crossways.

Therefore, the ship is not fit for a continuation of our voyage further.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Master Sofron Khitrov

All the lower officers and crew of the St. Peter, except the sailor Dimitri Ovtsin, signed this.

Counterstatement by the Sailor Dimitri Ovtsin

To His Highness Lieutenant Waxel:

You commanded that the crew should meet on January 22 to sign the report that the St. Peter is no longer fit for our voyage, and these were the reasons given.

1. The bottom, keel, sternpost, and stem were damaged, and the rudder was gone, and it is impossible to examine the inside because of the water in the hold.

2. We have not a single anchor, and there is no hope of finding one.

3. The rigging, shrouds, ropes are not to be depended on, for they break and in many places are already broken.

4. It is not probable that the ship can be moved from its place, since it is deeply buried in the sand.

5. Below the waterline there is a crack crossways. Therefore, the ship is unfit for further service.

On these points I should like to comment to your highness:

1. The sternpost and stem are not so badly injured that they cannot be repaired; although the false stem is gone, another can be made. As to the condition of the bottom, it can hardly be ascertained now owing to the snow and ice. Another rudder can be made, and timber for that purpose could probably be found.

2. We have not yet tried to recover the anchors, and it is not too much to expect that they may be found in summer. In the spring the winds are surely not as bad as in the fall, and the weather may become favorable so that we could get the ship in a position to repair it.

3. Some of the bad rigging could be repaired, other parts could be replaced from the stores; we have also spare ropes in case of need. If, of the four anchors, we find two, we should have enough for our purpose.

{p. 232}

4. Because of the snow and ice it is difficult to say whether the ship can be floated; if it can be floated, it can be repaired and used with the help of Almighty God.

5. At present it is difficult to say how badly damaged the bottom is; and, even if it were, it could be repaired.

These are my views, and these are the reasons why I refuse to sign the report to the effect that the ship was unfit for further service.

Sailor Dimitri Ovtsin

January 27, 1742.

January 29, 1742

Rebuttal

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all the lower officers and members of the crew of the St. Peter met today to listen to the reading of the statement of Dimitri Ovtsin which he handed to Lieutenant Waxel on January 27 of this year. In this document Ovtsin said that he hoped that the St. Peter could be saved, that it could be floated, that the damage could be repaired, that is to say the stem and everything else, that a new rudder could be made out of timber to be found on the island, and that the anchors lost at sea near here could be recovered. After listening to his statement and reasons they were rejected by all who were present, because on January 18 they had examined the ship and found it unseaworthy. A report on this subject had been made and was signed by the officers and crew. Even if the ship were sound it could not be floated since we have no anchor, no timber, and not enough men for such work. Taking all this into consideration it was agreed (Ovtsin dissenting) that in March the St. Peter should be broken up and out of the wreck some kind of small vessel should be made to take us to Kamchatka. In the meantime we should watch for an opportunity when the weather is favorable to empty out the water from the hold and to inspect again the ship with a view of determining its seaworthiness.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Master Sofron Khitrov and

  all the officers and men except

  the Sailor Ovtsin

February 23, 1742

Assistant Navigator Yushin with four men was ordered to follow the shore to latitude 56° 10′ N, which was the position of the mouth of the Kamchatka River. On the way he was to make a careful observation of the country.

March 8, 1742

Yushin and his party returned and reported that he had not gone farther than 70 versts from our camp because his advance was blocked by a rocky bluff which could not be passed even at low water. A fierce blizzard interfered also. Yushin said that when he was about 50 versts from camp he sighted land to the eastward, about 10 miles away, which seemed like an island.[127a]


See bracketed statement in third paragraph from bottom of p. 237.

{p. 233}

March 10, 1742

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all the lower officers, and the crew had another meeting to discuss Yushin’s report. Since it told them nothing definite about the land, it was decided to send another party under the boatswain’s mate Alexei Ivanov.

March 15, 1742

Ivanov with four men was sent along the shore to explore the land.

March 19, 1742

Ivanov came back and reported that bluffs blocked his way to the westward.

March 22, 1742

Ivanov was sent out again with instructions to exert himself to the utmost to proceed farther and secure some reliable information.

April 7, 1742

Ivanov and his party returned and reported that we were on an island because he had doubled the northern cape on the other side, which is about 150 versts from our camp.

April 9, 1742

Decision Made on Determination That Land Is an Island

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, Doctor Georg Steller, all the lower officers and crew of the St. Peter met to discuss the report of Ivanov. He said that the land on which we live is an island because he had doubled the last northern cape on the western side and it was therefore evident that we were on an island.

In order to reach Kamchatka it was decided to break up the St. Peter because it was not fit for further sea service, because it cannot be floated, and because of other reasons already mentioned, and make out of it some kind of small vessel.

It was agreed that during the period of the vessel’s construction a number of our men under the leadership of Yushin should be detailed to hunt and to supply the camp with meat. Whatever they got should be divided equally among all according to the size of each group. From the stores of flour left after the April distribution, 10 sacks should be set aside for the Kamchatka voyage. Until the voyage, the allowance should be reduced below that which had been allowed.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov and all the men

May 2, 1742

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, the lower officers, and some members of the crew looked about for a suitable place for building and launching a boat. Such a spot was found on the beach directly in front of the ship.

{p. 234}

May 6, 1742

With God’s help we began the building of the ship by erecting the stem and the stern post. It is to have a length of 36 feet, a 12-foot beam, and depth of 5 feet 3 inches.

July 1, 1742

I started along the beach toward S in order to examine the channel between us and the islands[128] sighted and to see whether we could use it when we sailed from here. I was also anxious to learn whether there was some good harbor along the coast. Alexei Ivanov went in the yawl to see if he could find the anchors, but did not locate any except the 8-pood grappling.


Khitrov was under the impression that Copper Island was two islands. See bracketed statement in next-to-last paragraph on p. 237.

July 9, 1742

About 7 p.m. I returned with my party. We found a channel between the islands but no harbor. I should say that it is about 50 versts to the southern cape.

July 13, 1742

Alexei Ivanov went again to look for the anchors but was unsuccessful. Weather clear and sunshiny. I received an order to make an inventory of all that we are to leave on the island.

July 15, 1742

Light air from W, weather clear and sunshiny. When the ship was broken up Lieutenant Waxel, I, the lower officers, and those members of the crew who were engaged in the work inspected her and found that she was injured in twelve places.

July 24, 1742

Yushin went in search of the anchors and did not find them.

Light air from SW, fine weather.

Midshipman Ivan Sint handed in his report of July 1, and with it was a list of the baggage and provisions each person had. The following is an exact copy:

{p. 235}

List of Baggage of Each Member of the Expedition

Rank and NamePoodsPounds
  Officers  
Lieutenant Sven Waxel20 
Master Sofron Khitrov12 
Adjunct Steller10 
Ass’t Navigator Kharlam Yushin4 
Ass’t Constable Boris Roselius6 
Ass’t Surgeon Matis Betge6 
Surgeon Apprentice Arkhip Konavalov3 
Boatswain’s Mate Alexei Ivanov7 
Midshipman Ivan Sint5 
Boatswain’s Mate helper Luka Alexeiev3 
Cannoneer Michael Chechuev220
Andrei Kransnoi220
Gulakhition Ivanov2 
Soldier Ignatius Ivonik320
  
  Sailors  
Vasili Perfieev5 
Vasili Avechin220
Ivan Semenov320
Lavrenti Smetanik220
Dimitri Ovtsin5 
Timofei Anchiugov2 
Dimitri Alavenishkov320
Stepan Nikiforov220
Cooper Vasili Severgin2 
Sailmaker Denis Sarokin220
Blacksmith Dimitri Kuleksa2020
Trumpeter Martin Vasilev3 
  
  Siberian Carpenters  
Prokofei Chekalov3 
Sava Starodubtsov3 
Jeremiah Tonkikh3 
  
  Servants of the Captain Commander  
Ivan Maltsan3 
Maffei Kukushkin120
  
  Soldiers  
Maffei Antropov320
Fedor Darafeev320
Elizar Zykov320
Ivan Okulov220
Grigori Kaigorodal320
Grigori Ismailov220
Stepan Zhegalov320
Astafei Baiarkin220
Dimitri Kalodin220
  
  The Corporal of Okhotsk Harbor  
Frederic Plenisner5 
  
  Employees of Kamchatka Fort  
Ivan Partinyagin3 
Alexei Lazukov2 
Cossack’s son Peter Verkhaturov2 
  
  Employee of Upper Kamchatka Fort  
Toma Lepekhin2 
Total of baggage and provisions in possession of all ranks1860

{p. 236}

August 1, 1742

Decision on Disposition of Supplies

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all lower officers and members of the crew of the St. Peter met. Our ship with God’s help will soon be finished. The question came up what to do with all the supplies and materials on hand which we cannot take along for the following reasons.

1. To take all that material along would oblige us to leave behind half or more of the crew, and to leave these men on an unknown and uninhabited island is dangerous. There is little food to be had here aside from what may be obtained by hunting sea animals, and even this source cannot be depended upon. Since our coming the game has been frightened away and driven off, and one may not in the future rely on hunting.

2. Of the materials and other supplies on hand only a small part could be taken along, but owing to the autumn storms of this region it would not be safe to overload our vessel. A large part of the supplies and materials is worthless and rotten, as may be seen from the inventory[129] made out by Fleet Master Khitrov.

3. Although a small part of the above-mentioned material is good, yet it is not worth while to leave some one to watch it, because the island is uninhabited.

4. If we should leave a guard, we should have to come after him next year. There is no harbor here, nothing but rocks and reefs and the open sea, and there is great danger of wrecking the vessel.

5. Taking all these arguments into consideration, the undersigned have unanimously agreed to leave no one behind. Of the materials we should take iron enough to serve as ballast; of supplies, water, several casks of sea cow meat, and such other things as we need for the voyage.

All else should be left in the warehouses to be constructed.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel, Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov,

  all the lower officers and crew


The inventory exists but has not been included in the present work.

Description of Bering Island[130]

(A Description of the Island On Which We Lived From November, 1741, To August 13, 1742, [to which are added] Certain Observations Which I Made.)

By agreement with Lieutenant Waxel I called the island “Bering Island” after the late Captain Commander Vitus Bering, who died and was buried there.

This island extended from latitude 54° to 56° N, that is from the southern cape, which we called Manati, that is to say Sea Cow. The island lies between NNW [and SSE?] and is about 130 versts long and from 7 to 10 versts wide. There are {p. 237} no habitations on the island and no signs that there ever were any. It is a treeless region; there is no wood on it at all except in a few spots where a few willows grow, and they are so small that they are worthless for [fire] wood. There are mountain ridges, many volcanoes, and rocky bluffs; and therefore [it is] quite unsafe for ships to come near. The shore is everywhere rocky, some of the rocks extend a verst or more into the sea. In high water they are covered up, and in low water they are exposed. In those places where the shore is not rocky a heavy surf runs. There is no spot where a vessel drawing five or six feet of water may winter. We put ourselves to a great deal of trouble in looking for such a place—the boatswain’s mate, Alexei Ivanov, was sent to the northern cape, and I went to the southern. There is only one spot, on the other [W] side of the island from our camp, where a vessel might go in. There is a lake over there which has an outlet to the sea, and in time of high water a ship might enter the lake and remain during the winter. But one cannot be sure even of this; for each year the old channel fills up, and a new channel is formed. Whether the entrance is always as [open?] as when we were there it is impossible to say.

When the west wind blew, it brought from Kamchatka to this island building timber which had been in use, [such as] smashed boats and Koriak deer sleds. When the east wind blew it brought from America big pine trees, oars, and weapons such as are used by the natives of America but not by those of Kamchatka.

When the weather was clear many of our men claimed that from the western side of our island they saw more than once snow-covered volcanoes to the westward. We assumed from our reckoning that they must be on Kamchatka but we could not be sure.

During the whole time that we were on this island we suffered great hardships. Our habitations were holes in the sand covered over with sails. We had to search the beach for driftwood, which we had to carry on our shoulders 10 and 12 versts. At that very time nearly all of us were very ill with scurvy which hung on so long that some of the men did not completely recover until spring, when green grass {p. 238} appeared, which grass is known in Kamchatka as sweet grass and from which the government there manufactures a kind of wine. It tastes something like Russian borshch.[131] We used this grass as well as other grasses for food. We had no provisions and had to secure our food with great trouble, and such as we found was bad and unfit for human beings. We were obliged to go along the beach 20 and 30 versts in the hope of killing a sea otter, sea lion, or hair seal. On seeing them we would steal up behind them as they were on the beach or on the rocks, when the tide was out, and kill them with clubs, and having killed them we tied them on ourselves with a load in front and a load behind. If for some reason we could not hunt these animals we were forced to find and eat dead ones, such as whales and sea cows, which had been cast up by the sea. During the winter we hunted the animals so hard that they became frightened, and by spring they were quite a distance from our camp. Just then large herds of fur seals came to breed on the other side of the island. They were so numerous on the western side that during the breeding season two or three men could barely get by them in safety, for at that period they are quite savage and attack people. Sometimes the men, in order to get to their destinations, had to cross over the mountain ridges, for they could not get around the beach on account of these animals. Their flesh was quite distasteful, and the longer we ate it the less we liked it. We then turned to hunting the sea cow and did it in the following manner. This animal does not stay far out at sea but keeps close to shore. Its back is above water, and with the flood tide it moves toward the shore to feed on the sea cabbage. As the tide goes out the sea cow goes along so as not to get stranded, being such a large animal. At the time when it was nearing the shore our men in the longboat would pull up close to it, and one of them, standing in the bow, hurled at it a large iron harpoon with sharp teeth. To the harpoon was made fast a cable from 4 to 5 inches in thickness, which cable was held by 20 men who were ashore. When the harpoon had penetrated the flesh and held, the men on shore pulled with all their might while the men in the boat went up close to the animal, cutting and stabbing with sharp iron weapons in order to weaken it and prevent it from breaking the rope, which sometimes happened. This cow is so powerful that it took all these men to hold her. Counting meat and fat, the sea cow gives about 200 poods.[132] From the time on when we began hunting the sea cow we were not in want. Of all the animals mentioned above the flesh of the cow is the best tasting. We brought with us to Kamchatka a considerable quantity of it salted.

At times the winds on the island are so strong that a person can with difficulty keep on his feet. We concluded that these winds are due to the high mountains and deep valleys. I may say that, owing to these winds, the snow in the air, and the blizzards blowing off the mountains, we seldom saw a beautiful or clear day from December to March. From March on, during the spring and summer, there are heavy and continuous fogs and wet weather so that we seldom saw a pleasant day during this period. This kind of weather greatly interfered with the speed of our shipbuilding. In addition, the men were in such poor condition and so undisciplined that it was not safe to order them around, but everything had to be done by common consent. On this island there are no minerals or metals, for Adjunct Steller was sent purposely around the island without finding anything. There are no land animals on the island aside from the blue foxes. There are all kinds of land and sea birds.


Yushin’s journal:

Various Happenings in 1742

On different days and months we secured information which led us to believe that we were on an island. This island is about eighteen German miles long and its axis lies NW and SE. It is wider in the north than in the south, averaging, from N to S, 15, 10, 8, and 6 versts. It is impossible to go around some parts of the island on account of the cliffs and rocky beaches, which I myself saw in many places. There are some bays around the island. It is not safe to approach the island nearer than about 5 versts. Across from our camp, or on the south side, there is a lake about 1 verst in circumference, and out of the lake a river flows into the sea. This river is about 100 fathoms in length and 15 in width. I think that a small vessel, drawing not more than 5 feet of water, could enter this stream at high tide during the months of May and June. In the autumn the mouth of the river is covered with driftwood, and the surf plays there. The lake is deep enough, I think. I have sounded and got 3 feet [along the shore?], and at the mouth of the river the depth is 6 feet. On the western side of the island there is a breeding place for fur seals and sea lions. They came in the beginning of April, and soon their large numbers covered the beach. We used them for food when the sea otters became scarce in the spring.

By common consent we began to break up the St. Peter in April, and in May we laid the keel of the new vessel, which measured 36 feet at the keel. Ten men were detailed for shipbuilding, the others, petty officers and crew, broke up the old ship and brought the meat from the south side, a distance of about 15 versts over the hills. Each man carried about 2 poods, and it was hard work. An additional hardship was the fact that we ran out of shoes. From the middle of June we began to hunt the sea cow. These are huge beasts, each giving from 50 to 60 poods of meat and even a greater amount of fat. They have two forefeet and [ . . ? ]

Position of Bering Island

In the north there is a cape NNW 8 German miles. From this cape there is a projection NW 5 miles. To the south of us there is a point ESE½E ¾ of a mile. From this point the shore continues south 4 miles. From that point the shore extends NW to the northern point.

About 10 German miles away, in the direction NE by N from Bering’s Cross, there is an island which is not seen at all times. [There is no island in the direction indicated, and what Yushin saw was probably a cloud bank. Chirikov tells of sighting land on June 26-27, which, on further examination, proved to be a cloud bank].

Another Island is seen E¾N 6 German miles, a third island E by S 7 German miles. These two islands extend NE and SW; they seem to be small but very high. [In the direction indicated there is only one island. Copper Island, which, when viewed from Bering Island, looks like two islands and is so noted on the early charts.]

The latitude of Bering’s Cross, when I took it on the 7th day of July, was 55° 05′ N, variation of the compass 13° 58′, which I accepted as 1¼ rhumb E.

A soup usually made out of beet root.

7,200 lbs.

{p. 239}

LAUNCHING OF NEW VESSEL

August 8, 1742

All the men were preparing cables for launching the ship. After prayer we named the newly constructed vessel the hooker St. Peter and began to launch her. When she had slid down the ways 2 or 3 fathoms the boards of the platform gave way and she stopped.

August 9, 1742 [civil day]

With the help of God we got the hooker into the water about 5 o’clock in the afternoon.

The Log Book of the Hooker “St. Peter”

August 10, 1742 [astronomical day][133]

With God’s help I begin this journal on the hooker St. Peter under the command of Lieutenant Waxel. I take as departure Bering’s Cross which is in latitude 55° 05′ N, variation of the compass 1¼ rhumb easterly.


From this date until August 23 inclusive, Yushin’s journal is used. Under August 10 entry Khitrov’s journal gives in addition: “Size of the hooker: length, 36 feet; beam, 12 feet; depth, from the deck to the keelson, 5¼ feet.”


{p. 240}

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING

August 10, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1Strong wind, heavy rain.
2
3Wind going down, light rain.
4Clear with passing clouds.
5With the help of God we launched the new ship into the water and moored it in 3 fathoms with two anchors, one in S and the other in NE, and payed out ½ cable. The new vessel was named the hooker St. Peter, and it measured 36 feet in length, 11 feet in beam, 5 feet in depth, and 41 feet from stem to sternpost.
6
7
8
9I am on watch.
10Wind comes in puffs.
11
12Light wind.
1Cloudy, stars out.
2
3Chilly.
4The hooker is drawing 2 feet 10 inches of water, and at the stern 3 feet.
5
6
7
8
9Shears were brought on board for setting the masts.
10Masts and gear were brought.
11Rudder was put in place.
12Fixed the shears for the masts and made ready to set them in place.

{p. 241}

August 11, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1Clear.
2Took the shears ashore.
3
4Since noon we set and rigged the masts and yards.
5
6
7Assistant Constable Roselius relieves me on watch duty.
8
9Clear with passing clouds.
10Stars out.
11Light wind and unsteady.
12
1
2SAs above.
3
4Cloudy.
5
6Sunshiny.
7The main yard was brought on board and rigged.
8
9The bowsprit and topsail yard were brought from shore, the bowsprit was shipped in place.
10Clear with passing clouds.
11By noon we had stowed away 10 barrels of water, 5 barrels salt meat, 11 sacks of flour, some full others only partly full.
12

{p. 242}

August 12, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SELight wind, clear with passing clouds.
2Sails, blocks, and other naval stores were taken on board.
3
4
5Tried on the sails; the foresail did not fit and was taken back for alteration.
6
7Assistant Constable Roselius, the quartermaster Luka Alexeiev, and I are on watch.
8
9
10Light wind, cloudy.
11Moon out.
12Stars shining.
1E
2NELight wind, weather as before.
3
4Wind changeable.
5Clear with passing clouds.
6Naval and other supplies taken on board.
7
8
9
10Air thick, rain.
11
12The crew brought its baggage on board.

{p. 243}

DEPARTURE FROM BERING ISLAND

August 13, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1ENELight wind, drizzly, rainy.
2
3Bent on the foresail and trysail.
4NEPut up a cross in memory of Captain Bering.
5
6The crew have moved on board.
7Brought on board four oars for the hooker.
8Topgallantsail wind, drizzly.
9The hooker is down 4¾ feet at the stern and 4½ feet at the bow.
10NNE
11
12
1Clear with passing clouds, light wind and light sea; ran out the anchor on the left side.
2
3
4N
5
6Warped 100 fathoms to the north.
7Took up the anchor and warped.
8Dropped the anchor once more.
9Since 7:20 warped three times, too fathoms each time.
10Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
11Clear with passing clouds; picked up the anchor with which we warped, set the sails, and with the help of God headed east in order to get around the island.
12

{p. 244}

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND

August 14, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¾N/WE½STopgallantsail wind, drizzly, clear with passing clouds; carrying mainsail, foresail, jib, and topsail.
21¾N/E
32ESEFoggy; the southern point of Bering Island bears S by E½E, Bering Cross WNW½N.
42
51¾NNESE/E½EDrizzly, wind as before.
61½SE/ETook the ship’s boat on deck.
72SE/S
81½SSEThe southern point of Bering Island bears SW½S about 2½ German miles.
92½Light wind.
101¼Let down the jib.
111½NESounded in 25 fathoms, no bottom.
121½S
11½3 inches of water in the hold.
21¾Hauled down the foresail; sounded in 30 fathoms, no bottom.
31½SSW
41¾
51½WSW
61ENELight wind, drizzly.
7¾Hoisted foresail and jib.
8½W/SAt times calm.
9½We cut off two reefs from the mainsail because it was already too long. It was left with one reef.
10½
11¼
12¼Clewed up mainsail because of lack of wind; drizzly. The southern point of the island bears N½E about 2 German miles. We called this point Cape Manati. and we begin our reckonings from it. In today’s reckoning we take into account the bearings, distance, and rhumbs of the 13th. According to our observation Cape Manati is in latitude 54° 50′, 12 minutes E of Bering’s Cross. At noon by cross bearing it is distant 5′ of longitude from us.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS10°24′E22S 21.8′E 4.17′54° 43′2N/E¾E0° 5′

{p. 245}

August 15, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SWSW1Light wind, drizzly.
21S/WW/S1½Set mainsail; carrying, in addition to topsail, jib and foresail.
31½1½
42SW/SWNW½W1½Topgallantsail wind. The officers agreed that the longboat should be cut adrift because it impeded our progress.
52SSWW1Weather as before.
621Let out a reef in mainsail. Cape Manati is NE by N¼E about 4½ German miles.
72S/WW/S1
821½
92¼1½Topsail wind.
102¼1½Drizzly.
112½1½The hooker has sprung a leak, and we are bailing continuously.
122½1½
12¾1½Wind freshening.
221½Bailing out of the hold but have not yet found the leak. It is difficult to get at it. We threw overboard some of our ammunition. By 3 in the morning we got the leak under control.
31½SSWW1
411
51½S/WW/S1½
61½1½
71¾1½
81¾1½
91½1½Topsail wind.
101¼1½Reefed the mainsail.
1111½Light wind, southerly swell.
121SSWW1Drizzly.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN68°57′W42N 15′W 3967′54° 58′10½N79°0′W1° 12′

{p. 246}

August 16, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1¾SWWNW2Light wind, drizzly, wet; carrying mainsail, foresail, jib, and topsail.
2½
3¼WSWNW
4½No wind Heavy swell from south at the rate of ½ a knot in 4 hours.
5 NNW3Clear with passing clouds.
6
7 Foggy, wet.
8½WSWNW2Changeable wind.
9½No wind3Swell at the rate of ½ knot in 4 hours.
10
11 Stars out.
12
1½SSEWSWLight wind, drizzly.
2½Fog, wet, clear with passing clouds.
31
41½
51½Topsail wind.
62¼Let out a reef in mainsail and topsail.
72¾Topgallantsail wind, atmosphere thick.
82¼
92½SE/SSW/WClear with passing clouds.
102¼
112Squally clouds.
122½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1¼RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS83°24′W22S 2.5′W 21.637′54° 56′15¾N84°33′W1° 49′

{p. 247}

August 17, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12¾S/ESW/W1Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying foresail, mainsail, jib, and topsail.
22¾
33SWSW
43
52½ Topgallantsail wind, southerly swell.
62
72SE/SWeather as before.
82½
93¾SSESW/WReef-topsail wind, foggy, rainy.
103
112¾Lowered topsail.
122½
12½Reef-topsail wind, rain.
22¾
32¾SESWUndersail wind.
43½EHauled down jib and foresail.
54¾
64½ESEReef-undersail wind.
74¼Wind in gusts, heavy rain.
83½Fog.
93¾Clear with passing clouds.
103SE/ESSW1Thick fog. Sighted high snow-covered land, N by W and WNW about 3 German miles away.[134]
112¾ Wind going down a bit, weather as before.
122½

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS65°23′W71S 29.6′W 64.6111′54° 27′32¾S79°46′W3° 40′

Khitrov’s journal: “At 9:30 we sighted, through the mist, land in the W from which rose a high, snow-covered volcano, which we identified as in Kamchatka, near Cape Kronotski. We steered away from the land.” Cape Kronotski is shown on Pl. 1.


{p. 248}

August 18, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½E/SSStrong undersail wind, rain, sunshine.
22NE
32Wind going down; set topsail, hoisted jib.
41½Heavy southerly swell.
54WClear with passing clouds.
63½W/S
71½WSWS½E1½Topgallantsail wind, chilly.
81 Sighted a high volcano W by N, another volcano W by S. Some distance farther to the north a point N½E 5 miles.
92½SW/WS/E Topsail wind.
102¾1Lowered topsail.
113 Undersail wind, stars out.
122¾SWSSE
14 Heavy clouds, squalls; tacked to port.
22WNNW
31½1½
41 Stars out, chilly.
51½W/SNW/N
61½ Topgallantsail wind.
71¼ Sunshiny.
81 Light wind.
91½ Set topsail reefed.
102 Topsail wind.
112¼WSWNW1Clear with passing clouds.
122¼Took observation: zenith distance 44° 40′, declination of the sun 9° 34′, latitude 54° 14′. High volcano sighted is W by N, the point north of it is N 4 German miles.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead Reckoning[135][135]S 13.6′W 9.318′54° 13′33¼W/S4°55′S3° 40′

Khitrov’s journal: Rhumb, SW/S0°51′ S [i.e. S32°54′W]; Dist. in Knots, 20.


{p. 249}

August 19, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
12½WSWNW1Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying all sails; topsail and mainsail are reefed.
22½ Southerly swell.
32½
41¾ Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
51½
61¼S/WSE/E Came within ¾ mile of shore, tacked to starboard.
72¼SE/E½E1
82¾ Topsail wind.
94SE/E Strong reef-topsail wind; lowered topsail.
103½
113SESE1½Undersail wind, heavy rain.
122¼S/EE/S
12½ Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy, chilly.
22SESE
32 Hauled down the jib.
41¾SSWSE2Topsail wind.
51
61½W/SNW/N Tacked to port.
7½SWSSE3Tacked to starboard.
8½ Set topsail and jib.
91WSWW2Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
10¾
11½No windWeather as before, heavy southerly swell at the rate of ½ knot per hour during 2 hours.
12 NThe northern point bears NW½N 1 German mile.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS81°44′E23.7S 3.4′E 23.439.8′54° 10′28WSW1°33′W3° 0′

{p. 250}

August 20, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1½SW/WS/E½E2Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
2½
3Calm Warm, clewed up mainsail.
4½WSWS
51No wind Clear with passing clouds.
6 SSE3Heavy southwesterly swell, at the rate of 1 knot per hour during 4 hours in SSE direction. The high volcano bears WNW about 12 miles, the point north of it NW by W 8 German miles.
7
8
9½SW/SSE2Light wind, stars out, chilly.
10½
111SWSE/S1½Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
121½
11SSE½E As before.
21
31¼ Clouding up.
41½
51½WSWS½E
61W/SS/W½W2Light wind.
7½No wind
8½ Clear with passing clouds.
9¼SSE3Southwestern swell at the rate of 1 knot in 4 hours.
10¼
11¼
12¼ Took observation: zenith distance 45° 10′, declination of the sun 8° 51′, latitude 54° 1′.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC 1RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS29°10′E14.7S 12.9′E 7.212′53° 57′27¾SW/W5°18′W2° 48′

{p. 251}

August 21, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½No windClear with passing clouds.
2
3 Southerly swell.
4 Filled four empty barrels with salt water and put them in the hold because the ship was becoming light.
5 E4
6
7
8
9½SW/SW/N½From noon until 9 o’clock we allowed 1½ knots for the swell, which pushed us to the east. Light wind and unsteady, clear; set mainsail.
10¾
111
121¼ Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
11¼
21¼
3¾ Light wind.
4½ Chilly.
5¾SWSW½W½
6½
71 Clear with passing clouds.
8¾
9Calm Clear with passing clouds.
10½S/WW/S Topgallantsail wind.
111¼
121½ Chilly; point in the N bears NW 7 miles.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningN69°09′W11N 4′W 10.517.6′54° 01′29½WSW1°58′S3° 05′

{p. 252}

August 22, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11½SWSWTopgallantsail wind, drizzly; carrying the foresails.
21
3¾
4CalmLight rain.
5½ESWLight wind, weather as before.
61½Topgallantsail wind.
72½Reefed topsail, lowered jib and foresail.
83SW/S
94¾Topsail wind, drizzly, heavy rain.
104
115Undersail wind; lowered topsail.
124¾Squally.
14NNESSW½W
24½Reef-undersail wind, chilly, heavy rain.
34½Took a reef in mainsail.
44¾Gale, rain.
54¼WSW
63¾Wind going down, air thick, clear with passing clouds.
73½Let out reef in mainsail.
82¾Topsail wind, northeasterly swell, light rain.
92¼N/EClear with passing clouds.
103Set topsail.
111¾
12½Light wind, sunshine, air clear. Took observation: zenith distance 45° 0′, declination of the sun 8° 08′, latitude 53° 08′.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS53°39′W66S 39.8′W 52.989′53° 21′4° 36′
By ObservationS38°46′W66S 53′W 41.371.7′53° 08′45½S55°59′W4° 17′

{p. 253}

August 23, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1½NE/ESWLight wind, clear with passing clouds.
2 No wind
3½Heavy northeasterly swell.
4 Clewed up mainsail.
5 Allowed for the swell ½ knot in 3 hours.
6½SWSSE1Light wind, clear with passing clouds. The high volcano mentioned before bears now NNW, the point of land SW 3½ German miles. We take it to be Shipunski Cape. From this cape the land is low and level, bearing SW by W 3 miles.
7¾ Lowered topsail, hoisted jib.
81½ Topgallantsail wind, stars out.
92¼ Chilly.
102½ Topsail wind, weather as before.
112½
122 At the end of the hour tacked to port.
12½WNW1
22¼
31¾ Topgallantsail wind, stars out.
41½ Set topsail.
51¼ Light wind.
61½SW/SW/N1½Sun shining.
71
81Calm Cloudy.
9½SWWNWVery light wind and unsteady.
10 Clear with passing clouds.
11½
12 From nine o’clock until noon we worked with the oars and advanced at the rate of ¼ of a knot per hour. The cape or point bears W½S ½ German mile, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, the cape to the south NW 4 German miles. It is quite evident that this is Kamchatka and that the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul is about 12 German miles to the west.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead ReckoningS59°21′W6.2S 3.2′W 5.49′53° 05′46¾S56°08′W4° 26′

{p. 254}

August 24, 1742. After Midday[136]

Key

HKWCL
1¼SW/WNW/W1Light wind; carrying all sails.
2¾1
3¼1
4¼CalmSWRowed.
5¼Rowed.
6¼SWSSE1Light wind; let out mainsail and foresail. Shipunski Cape W by S½S, from it a projection WSW 2 miles. Clewed up mainsail, lowered topsail.
71½NNWSW/S
8Calm
9
10½WSWS1Set mainsail.
1111
12½1
1¾1
21¼WSSW½Hoisted topsail.
31½½
4¾½
51W/NSW/S¾
61¾Sunshine.
7¾¾
8½¾
9CalmClewed up mainsail.
10Sunshine, pleasant weather.
11
12Shipunski Cape NW½W 3 miles distant. Burning Volcano W by N½N.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead Reckoning (Khitrov)SW/S6°51′W9.2S 7′W 610′53° 13′50½SW/W5°10′W5° 03′
By Dead Reckoning (Yushin)S24°24′W12S 10.8′W 4.98′52° 54′??[4° 34′]

Khitrov’s journal is used from now on to the end because Yushin’s is in part illegible. Yushin’s 24-hour summaries are retained, however, because they are based on the observed position of August 22, while Khitrov’s seem based on that day’s position by dead reckoning.


{p. 255}

August 25, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1CalmClear, sunshiny.
2
3¼S/WW/SSet mainsail, hoisted topsail, light wind.
4¼
51S/EWSW½Topgallantsail wind.
61½
71¾SW/W½W
81¾ Shipunski Cape N 4 miles. Burning Volcano NW by W½W, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW¼W.
91¾SWSW
101½S/WW/S
11Calm
12
1No windStars shining.
2
3
4
51¼Rowing.
61¼
71¼
81¼
91
101
111Air clear, calm, making use of the oars.
121Isopa Point SSW¼W, Burning Volcano NW½W.

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead Reckoning (Khitrov)W/S5°33W20.5S 2′W 2034′53° 11′55¼SW/W7°11′W5° 37′
By Dead Reckoning (Yushin)?20.5S 2′W 2033′52° 52′54S56°55′W5° 07′

{p. 256}

ARRIVAL AT PETROPAVLOVSK

August 26, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
11¼SW/SClear, sunshiny; using the oars; occasional puffs of wind from S; carrying the topsail, foresail, and jib.
21½
31½
42½S/EStopped rowing.
52½W/S½S
62½Topgallantsail wind. Shipunski Cape NE by E 8 miles, Vaua W½S 3½ miles.
72½
82SWSW
91½
101½E
111½W
121½W/N
12NNENWUsing both sails and oars.
21NE/NNW/NCame opposite lighthouse, which was N½E; anchored, because of head wind and strong head tide, in 23 fathoms.
3NW/N
4
5½N/WWeighed anchor and rowed into the mouth of Avacha Bay.
6½
7½
8½Owing to strong head tide we anchored in 10 fathoms. Kamchadals in baidars came to us and said that Captain Chirikov had gone to Okhotsk this summer.
9
10
11SSEWeighed anchor and by means of the oars and sails proceeded to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.
12

Key

In 24 hoursFrom Cape Manati
VC ¾RDKDLDiKDLoLat.DGMRLong.
By Dead Reckoning (Khitrov)W3°01′S25.2S 0.8′W 2542′53° 10′60½SW/W9°20′6° 19′[137]
By Dead Reckoning (Yushin)W2°18′S25.2S 1′W 2541′55° 21′59¼S59°54′W[5° 48′]

Even with the fresh start in reckoning from Bering Island, this value is short about 1-2/3° of the true longitude difference between Cape Manati and Petropavlovsk. See footnote 134, above.


{p. 257}

August 27, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SSEClear with passing clouds.
2At anchorCame to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, took in the sails, dropped anchor in 9 fathoms, payed out a little rope.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8Lieutenant Waxel, Khitrov, and the crew went ashore.
9
10Started to transfer the baggage from the ship to the barracks.
11
12Light wind.

{p. 258}

August 28, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SELight wind, at times calm. This day we took out all the ammunition, iron, provisions, etc. We inspected the ship because on the way over it had sprung a leak. We discovered that the bottom was poorly calked and had many cracks. We hauled it near shore and calked the right side and filled the cracks with pitch.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 259}

August 29, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SECalm at times, calked and repaired vessel on the other side, and having patched it up we anchored it farther from shore in 8 feet of water.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2NModerate breeze and in gusts.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12Clear, sunshiny.

{p. 260}

August 30, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SLight wind, sunshiny. Stowed 18 water casks in the hold and ½ fathom of wood; added to our meat stores 5 barrels of fish, 1 tub of butter, and 12 poods of groats.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 261}

August 31, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NELight wind, clear. Took on naval stores and personal baggage.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

{p. 262}

September 1, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SELight wind and unsteady. Fastened on the shrouds and stays. Took on board two barrels of water in which cedar had been boiled for the use of the crew in case of scurvy.[138]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9Took aboard about 12 poods of iron.
10NELieutenant Waxel, Khitrov, and the crew have moved to the ship.
11Heaved the hawsers, weighed anchor, and went in tow of the yawl and boat until out of the harbor, and then made use of the sail and oars.
12Little breeze, light rain.

The cedar in question is, according to Dr. Stejneger, the Pinus cembra, the prostrate nut pine. Krasheninnikov (History of Kamchatka, Russian edit., St. Petersburg, 1755, Vol. 2, pp. 192-193) says: “This tree differs from the regular cedar in that it is smaller and does not grow straight but creeps along the ground, and for that reason it is called slanets. It is a valuable remedy for scurvy.”

Cook refers to it: “One of these [cedars] grows upon the coast . . . It was of this sort we made our essence for beer, and found it excellent for the purpose . . . We were told by the old Toion [chief] at St. Peter and St. Paul that Beering, during the time he lay in that harbour, first taught them the use of the decoction of these pines and that it had proved a most excellent remedy for the scurvy.” (James Cook: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, London, 1784, Vol. 3, pp. 332-333.)


{p. 263}

ATTEMPT TO REACH OKHOTSK

September 2, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1NEUnsteady wind, gloomy, rainy; depth 6, 7, 8, 10 fathoms.
2At times calm; for that reason it was dangerous to go out to sea, and we therefore anchored in 10 fathoms and paid out 25 fathoms of cable.
3
4
5
6
7
8ESELighthouse SE½E, stone projection SE¼S.
9
10
11
12Calm, clear with passing clouds, chilly.
1
2
3
4WLight breeze; weighed anchor, hoisted sails, and went S from the mouth of Avacha Bay.
5N
6NNWLight breeze; carrying mainsail, foresail, and topsail.
7
8
9
10SE/SClewed up mainsail and steered E in order to get clear of the Kamchatka coast. Opened mainsail.
11
12Lighthouse N by W, Isopa Point S½W.

{p. 264}

September 3, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1SESELight wind, clear.
2Light breeze.
3
4S/WSE/E½EVaua NW½W 3 miles. Isopa SSW, Shipunski Cape NE½N.
5SESE
6S/WSE/EWind freshening, chilly; took a reef in topsail.
7
8Topgallantsail breeze; came about with the wind and sailed W.
9SSWW
10
11
12Very little wind.
1
2Tacked to starboard.
3Calm
4Clewed up mainsail.
5
6S/WSE/EHoisted mainsail; rain falling.
7SE½ETopgallantsail wind.
8Lowered topsail.
9W/NLieutenant Waxel and Navigator Yushin agreed to return to Avacha, because the wind was contrary and no headway was being made by tacking and because the vessel was leaking badly.
10
11WNWSailed into Avacha Bay.
12NW½WVaua lighthouse NW by N 1½ German mile.

{p. 265}

September 4, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1S/WLittle breeze, sunshiny.
2Entered mouth of Avacha Bay and anchored in 8½ fathoms.
3Vaua Point ESE, Vilyuchensk Island S by W½W.[139]
4
5W
6WNW
7
8WGale blowing; dropped another anchor and payed out ½ cable.
9W/N
10
11
12Storm.
1
2Wind going down a little.
3
4
5
6Light wind; weighed one anchor.
7Had a consultation in regard to the condition of our ship, which was leaking badly. An accurate copy of the results of our deliberation is given below.
8
9
10Weighed anchor and began to tack towards the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.
11
12Clear with passing clouds.

“Vilyuchensk” Island has disappeared from the maps. It is probably the same as “Starichkov” Island of later maps. Stellar (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” p. 18) refers to it: “Diesem Haven [Avacha] zur Rechten ist eine kleine steinerne Insel . . . Diese wird Wiliutschisky ostrow genennet.”


{p. 266}

September 4, 1742

Decision Reached at the Consultation on September 4, 1742

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and all the lower officers on board on the voyage from Avacha to Okhotsk came to the following decision:

1. We tried to repair the hooker St. Peter so that it would not leak as much as it had on the way from Bering Island to Avacha, and when we were at Avacha we had hoped that this had been done.

2. On September 1, after we had [made out a report ?] of the activities of our company, based on the original journal and chart, we were ready to go on our way. We went as far as eight miles from the bay but could not make much headway owing to the strong head wind which prevented us from sailing on our course, which was south and between south and west. At the same time our ship sprung a leak as before, forcing us to bail all the time and in the end to turn back to the aforementioned bay.

3. We knew, from former experiences, that after the middle of this month the strong north winds would begin to blow and that our vessel could not weather them and could never make Okhotsk in time [to escape them?]. We had time to go as far as the mouth of the Bolshaya River and might have done so, but we knew that at the Bolsheretsk Post there were not provisions enough for our men. Having taken all these reasons into consideration we decided to return to Avacha Bay.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Master Sofron Khitrov

Assistant Navigator Kharlam Yushin

For the Boatswain Alexei Ivanov

Boatswain’s mate Grigori Trubeshin

Midshipman Ivan Sint


{p. 267}

FINAL RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

September 5, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1WNWReef-topsail wind, cloudy; tacked in succession into the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.
2
3
4W/NFailed to make the harbor and anchored in 7 fathoms.
5
6
7Dropped another anchor.
8
9
10
11
12W
1N
2W
3
4Sent ashore to get a yawl and another boat to tow us in.
5NW/W
6
7W/N
8
9
10
11WWeighed anchor and tacked into the harbor.
12Fresh breeze, sunshine.

{p. 268}

September 6, 1742. After Midday

Key

HKWCL
1WTopsail wind.
2
3
4By tacking, towing, and rowing got into the harbor.
5
6
7
8We safely brought the St. Peter in front of the warehouse.
9
10
11
12At anchorDropped the anchors and made fast to shore with lines.
1
2
3
4
5
6NE
7
8Crew took its baggage ashore.
9
10
11
12Lieutenant Waxel and I went to our quarters [on shore].

{p. 269}

September 7, 1742. After Midday[140]

Key

HKWCL
1Light air.
2Clear; discharging the ship and taking the cargo ashore.
3
4Since noon we have been unrigging the hooker.
5
6
7
8Fair weather.
9
10Moon and stars out.
11
12Very light air, weather as before.
1
2
3
4Cloudy.
5
6Clear.
7Sky overcast.
8
9Since 8:30 it has been raining lightly.
10Clear with passing clouds.
11
12Took out the water barrels and the wood from the hooker, and it is now empty.

Yushin’s journal.


{p. 270}

CHAPTER VI

LIEUTENANT WAXEL’S REPORT ON THE VOYAGE OF THE ST. PETER

Although the log book of the St. Peter gives an intimate, day-by-day insight into the happenings of the voyage, and is therefore a valuable historical document, its stereotyped form and routine information often obscure the human interest of the story. This element is supplied by the simple and straightforward narrative of Lieutenant Sven Waxel’s report, which he, as officer in command after Bering’s death, forwarded to the Admiralty College from Petropavlovsk by special messenger in November, 1742. A translation from the original[1] in the Russian archives follows.

To the Imperial Admiralty College, a Most Humble Report

Last May, 1741, the late Captain Commander Bering called a council, in which participated Captain Chirikov, Professor de la Croyère, the officers, and navigators, to decide on the first course to sail after leaving the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul [Petropavlovsk] in order to discover the Terra Juan de Gama which is marked on the map of the above-named Professor de la Croyère and which extends northerly to the 47th parallel. It was agreed to steer, after going out of Avacha Bay, SE by E, true compass, to the 46th degree in order to see whether there is any land on that parallel and if such be discovered to coast alongside of it between north and east or north and west, depending on the lay of the land. If, however, no land is seen on that parallel, it was concluded to sail from there on an E by N course until land is found, and when found to follow it in a northerly direction for the purpose of observation as long as time will permit so as to return during the last days of September {p. 271} to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, where we would pass the winter. All having agreed to this plan, Captain Commander Bering on the St. Peter, accompanied by Captain Chirikov on the St. Paul, sailed out of Avacha Bay on June 4, 1741, and on getting out to sea kept the course agreed upon, that is SE by E, and a little closer at times.

DISCOVERY OF LAND: KAYAK ISLAND

The wind was fair, and we kept together with Captain Chirikov until June 19, when there was a strong easterly wind which compelled us and him to take in sail and heave to. The St. Paul was seen to the northwest of us until about eleven o’clock at night, being then in latitude 49° 52′ N and from Vaua 17° 49′, but after that time we lost sight of her. With the coming of day we set out to find her on the course on which we saw her during the night, and in this neighborhood so far as the weather allowed we spent 43 hours but without success. Then Captain Commander Bering, his officers agreeing, decided to pursue the course originally agreed upon between S and E, and we kept within that quarter of the compass on various rhumbs, according to the wind, to 45° 13′ and to the east of Vaua 16° 23′, and about 200 German miles without finding any land. The Captain Commander then changed the course to E by N, the same which had been agreed upon in council, and we sailed on it to latitude 48° 38′ and longitude from Vaua 36°, but even at this distance no land was seen. The Captain Commander, his officers agreeing, decided to keep a little more to the north in the hope of soon discovering some land. Between N and E we sailed until July 16, on which day we saw land [Mt. St. Elias] in the northwest. We steered for it and on July 20 anchored alongside one of the islands, which we named St. Elias [Kayak].

This island is situated in latitude 59° 40′ N;[2] longitude from Vaua 48° 50′, and on the course E by N from Vaua 417¾ German miles. That same day the Captain Commander sent Fleet Master Khitrov in the longboat to look about among the other islands in sight for a good anchoring place where we might run for shelter in case of need. Khitrov returned during the day and made a verbal report to the Captain to the effect that he found anchorage between the mainland and the island in the roadstead, where he got 3 to 3½ fathoms of water. He also reported that on that island he came across a hut built of hewn boards and that there were indications that people occupied the hut shortly before our coming. He brought to show us a wooden basket, a shovel, also a stone which had on it many marks of copper. The Adjunct Steller, who went in the small boat to the island of St. Elias, found there an earthen hut in which were dried fish, cured that very summer; we saw also human footprints on the sand and a fireplace. It was evident that on seeing {p. 272} us the people ran into the woods to hide or that their homes are on the mainland and they visit this island to catch fish and hunt sea animals. In order to show his good will to the native people the Captain Commander sent to the hut a number of presents—16½ arshins of green-colored goods, 2 iron knives, 20 Chinese strings of beads, 2 iron [smoking] pipes, all of which were left there. We could not tell whether on the mainland there was any good timber or not, but we did see the huge mountains and volcanoes covered with snow. On the island there is plenty of small timber, namely fir, larch, and other trees, which are not fit for building and not even for repairing a ship, for we looked for material for topyards but did not find it.

When we had provided ourselves with water from the island of St. Elias, the Captain Commander, mainly because it was dangerous to lie out in the open sea, departed July 21, and we steered between S and W, following the lay of the land, for the purpose of observation. In this way we sailed on various courses and came to latitude 56° 54′ by July 26. Here we sighted that same coast [Sitkalidak Island] in the direction NE by N from us, about seven miles distant. On taking soundings we had 35 to 40 fathoms of water. It was quite unsafe to keep near the land because of the sand banks, continuous heavy fogs, and violent winds; on that account, as well as our ignorance of the nature of the coast, which had dangers for us, we steered different courses in order to draw away from it more and more—all of which is clearly noted down in our log book. This maneuvering we kept up until August 2. During that night as the fog lifted, we saw quite close to us an island [Chirikov Island], the water being 18, 17, and 16 fathoms deep. On that account, as well as the darkness and the fog, we let go the anchor in 18 fathoms. We named this island Tumannoi [foggy]. In the morning we sailed away.

The mainland was from us in a NNW direction and not a great distance away. August 4 we sighted five islands [Semidi], and from this time on we kept farther and farther out to sea. For the course we were following the winds were quite contrary. By August 10 we were in latitude 53° 18′ N and from Vaua a little less than 400 German miles; and taking all this into consideration, also the report submitted by the assistant surgeon, to the effect that 21 of our company were down with scurvy and that, if obliged to remain out at sea during the autumn weather, they would be altogether unfit for service, the Captain Commander with his higher and lower officers decided that if the winds permitted it we should from this day on keep on the 53rd parallel in order to see whether or not American land is to be found on that parallel, although the last we saw of it was on the 55th. We attempted to put our decision into execution but, until August 27, were hindered by the severe headwinds from the west, being then still more than 300 German miles from Vaua and on the 53rd parallel of latitude. It was quite clear to the Captain Commander that {p. 273} if these violent head winds held on we should not advance very fast. At this time we had only 25 barrels of water, and to attempt with no more on hand to reach the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, assuming even that headwinds would no longer trouble us, would be very dangerous and might lead to a great misfortune.

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS

Taking these possibilities into consideration it was agreed on this 27th day of August to go in search of water on the land which according to our calculation was about 60 miles away. On the 29th we saw many islands [Shumagin], towards which we steered closer and closer, having 55, 50, 45, and 15 fathoms of water, with an even, sloping, sandy bottom. When we had come near enough we lowered the small yawl and sent the Assistant Navigator Yushin to find anchorage among the islands. While he was gone we anchored in 24 fathoms. When he returned and said that he could not find good anchorage we weighed anchor, put over the longboat, and went in its tow into the bay among the islands, where we had 25 and 15 fathoms of water. Near one of the islands we anchored and sent the navigator ashore to look for water, and, on returning, he reported to the Captain Commander that he found plenty of it. The mainland was seen behind these islands about 12 miles away. During the night we saw fire on one of the islands to the NNE, about a mile and a half away from us.

The following morning, August 30, Fleet Master Khitrov was sent in the small yawl to the place where fire had been seen, with instructions that, if he found people, he should treat them kindly; and with that in view he was given a number of things to present to them. In the meantime a strong wind was blowing, accompanied by squalls, so that it was not safe to remain longer near the island, as we were wholly unprotected. We were therefore obliged to seek shelter, though it was slight, among the islands, where we anchored. On September 2 we sent the longboat to Khitrov because, owing to the violent wind, he could not get off shore in the small yawl. The next day, September 3, he came safely aboard but without the small yawl, which he had to leave behind owing to the strong wind and heavy surf. He made a report to the Captain Commander that he was at the place where fire had been seen, that he found the fireplace but did not meet any people. This same day we weighed anchor and tacked among the islands, going around the first island to the island [Bird Island] which was to the east of it, about two miles distant, and there anchoring in 15 fathoms. Here we remained, September 4. About noon of the 5th we heard a loud noise and saw two men, who sat in two baidarkas rowing towards our ship. When they came within 50 fathoms of us they stopped and called to us in their tongue, which our interpreters of the Chukchi and Koriak languages could not make out. Our interpreters hailed them in Koriak and in Chukchi, and it was evident that they could not understand, because {p. 274} they pointed to their ears, waved their hands to us, and motioned to the shore. After this, one of the two approached much closer to our ship but would not come alongside. At the order of the Captain Commander we threw to him, tied on a board, several arshins of red (Chinese) silk, mirrors, iron pipes for smoking Chinese tobacco (called shar), and several small copper bells. He seemed to receive these gifts with pleasure, and in return he threw to us two thin sticks planed smooth, to one of which were tied birds’ feathers and to the other a bird’s claw with the feathers on, which feathers we identified as that of the hawk. When we had accepted the presents the Americans pulled away for the shore, at the same time shouting to us in a loud voice and waving their hands toward the beach.

The Captain Commander ordered that the longboat should be lowered; in this I was sent to the Americans. I took with me an interpreter who understood the Chukchi and Koriak tongues, several armed men, also presents and Russian liquor. When I came near the place of the Americans I anchored because, owing to the surf, the strong wind, and submerged rocks, it was impossible to land. I allowed the interpreter and several men of my party to wade ashore. At the same time I offered the Americans presents, which they would not accept. To one of them I handed a cup of liquor, which he took and drank but immediately spat it out. In the meantime the interpreter who went ashore was led to their camp, where he was offered whale blubber, which he accepted. When he wished to go back to the boat the Americans detained him and would not allow it; just how fast they held him it was difficult to say. In order to free him I was obliged to command the soldiers to fire in the air. When the guns were fired they all fell on the ground, and this gave the interpreter the chance to come aboard. The Americans made a dash for the boat, seized the painter, and started to haul the boat ashore. I feared that it would be smashed on the rocks and therefore shouted to cut the painter and slip the cable. With all my men I returned safe on board and made a verbal report to the Captain Commander. At night the Americans built a big fire on the beach. That night there was an unusually strong wind, and we were compelled to strike the main and fore yards and wait for daylight. As soon as the 5th of September dawned we weighed anchor and tacked near the island with the intention of proceeding on our course, but the wind was contrary and the tide against us. We went back again to the island and anchored in 17 fathoms. While we were at anchor there rowed to us from the aforementioned island seven baidarkas, two of which came right up to the ship. It was evident that they had never before seen a gun, for when they came to us they were not in the least afraid. We gave them at this time an iron kettle and a few needles. They gave to us as presents two hats made of bark on which were fastened ivory images in the form of a human {p. 275} being.[3] These images are being sent together with this humble report to the honorable Admiralty College, but the hats as well as the sticks were lost at the time of our misfortune.

SKIRTING THE ALEUTIAN ISLANDS

All these islands are uninhabited and treeless. It is evident that the Americans come in baidarkas from the mainland to the islands to hunt sea animals and to catch fish. As to the way the Americans make their baidarkas from seal hide, it may be seen from the detailed drawing which I made on the map which is sent to the Admiralty College. Having taken on water we got under sail September 6 and continued on our course. We called that island Shumagin. We intended to go straight to Avacha Bay, but contrary winds from the west as well as violent winds hindered us and caused us much suffering. Frequently we had to heave to in order to save ourselves. On September 24 we came to latitude 51° N where we sighted several islands [Adak, Atka] and, behind them on the WNW, the American mainland [Great Sitkin]. At this place there blew an indescribable gale from the west which continued until October 13. During the whole time we had to heave to and were carried to the eastward about 80 German miles. In order that the Admiralty College may form some idea of the storm it should be pointed out that the old navigators said that they had seldom seen anything like it. We were saved from it with great difficulty. A number of the men were down with scurvy, some died of it, and those who survived were too weak to work. Although, on account of the hard labor and the continuous inclement weather, we were at the end of our strength, yet with the help of God we made every effort to reach the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. On October 25, being then in latitude 51° and some minutes, we sighted a high, rocky, and treeless island in NW by N, which we named St. Markiana [Kiska Island], On the 28th we saw another island to the NNW, about three miles distant, and in its neighborhood three small islands. As far as we could make out they were all bare and treeless. This island we named St. Stephen [Buldir]. The following day it was foggy, and on taking soundings and getting only 35 fathoms of water we hove to and did not take any chances. When it cleared a bit we noticed an island to the west which we named St. Abraham [one of the Semichi]. We then hoisted the sails and went on our way. It became very difficult to run the ship because, in addition to those who died, 40 were ill and those who were still about were very feeble. We continued under these conditions {p. 276} until November 4, on which day we sighted land [Copper Island] which we looked upon as a godsend because it was beyond our strength to keep any longer at sea. By observation this land is in latitude 54°, but by dead reckoning we thought we were in latitude 53° and in longitude some 140 minutes from Vaua. From this reckoning we hoped that the land in sight might be Kamchatka, some little distance north of Shipunski Cape. Our faulty reckoning was due to the fact that we had for a long time (as may be seen from our log book) thick weather and no sunshine to set us right.

VAIN ATTEMPTS TO SAVE THE SHIP

We and our men were greatly weakened from the severe attack of the scurvy and at the end of our strength and in great danger, for it may be said at that time the ship was without control. Of our men there were only eight who, with great pain, could look after themselves, and of these three, one of them being the Captain Commander’s man, could come on deck. All the others were sick unto death. We had only six barrels of water on board. As to provisions we had no sea biscuit or such like and only a little flour, butter, and meat. On top of this the shrouds on the mainsail above the catharpings on the right side were all torn, and therefore we could not carry any sail on the mainmast and, as was noted above, there was no one to do any repairing. At the particular time of our misfortune the wind was contrary for getting around the cape seen by us. Therefore, on November 5, realizing that we were in a bad state to remain longer at sea and that it was dangerous to wait for fair winds because our men were giving out so fast that we feared we should be left without any help whatever and the ship would be lost with all on board, the Captain Commander called together for consultation all the higher and lower officers and those of the men who were still able to drag themselves to the cabin. The members of the crew announced that because of their sickness and feebleness they were no longer able to do their work at sea. Taking this into account the Captain Commander and the higher and lower officers agreed to look for an anchoring place where we might winter in order to save ourselves and not be entirely destroyed by such a dreadful disease. All the men agreed to this, and we sailed before the wind towards the land and drew near it about five o’clock in the afternoon and anchored with the small bower in 12 fathoms of water and paid out about three-fourths of a cable. It broke about 80 fathoms from the end, and we were carried by the surf 5 fathoms, when we let go another anchor with the same result, and we were carried by the surf over [the reef] closer to the shore into 4½ fathoms, where we let fall the best bower and paid out three-fourths of a cable. By this time we had 49 of the crew on the sick list. On November 6 we lowered the longboat and moored the ship, but only after great difficulty since we were so short-handed. After this week, with the help of those men who, although with some effort, were still able to be on their feet, we did our best to transport {p. 277} the sick ashore and to put up for them tents made out of sails. When these were up we took the sick Captain Commander ashore on November 8; Fleet Master Khitrov, who was also ill, on the 15th; and many of the crew, not a few of whom died as they were being transported. On the 21st I, too, was so ill that I had to be taken off the ship because I was almost helpless, and there was no one to bring water on board, and no one to look after the ship.

At this time the Captain Commander sent Constable Roselius with two other men with instructions to follow the shore in a northerly direction to determine whether the land on which we were was part of Kamchatka or some island; and, if Kamchatka, Roselius was to continue on his way until he came to an inhabited place and there carry out such orders as the Captain Commander gave him. Roselius was so weak that he did not go farther than 30 miles from our camp and returned without news. On November 21, the Captain Commander ordered me, with the higher and lower officers and members of the crew, to submit a report on the best way to save the ship. This was done, and the report was submitted on the 23rd, in which we recommended that the ship should be hauled up on the sandy beach near our camp and that the cargo should not be unloaded so that in case of a strong offshore wind and the breaking of the cables the ship would not be carried out to sea. The Captain Commander accepted the report and that same day, the 23rd, ordered Master Khitrov to put it into execution at the very first opportunity. On the 25th Khitrov started to go on board and, when he came to where the longboat was hauled up, was told by the boatswain, Alexei Ivanov, who was on watch, that there were only five able-bodied men. In dragging the longboat into the water one of the men got drenched to the skin and had to give up, which left four men who were completely exhausted. When Master Khitrov realized that with this handful of men he could not weigh the best bower anchor, that the wind at the time was blowing NNW straight on the rocky reef, which was about 150 fathoms in SSE direction from where the ship was at that time, and that the topmasts and yards were down, and even if there had been enough men it would be dangerous to move the ship in such weather, owing to the above-mentioned reef, he became convinced that he could not carry out the task assigned to him. He then came to me and explained the situation, and I advised him to make his report to the Captain Commander, which he did. From the 25th to the 28th it blew hard so that it was not possible to go on board to carry out the above-mentioned order. In addition to the other troubles Fleet Master Khitrov was quite ill with scurvy and unable to be about and was put in the same tent with the rest of us. On the night of November 28 a violent storm from NE broke the cable and drove the ship on the sandy beach on which we had planned to lay her up. On December 1 the Captain Commander sent the sailor {p. 278} Anchiugov with two other men along the shore to the south to explore and to learn whether the land on which we were was the mainland or some island. They came back on December 27 without any definite information.

WINTERING ON BERING ISLAND

On December 8, 1741, by the will of God, Captain Commander Bering died of scurvy from which he had been suffering for four months, and we buried him on the island where we lived. I succeeded him in command, and, with the assistance of Fleet Master Khitrov, every effort was made to find out where we were; but, owing to bad weather and other serious obstacles, it was not before the month of April that we knew anything certain. As soon as we were sure that we were on an island, we made a general inspection of the St. Peter to determine whether she was in good condition for going to Kamchatka and whether it was possible to get her into the water. Our examination showed that the vessel was so badly injured that she could not be repaired, that we had nothing to repair her with, and that we had not the facilities for getting her off since she was buried in something like seven feet of sand above the keel. We took council together as to how to get away from the island, and we found no other means (since the island was bare and treeless) than to break up the ship and make out of her for our voyage to Kamchatka as large a vessel as the timber would allow. To this plan all agreed, and we went to work in April and continued operations until May 5. On the following day (May 6), with the help of God, we commenced building the new vessel, the keel of which was 36 feet, beam 12, and depth 5 feet 3 inches. We worked as fast as we could, making use of every favorable moment.

The island on which we wintered extends from 54° to 56° north latitude, and from the southern cape, which we named Cape Manati, that is to say Sea Cow, it stretches from NNW to SSE. It is about 130 versts long and about 10 wide. There are no habitations on it and no signs that people ever lived there. There are no trees of any kind except in some places a few small willows. On the island are high mountains and volcanoes. In many places there are rocky bluffs, making it extremely difficult for sea-going vessels to approach, for on the whole island there are very few places where the beach is not full of rocks, stretching out into the sea for a verst or more, which are submerged at high tide and exposed at low tide. Where the beach is not rocky the surf runs high, and therefore it is quite dangerous to anchor in the roadstead. For ships that draw five or six feet of water there is no place for wintering, for we looked into the question of a harbor and sent for that purpose Fleet Master Khitrov to the south and boatswain Alexei Ivanov to the north, but they could not find one. When the wind blew from the west it brought us from Kamchatka pieces of timber that had been used in the building of huts, planks that had been used for fastening together rafts of logs, and broken deer sleds such as are used by the wandering Koriaks.

{p. 279}

Many times when the weather was clear some of our men saw, from the west side of the island, what seemed to be snow-covered volcanoes, but on account of the great distance we could not be sure about that, but our reckoning on the 1742 voyage leaves no room for doubt that the volcanoes in question were those of the Kamchatka coast. From the American side there floated over to us big pine trees, arrows, and paddles such as are not found in Kamchatka. While on the island we lived very poorly because our dwellings were holes made in the sand covered over with sail. The gathering of wood was particularly difficult, for we were obliged to search for it along the beach and carry it on our backs as far as 10 or 12 versts. While we were there we and nearly all the men in our command suffered greatly from scurvy and for such a long time that some did not fully recover before spring when there were found some greens which could be used for food. During the whole winter our food, because we had no other provision, was, we might say, very poor, difficult to obtain, and not fit to eat. We had to hunt along the beach sometimes as far as 20 and 30 versts in the hopes of killing a sea animal, sea otter, sea lion, or hair seal, which is commonly called tulen. Having killed the beast we had to carry it on our backs the same long distance back to our camp. If we could not find live animals to kill we had to content ourselves with dead ones that were washed ashore, such as sea cows and whales. By spring the game was frightened away, and we had to live on the fur seals which came here at that time to breed. Their meat was especially nauseating; and, as it became more so as time went on, we took to hunting sea cows, huge animals, weighing no less than two hundred poods. One may form an idea of the appearance of these animals—fur seal, sea lion, and sea cow—from the sketches of them made on the map which I send to the Admiralty College.[4] From this time on we lived on sea cow meat, which is better than that of the other animals aforementioned.

On the island where we lived there were violent winds and even blizzards during the winter. It may be said that between December and March there was seldom a fair day. From March and during the spring and summer months there was almost continuous fog and dampness and little pleasant weather.

The delay in the construction of our vessel was due in part to the disagreeable atmospheric conditions just mentioned and in part to the poor health of the men and the great distance from the source of authority, which made it unsafe to hold them strictly to their work, and nothing could be done without the consent of all concerned. Adjunct Steller, who was with us, prospected the island for metals and minerals but found none. When with God’s help the new ship was finished, I, with Fleet Master Khitrov and all the men, had a meeting to discuss what we should {p. 280} do with all the material on hand. We agreed to take with us a certain amount of iron for ballast, such provisions as we needed, a supply of fresh water, several barrels of salted sea cow meat, and all the crew with their baggage and to sail for Kamchatka. All the other material and supplies, the greater part of which was worthless, according to the testimony of the Fleet Master and the petty officers, it was decided to leave behind in the warehouse which we built for that purpose. Owing to the fall weather and our ignorance of the seaworthiness of our craft we did not think it wise to overload it. A list of all the material, good and bad, left behind is sent to the Admiralty College.

On August 10 we launched our newly constructed ship which we named the hooker St. Peter, and we rigged it on August 13. Having taken on board all the men to the number of 46, we started, with God’s help, on our way to Kamchatka. On the night of August 15, while out at sea, the vessel, owing to her poor construction, sprang a big leak so that there was soon about two feet of water in the hold. We were in great danger, and to lighten the ship we threw out of the hold cannon balls and shot. By means of buckets and pumps we got rid of some of the water. When the leak had been somewhat attended to we proceeded on our course. On August 26 we sailed safely into the Harbor of the Holy Apostles St. Peter and St. Paul. There we heard that Captain Chirikov and his company had left this same summer for Okhotsk. We repaired the hooker St. Peter and set sail on September 1 with the intention of following him to Okhotsk, but after being out at sea for five days another big leak was discovered. In addition to other troubles the wind was contrary, so that we decided, all agreeing, to return for the winter to the harbor so that we might not suffer misfortune from such a leak in such an unreliable vessel and so late a season.

FINAL ARRANGEMENTS

We are now in Kamchatka, where we plan to remain until the coming April, when we will repair the hooker and go to Okhotsk. If Captain Chirikov should still be there, I and my company will place ourselves at his orders; if he should be gone, we will proceed to Yakutsk, where I will try to carry out the instructions of the Admiralty College which I shall there receive; if there are no orders on hand, I will wait until they come.

I take this occasion to report to the Admiralty College that from the time we left the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul in the year 1741, and during the time we were out at sea and on the island, there died of scurvy at different times, officers and others, 31 men. The names of these persons and the dates of their death are sent on a special list.

Article 9 of the instructions which the Admiralty College gave to Captain Commander Bering reads that when the expedition shall have come to an end there should be forwarded to the Admiralty College the log book and the chart that shall have been made by the officers who were on the voyage. I and Fleet Master Khitrov fully meant to do that [make {p. 281} the chart] but we were in such trouble and so ill (all of which I have reported above) that we have not as yet been able to accomplish it. But the log book and a sketch map giving the outline of the American coast (which we wished to name, after the manner of other European discoverers, “New Russia” but did not feel empowered to do so without orders of the Admiralty College), as well as sketch maps of the islands of St. Elias, Shumagin, and the other neighboring islands are being sent to the Admiralty College this 15th day of November, 1742, by a special messenger, one of my men, the boatswain Alexei Ivanov. This man was a tower of strength when we were in trouble. The Captain Commander made him boatswain, and he fulfilled the duties of his position in an able manner. For greater safety in going through the country of the natives Ivanov is accompanied by Ivan Okulov, one of our soldiers, from a Tobolsk regiment. They are ordered to go by way of the Anadyr Post and to lose no time.

That which I have reported above about our hardships and suffering I humbly pray that the Admiralty College may receive.

Lieutenant Sven Waxel

Harbor of the Holy Apostles

  St. Peter and St. Paul

 

November 15, 1742

Enclosure

 

List of the Officers and Men of the “St. Peter,” Which Sailed from the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul in 1741, Who by the Will of God Died of Scurvy Either at Sea or on the Island Where We Wintered

The name of each person and the date when he died are noted below; and the island where we wintered, and which has been described above, we named Bering’s Island.

Sailor, 2nd rankNikita ShumaginAug.31,1741
Marine grenadierAndrei TretyakovSept.24,1741
Marine soldierAlexei KiselevOct.19,1741
Kamchatka soldierNikita KharitonovOct.20,1741
Marine soldierLuka ZaviakovOct.22,1741
Admiralty cooperStepan BogdrievOct.28,1741
Soldier of the Siberian garrisonKarp PashennoiOct.31,1741
Admiralty carpenterIvan PetrovNov.2,1741
Drummer of the Siberian garrisonOsip ChentsovNov.4,1741
Marine grenadierAlexei PopovNov.4,1741
Soldier of the Siberian garrisonIvan DavidovNov.4,1741
Marine grenadierIvan NebaranovNov.5,1741
BoatswainNils JansenNov.8,1741
TrumpeterMikhael ToroptsovNov.11,1741
Sailor, 1st rankIvan EmelianovNov.15,1741
Cannoneer, 2nd rankIlya DergachevNov.15,1741
Cadet of the Yakutsk regimentVasili PopkovNov.15,1741
Sailor, 2nd rankSeliverst TarakanovNov.15,1741
Soldier of the Yakutsk regimentSavin StepanovNov.16,1741
{p. 282}    
Sailor, 1st rankMark AntipinNov.20,1741
Sailor, 1st rankSemen Artemev[5]Nov.22,1741
NavigatorAndreyan EselbergNov.22,1741
Admiralty calkerAlexei KlementevDec.4,1741
UnderskipperNikita KhotyaintsovDec.9,1741
Marine grenadierIvan TretyakovDec.17,1741
Cannoneer, 2nd rankProkofei EfintsovDec.27,1741
Marine soldierFedor PanovJan.2,1742
EnsignIvan LagunovJan.8,1742
Personal servants of the officers, two men   

Altogether, with the Captain Commander, 31 men.[6]

Lieutenant Sven Waxel


Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty College, 1742-1746, No. 2, pp. 233 ff. On the top of the first page is written “Received September 4, 1743, from the hands of Boatswain Alexei Ivanov, who was sent here for that purpose.” The report was passed on to the Senate two days later, and to the Cabinet on September 17.

Yushin gives 59° 49′, Khitrov 59° 39′. The correct latitude of the southern point (Cape St. Elias) is 59° 48′, of the northern point 60° 0′, and of the St. Peter’s anchorage 59° 56′.

These so-called hats were eye shades which the hunters used when out at sea. Cook gives the following description of them: “All of them [Aleuts of Unalaska] have a kind of oval snouted cap, made of wood, with a rim to admit the head. These caps are dyed with green and other colors; and round the upper part of the rim are stuck the long bristles of some sea animal [sea lion] on which are strung glass beads; and on the front is a small image or two made of bone.” (James Cook: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, London, 1784, Vol. 2, p. 51.) See Fig. 12, lower.

Reproduced by W. H. Dall as Pl. 70, Appendix 19, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept. for 1890.

His death not mentioned in the log book.

Waxel left out the name of the sailor Nikita Ovtsin, who died on November 19 (see log book).


{p. 283}

CHAPTER VII

THE JOURNAL OF CHIRIKOV’S VESSEL, THE “ST. PAUL”

The second of the two vessels that started on June 4, 1741, from Petropavlovsk on that eventful voyage was the St. Paul, Captain Alexei Chirikov in command. The first-hand records consist of a log book, a daily journal of the voyage, and Captain Chirikov’s report to the Admiralty College in St. Petersburg. Of the originals[1] in the Russian archives, a translation of the journal is given in this chapter and of Captain Chirikov’s report in the next chapter. It has not been deemed necessary to publish the log book, as, other than routine navigational information, it contains nothing that is not reported even more fully, in the journal and report. The log book has, however, been used in plotting the track of the St. Paul (see p. 330, footnote 1).

Journal Kept on the Ship “St. Paul” in Command of Captain Alexei Chirikov At the Time It Made the Voyage East From the Kamchatka Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul to the Western Coast of America in the Year 1741

The reckoning begins from the landmark called Vaua at the mouth of Avacha Bay, situated in latitude 52° 53′ north, longitude (according to the observation taken recently by Professor of Astronomy Delisle de la Croyère) 127° 55′ from the meridian of St. Petersburg and 175° 55′ from the Peak of Teneriffe Island. For our reckoning we take the meridian which runs through Vaua as the first meridian. We reckon in knots, of which there are sixty to the degree. After June 4 we marked on the chart our daily position in latitude and longitude, the rhumb, and the distance from Vaua.


Log book: Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: 1741-43, Nos. 645-648. Another log book, under 1742, No. 1706.

Journal: Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty College, 1743, No. 16.

Report: Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain Commander Bering, No. 44.

{p. 284}

June 4, 1741

From Vaua we sailed on the rhumb S50°E, distance 8.5 knots.

June 5, 1741

From Vaua rhumb S68°E.

Saw the St. Peter, Captain Commander Bering in command, on the rhumb W by S, 5 knots distant. We fired a gun as a signal for the Captain Commander to come closer to us since the wind was such that we could not go to him. From us it seemed that the course sailed was more southerly than agreed upon. It had been decided by all the officers and by Professor Delisle de la Croyère to sail SE by E true compass. That same hour the Captain Commander acknowledged our signal by firing a gun and stood straight for us.

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND

Although Juan de Gama Land is an island, consequently not a part of the American continent, yet we decided on the course we did because our instructions called for an examination of the islands lying on the way to America. It was agreed in case we failed to find land in latitude 46° N, to sail steadily E by N until we met with success. If on either of the courses SE by E or E by N we discovered land it was our plan to coast along it from east to north or north to west, depending on its position, but not to follow it up if it extended between south and east. In that case we were to leave it and go east until we came across [other] land and keep this in sight while likewise going northerly, to latitude 65° or at least as far as, with the help of God, the time would permit. If we reached latitude 65° in good time we planned to sail due west to the Chukchi country and in this way determine the distance between America and Asia and when that was accomplished to return to this harbor. If on the above-mentioned rhumb we should run into head winds then we agreed to keep as close to the rhumb as possible until, with God’s help, we discovered land, which we would examine according to the instructions of the Captain Commander. In planning the voyage we had to keep in mind that we must return to this harbor towards the end of September. Although we discussed the plan suggested by the Admiralty College, before we left, of sailing (because the distance was supposed to be short) across from the Chukchi land to America, yet we did not do so because it was too early.

June 6, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 02′ N; from Vaua, longitude 1° 57′ 3″ E, rhumb S54°30′E, distance 87.9 knots.[2]

{p. 285}

At 1:30 in the afternoon the Captain Commander, in answer to our signal mentioned above, came close to our ship. Through the speaking trumpet we told him that we signaled because he was on the rhumb W by S, 5 knots distant, wind SW by W, and that we ought to keep closer together. If we failed to do so we might become separated in foggy weather and spend valuable time in looking for one another, for we were on the course agreed upon and the wind fair.

The same day the Captain Commander signaled for one of our lieutenants. Captain Chirikov requested that, unless it was an urgent matter, the communication should be made through the speaking trumpet, for to send a lieutenant necessitated the lowering of a boat and the loss of time. It was replied (from the St. Peter) that if we had any communication of importance to make to the Captain Commander we should send a lieutenant; if we had not we need not send him, and that this was all they wished to tell us. After this the signal was taken down.


As in the log book of the St. Peter, the positions refer to noon of the astronomical day. For the difference between the civil and the astronomical date, see footnote 6, p. 50. In the journal of the St. Paul, however, the rhumb and distance from Vaua are reckoned differently from what they are in the log of the St. Peter. The rhumb is expressed as direction within a quadrant instead of in points of the compass, as there (footnote 2, p. 37); the distance, in knots, or nautical miles (60 to a mean degree of latitude), instead of in German miles (15 to a degree). Comparing the entries for June 6 and reducing them to a common term, we get: (1) rhumb: St. Peter, SE by E3°30′E, or, in azimuth, 120° 15′; St. Paul, S54°30′E, or 125° 30′; (2) distance, St. Peter, 25¼ German miles, or 101 knots; St. Paul, 87.9 knots. For the track of the St. Paul Pl. 1 should be consulted throughout.

June 7, 1741

Latitude 50° 55′; from Vaua, longitude 4° 26′ 7″, rhumb S54°21′E, distance 201.4 knots.

June 8, 1741

Latitude 49° 52′; from Vaua, longitude 6° 49′, rhumb S54°41′E, distance 313 knots.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon the Captain Commander signaled for our ship to take the lead.

June 9, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 42′; from Vaua, longitude 9° 09′ 6″, rhumb S54°08′E, distance 428.4 knots.

June 10, 1741

Latitude by observation 47° 45′; from Vaua, longitude 10° 53′ 9″, rhumb S53°33′E, distance 518 knots.

At the fifth hour the St. Peter came near us, and we told them that at night we would heave to in order to take soundings and when we did that we would hang a lantern at the ensign staff and that they should keep a lookout for it and not run into us.

{p. 286}

June 11, 1741

Latitude 46° 58′; from Vaua, longitude 12° 38′ 8″, rhumb S53°56′E, 603 knots.

At the sixth hour Captain Commander signaled to wait for him and to do that we hove to. At 6:30 we talked over with him the latitude, the longitude, and the distance from Vaua. Proceeded on our course. It was understood that if in the nighttime we took soundings and got bottom we should fire a gun and bring to.

June 12, 1741

Latitude by observation 46° 05′; from Vaua, longitude 13° 35′ 5″, rhumb S52°20′E, distance 667.7 knots.

June 13, 1741

Latitude 46° 03′; from Vaua, longitude 14° 0′ 1″, rhumb S53°02′E. distance 682 knots.

At 3:30 in the afternoon we hove to while the St. Peter came up to us. Lieutenant Waxel, through the speaking trumpet, announced that according to the decision reached by the Captain Commander, the officers, and the Professor of Astronomy, Delisle de la Croyère, it was time to change the rhumb and to sail E by N by true compass. From our ship it was replied that Captain Chirikov and his officers agreed to this, since the observations made at noon [recorded under June 12] gave our position as latitude 46° 05′ N, rhumb from Vaua S52°20′E. The conversation ended by all agreeing to sail E by N true compass. That same hour we looked from the crosstrees for land between S and W, also S and E, but saw no land. We filled our sails and went on the rhumb agreed upon.

June 14, 1741

Latitude 46° 18′; from Vaua, longitude 14° 10′ 7′, rhumb S54°20′E, distance 677 knots.

June 15, 1741

Latitude 47° 41′; from Vaua, longitude 14° 23′ 4″, rhumb S60°26′E, distance 632.3 knots.

June 16, 1741

Latitude 47° 55′; from Vaua, longitude 14° 39′ 1″, rhumb S61°58′E, distance 634.1 knots.

At the beginning of the fourth hour in the afternoon we came about and went on a port tack in order to get closer to the Captain Commander, who was from us SE by S, about 3½ (?) knots away. About the middle {p. 287} of the hour we shook out the first reef in the fore-topsail; at the end of the hour we came about on a starboard tack.

At the end of the fifth hour we came up with the St. Peter. We lowered the staysail, clewed up the foresail, and inquired through the speaking trumpet how far north we should go in case this east wind held on and whether a signal would be given us when it was time to put about. In reply we were told that no changes would be made without a signal. At the beginning of the eighth hour the Captain Commander came about and so did we.

June 17, 1741

Latitude 48° 12′; from Vaua, longitude 15° 49′ 5″, rhumb S65°0′E, distance 665 knots.

June 18, 1741

Latitude 48° 53′; from Vaua, longitude 17° 30′ 05″, rhumb S70°04′E, distance 704 knots.

About the middle of the fifth hour in the morning a gun was fired from the St. Peter as a signal for us to come up. We brought to, since we were to the leeward; and in the meantime the St. Peter drew close to us, and Master Khitrov, speaking through the trumpet, informed us that we were now near 49° 0′ N, and that the place on the 46th parallel which lies on the agreed course from Vaua is now S½W from us; consequently we should now come about on another tack. I replied that we should [not?] come about with the wind as it stands because we are now sailing NE½E true compass, which course is the same as E by N from the 46th parallel, a difference of 2½ rhumbs. If we came about on another tack we should be sailing SSW½W, a difference of 11½ rhumbs, which would lead us far away from our main course. Therefore I suggested that we proceed on the course we are on, making use of the north and west winds, until we had come at least as far as the 53rd parallel. No reply was made to this. We filled our sails and went our way.

June 19, 1741

Latitude 49° 31′; from Vaua, longitude 18° 36′ 2″, rhumb S73°53′E, distance 727.7 knots.

SEPARATION OF THE TWO VESSELS

June 20, 1741

Latitude 48° 49′; from Vaua, longitude 17° 41′ 7″, rhumb S69°58′E, distance 712 knots.

At the third hour in the morning the St. Peter was 10 knots distant; at the fifth hour she began to disappear from sight.

The spot where we last saw the ship was to the north, latitude 48° 59′, longitude from Vaua 18° 0′, distance 10 knots.

{p. 288}

June 21, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 27′; from Vaua, longitude 17° 29′, rhumb S68°10′E, distance 716 knots.

At the beginning of the ninth hour wind moderated; hoisted mainsail and foresail and proceeded on our course; lowered main-staysail. The signal code which the Captain Commander gave us said that in case we parted we should look for one another at the place where we last saw one another. I gave the order to steer as near as possible for that spot, but this was difficult as it was NNE from us and the wind was dead ahead.

June 22, 1741

Latitude 48° 06′; from Vaua, longitude 18° 37′ 8″, rhumb S67°59′E, distance 765 knots.

June 23, 1741

Latitude 48° 15′; from Vaua, longitude 20° 20′ 3″, rhumb S70°15′E. distance 823 knots.

At the fifth hour in the morning we gave up looking for the St. Peter and with the assent of all the officers of the St. Paul we went on our way.

June 24, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 03′; from Vaua, longitude 23° 14′, rhumb S71°53′E, distance 933 knots.

June 25, 1741

Latitude 48° 22′; from Vaua, longitude 26° 24′ 2″, rhumb S74°54′E, distance 1,040 knots.

June 26, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 11′; from Vaua, longitude 29° 14′, rhumb S75°48′E, distance 1,149 knots.

At the beginning of the twelfth hour in the morning we thought we sighted mountains between N and NE, and to make sure we steered NE by compass.

June 27, 1741

Latitude 48° 34′; from Vaua, longitude 30° 52′ 4″, rhumb S77°32′E, distance, 1,200 knots.

At the end of the fourth hour in the afternoon we discovered that the supposed mountains were clouds and therefore went back to the regular course.

June 28, 1741

Latitude 48° 59′; from Vaua, longitude 33° 0′ 5″, rhumb S79°24′E, distance 1,269 knots.

{p. 289}

EASTWARD COURSE

June 29, 1741

Latitude 49° 22′ 1″; from Vaua, longitude 34° 58′ 1″, rhumb S80°53′E, distance 1,332 knots.

June 30, 1741

Latitude 49° 47′; from Vaua, longitude 37° 06′ 8″, rhumb S82°24′E, distance 1,407 knots.

July 1, 1741

Latitude 50° 27′; from Vaua, longitude 40° 31′, rhumb S84°28′E, distance 1,514 knots.

July 2, 1741

Latitude 50° 48′; from Vaua, longitude 42° 0′ 4″, rhumb S85°24′E, distance 1,559 knots.

July 3, 1741

Latitude 50° 50′; from Vaua, longitude 42° 06′, rhumb S85°29′E, distance 1,562 knots.

July 4, 1741

Latitude 51° 03′; from Vaua, longitude 42° 40′, rhumb S86°01′E, distance 1,584 knots.

July 5, 1741

Latitude 51° 32′; from Vaua, longitude 45° 12′ 8″, rhumb S87°13′E, distance 1,668 knots.

July 6, 1741

Latitude 51° 58′; from Vaua, longitude 47° 33′ 1″, rhumb S88°12′E, distance 1,751 knots.

July 7, 1741

Latitude 52° 10′; from Vaua, longitude 48° 36′, rhumb S88°37′E, distance 1,773 knots.

At the eighth hour in the evening we noticed considerable green-looking vegetation afloat, which we thought was grass, and therefore we brought to in order to take soundings. No bottom at 100 fathoms.

Examined the vegetation and learned that it was not (sea) grass but a species found in thick water resembling a sea nettle which is washed ashore in large quantities.

July 8, 1741

Latitude 52° 32′; from Vaua, longitude 48° 45′, rhumb S89°19′E, distance 1,772 knots.

July 9, 1741

Latitude 52° 49′; from Vaua, longitude 49° 08′, rhumb S89°50′E, distance 1,782 knots.

{p. 290}

July 10, 1741

Latitude 53° 10′; from Vaua, longitude 51° 18′, rhumb N89°28′E, distance 1,852 knots.

July 11, 1741

Latitude 53° 21′; from Vaua, longitude 52° 04′, rhumb N89°09′E, distance 1,874 knots.

July 12, 1741

Latitude by observation 54° 27′; from Vaua, longitude 55° 16′, rhumb N87°15′E, distance 1,959 knots.

Saw a shore duck today.

July 13, 1741

Latitude by observation 54° 41′; from Vaua, longitude 58° 03′ 5″, rhumb N86°59′E, distance 2,053 knots.

Saw a shore duck, a gull, and two old floating trees.

July 14, 1741

Latitude 55° 09′ 6″; from Vaua, longitude 60° 41′, rhumb N86°21′E, distance 2,145 knots.

At the beginning of the first hour in the morning we noticed near the ship three wide and long strips of very white water. We brought to and took soundings, but no bottom at 100 fathoms. We drifted into the first strip, which was about half a verst long and 200 fathoms wide, and later into the other strips, which were smaller. The color of the water was different, possibly owing to the movement of a school of fish; but we do not know for certain the cause of it. As the night was dark and foggy we were afraid of running ashore and therefore during the second and third hours we sailed by the wind on the course W by N by the compass.

At the third hour in the morning we saw a large number of shore ducks, gulls, a whale, porpoises, and three medium-sized pieces of driftwood that had been in the water for some time.

DISCOVERY OF LAND: CAPE ADDINGTON

July 15, 1741

Latitude 55° 36′ 3″; from Vaua, longitude 61° 51′, rhumb N85°42′E, distance 2,178 knots.

At the beginning of the fourth hour in the morning [i.e., 3 a.m.] we sighted land, took its bearings, and went by the wind on a left tack. Shook out reef in fore-topsail. At the ninth hour took soundings and at 60 fathoms got bottom of gray sand. The parts of the shore which we saw today are quite mountainous. We took a number of soundings within three to five knots from shore and got nowhere less than 60 fathoms, bottom gray {p. 291} sand and in places small rocks. Many different kinds of ducks flew past our ship.

page of log book handwritten in Cyrillic script

Fig. 13—Facsimile of a page of the journal the St. Paul: entries of July 10-14 and first part of July 15, 1741. the last recording the discovery of land (for text, see opposite page).

At two in the morning we distinguished some very high mountains and, as the light at the time was not very good, we brought to. An hour later the land stood out much better and we could make out trees. This must be America, judging by the latitude and the longitude, for we were at that hour in latitude 55° 21′ N and longitude from Vaua 61° 55′. From this place we took the following bearings according to the corrected compass: in the south the land seemed to end in S36°19′E, distant about 30 knots; the shore nearest to us had three projections in N72°41′E; the cape[3] ending in the north bore N19°41′E. From the third hour proceeded N¾W 8 knots. At 5:30 in the morning the three projections were on the rhumb S70°19′E; the cape which seemed to end in the north was on the rhumb N34°41′E. We examined the newly discovered coast to the north; the low cape was on the rhumb N39°22′E; at 8:30 in the morning the coast seemed to end in N33°0′W.[4]


Cape Addington. (Identifications in this and the next chapter by E. P. B.)

Coronation Island.—[The lack of chronological sequence in the entry under July 15 may be due to the fact that the first paragraph is a general summary of the events of the day, while the second paragraph takes them up in detail. To this may also be due the seeming discrepancy in the hour when land was first sighted. At 2 a.m. the mountain tops were first seen; at 3 a.m. the coast itself became visible.—Edit. Note.]

July 16, 1741

Latitude by observation 56° 15′; from Vaua, longitude 60° 57′ 2″, rhumb N84°48′E, distance 2,140 knots.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon we lowered a boat and sent boatswain Trubitsin and eight men to the bay sighted an hour and a half ago. When he reached there he had orders to take soundings and to examine it to see whether it offered good anchorage and protection from the winds. He was told to keep an eye on our ensign flagstaff and to listen for guns signaling for him to return to the ship. At 6:30 in the afternoon we saw our boat near the shore; we came about so as to get closer to it and hove to.

At the beginning of the eighth hour the boat came back and we took it in tow and stood off. Trubitsin reported that he took soundings within 60 fathoms of the cape and got 40 fathoms and that the bay was unprotected from south and west winds. He said also that he saw large fir, spruce, and pine trees on the beach, many sea lions on the rocks, but no sign of human beings or their habitations. At the seventh hour in the morning there was an endless flight of large flocks of birds past the ship, the same species that are found in Kamchatka and known as aru and urili [murres and cormorants].

At noon we were from seven to three knots from shore, depth of water {p. 292} from 60 to 62 fathoms. Observed many ducks and gulls of different species, also sea animals—whales, sea lions, and walrus.

At the ninth hour in the morning the cape to which Trubitsin was sent bore S by E¼E, distant three knots. About the middle of the hour [ninth] we sighted on the rhumb E by S¼E, distant six knots, three small islets[5] close to one another and right up against the shore or very close to it, for we could not see clearly because of the fog. At end of the tenth hour land[6] loomed up through the fog on the rhumb N by E¾E or almost ENE, but the fog came down again and hid it. We took soundings, no bottom. Proceeded on our course.

At noon[7] we caught sight through the fog of a very mountainous land on the rhumb N¼E, distant not more than three knots, which stretched from NW¼W to SE¼E. We sailed parallel to it, keeping it on the east from three to five knots.


Hazy Islands.

Cape Ommaney.

Close to Puffin Point, just north of Cape Ommaney.

July 17, 1741

Latitude by observation 57° 39′; from Vaua, longitude 58° 54′ 2″, rhumb N82°43′E, distance 2,059 knots.

About the middle of the sixth hour in the afternoon the fog began to clear and we caught sight of the coast parallel to which we were running. At the seventh hour we took soundings, depth 75 fathoms. At the tenth hour in the morning lowered the boat for the purpose of sending it ashore. From the first to the ninth hour in the afternoon we went parallel to the shore, having it to the east of us about three or four knots distant. The land was full of mountains, some covered with snow and all with trees. At the eighth hour in the evening the coast seemed to end[8] in N¾E, distant 8 knots; and in its place appeared low land with sea cliffs, with the high mountains receding in the background. At the ninth hour in the morning the coast parallel to which we were sailing ended[9] in NNW½W, distant 30 knots. Behind us there was a cape[10] in SE by S¼E, distant 45 knots.

At noon[11] the cape which we saw at the ninth hour in NNW¼W [sic], distant 30 knots, is now on that same rhumb, distant 19 knots.


The south shores of Sitka Sound.

Cape Cross.

Cape Edgecumbe.

At noon the St. Paul was off Cape Edward.

LANDING IN LISIANSKI STRAIT

July 18, 1741

At 3:30 in the afternoon we went as close to the shore as we dared. We sent the boat ashore in charge of Fleet Master Dementiev who had with him ten armed men. He took with him a hand compass, a small lead, two empty water casks, a grapnel, and a cable. He had written {p. 293} orders; and among other things he was told to make for the opening[12] which seemed to us a bay and to take its bearings. The position of the bay and other details relating to it are recorded in their places so that it can be more easily identified.

At the eighth hour in the afternoon we sighted a low shore in N by E¾E, distant 7 knots, which stretched to SE and SE by E. The bearings of the place into which the boat was sent we did not see.

At the beginning of the fifth hour in the afternoon the second mountain, behind which is another broad mountain covered with snow, is in NE¾E; the bay into which the boat was ordered bears NNE¾E, distant 5 knots. There is still another mountain with a sharp peak, somewhat crooked on the right side; and, when you look at it, it is in ENE¼E; opposite, or a little south of it, is a small island or a piece of rather low land covered with medium-sized trees. North of this island and opposite the bay were seen in places projections of bare rocks.

At the end of the day we saw high snow-covered mountains extending to the northward and ending in NW by N.

According to the reckoning at 4:30 in the afternoon, taking into consideration the bearing of the bay, we set down the position of the bay into which the boat was sent as latitude 57° 23′ N, longitude from Vaua 59° 36′. distance 2,059 knots, rhumb N82°28′E; by correction the latitude is 57° 50′, longitude 58° 54′.

From this place we again started a new reckoning, because for some time after July 17 we beat up and down the bay so as not to get too far from it; but the strong winds and tides carried us out 20, 30, and more knots.


The St. Paul was off Lisianski Strait.

July 19, 1741

At the third hour in the afternoon took the bearings of a round, forested volcano; below it was a low, thick, dark green forest on a white cliff in NE¼E; the white cliff was distant about 6 knots. Another volcano to the left of it and smaller was in NE by N¼E, some distance from shore; a high bare cape covered with a clump of high trees in SSE¼E, distant 12 knots.

At the middle of the fifth hour in the afternoon we saw a mountain in NE by N¼E, distant 30 knots, another in NNE¾E, distant 32 knots; after this we saw no more land to the north beyond the high mountain which is in N¼W, distant 30 knots; then the mountain was N by W¾W, distant 40 knots. From this hour we observed lower ground through the cape in E by S¼E, opposite which we supposed our boat had gone into the bay.

{p. 294}

At the eighth hour in the afternoon we saw a high bare cape which at the third hour bore SSE¼E, distant 12 knots; now it bears SE by S¼E, 15 knots.

At the fourth hour in the morning we saw that the small far-away cape which at the eighth hour bore SE by S¼E now bears SE¼E, distant 25 knots; the mountain which at the fifth hour bore N by E¼E, 24 knots, is now NE¾E, 12 knots. Now the mountains extend N¼W.

FAILURE OF PARTIES TO RETURN

July 20, 1741

During the twenty-four hours the wind shifted about; it was foggy, cloudy, rainy. The heavy wind and rain carried us away from the place where the boat had gone and from which it had not yet returned.

July 21, 1741

Boat has not yet returned. We worked hard to come closer to the place to which it had gone.

July 22, 1741

No boat. We went near the place into which it had been ordered.

July 23, 1741

From about the first hour in the afternoon we kept parallel to the coast and, according to our opinion, close to the place where the boat went; but owing to the heavy fog we could not identify the landmarks.

At the second hour we thought we were opposite the exact spot where the boat was, and to summon it we fired two guns. Depth of water 70, 75, and 80 fathoms; bottom of sand and large rocks.

At the fourth hour the fog lifted a little and we noticed smoke on the beach E by N¼E, 5 knots, and we supposed that it was made by our men because during all the time that we followed the shore we saw no human habitations, no boats, and no fires. Took soundings and got 80 fathoms.

At the seventh hour wind very light, and the air clear from fog, and the landmarks of the place into which the boat was sent stood out. The fire burned in the very place into which the boat went, and we took it for granted that it was kept up by our men, and we fired seven times at intervals as a signal for them to come out; but no boat appeared, although the weather was fair. We noticed, however, that after we signalled the fire on the beach grew bigger.

At the tenth hour in the evening we hung out a lantern at the ensign staff so that the boat might see us if it came out.

Midnight. The fire on the beach bore ENE¼E.

At the ninth hour in the morning no fire on shore; half hour later a little smoke in ENE¾E, and then it again became invisible.

{p. 295}

At the eleventh hour a walrus swam past the ship. At the middle of the twelfth hour lowered the small boat for the purpose of sending it ashore to help the men in the large boat.

Noon. The place into which the boat was sent bore ENE½E, 9 knots.

No boat, although we sailed close up to the place into which it went.

July 24, 1741

The weather was fair enough for a considerable length of time for the boat to come out; since it did not appear we concluded that it must be damaged and could not. All the officers, higher and lower, were of the opinion (which they put in writing) that it was necessary to find out what was the matter with the boat and for that purpose to send, while the sea was quiet, the small boat with a carpenter and a calker with the necessary tools to repair the boat, as well as provisions, since those ashore had only enough for a week. Boatswain Sidor Savelev volunteered to take the mechanics ashore, and the sailor Sidor Fadiev, who expressed a desire to go along, was detailed to accompany them. The carpenter’s name was Nariazhev Polkovnikov and the calker’s was Gorin. They left at one o’clock in the afternoon, and we, having a light wind, followed them to shore. The boatswain had orders that as soon as he landed he should build a fire to notify us of his arrival and to signal the condition of the men and the boat. He was ordered to leave ashore the carpenter and the calker to repair the boat, but he himself was to return without delay to the ship with Dementiev and as many others as he could accommodate. We sailed up quite close to the land, on which a heavy sea was running, so that we had difficulty in getting away, for the sails made little headway against the sea. We saw the boatswain near the shore in the sixth hour of the afternoon; but he made no signals and, although the weather was fair, did not come back.

In the fifth hour we brought to in order to wait for the two boats; we watched for signals but in vain; we took soundings and got 65 fathoms and a bottom of big rocks. For two or three versts from shore the water was 70, 65, and 60 fathoms, and the bottom bad. Many rocks were seen both under and above water on which the surf was playing. For these reasons we could not anchor.

At the seventh hour we came about and moved away from shore because we had no signals from the boatswain and the men.

At the ninth hour we steered for the shore to watch for signals. Half an hour later we were so close to shore that we could see the rocks and the surf playing on them, but no signals. Because it was night we decided to go a little farther from land. The place where the two boats went bore NE¾E, 3 knots. We fired a gun as a summons to the men ashore; at the time there was hardly any wind, the ship was making almost no {p. 296} headway, and those ashore had the weather in their favor for coming out. As we fired from our cannon we thought we saw some one on shore shooting a gun, but we heard no noise. We observed also a fire on the beach as if in answer to us. We fired another gun.

At the ninth hour in the evening we observed fire on the beach. Took soundings, 66 fathoms; very little wind. We hung out two lanterns, one at the ensign staff and the other at the gaff. The fire on the beach appeared and disappeared by turns.

At the first hour in the afternoon we saw the fire.

At the third hour we fired guns to summon the boats.

At the fourth hour we fired guns.

At the tenth, eleventh, and twelfth hours we tacked close to the place into which the boats had gone. Our position is latitude 57° 51′ N.

July 25, 1741

Latitude by observation 57° 50′ 6″; from Vaua, longitude 57° 10′ 2″, rhumb N82°35′E, distance 2,007 knots.

First hour. We noticed two boats rowing from the bay into which our boats had gone; one of them was large, and the other small. We naturally thought they were our boats, and we stood towards them. There was very little wind stirring, and I ordered that the sails be taken in and the shrouds tightened[?]. When the small boat drew close to us we became aware that it was not our boat, for it had a sharp bow, and that those in it did not row with oars but paddled. The boat did not, however, come near enough so that we could see the faces of those in it. All that we did see was that it contained four persons, one at the stern and the others at the paddle. One of them had on clothes of red material. Being that far away they stood up and shouted twice “Agai, Agai,” waved their hands, and turned back to shore. I commanded my men to wave white kerchiefs and to invite those in the boat to come to our ship. Many of my men did that but it did no good; the boat proceeded on its way to shore. We could not pursue them because in the first place we had no wind, in the second place the small boat went very fast, and the large one had stopped a considerable distance from us. They continued to pull away and finally disappeared in the bay from which they had come. We then became convinced that some misfortune had happened to our men,[12a] for it was the eighth day since the Fleet Master had left; during that period there was plenty of fine weather for returning, and we had sailed quite close to the place, and yet he did not appear. Since the boatswain had gone we had not been away from the place, the weather had been fair, and if a misfortune had not overtaken them they would have returned. The fact that the Americans did not dare to approach our ship leads us to believe that they have either killed or detained our men. We remained {p. 297} close to the place until evening, hoping that our boats would come out. Towards evening, however, we had to keep away from shore because of the danger.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon we came about and steered for shore where we observed a fire, also two boats which came out and, after keeping close to land, put back and disappeared. This is the last of boats and signals that we saw, except on the spot where we formerly observed fire we now had smoke.

Ninth hour in the afternoon. Because of the night we took a reef in the topsails. There were neither signals nor fires on shore. We hung out a lantern on the ensign staff so that, if, against all hope, our boats should come, they could find us.

This day we began again our reckoning. The bay into which the boats were sent is in latitude 57° 50′ N, longitude 58° 54′.


See note on p. 311.

July 26, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 21′ 5″; from Vaua, longitude 57° 7′, rhumb N80°42′E, distance 1,954 knots.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon we saw large quantities of grass, the kind that grows near the beach.

At noon we saw high, snow-covered mountains[13] on the land ending in the north, bearing N¾E, 40 knots.


Mt. Fairweather.

START ON RETURN VOYAGE

July 27, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 37′ 3″; from Vaua, longitude 54° 11′ 4″, rhumb N80°23′E, distance 1,862 knots.

At the first hour in the afternoon Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants Chikhachev and Vrange, Navigators Michael Plautin and Elagin came to the following decision, which they put in writing: Owing to the fact that there were no small boats by the help of which the shore could be examined and water brought aboard (of which there were only 45 casks left) it would be better to go straight to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, in Avacha Bay in eastern Kamchatka.

Ninth hour. Wind strong; cloudy, rainy. Ordered the crew to catch the rain water from the sails for drinking purposes, for even before this the men made use of it without being obliged to do so, and no harm came to them. Considering the distance we were from port the amount of water on hand was far too little, and therefore I commanded that it should be rationed out to the crew.

July 28, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 54′; from Vaua, longitude 52° 57′, rhumb N78°47′E, distance 1,815 knots.

{p. 298}

July 29, 1741

Latitude 59° 05′ 6″; from Vaua, longitude 51° 38′ 4″, rhumb N77°52′E, distance 1,773 knots.

During the day we saw many shore ducks and gulls, which indicated that there is land not far from us to the north; but owing to the fog and the gloomy weather it could not be seen.

July 30, 1741

Latitude 58° 25′; from Vaua, longitude 47° 32′, rhumb N78°19′E, distance 1,640 knots.

Saw one shore duck.

July 31, 1741

Latitude 58° 38′ 7″; from Vaua, longitude 45° 52′, rhumb N77°24′E, distance 1,587 knots.

During the day we saw many shore ducks and gulls, a little sea cabbage, water of greenish color—all of which go to show that land is not far from us to the north. The reason we did not see it was due either to the atmosphere or to the lowness of the shore.

LANDFALLS: KENAI AND KODIAK

August 1, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 46′; from Vaua, longitude 45° 21′, rhumb N76°58′E, distance 1,565 knots.

At the fifth hour sighted land in N by W, 30 knots; it ended NNW about 18 knots. A walrus dived near the ship.

At noon land ended[14] in WNW½W, 50 knots; northern ending N by E½E, about 30 knots; middle of it NNW½W, 20 knots. There were high, snow-covered mountains on the land. During the day flocks of shore ducks and gulls were seen on the wing.


Cape Elizabeth, the southwestern end of Kenai Peninsula.

August 2, 1741

Latitude 58° 24′; from Vaua, longitude 45° 12′, rhumb N77°47′E, distance 1,564 knots.

At noon the land in the west seemed to end in W, 65 knots, with high, snow-covered mountains.[15] Saw flying ducks and gulls.


Probably northern end of Afognak Island, with Mt. Douglas back of it on the mainland.

August 3, 1741

Latitude by observation 57° 37′; from Vaua, longitude 44° 49′, rhumb N79°29′E, distance 1,556 knots.

During the day many flocks of gulls flew over us, also red-billed ducks and another species with white bellies and white under wings. Sandpipers (kuliki) came on board, sea animals swam alongside of us.

{p. 299}

August 4, 1741

Latitude 57° 10′; from Vaua, longitude 45° 07′, rhumb N80°34′E, distance 1,575 knots.

Saw many whales.

August 5, 1741

Latitude 56° 49′ 4″; from Vaua, longitude 43° 41′, rhumb N81°05′E, distance 1,525 knots.

Numerous flocks of birds were in the air, the color of the water was not altogether like the sea, and therefore we concluded that land must be near, hidden by the fog.

August 6, 1741

Latitude 56° 32′ 4″; from Vaua, longitude 44° 15′, rhumb N81°51′E, distance 1,542 knots.

Did not see land.

August 7, 1741

Latitude 56° 31′ 4″; from Vaua, longitude 44° 20′, rhumb N81°55′E, distance 1,533 knots.

August 8, 1741

Latitude 55° 57′ 7″; from Vaua, longitude 44° 32′, rhumb N83°13′E, distance 1,564 knots.

August 9, 1741

Latitude 55° 01′ 7″; from Vaua, longitude 44° 03′, rhumb N85°15′E, distance 1,554 knots.

August 10, 1741

Latitude by observation 54° 01′; from Vaua, longitude 42° 21′, rhumb N87°20′E, distance 1,513 knots.

August 11, 1741

Latitude 53° 20′; from Vaua, longitude 41° 25′, rhumb N88°58′E, distance 1,492 knots.

Saw many whales near the ship and in the distance.

August 12, 1741

Latitude 53° 08′; from Vaua, longitude 40° 52′, rhumb from N89°25′E, distance 1,475 knots.

Saw many whales near the ship and in the distance.

August 13, 1741

Latitude 53° 16′; from Vaua, longitude 40° 23′, rhumb N89°06′E, distance 1,456 knots.

{p. 300}

WESTWARD COURSE

August 14, 1741

Latitude 52° 32′ 4″; from Vaua, longitude 39° 30′, rhumb S89°11′E, distance 1,436 knots.

August 15, 1741

Latitude 52° 24′; from Vaua, longitude 38° 37′, rhumb S88°49′E, distance 1,418 knots.

Saw one shore duck—the kind that lives on the rocks.

August 16, 1741

Latitude 52° 31′; from Vaua, longitude 38° 43′, rhumb S89°06′E, distance 1,408 knots.

Saw three shore gulls, which looked like sea terns, and one fur seal that dived near the ship.

August 17, 1741

Latitude 53° 10′; from Vaua, longitude 37° 56′, rhumb N89°17′E, distance 1,369 knots.

Saw one large shore duck.

August 18, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 30′; from Vaua, longitude 37° 32′ 4″, rhumb S89°02′E, distance 1,363 knots.

August 19, 1741

Latitude 52° 15′; from Vaua, longitude 36° 39′ 1″, rhumb S88°22′E, distance 1,337 knots.

August 20, 1741

Latitude 52° 01′; from Vaua, longitude 35° 43′, rhumb S87°43′E, distance 1,306 knots.

Saw one shore duck and one fur seal which dived near the ship.

August 21, 1741

Latitude 51° 35′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 50′, rhumb S86°31′E, distance 1,284 knots.

Saw two shore gulls.

August 22, 1741

Latitude 52° 16′, from Vaua, longitude 34° 42′, rhumb S88°20′E, distance 1,266 knots.

Saw one large shore gull and a large root of sea cabbage.

{p. 301}

August 23, 1741

Latitude 52° 15′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 23′, rhumb S88°16′E, distance 1,254 knots.

Saw a shore duck and floating grass.

August 24, 1741

Latitude 52° 23′ 6″; from Vaua, longitude 33° 42′, rhumb S89°21′E, distance 1,228 knots.

Saw floating green grass—the kind that grows near shore.

August 25, 1741

Latitude 52° 0′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 20′, rhumb S87°35′E, distance 1,256 knots.

Saw plenty of floating grass near the ship.

August 26, 1741

Latitude 51° 58′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 26′, rhumb S87°30′E, distance 1,260 knots.

August 27, 1741

Latitude 52° 03′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 33′ 2″, rhumb S87°45′E, distance 1,263 knots.

August 28, 1741

Latitude 51° 48′; from Vaua, longitude 34° 15′, rhumb S87°02′E, distance 1,256 knots.

Saw about ten white shore gulls.

August 29, 1741

Latitude 52° 05′ 9″; from Vaua, longitude 33° 55′, rhumb S87°50′E, distance 1,239 knots.

August 30, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 21′; from Vaua, longitude 33° 52′, rhumb S88°31′E, distance 1,233 knots.

August 31, 1741

Latitude 52° 36′; from Vaua, longitude 31° 18′, rhumb S89°09′E, distance 1,138 knots.

An old, somewhat dried-up tree floated past us; we saw also one red-billed duck.

September 1, 1741

Latitude 52° 52′; from Vaua, longitude 26° 39′, rhumb E, distance 965.3 knots.

{p. 302}

September 2, 1741

Latitude 52° 47′ 5″; from Vaua, longitude 23° 44′, rhumb S——E, distance 860.3 knots.

September 3, 1741

Latitude 52° 21′ 5″; from Vaua, longitude 23° 18′, rhumb S87°53′E, distance 849 knots.

September 4, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 23′; from Vaua, longitude 21° 10′, rhumb S88°19′E, distance 770 knots.

At the beginning of the seventh hour in the morning we sighted land ahead of us and a little to the left, but owing to the mist we could not observe it carefully. At noon the land[16] which we sighted at the seventh hour appears now NE by N, 40 knots, N by E¼E, 30 knots; mountains (not very high) in NNW, 25 knots; high land, on which there are several high peaks, in NNW¾W, 25 knots; a large round, snow-covered volcano NW by N¾W; the land ends W by N¾W, distant about 50 knots. Sailed past a dead whale on which were many sea birds called fulmars.[17]


Islands of Four Mountains.

Procellaria glacialis glupischa Stejneger

September 5, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 53′; from Vaua, longitude 19° 55′, rhumb S85°22′E, distance 730.4 knots.

September 6, 1741

Latitude 51° 29′; from Vaua, longitude 18° 58′, rhumb S83°08′E, distance 702.5 knots.

September 7, 1741

Latitude 51° 23′; from Vaua, longitude 16° 29′, rhumb S81°34′E, distance 613.7 knots.

September 8, 1741

Latitude 51° 36′; from Vaua, longitude 12° 20′, rhumb S80°21′E, distance 459.4 knots.

From six in the morning until noon we saw floating sea cabbage, also many shore ducks and gulls flying.

MEETING WITH NATIVES ON ADAK

September 9, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 40′; from Vaua, longitude 11° 28′ 5″, rhumb S79°39′E, distance 429 knots.

At the ninth hour in the evening paid out 75 fathoms of cable. Took soundings, 25 fathoms; bottom fine gray sand. Heard the breaking of {p. 303} the surf on the beach to the SW, but owing to the mist we could not see the land.

At the ninth hour in the morning the fog lifted a bit, and we saw the shore[18] about 200 fathoms away. High, snow-covered mountains and tall green grass were seen, but no trees. In places cliffs came down to the very sea, and close to the shore were many rocks above and below the water. We caught sight of two men walking through the grass across the hills from north to south. They were close to a high hill out of which ran a small stream. It was evident that they had caught sight of us and came a little nearer so as to have a good look at our ship. We called to them in Russian and in Kamchadal that they should come to us. At the end of the hour we heard people shouting to us from the shore in the direction SSW, but we could not see them and owing to the surf could not make out their words. We replied, through the speaking trumpet and without it, asking them to come out to us.

At the tenth hour in the morning seven small boats, one man in each, were seen rowing towards us. Each of these boats was about 15 feet long, 3 feet wide, the bow very sharp, the stern somewhat rounded and blunt, and the whole covered with hair seal and sea lion skins. The deck was roundish and, like the sides, was sewed with some kind of skins except one spot between the center and the stern, where there was a round hole in which the man sat. He was dressed in a kind of shirt which covered his head and his arms and was made from the intestines of a whale or some other animal. There was something outside the hole that resembled leather breeching and which tied around the man. Some of these breechings were not tied, and we could see that there were rocks in the boats. They have light double paddles, made of birch wood, with which they paddle on both sides; and, as far as we could make out, the men were quite fearless in the water. They were not deterred by any kind of waves or seas and went through the water at a rapid rate. When they came within 50 fathoms of the ship they began to shout, turning first to one side and then to the other, not in the manner as if they wished to speak but as the Yakuts and Tungus do in their incantations. From this act we concluded that the people before us were doing the same thing and were praying that no harm might come to them from us. Whether this is the true explanation of their behavior or not I cannot tell. After they had carried on like this about seven or eight minutes they began to converse with one another in the usual tone of voice. While they were doing this we looked pleasant, bowed to them, and waved our hands as an invitation for them to come nearer our ship; but they did not quite dare to do so. They made a gesture with their hands as if drawing a bow, which showed that they were afraid we might {p. 304} attack them. To the best of our ability we tried to convince them that they had nothing to fear from us. We pressed our hands to our hearts as a sign that we would receive them in a friendly manner. To convince them still more I threw them a Chinese cup as a mark of friendship. One of the men picked it up and after examining it made a gesture as if to indicate that he had no use for it. He was about to throw it back to the ship when we bowed and motioned for him to keep it, but he threw it into the water. I ordered that two pieces of damask should be tied to a board and thrown into the water near the ship. They picked it up and after handling it for a little while threw it away. I then gave the order to bring up the different things we had to give as presents—small boxes, small bells, needles, Chinese tobacco, pipes—and, holding them up, I invited them to come near. During this time I had few men on deck but had them concealed below with their guns loaded in case of danger. In spite of our efforts we could not convince them of our good will if they came close to the ship. It was only after we made them understand that we were out of water and had nothing to drink and that we looked to them for help that one of them dared approach us. We gave him Chinese tobacco and a pipe which he took and placed on the deck of his boat. When the others saw this they, too, became bold and paddled up. We distributed among them boxes, bells, needles, all of which they received rather indifferently as if not knowing what to do with them. They did not even know that needles would sink and did not make any effort to keep them out of the water, for among the presents we gave them some of the needles fell into the water, and instead of saving them they merely watched them go down. Among them we noticed several who raised one hand to their mouth and with the other hand made a quick motion as if cutting something near the mouth. This gave us the idea that they wanted knives, because the Kamchadals and the other peoples of this region when they eat meat or anything of that kind cut it at the mouth. I ordered that a knife should be given them, and when they saw it they were overjoyed and seized it from one another and with great eagerness begged for more. We then invited as many of them as would to come aboard so that we might show them friendly attentions and persuade some of them to accompany us, as the instructions of the Captain Commander required. Not being able to understand one another, we not only failed to persuade them to go with us but even to coax one of them to come on board so that we might show them how friendly we really were. We gave them a small barrel in which to bring us water from the shore. They understood what we meant, but they would not take the barrel and showed us that they had bladders for that purpose. Three of them paddled towards the beach and returned with water. When they came alongside one of them held up a bladder and indicated that he wished to have a knife in {p. 305} payment. This was given him; but, instead of handing over the bladder, he passed it to the second man, who also demanded a knife. When he got it he passed the bladder to the third man, who equally insisted on a knife. This act, as well as some other things they did, proves that their conscience is not highly developed.

sketch with handwritten annotations

Fig. 14—An Aleut man from Unalaska. From same source as Fig. 12, lower.

Explanation of key: A, man of Unalaska; B, holds in his right hand a throwing stick; C, holds in his left hand a spear tipped with barbed bone; D, wooden hat; E, tambour used in dancing; F, tambour sticks; G, how the spear is thrown by means of the throwing stick; H, bow and arrow; I, instruments for making baidarkas and spears; K, different kinds of spears; L, sheath for the stone spears.

sketch with handwritten annotations

Fig. 15—Left: Inside and outside views of native hut, Unalaska. Right: An Aleut woman from Unalaska. From same source as Fig. 12, lower.

Explanation of key: A, native woman of Unalaska; B, an instrument for digging in the ground; C, grass basket; D, grass mat on which the natives sleep; E, belt used when they dance; F, spoons made out of bone; G, iron knives; H, wooden utensils.

These men seem to be of fair size and resemble the Tatars. They are pale and seemingly healthy. Almost all of them were beardless, whether naturally so or because they had plucked out the hair it is hard to tell; only two or three of them had anything like beards. They stuff roots into their noses which causes them to bleed. Some of these roots they were eating and gave us a few for the same purpose. In order to determine what these roots are we brought them along. In return for their gift we made them a present of sea biscuits. They brought us some kind of mineral wrapped in sea weeds. Aside from arrows, of which we secured four, there was nothing on board their boats. They wear on their heads a kind of hat made of thin birch boards, which are decorated with various colors and feathers. Some of these dippers (hats) had in the top small ivory statues. We secured one of these dippers by giving in trade a dull axe, which they received gladly. As a mark of friendship we offered them a copper kettle, which they kept for a little while and then handed back.

When they had been near the ship for a considerable time they returned to the shore. In the afternoon we were visited by fourteen of these boats, one man in each, among whom were a number who had been with us before noon. When they neared the ship they made the same kind of noise as before. Although they spent three or four hours alongside and we talked a great deal, yet we do not know anything they said, and we could not persuade one of them to come aboard. They would have remained near us even longer if I had not ordered that signs should be made to them to go ashore. I did this because the wind began to rise, making it possible for us to get out of the bay into which we had unintentionally entered. After much difficulty and the loss of an anchor we finally, with God’s help, got out.


Adak Island.

WESTWARD AGAIN

September 10, 1741

Latitude 51° 12′; from Vaua, longitude 11° 54′ 6″, rhumb S77°04′E, distance 451 knots.

At the sixth hour in the afternoon there was a very light offshore breeze, but we could see from the way the clouds were being driven eastward that beyond the mountains there was a west wind.

By the eighth hour the wind freshened a little. We began to heave in the cable and had already 35 fathoms aboard when all of a sudden a squall from the mountains struck us. The anchor began to drag. We hoisted the topsails and foresail. The tide was setting towards the north, {p. 306} forcing us on the land, which was about 300 fathoms to the east. Fearing that we might be driven ashore and dashed on the submerged rocks farther to the west we cut the cable (35 fathoms of which we had already heaved in) of the spare small bower anchor at the hawsehole, crowded on all sails and stood out to sea in a SE direction, and after great difficulty and great danger succeeded.

September 11, 1741

Latitude 50° 52′; from Vaua, longitude 11° 45′ 8″, rhumb S74°28′E, distance 451.8 knots.

September 12, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 12′; from Vaua, longitude 10° 52′ 3″, rhumb S75°59′E, distance 414 knots.

September 13, 1741

Latitude 51° 01′; from Vaua, longitude 10° 05′ 9″, rhumb S73°18′E, distance 389.7 knots.

Saw a considerable quantity of floating weeds near the ship.

September 14, 1741

Latitude 50° 31′; from Vaua, longitude 8° 19′ 0″, rhumb S65°22′E, distance 341.5 knots.

Saw a shore cormorant on the wing.

September 13, 1741

Latitude 51° 01′; from Vaua, longitude 6° 27′ 9″, rhumb S64°53′E, distance 264 knots.

September 16, 1741

Latitude 51° 54′; from Vaua, longitude 5° 26′ 5″, rhumb S73°30′E, distance 207.7 knots.

Captain Chirikov, Lieutenant Chikhachev, and the members of the crew are very ill, owing to the lack of water and the long and hard sea voyage. They are no longer able to work. One of the strongest, the sailmaker Michael Usachev, died of scurvy, and we lowered the body into the sea. All during the day we saw sea cabbage and floating grass, the kind that grows near the shore; the color of the water was green, unlike the color of sea water.

September 17, 1741

Latitude 51° 30′; from Vaua, longitude 5° 17′ 9″, rhumb S66°56′E, distance 209.5 knots.

This day we saw the same kind of sea cabbage, grass, and water as the day before.

{p. 307}

September 18, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 33′; from Vaua, longitude 4° 44′ 8″, rhumb S83°20′E, distance 172.5 knots.

Saw the same kind of sea cabbage, grass, and green water.

September 19, 1741

Latitude 52° 37′; from Vaua, longitude 4° 36′ 8″, rhumb S83°12′E, distance 167.5 knots.

September 20, 1741

Latitude 52° 36′; from Vaua, longitude 4° 17′, rhumb S83°46′E, distance 156.6 knots.

LANDFALL: AGATTU ISLAND

September 21, 1741

Latitude 52° 35′; from Vaua, longitude 3° 29′ 5″, rhumb S81°51′E, distance 127 knots.

At the eighth hour we saw a small fish near the ship, took soundings, and got 60 fathoms. No land in sight, but for the sake of safety we put about.

At the tenth hour in the morning we saw land straight ahead of us, which did not look like Kamchatka. We came about on a right tack and went parallel to the shore on the east, distant about 4 knots. At noon the land was still in sight, extending from WSW, 8 knots,[19] to NW½W, 6 knots. Until 12:30 the southern half of the land seemed level, and the northern half mountainous; but the mountains were neither high nor snow-covered. A small island[20] loomed up in N by W½W, 10 knots. In a bay situated between the above-mentioned land in NW½W and NE by N high, snow-covered mountains were seen.[21]


This was the southeastern point of Agattu Island.

One of the Semichi Islands.

The high land of Attu.

September 22, 1741

Latitude 52° 07′; from Vaua, longitude 2° 34′ 3″, rhumb S63°54′E, distance 104.5 knots.

At the sixth hour in the afternoon the cape which at noon bore WSW, 8 knots, bears now NE by N¾E, 12 knots, and the other cape, the western one, bears N by W, 6 knots; between them the shore is low and level; the low, snowless mountains, which at noon seemed to stretch from south to north, and the high, snow-covered mountains in the bay bear NW by W½W, 15 knots; and the land which we sighted yesterday in N by W is now N, distant about 15 knots.

Today we saw two otters asleep in the water.

{p. 308}

September 23, 1741

Latitude 51° 48′; from Vaua, longitude 3° 10′ 4″, rhumb S54°52′E, distance 112.9 knots.

September 24, 1741

Latitude 51° 50′; from Vaua, longitude 1° 59′ 1″, rhumb S49°06′E, distance 96.2 knots.

September 25, 1741

Latitude 51° 27′; from Vaua, longitude 1° 03′ 1″ E, rhumb S31°10′E, distance 100.5 knots.

September 26, 1741

Latitude 52° 16′; from Vaua, longitude 0° 6′ 13″ W,[22] rhumb S5°45′W, distance 46.8 knots.

Assistant Constable Osip Kachikov died of scurvy and we lowered the body into the sea. Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants Chikhachev and Plautin, and six of the crew are very ill with scurvy; all the others are so weak from long sickness, hard work, and lack of water that they can barely come on deck and do their work. We have not more than seven barrels of water on board.


All the longitudes ought, of course, to be E, as the whole voyage lay to the eastward of Vaua. That their calculations from now on gave W longitudes (the E positions of September 27 and 28 were temporary setbacks because of head winds) made the officers of the St. Paul aware of the error in the ship’s position: the total error in longitude amounted to 11° 39′ (see footnote 14, p. 322). The distances, rhumbs, and longitudes become intelligible when referred to the assumed position of Vaua, which was about in 170° 30′ E of Greenwich (and 52° 53′ N).

In his report (Chapter VIII, p. 322) Chirikov discusses this matter of error in longitude and its cause. He correctly ascribes it to lack of a known point at the farther end of his journey wherewith to check his observations. He also correctly infers that the currents are partially responsible; he made attempts to determine this element but was not able to. It is precisely in the adjustment to known positions through the identification of landfalls and in the allowance made for currents that lies the value of such modern reconstructions of Bering and Chirikov’s tracks as is afforded by Pl. 1. It is interesting to compare this chart with the reproduction of the original chart of the navigators accompanying Sokolov’s memoir in Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851 (copied on Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,” 1889, Map III.)—Edit. Note.

September 27, 1741

Latitude 51° 44′; from Vaua, longitude 0° 38′ 27″ E, rhumb S18°44′E, distance 72.9 knots.

Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants Chikhachev and Plautin, Professor of Astronomy Delisle de la Croyère, and twelve members of the crew are very sick with scurvy; and the others are weak and get about with great difficulty. We have only six small barrels of water, and the daily need is five cups per person. We no longer cook kasha.[23]


Buckwheat mush.

{p. 309}

WESTWARD ON THE LAST STRETCH

September 28, 1741

Latitude 51° 17′; from Vaua, longitude 0° 50′ 37″ E, rhumb S17°52′E, distance 101 knots.

September 29, 1741

Latitude 52° 11′; from Vaua, longitude 0° 21′ 53″ W, rhumb S17°18′W, distance 44 knots.

September 30, 1741

Latitude 51° 55′; from Vaua, longitude 1° 02′ 53″ W, rhumb S33°19′W, distance 69.4 knots.

At the ninth hour in the morning we had a heavy storm with squalls, hail, and snow. We furled the mainsail, lowered the main yards and fore yards, and hove to under the mizzen. The waves threw up on deck a small fish called stickleback (khakhalcha), which is not more than 2½ inches long.

October 1, 1741

Latitude 51° 28′; from Vaua, longitude 0° 32′ 33″ (?) W, rhumb S13°22′W, distance 87.4 knots.

Heavy sea running; rain, snow, and cold.

October 2, 1741

Latitude 51° 46′; from Vaua, longitude 2° 19′ 6″ W, rhumb S51°50′W, distance 108.4 knots.

October 3, 1741

Latitude 51° 58′; from Vaua, longitude 3° 48′ W, rhumb S68°34′W, distance 150.5 knots.

October 4, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 56′; from Vaua, longitude 5° 31′ 4″ W rhumb N89°08′W, distance 199.9 knots.

At the second hour in the afternoon we had a heavy rain, and the crew had a chance to satisfy their thirst and to catch seven buckets of water in addition.

October 5, 1741

Latitude 52° 33′; from Vaua, longitude 6° 48′ 4″ W, rhumb S85°23′W, distance 248.4 knots.

At the ninth hour in the morning topsail wind, heavy snow, and very cold. The men were so weak that they suffered much at their work.

October 6, 1741

Latitude 52° 29′; from Vaua, longitude 6° 41′ 7″ W, rhumb S84°22′W, distance 244.5 knots.

{p. 310}

October 7, 1741

Latitude 53° 12′; from Vaua, longitude 9° 32′ W, rhumb N86°54′W, distance 352 knots.

At the fifth hour in the afternoon Vasili Nizhegorodok of Yakutsk, the servant of Lieutenant Plautin, died of scurvy, and we lowered the body into the sea. At end of the tenth hour Lieutenant Chikhachev died of scurvy.

October 8, 1741

Latitude 52° 37′; from Vaua, longitude 11° 04′ 1″ W, rhumb S85°07′W, distance 399.4 knots.

Navigator Vrange and Lieutenant Michael Plautin died of scurvy in the third hour of the afternoon. At the seventh hour in the morning we sighted land—high, snow-covered mountains. According to our opinion and according to the position of the land it must be the shore running north from Isopa to Vaua.[24] Owing, however, to the mist we could not see very distinctly.

At noon we were certain that the land in sight was Shipunski Cape bearing NNE¾E; Avacha, or Burning, Volcano bore NW by N¾W, Vilyuchensk Volcano W by N¾W; the land ended to the S and SW by W; Vaua could not be seen owing to the mist.


It was not the coast south of Vaua but north of it that was sighted, as was soon realized, as the first sentence of the next paragraph shows.

October 9, 1741

Latitude 52° 57′; from Vaua, longitude 11° 39′ 4″ W, rhumb N89°27′W, distance 422 knots.

At the sixth hour we sighted Vaua; but, owing to the head wind and the coming on of night, we could not enter the bay and therefore put out to sea. At noon the wind was very light, and the fog cleared a bit, and Vaua stood out, bearing according to compass W by N, distant about 10 knots.

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

October 10, 1741

At the fifth hour in the afternoon the wind from N increased a little, and we sailed WNW into the mouth of the bay.

At the eighth hour noticed a light on Vaua lighthouse.

At the ninth hour we safely passed Vaua and entered the mouth of Avacha Bay, where we anchored in seven fathoms.

At the seventh hour we fired five guns as a signal for small boats to come out.

At the ninth hour Ensign Levashev came out and told us that Captain Commander Bering on the St. Peter had not yet returned, that the galliot Okhotsk, in command of Assistant Navigator Andrei Sheganov, had {p. 311} come from Okhotsk bringing 1,500 poods of provisions, that Captain Spanberg with five ships had reached Bolsheretsk from Okhotsk on his way to Japan.

Professor of Astronomy Delisle de la Croyère died of scurvy at ten o’clock.

At noon Captain Chirikov was taken ashore in a very sick condition.

October 12, 1741

Brought the ship around into the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul for the winter and began to discharge cargo.

Note on the Loss of Chirikov’s Men

The loss of Chirikov’s men is the most dramatic incident of the voyage of the St. Paul. The question naturally arises, What was their fate? Has any account of this episode been handed down in the traditions of the Indian tribes of the region? This question was submitted to a number of authorities on the ethnology of the Pacific Coast. None of them had heard of any such tradition. Among previous investigators, Professor George Davidson, to judge by a footnote on p. 20 of his “The Tracks and Landfalls of Bering and Chirikof on the Northwest Coast of America,” San Francisco, 1901, made an attempt in 1901 to ascertain the traditions of the Tlingits through the medium of two members of the Alaska Commercial Company. It is not known that any information was secured.

One of the ethnologists consulted, Lieutenant George T. Emmons, whose study of a similar first contact between a Pacific Coast tribe and white men (The Meeting between La Pérouse and the Tlingit, Amer. Anthropologist, Vol. 13, 1911, pp. 294-298), together with his long labors among the Tlingits, makes him peculiarly well equipped to deal with this question, has likewise, during thirty years’ investigation among the coast tribes, never been able to learn anything of the loss of Chirikov’s men. However, in the communication that he kindly sends, he suggests that Chirikov’s two boats may have been swamped in the strong tidal rips that occur at the mouths of such narrow fiord arms as Lisianski Strait, especially if they entered with the strength of a flood tide. That this might easily happen to small boats is evidenced by the fact that today even powerful steamers, as he states, enter Peril Strait, a similar passage somewhat farther south, only at slack water. The assumption that the boats were swamped and their occupants drowned would seem to be borne out by the fact that two native canoes put off from shore and approached the St. Paul. If the Russians had landed and if, in spite of Chirikov’s admonitions to his men, there had been a fight, the natives, after this first experience of firearms, even if they had overpowered the landing parties, would certainly not have exposed themselves to the greater risk of facing the main body of the Russians. The fact that they approached the ship would rather prove their innocence. Also, the similarity of their call of “agai,” as reported by Chirikov, to the Tlingit “agou,” which means “come here,” would seem to imply friendly intentions. In most later instances the first meetings of natives of this coast with Europeans, before the Russians commenced to appropriate their hunting grounds, says Lieutenant Emmons in conclusion, were friendly; indeed, the Tlingits were rather ready to trade.

The only suggestion of a tradition among the coast tribes that might shed light on the loss of Chirikov’s men is contained in a recently published book, “The Story of Sitka, The Historic Outpost of the Northwest Coast, The Chief Factory of the Russian American Company,” by C. L. Andrews, Seattle, 1922. The relevant passages (pp. 9-10) follow. The author assumes the locality of the tragedy to be Sitka Sound.

“Nearly two centuries have passed since the Russian seamen landed and no word has come from them. For more than seventy years the Russian Government sought for some sign of their fate.[A] Tales were told of a colony of Russians existing on the coast, but each upon investigation proved but a rumor.

“There is a dim tradition among the Sitkas of men being lured ashore in the long ago. They say that Chief Annahootz, the predecessor of the chief of that name who was a firm friend of the whites at Sitka in 1878, was the leading actor in the tragedy. Annahootz dressed himself in the skin of a bear and played along the beach. So skillfully did he simulate the sinuous motions of the animal that the Russians in the excitement of the chase plunged into the woods in pursuit and there the savage warriors killed them to a man, leaving none to tell the story. The disappearance of Chirikof’s men has remained one of the many unsolved mysteries of the Northland, and their fate will never be known to a certainty.”—Edit. Note.[TN1]


“January 20th, 1820, a letter written by the Directory at St. Petersburg to Chief Manager Muravief at Sitka enclosing instructions previously given to Hagemeister, instructing him to find the descendants of Chirikof’s lost men, urging that it must be done and expressing surprise that it had been neglected thus long. (Russian American [Company’s] Archives, [State Department, Washington, D. C.,] Correspondence, Vol. 2, No. 108).”

Transcriber’s Note: the Errata of this work states, “Pallas says (Neue Nordische Beyträge, Vol. 1, 1781, p. 272) that on Heceta’s expedition of 1775, in lat. 56° near the coast, a party of very white and blond natives in thirty canoes was met with, and he queries whether these might have been the descendants of Chirikov’s men.”


{p. 312}

CHAPTER VIII

CHIRIKOV’S REPORT ON THE VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PAUL”

Captain Chirikov’s report on the voyage of the St. Paul, together with a supplementary report in which he expresses his readiness to continue the explorations, with their respective enclosures, translated from the originals[1] in the Russian archives, reads as follows.


Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain Commander Bering, No. 44.

To the Imperial Admiralty College, A Report

On May 4, 1741, Captain Commander Bering, I, Captain Chirikov, Lieutenant Chikhachev, Navigator Vrange, Fleet Lieutenants Sven Waxel and Plautin, Professor of Astronomy Louis Delisle de la Croyère, Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, Acting Fleet Master Avraam Dementiev, and Navigators Andreyan Eselberg and Ivan Elagin met to hear the written instructions given to Captain Commander Bering by the Imperial Admiralty College, especially Articles 9, 10, and 17, and Article 6 of the general order of the ruling Senate,[2] which was with the said instructions. After reading them we all agreed that, according to the instructions, to find the American coast we should sail at first, after leaving this harbor, SE by E by true compass and keep on this rhumb to the 46th parallel of north latitude unless we sooner found land, for, on the map of Professor Delisle de la Croyère, Juan de Gama Land was located on the 47th parallel of latitude and right on our course. We believed that it was a part of America because, on the general charts, land is indicated all the way from California to Juan de Gama Land, and this indication is also on the map of Professor Delisle de la Croyère.

Although Juan de Gama Land is represented as an island, consequently not a part of the American continent, yet we decided on the course we did because our instructions called for an examination of the islands lying on the way to America. It was agreed that in case land was not found in the latitude just mentioned we should sail steadily E by N {p. 313} until we met with success. If land was discovered either on the course SE by E or E by N, we determined to coast alongside of it from east to north or north to west, depending on its position, but not to follow it up if it stretched between south and east. In the latter case, we were to leave it and sail east until we sighted [other] land and when found to keep it in view likewise while going northerly, to the 65th parallel or at least as far as, God willing, time would permit. If we reached the 65th parallel in good season we planned to sail due west to the Chukchi country and determine the distance between America and Asia and when we had done that to steer for this port. If head winds should prevent us from keeping on the above-mentioned rhumb, we agreed to keep as close to it as possible until with God’s help we discovered land and examined it in accordance with the instructions of the Captain Commander. In planning the voyage we had to keep in mind that we were to be back in this harbor towards the end of September. Although we discussed the suggestion of the Admiralty College, made before we left St. Petersburg, to go first to the Chukchi country and from there towards America (for the distance must be short), we did not act upon it because the season was too early and there was too much ice in the neighborhood of the Chukchi land, which is situated near latitude 65° N.

Therefore we concluded to follow the course first mentioned, and on May 29 we sailed out of the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul [Petropavlovsk] and anchored in the roadstead of Avacha Bay and there remained, on account of head winds, until June 4, when the wind died down and we put out to sea and kept the course agreed upon for Juan de Gama Land. By June 12 we had come as far as the 46th parallel without finding the said land, and it became quite evident that it did not exist, since we had sailed over the region where it was supposed to be. On June 13 we changed the course in order to find America and sailed E by N, or as near to it as the winds permitted. On June 20 because of the continuous fogs, which are common in this region, and the stormy winds (which obliged us to heave to under the mizzensail) the Captain Commander and I became separated. During this bad weather I searched for him as long a time as he allowed for such a purpose but without success. From this time on I did not again see his ship and was, therefore, compelled to continue the voyage alone on the course laid out.

On July 15 (having, from the mouth of Avacha Bay, where we had put up a lighthouse named Vaua, come east 61° 51′ of longitude, according to our reckoning, distance on the rhumb E by N6°57′E, 2,178 knots or Italian miles, or 3,793 Russian versts, counting 104½ versts to a degree—in returning we made 73° 30′ of longitude, distance on the rhumb E by N7°38′E, 2,589 knots, or 4,509 Russian versts—) we discovered land [Cape Addington] in latitude 55° 36′ north [noon position]. This land was without doubt the American coast, because, according to the map {p. 314} of the Nuremberg geographer Johann Baptist Homann and others, we were not far from parts of America that are well known. To illustrate this point more clearly we have joined (on the chart which is being sent to the Admiralty College) our discoveries with the American coast as it appears on the map of Homann and Professor Delisle de la Croyère, namely the northern part of California, the mouth of the Moozemleck River,[3] a portion of the interior of the eastern part of Hudson Strait. The longitude of Kamchatka, as given on the chart, is referred to Teneriffe Island and St. Petersburg as calculated by Professor Delisle de la Croyère.

When we stood near the land on the above-noted date we looked about for anchorage in order to make our observations as we were instructed. We approached within three versts of the shore and even nearer in some places, sounding as we went along, but found no good anchorage, for the depth was about 70 fathoms or more. The coast is irregular and mountainous; these mountains had a fine growth of timber and in places were covered with snow. In the journal and on the general chart may be seen the lay of the land, for we paralleled it. Not finding a good anchorage I sent the quartermaster Grigori Trubitsin with eight men in the longboat into a bay to ascertain whether it could be entered, the kind of anchorage, and the depth of the water. He did as he was told and returned in four hours and made a written report to the effect that he had been within 60 fathoms of the shore opposite the bay, where he found 40 fathoms of water and gravelly, sandy bottom. There was shelter from north and east winds, but no protection from west and south winds. It offered anchorage for only a small boat. The width of the bay from the cape to the shore is somewhere from 4 to 5 versts. In going by the cape we noticed on the rocks many sea lions. On the mountains were large trees of fir and pine. Human habitation we did not see. On July 16, at eight o’clock in the evening, we took the longboat aboard, because there was no good place to anchor; and, for more safety, we steered away from shore for the night. About five in the morning, the wind being fair, we came about and sailed north on the same rhumb on which we last saw land [Cape Ommaney] in the north the night before. At ten o’clock in the morning we came within a half verst of it. At the time it was quite foggy, and in order not to get too close we paralleled it, keeping between north and west. It was my intention to make a careful survey of a part of the American coast, but my plans were ruined by the misfortune of July 18. On that day we were in the 58th degree, and I noticed that the mountains had more snow on them than those we had passed. Evidently we were going into colder country, where it is more difficult to make observations than in warmer. With this idea in mind I ordered, my officers {p. 315} agreeing, the acting fleet master Avraam Dementiev with ten armed men to take the yawl and examine the bay. It was then in the fourth hour. I followed them with the ship, with the purpose of anchoring when I was near the bay into which they entered. Much to our disappointment we found no place to anchor; everywhere the shore is broken up, and the mountains come right down to the water’s edge; and, as is usual in such cases, the water is deep, which on sounding we found to be true, as may be seen in the officers’ journals.

We approached within two versts of the bay, sounding as we went along, but got nowhere less than 65 fathoms. Almost everywhere the bottom was gravelly, and in many places rocks were seen above and below water. For these reasons we did not anchor but hove to and tacked in front of the bay, the bearings of which we took. Before he set out I handed Dementiev a copy of the instructions which had been given to us to display in public. He read it over several times. I gave him also the following order which was signed by me:

You are put in command of the longboat and ten armed men, one copper cannon and two rockets; and you are to go ashore and do the following things.

(1) When you come near enough to the shore, make a landing if possible; if not, come back to the ship and for our information fire two guns. (2) If with God’s help you get ashore, look about for human beings; if you find them, be gentle with them and present them with a few small presents with which the ensign Choglokov will provide you, namely a copper and an iron kettle, two hundred beads, three packages of Chinese tobacco, one piece of nankeen, one piece of damask, five rattles [?], and a paper of needles. From me you will receive ten-ruble pieces which you may distribute among the inhabitants as you think best. Among other questions ask them, in case the Koriak interpreter who goes with you can enter into conversation with them (for it is not likely that any other language but his will be of any help), what kind of land this is and under what government they are; and ask some of them to come aboard our ship. (3) See whether there is a safe place for a ship to come in and anchor for a time, take soundings, and make a sketch map of the harbor, even if it is only rough. (4) Note the kind of trees and grasses on shore. (5) Examine the rocks and the soil to see whether they contain precious minerals; in order to help you a piece of silver ore is given you to take along and if you find something like it bring it aboard. (6) Ask the natives in what direction the land extends, whether it has any rivers that flow into the sea, and where they are; and obtain such other information as you can. (7) If the inhabitants should act in an unfriendly manner and make it unsafe to remain, return to the ship as quickly as you can; but do them no harm nor allow your men to do so. (8) Make every effort to carry out quickly the above instructions so that you may return to the ship the same day or at least not later than the next day. If thick weather should set in, making it impossible to see the ship, you had better not come out. If stormy weather should come on, delay your departure and, with that in view, take with you provisions enough to last your company a week. (9) As soon as you land signal to us with a rocket and when you embark let off another one. While ashore keep up a big fire, especially at night, if you think {p. 316} we are likely to see the flame, or the smoke in the day time. (10) When you are within a verst of the shore begin sounding, to ascertain the depth and the kind of bottom, (11) Fill with fresh water the two barrels which are being sent with you. In all things conduct yourself as a true and good servant of Her Imperial Majesty.

We had no signal of any kind from him. We saw them approach the shore, and that is all. Hoping that he would come out, we kept under sail for five days and as near the bay as we dared.

At first the weather was such that the longboat could have come without any trouble; later we had heavy rains, fog, and strong winds which carried us from the said bay a distance of about 30 knots. On July 23 we returned and went up quite close to the bay and there saw a fire which we thought was made by our men. During all the time that we had followed the coast we had seen no fire, no buildings, no boats, nor any other signs of human beings and therefore supposed that the country was uninhabited. When we observed the flame we fired a gun at intervals as a signal to the boat to come out; but no boat came, although the weather was fair for that purpose and we sailed quite close to the shore. As we fired the blaze on the beach grew bigger.

On July 24 we concluded that it was quite probable that the boat was damaged and could not come out. With this idea in mind all the officers consulted and decided (in writing) to send ashore the small boat with the carpenter, the calker, and the necessary tools to repair the longboat. Boatswain Sidor Savelev volunteered to accompany them, and the sailor Fadiev was asked to go and help row because he had expressed a desire to do so. These are the instructions (a copy of which is enclosed[4]) which were given to the boatswain. On reaching shore and finding the boat in need of repairs he was to leave the carpenter and calker; and he, with Dementiev and three or four of the men, was to return to the ship without delay. When he departed the weather was very still; we followed him quite close to shore and saw him approach it. According to our time it was exactly six o’clock in the afternoon. The signals which had been agreed upon he failed to make and at the expected time did not return. The weather was fair. Next day, July 25, at one o’clock in the afternoon we sighted coming out of the bay into which we had sent our men two boats, one small and the other larger, and we concluded that they must be our boats returning. We went to meet them; as we drew near we noticed that they were not our boats, because their bows were sharp and the men did not row as we do but paddled. They did not come near enough for us to make out their faces; all we saw was that there were four men in one boat; one man stood at the stern and three paddled. One of them wore something red. We saw them stand up, motion with {p. 317} their hands, and heard them call twice, “Agai, Agai”; and then they turned about and paddled for the shore. I ordered white kerchiefs to be waved as an invitation for them to board our ship. This was done by a number of our men, but it did no good; the people in the boats paid no attention, proceeded shoreward, and entered the bay out of which they had come. We could not follow them because in the first place there was little wind and in the second place the small boat was fast and the larger one had not come very near us. We became convinced that some misfortune had happened to our men.[4a] Dementiev had been gone eight days, and during that time the weather was fair for returning and we stood close by. From the time that the boatswain left us we had hardly moved, and the weather was quiet. Surely something must have happened to them; otherwise they would have come. The action of the natives, their fear to come close to us, made us suspect that they had either killed our men or held them. We stood near the place the rest of the day; in the evening we kept offshore a bit but had a lantern at the stern so that in case our men came out they would see us.

The next morning at eleven we came about and coasted along the shore between north and west. By the end of July 26, we had come to latitude 58° 21′ N and longitude from Vaua, according to our reckoning as we went along, 54° 11′.[5] At this place and on July 27 we discussed whether we should still keep up the search. We had no small boat and therefore no means of sending a party ashore or bringing water and provisions on board. According to our reckoning in coming over we were nearly 2,000 knots from the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, and we had no idea what kind of wind we should have. We had 45 casks of water, hardly enough for such a distance; we did not know whether they were full or partly empty (later it proved that we were seven short). Having taken all these circumstances into consideration, we—that is, I, Lieutenant Chikhachev, Navigator Vrange, Fleet Lieutenant Plautin, and Navigator Ivan Elagin—agreed not to continue on our course [not to follow the coast] but to start back at once for the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. I enclose an accurate copy of our decision.[6] At the time we realized that it was too soon for going back and, had it not been for our misfortunes, we should not have done so. Altogether we saw about 400 versts of the [American] coast.

Having decided, we put about and sailed for this harbor. On the way we had contrary winds from northwest and southwest almost continuously. We unexpectedly ran into some land [Adak Island] which was on our course and nearly lost the ship and all on board. We saw whales, sea lions, walruses, porpoises, birds, many white-backed ducks, {p. 318} also another kind with a red crooked bill, and many different kinds of gulls. All along the coast the mountains are high, the shore steep, and the water deep.

The mountains along the shore which we first sighted were covered with growths of good-sized trees; some of the mountains had snow on them, increasing in quantity the farther north we went. From the place we turned back we could see in N¾E very high snow-covered mountains [Mt. Fairweather], far higher than any in Kamchatka. On August 1, at five in the afternoon, we sighted land in NW½W [SW end of Kenai Peninsula], about 30 knots distant, and towards the end of the day we took bearings of it. On this land there was a chain of snow-covered mountains, and we were of the opinion that this was a continuation of the land from which we had turned back a few days before, because in the interval we saw birds, gulls, ducks, also floating grass which grows along the shore. These we did not see on our outward voyage, when we were a considerable distance from land, except during two or three days when we ran into a little floating grass and observed one bird a day (not counting gray gulls and another kind of small bird that looks like the kestrel of the steppes,[7] which we always saw far out). On account of this we kept a little south of the regular course and the fair wind. Beginning with July 31 the color of the water was different from what it is far out at sea, but we saw no land on that day, probably because of the fog. On August 1 and 2 we caught sight of it and at the end of the day took its bearings. On August 4 and 5 we took soundings and got bottom between 43 and 90 fathoms. Many birds flew about, and the color of the water indicated that we were near land; but we did not see it. During the night of August 6 we came to a bank where the water was only 30 fathoms and the bottom sandy and rocky, and we were therefore obliged to come about and go on an easterly course. The land which we sighted on August 1 is marked on the chart alongside of the date, and our daily positions are also indicated there. The winds were contrary, and the fresh water was decreasing.

On August 1 I consulted with the officers and with their consent gave the order that the crew should have cooked kasha[8] once a day for two days and twice on the third day, and of drinking water no more than is necessary to quench the thirst. As to the officers, they were to have one cooked meal a day. When it rained the crew set buckets and other {p. 319} vessels to catch the water from the sails; and, although it was bitterish and tasted of tar, yet the men drank it gladly and said that it was good for the health and that the tar bitterness cured them of scurvy. In order that the men might not become too weak from lack of sufficient food I ordered that on those days when they had kasha just once they should be given (this did not apply to the officers and their servants) a cup of wine in addition to the usual allowance. As the head winds continued and the supply of water ran short without any hope of our getting more, the distance from the harbor being still considerable, I ordered that the crew should have kasha only every other day. The men took it in the right spirit, and on the days when they had no kasha they lived on biscuit and butter. On those days when additional food was allowed they had salt meat cooked in sea water. After September 14 the crew had cooked kasha but once a week, and on the other six days they lived on cold food. It was understood that if any one wished to use his allowance of drinking water for cooking his biscuit he might do so, but this would be the only warm food he would receive. These privations began to tell; many of the men came down with scurvy, and both officers and crew did their work under great difficulties. Some of the men were so feeble that they could not even come on deck. I began to fear that the worst might happen and therefore ordered that after September 14 the members of the crew should have daily two cups of wine and the petty officers one above the usual allowance.

About seven in the morning of September 4 we sighted land [Islands of Four Mountains], and at the end of the day we took the bearings of it. The reckoning on our returning voyage gave latitude 52° 23′ N, longitude from Vaua 32° 49′, distance on the rhumb E by S9°48′E, 1,186 knots,[9] or 2,065½ Russian versts. The land was full of mountains, the highest of which was covered with snow. At eight o’clock we came about to get away from the land and sailed on a course between S and W so that after we got by it we could continue on our regular course. On September 8 we had many indications of the nearness of land, namely birds and floating grass, and on that account between seven in the evening and seven in the morning we kept one or two points more to the south than usual, and after that we sailed on the regular course for a short time. At nine o’clock the fog set in and the signs of land were still plentiful, and I was again obliged to sail one point south of our regular course, or west by true compass. At the end of the seventh hour in the evening the wind, by God’s mercy, suddenly moderated. We took soundings and found bottom at 50 fathoms.

While we made ready to anchor the sea carried us into 30 fathoms and sandy bottom, and there we let go the small bower anchor and {p. 320} paid out a half cable. At the bow there was 28 fathoms and at the stern 24. We heard the breaking of the surf on the rocks, but the heavy fog hid everything from sight. Towards nine in the morning, when it cleared a bit, we saw land to the west [Adak Island], about 200 fathoms away. The high mountains on it were bare of trees but covered with grass. The beach was irregular, the eastern part seemed lower and about 300 fathoms away. Near the shore, on both sides, there were many rocks above and below the water, and we could see the surf breaking over them. To the north no land was seen.

As we examined the shore we caught sight of two men walking along the beach. We shouted to them in Russian and in the Kamchadal language to come aboard; a little later we heard human voices calling to us, but the breaking of the surf made so much noise that we could not make out what was said. Through the speaking trumpet and without it we again invited them to come. At ten o’clock seven men in seven small skin boats came near us and, after looking on for some time, went back to shore. In the afternoon (September 9) fourteen of these skin boats, one man in each, paddled up to our ship, and from them we secured one of the hats they wore (which was made of birch wood) and four arrows. They also gave us, wrapped up in seaweeds, some kind of mineral which I think is antimony (or stibnite), which I have sent to Bolsheretsk Post to be assayed by the assayer Gardebol; but up to this time I have not heard from him. They also gave us the roots of a grass with which they stuff their noses, and a few of these roots we brought with us for exhibition. As to how they came, their kind of boats, their dealings with us, and other such matters are written up in the journal.

At the eighth hour in the evening of September 10, the wind began to blow from the west, and, trusting to God’s help, we attempted to get away from where we stood before it was too late. We started to heave in but while doing this drifted easterly to within 300 fathoms of the shore and were in danger of being blown on it. I feared also that there might be submerged rocks on the west. I, therefore, ordered to cut the cable (34 fathoms of which was still out) at the hawse hole, to put on all sail, and to go SE. This was done with God’s help, but it was a narrow escape, for a strong wind blew off the mountains and from all directions.

The place where we were at anchor is in latitude 51° 40′ N, distant from Vaua, reckoning from our returning point on the rhumb E by S6°20′E, 852 knots,[10] or 1,484 Russian versts. After we cleared the land we proceeded to sail a little more westerly than our laid-out course, but the head winds greatly hindered us.

On September 21, at eight in the evening, we noticed a small fish close to the ship. We took soundings and got 60 fathoms. We let the ship drift {p. 321} and took more soundings and got the same depth with sandy bottom. There was no land in sight, probably because it was hidden by the darkness and fog; but we took no chances and stood out easterly for two hours and then hove to until three in the morning, when we proceeded on our course. At the end of the ninth hour in the morning, land [Agattu Island] was sighted on the rhumb W by N, but I knew that it was not yet Kamchatka. In the tenth hour we came about in order to clear it in the south, for the wind was favorable and we were keeping parallel with the shore between south and west. At the end of the day we took the bearings of the land, which was latitude 52° 35′ N, distant from Vaua 956 Russian versts,[11] reckoning from the returning point. The shore seemed broken up; here and there were mountains of no great size, but in the distance were high snow-covered mountains; but on the lower mountains and on the level there was no snow. At different times we noticed near the land four otters, the kind that live near Kamchatka, but which we had found nowhere else. We had the land in view until six in the morning of September 22. I am of the opinion that the land which we sighted on September 4, 9, and 21 is one and the same body, and it is probably due to the fog that we did not always see it. We had enough evidence of it in the shape of shore birds, different kinds of animals that keep close to land, and floating grasses. As we sailed south these signs either decreased or disappeared altogether. On our outward voyage, when we kept much farther south than on the inward, we saw hardly any of the above indications, aside from sea animals and a small amount of fairly broken-up sea grass and that rarely. I am inclined to think that all the land which we saw is one body because from August 6, when it disappeared from view, until September 4, when we caught sight of it once more, there were signs that it was near. Another good bit of evidence to substantiate my theory is this: If the people we met with on September 9 were on an island it goes to show that the mainland is near, for how could they have come here otherwise? If it is not an island then it is the mainland itself. I cannot say for certain which it is.

By the end of September all members of the crew were down with scurvy; many of them could not stand their watch, and those that came on deck did so because it was necessary and not because they had the strength. Between September 16 and the time when we returned to the harbor six men died. Their names, as well as those who were left on the American coast, are recorded in the register.[12] On the night of October 7, at ten o’clock. Lieutenant Chikhachev died; on the next day Navigator Vrange and Fleet Master Michael Plautin passed away. Chikhachev could not stand his watch for three weeks before he died, and Plautin {p. 322} for two weeks. I was so ill with scurvy and so weak that I expected death any moment. From September 21 to the time that we reached port I was not able to come on deck. The ship was navigated by Ivan Elagin, who, although very ill, yet would not give in and because of dire necessity remained on deck almost continuously. I gave him such help as I could, for, thanks to God, my mind did not leave me. I worked out the courses from the log book and told him what to do. When, according to our reckoning on the outward voyage, we should have sighted Kamchatka but failed to do so, I ordered him to steer west close to the parallel of this harbor. Elagin has good judgment, and, if it had not been for him and the strength which God gave him, some great misfortune would have happened to the ship. Because of his great merits, good judgment, soberness, as well as for numerous difficult services, I promoted him to the rank of fleet lieutenant, for he not only did the work of that office but ran the whole ship.

By the will of God we caught sight of Kamchatka at seven in the morning of October 8, and two days later, nine in the evening, we sailed into Avacha Bay and anchored. At the time we had but two barrels of water, which we had boiled out of sea water. At ten o’clock in the morning of October 10 Professor Delisle de la Croyère died. With God’s help we entered the Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul on October 12. At the time of this writing the Captain Commander has not yet arrived, and it is not known whether on account of some misfortune he has been obliged to winter somewhere. We had enough provisions on board both ships to last a half year in case of necessity.

Enclosed is a list of the crew (with their names) who are with the Captain Commander.[13] I am submitting to the Admiralty College the journal of our voyage and a Mercator chart. According to our reckoning the number of degrees of longitude between Kamchatka and America differs in going and coming,[14] owing to the fact that during all the time that we were at sea we reckoned from only one base, the meridian of Vaua, and had no other base or way to correct by. The outward voyage and the land discovered on it are marked on the chart in black ink; and the return voyage, with the land sighted and its extension, in red ink. During such a long voyage and period of time it is impossible even for the best navigators to escape errors altogether. If a more accurate map is desired, the professors of the Academy can make it from the reckonings going and coming or in some other way from the log, journal, and chart. To what extent the error in longitude is due to the currents I cannot tell. In going we tried twice to determine the current but failed. Along the American coast there was a tidal current running up and down parallel {p. 323} to the shore. In returning we had no small boat and could not make a study of the tide.

It took six weeks to go from Kamchatka to America; these weeks were in the months of June and July (by the middle of June we were in latitude 46° N), and yet it was as cold as our middle autumn. We had almost continuous fogs; only occasionally about the middle of the day did the sun show itself. During these six weeks we had only three really fair days. The same kind of weather prevailed along the American coast, for while we were there the weather was not fair. In August and September, when we returned, we had many more clear days with the usual strong autumn winds. In my opinion the best time to navigate these seas is August and half of September and not June and July.

The instructions of the Admiralty College require that this report be sent in care of an officer who took part in the expedition. Unfortunately this is not possible, as the officers are dead; and therefore I am sending it in care of the marine Semeon Splavshikov, who will follow the winter overland route. This route as far as Yakutsk is not very safe because of the unsubdued natives living between Kamchatka and the Kolyma Post, who sometimes kill, plunder, or detain Russian travelers. If I were not to send it, I should be blamed for delay. For fear that these papers may not reach their destination I intend, as soon as navigation to Okhotsk opens in the spring, to send to the Admiralty College exact copies of the report, journal, chart, list of the crew with their names, by a special messenger, the midshipman Yurlov. He will also take along the things we secured from the natives of the newly discovered land and hand them to the Admiralty College. I beg to add that in this journal the day of the month begins at noon as is customary in all naval journals.

To the Admiralty College from its humble servant.

Captain Alexei Chirikov

December 7, 1741


The instructions of the Admiralty College to Bering are not given in the present work, but the orders of the Senate are. Article 6 will be found in Chapter IV, p. 30.

On Homann’s map (1712?) this river falls into the Gulf of California.

See below, p. 323.

See note on p. 311.

According to the journal (Chapter VII, p. 297) the latitude is that of July 26 but the longitude that of July 27.

See below, p. 324.

According to Pallas, pustolga is the Russian name for the kestrel (Falco tinnunculus), which is common enough on the Russian steppes but does not occur in eastern Asia or in Alaska. The bird seen by Chirikov must therefore be another species of small hawk or falcon, possibly Circus hudsonius, or more likely Falco columbarius, the typical form of which has been recorded from the Prince William Sound region by Grinnell (Univ. of California Publs. in Zool., Vol. 5, 1910, p. 387) while the dark form (Falco c. suckleyi) prevails between Sitka and northern California. (L. Stejneger.)

A buckwheat mush.

These are the corrected longitude and distance. The journal for September 4 (see p. 302) gives: longitude, 21° 10′, distance 770 knots.

This is the corrected distance. The journal for September 9 (p. 302) gives 429 knots.

Equivalent to 549 knots. This would be the corrected distance. The journal for September 21 (p. 307) gives 127 knots.

Not published in the present work.

Not published in the present work.

Going, 61° 51′; coming, 73° 30′ (see Chirikov’s report, above, p. 313; also Chapter VII, footnote 22, p. 308).

Enclosures

Instructions to Boatswain Sidor Savelev

On the 19th of this month Acting Fleet Master and Navigator Dementiev went ashore and has not been heard of since, and it is possible some harm has come to him. We are now near the spot where he was sent, and I order you to go in the small boat to the place where he went. Take with you a carpenter and a calker and such tools as are needed for repairing the boat. When you come close to the shore, if you see no hostile natives or see Dementiev or some of his men, make a landing. If the boat is damaged and can be repaired, set the carpenter and some of Dementiev’s men to work; but do you come back at once and bring with you Dementiev and as many of his men as are not needed to do the repair work. If the boat is beyond repairs bring aboard as many men as your boat will hold, and {p. 324} for the others another trip will be made. If you find his party and boat in good condition, signal that fact to us by making two fires—the smoke of which we could see in day time and the flames at night. If the boat can be repaired, build three fires; if it cannot be, make four some little distance apart. But you are to come aboard with Dementiev and as many others as the boat will accommodate without overloading. Should you start back in the evening or at night, lay out the fires as best you can.

Captain Chirikov

July 23, 1741

Decision to Return

On July 26, 1741, Captain Chirikov and the undersigned officers decided, owing to the loss of the two ship’s boats with Dementiev and fourteen men, not to follow out the original plan but to start for Kamchatka that very day. There were no more small boats on board, which made it impossible to examine the shore or to take on flesh water. We had only 45 barrels of water, and this is a very small amount considering the long distance to Avacha, which is nearly 2,000 knots. We were not even sure that some of the water had not leaked out of the casks. We were equally in doubt as to the kind of winds we might have. Because of this shortage of water it was agreed not to examine the coast but to sail for Kamchatka so as not to suffer some great misfortune.

Captain Alexei Chirikov

Lieutenant Ivan Chikhachev

Lieutenant Michael Plautin

Navigator Ivan Elagin

To the Admiralty College, A [Supplementary] Report

Captain Commander Bering’s instructions required us to examine the land which according to rumor lies opposite the Chukchi country, some distance to the east, also the last land we saw on our voyage, 956 versts from here [Agattu]. It is my humble duty as well as my great desire to secure full information about both of these lands. Of the company that was put under my command, that is to say the lieutenant, two navigators, constable, boatswain, and crew, some, by the will of God, have died, others were lost on the American coast (their names I have sent with my first report to the Admiralty College). At the present time I have only one man on board for navigating the ship, keeping the log, and mapping the coast, and that is the navigator Elagin. Although on the list of officers there is the name of the assistant navigator Yurlov (who was not taken along on the last expedition), yet he does not know his business. (It would seem that he was taken from a warehouse, where he acted as watchman, and put to study navigation, being then of an age when he could learn neither the theory nor the practice of it; and after a time, because of length of service, he was given the rank and pay of assistant navigator.) As to myself, I am quite unfit for sea duty. The scurvy is deep in my system, and this it is difficult to shake off because of the {p. 325} heavy atmosphere and especially because of the poor and insufficient food. Twice on the return voyage I nearly died of the disease, the last time it was October 26. Now, by God’s mercy, I am just able to sit up; my feet are drawn up and full of spots, and the teeth are loose in the gums. The drugs on hand are so old that they are worthless. A similar state of ill health exists among the crew; some of them are not fit for sea service. From the enclosed lists[15] may be seen how many officers and men we still have, how many were left ashore, how many we should have according to the regulations of the Admiralty College, and how many we need. The ship’s rigging is in bad condition, and I attach the report[16] made by the lower officers on that subject. We cannot replace it because we have no other rigging. Taking all these things into consideration—my illness, shortage in men, food, material—it is impossible to put to sea for the purpose of making a detailed investigation of the above-mentioned lands, namely the one we discovered and the one opposite the Chukchi country. I am going to ask help from Captain Spanberg (who is now at Bolsheretsk with five ships). If he himself cannot take part in the expedition, he may be willing to give us a navigator or an assistant navigator and provisions, a list of which I have made out and sent to him. If I should receive assistance, even if only enough to repair my rigging, and if I am not too ill I will do my duty and go to sea. If help should not come the best thing to do would be to take the men on board and go to Okhotsk or Yakutsk and wait there for orders. It would perhaps be better to go on to Yakutsk so as not to use up the provisions at Okhotsk, where they could be used later for the expedition.

Should it be the wish of her Imperial Majesty for us to explore the newly discovered land as well as that part which is supposed to lie opposite the Chukchi country and (according to the instructions to Captain Commander Bering) to bring the inhabitants under Her Imperial Majesty’s subjection, it would be necessary to increase the number of men on the ship to the full complement as laid down by the Admiralty College. How many men and of what rank they should be is indicated on the enclosed list.[17] We need also new rigging, spare parts, and a number of other things. If I were at Yakutsk to hurry the material along it would reach here more quickly than by my waiting for it in these harbors. If I should receive no aid, I, with the assent of my officers, will do the best that we can for the interests of Her Imperial Majesty and will report to the Admiralty College.

According to the instructions of the Admiralty College we were required to bring to St. Petersburg a few inhabitants of the newly discovered land, or of land we might discover in the future. We could not {p. 326} persuade them to come, and to force them against their will without special instructions was dangerous. Not having any of these people with me and not knowing their language I can say little about them. It is not likely that they will come on board willingly, and I do not suppose Her Imperial Majesty would have us use force. For that purpose a larger crew is necessary than we have had so far.

To the Admiralty College from its humble servant.

Captain Alexei Chirikov

December 9, 1741


See p. 327.

Not published here.

See p. 326.

Enclosures

List of the Complement of Men on My Ship, According to the Regulation of the Admiralty College, the Number on Hand (Besides Those Who Are Unfit for Sea Service), the Number Needed, and Their Rank

RankComplementPresentNeeded
Captain11  
Lieutenant11
Navigator11  
Assistant navigators22
Surgeon11
Assistant surgeon11  
Surgeon’s apprentices211
Boatswain11
Boatswain’s mates22  
Quartermasters211
Purser11  
Assistant constable11
Cannoneers642
Copyist11  
Assistant storekeeper11  
Sailors1284
Calkers33
Sailmakers321
Carpenters33  
Coopers321
Corporal11
Soldiers2424  
Drummer11  
Monk11
Total755421

In addition we need a boatswain’s mate in place of Evdokim Fedorov.

Captain Alexei Chirikov

{p. 327}

List of Admiralty Men, Artillerists, and Siberians of Various Ranks Who Are Registered in the Harbor of the Holy Apostles St. Peter and St. Paul. Some of these men are on hand and others absent

Absent 
RankRegistered(a)(b)(c)(d)AbsentPresent
Captain11
Ensigns22
Assistant surgeon11
Surgeon’s apprentice11
Navigator11
Assistant navigator11
Assistant storekeeper11
Midshipman11
Clerk11
Copyist11
Boatswain’s mates22
Registrars22
Cannoneer corporal11
         
Cannoneers1st class22
2nd class11
         
Quartermaster11
         
Sailors1st class33
2nd class33
         
Ranked as sailorsSiberian carpenters22
Workman11
         
Assistant corporal11
Soldiers2111
         
Carpenters44
Turner11
Blacksmiths       
  Foreman11
Admiralty  Smiths22
Cooper11
Assistant cooper and Siberian carpenter11
Calkers22
Sailmakers33
         
Secretaries22
         
SiberianDrummer11
   garrisonSoldiers191118
         
From Yakutsk regiment8117
Siberian carpenters4113
Employees of Kamchatka posts222 
Total831122677

Captain Chirikov

(a) Sent to St. Petersburg with a report.

(b) Sent to buy deer.

(c) Guard the deer herds at Bolsheretsk.

(d) In Lower Kamchatka Post.


{p. 328}

CHAPTER IX

THE END OF THE EXPEDITION

Bering’s second expedition came officially to an end in 1749, although very little in the line of exploration and discovery was done after 1742. Counting from the time when Peter the Great signed the instructions for the first expedition, twenty-five years had been spent in the attempt to solve the mysteries of the North Pacific and the Arctic. Many of them were solved. It was proved that a northeast passage was impracticable; that Novaya Zemlya was not a peninsula; that the Asiatic coast extended much farther to the eastward than was supposed; that Terra de Ieso, Company Land, and Gama Land, as pictured by the cartographers, did not exist; that Japan was an island; and that the American coast ran in a northwesterly direction from Cape Blanco. In brief, it made clear all the points which were in doubt at the time of Peter’s last visit to Paris.

Unfortunately, the one question, the important question, the raison d’être of these undertakings, whether Asia and America were united, was not answered, owing to the fact that the explorers along the Arctic coast were unable to go from the Kolyma to the Anadyr. The same questions were asked after the second expedition as at the end of the first expedition; and they continued to be asked until another Russian, Baron Ferdinand Wrangell, answered them during the winters of 1821 and 1823, when he walked along the Arctic shore from the Kolyma to Kolyuchin Island, a place that had been charted by Billings, of the Russian Navy, in 1791. So, after all, Russia did solve that problem, and to her belongs the credit.

It may be of some interest to the reader to know what became of the officers who survived the hard voyage. Chirikov passed the winter of 1741-1742 at Petropavlovsk, and in the spring he {p. 329} sailed on the St. Paul to the eastward in the hope of finding Bering and locating the American coast opposite East Cape. He failed in both of his objects largely because of the poor health of his men, the poor equipment, and the unseaworthiness of his vessel. He did, however, reach the islands of Attu and Atka, the first being a new discovery, the second probably a resighting of an island seen by Bering on September 25, 1741. During the summer of 1742 he sailed for Okhotsk, where he left the St. Paul, and from there he proceeded inland. He remained in Siberia as the head of the expedition until 1745, when he was asked to come to the capital and was promoted to the rank of captain commander; but he died in 1748 as a result of a disease contracted on the voyage. Waxel left Kamchatka in 1743 for Okhotsk, and from there he went to Yakutsk and Yeniseisk, where he found Chirikov. When the latter was called to St. Petersburg, Waxel assumed command until he was summoned home. There he was made captain of the first rank, and when he died his widow was granted a pension of 2,000 rubles.

Khitrov was made rear-admiral in 1753. Ovtsin in 1757 was in command of the Poltava, holding at the time the rank of oberster Kriegskommisar.

All others who took part in these expeditions were advanced one grade in rank, dating from July 15, 1744, and their wages were paid accordingly. The Senate requested the Admiralty College to reward them as it should seem best.

When Bering’s death became known at Kamchatka his private property was sold at auction and the proceeds, about 1,000 rubles, were sent to his family. Whatever wages were due him at the time of his death were also paid over to his wife and children. In addition the Senate voted him a reward of 5,000 rubles.


{p. 330}

NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE VOYAGE OF BERING AND CHIRIKOV FROM KAMCHATKA TO THE ALASKAN COAST AND RETURN, 1741[1]

Ellsworth P. Bertholf

Captain-Commandant U. S. Coast Guard (retired)

The tracks of both vessels, as laid down on the accompanying chart (Pl. 1), show the approximate noon positions throughout the voyage and indicate the several portions of the coast and the islands sighted or examined by the navigators.[2]


The following material (translated by Professor F. A. Golder) was made use of in constructing the chart. In connection with the St. Peter: (a) Yushin’s log book; (b) Khitrov’s log book; (c) the report of Lieutenant Waxel, who succeeded to the command after Bering’s death; and (d) the journal of the naturalist Steller (published in Vol. II of the present work). In connection with the St. Paul: (a) the log book, (b) the daily journal, and (c) the report of Captain Chirikov. [Captain Bertholf, shortly before his sudden death in November, 1921, was able to revise a proof of the chart. As it now stands it represents his final judgment.—Edit. Note.]

In the course of several tours of duty in Alaskan waters, as executive and commanding officer in the U. S. Revenue Cutter Service and the U. S. Coast Guard, the writer became familiar with the coast and islands of that territory, and this knowledge has been of great help to him in identifying the land sighted by Bering and Chirikov.

The Joint Voyage of the “St. Peter” and the “St. Paul”

The brigs St. Peter and St. Paul, commanded respectively by Captain Commander Bering and Captain Chirikov, sailed out of Avacha Bay, Kamchatka, on June 4, 1741, and entered on their eventful voyage of discovery. Bering’s instructions from the Admiralty College required that he should steer SE by E, true, until he reached latitude 46° in order to locate Juan de Gama Land, which, according to the map of the astronomer Louis Delisle de la Croyère, extended to the 47th parallel of north latitude. If no land was sighted on that course he was to steer E by N, true, until he came to the American continent. The wind being fair, the ships were able to make good the true course, SE by E, and found themselves on June 12 in latitude 46°. No land being {p. 331} sighted and no bottom being found at 100 fathoms, Bering, on the 13th, gave the order to change the course to E by N. The wind was now unfavorable, but the vessels continued in company until the 20th, when stormy weather overtook them and they became separated during the night. Although up to this time the vessels had exchanged signals almost daily and had frequently spoken to each other and compared positions, nevertheless the noon positions recorded in the log books of the two vessels do not always agree even on those days when they both obtained observations of the sun. On June 10 both vessels took observations within sight of each other, but the St. Peter’s log records the latitude as 47° 29′, while the St. Paul’s log gives the latitude as 47° 45′. In plotting the noon position of the vessels while in company we have therefore averaged the positions recorded in the two log books.

On June 20 the wind was strong from the eastward with a heavy sea running, and both vessels were under short sail. The St. Peter’s log for that day records that at 10 p.m. the St. Paul bore NW distant 2 miles, and that at 1 a.m. the latter was no longer within sight, in consequence of which the St. Peter hove to. The log of the St. Paul for June 20 records that at 3 a.m. the St. Peter was 10 miles distant, and at 5 a.m. she began to disappear from sight, whereupon the St. Paul hove to, and both vessels, being hove to on the port tack, drifted to the southward and westward. The following day the weather moderated, and in accordance with Bering’s previous instructions each vessel began to search for the other in the direction in which the other was last seen. Bering believed the St. Paul to be northwest of him and began his search in that direction. Chirikov, however, reckoned the St. Peter to be north-northeast of him and endeavored to search in that direction, but as the wind was from that same quarter the St. Paul made little progress.

The Separate Voyage of the “St. Peter”

Bering searched for the St. Paul until the 22nd and then resumed the voyage; but, after taking council with his officers, he {p. 332} decided to shape again his course to the southward as far as latitude 46° in order to make another attempt to locate the elusive Gama Land. Noon of the 25th found the ship in latitude 45° 16′, with clear weather and no land in sight. This finally convinced Bering that the map of Delisle de la Croyère was incorrect and that Juan de Gama Land did not exist, and consequently he changed the course to E by N, true. He had fair winds and made good progress, but no land being sighted by July 6 he began to keep more to the northward. On July 14, being fearful of the water supply, a council of the officers was called, and it was decided to steer more towards the north, in the hope of reaching some land where the empty water casks might be refilled.

DISCOVERY OF LAND

At noon July 16 (the end of the log book day[3]), the ship was in latitude 58° 17′ by observation. Thirty minutes later land was sighted, high mountains covered with snow, and at 1 p.m., July 17, a particularly high snow-covered mountain bore N by W. This was Mt. St. Elias, Bering’s first glimpse of the American continent, at a distance of about 120 nautical miles. The longitude according to the reckoning was 151° 26′ W, but this was more than 9° in error, the correct approximate longitude of the St. Peter at noon July 16 having been 142° 10′ W. These early navigators were sailing unknown seas and had no means of knowing that during the greater part of their voyage a current set them constantly to the eastward. The errors in reckoning the ship’s position were due in small part to crude methods and lack of instruments, and in a larger part to the unknown currents. In plotting the positions of Bering and Chirikov we have endeavored to make due allowance for these currents.

{p. 333}

In approaching land the vessel made slow progress against the light head winds prevailing, and on the 18th foggy weather obliged Bering to proceed with caution. No land was seen that day, although there were many indications that the shore was close aboard. At 8 p.m. on the 19th the fog lifted, and the St. Peter found herself in the bight to the eastward of Kayak Island, with the southern point of the island and its detached Pinnacle Rock in plain view bearing SW by W. During the night the ship was worked around the point, and on the morning of the 20th the St. Peter dropped her anchor on the west side of Kayak Island about midway of its length. Bering named the island St. Elias, and the southern point Cape St. Elias. The two boats were put overboard, and men were sent ashore to fill the empty casks. Khitrov sounded out the passage between Kayak and Wingham Islands to find sheltered anchorage in case of need; he also landed and examined Wingham Island.


While the civil day begins at midnight and ends the following midnight, the astronomical day is reckoned from noon to noon. The log books of the St. Peter and the St. Paul were kept according to the astronomical date, and the log date of July 16 begins at noon July 15 and ends at noon July 16. The civil date coincides with the log date during the hours of the forenoon, but during the hours of the afternoon the log date is one day in advance of the civil date. The St. Peter’s log book records that land was sighted July 17 at 12.30 p.m., or 30 minutes after that day began; the civil date was July 16, 12.30 p.m. (Russian calendar).

SKIRTING THE ALASKAN COAST

The next morning at daybreak, the wind being fair, Bering, taking into consideration the lateness of the season and the signs of scurvy among the crew, gave orders to weigh anchor and begin the return voyage. After leaving Kayak Island early in the morning of July 21, the St. Peter made Cape Hinchinbrook, opened out the passage into Prince William Sound, and then hauled to the southward along Montague Island. The officers took bearings of the Wooded Islands, and at noon of the 22nd the ship was just below Cape Cleare and about 25 miles distant. The weather being thick no land was seen on the 23rd, 24th, and 25th, although on the 24th the course was changed more to the westward in order to draw near to land. At 4 a.m. on July 26 they suddenly made high land bearing NE by N distant about 8 miles and got bottom at 35 fathoms. This was Black Point, the southern point of Sitkalidak Island.[4] After sighting Black Point, the St. Peter stood about due south until noon, covering a {p. 334} distance of some 32 miles, and then hauled more to the westward until noon of the 27th. Frequent soundings were taken and the water shoaled to 35 fathoms. The weather being thick, no land was seen after leaving Black Point, but at noon of the 27th Bering decided that they were getting too near the land and hauled to the southward and eastward to work offshore until the weather cleared.[5]

From noon of the 27th until noon of the 31st the St. Peter stood off shore in a general southeasterly direction. On the 31st the weather cleared, and shortly before noon the course was changed to the northward and westward in order to get in touch with the land. Towards evening of August 2, a heavy fog set in, and the vessel was again headed offshore as the water had shoaled to 30 fathoms. At 1 a.m. the fog temporarily cleared and disclosed land close aboard bearing SE by S. The log records that a sounding shoaled 20 fathoms, whereupon the ship was put about and anchored in 18 fathoms to await daylight. Steller records this incident in his diary as follows: “About one o’clock in the night it was discovered on heaving the lead that the boat was in 4 {p. 335} fathoms of water, but it was otherwise reported to the captain. Gradually the ship worked out of this into 18 and 20 fathoms, where anchor was dropped to wait for daylight.”

This was Chirikov Island, and at daylight the bearings showed the ship was anchored about 1½ miles off the northern end. They named this island Tumannoi (foggy). Towards evening of the 3rd the anchor was raised, and the St. Peter stood to the northward and westward. At 3 p.m. of August 4 Mt. Chiginagak was sighted, and at 8 p.m. the officers made out the mainland from Cape Providence to Chignik Bay, with Sutwik Island in plain view. The vessel was now working to the southward; but the wind had fallen to light variable airs, and she made little progress during the night. In the morning the wind freshened from the eastward; and at noon August 4, according to the bearings, the St. Peter was 5 miles to the eastward of Anowik Island of the Semidi group. The largest and most northerly island of the group must have been hidden by the fog, as both the log and Waxel’s report state that only five islands were seen. Owing to the fog, unsteady winds, and numerous islands, Bering decided to work offshore {p. 336} and, after sighting the Semidi Islands, stood to the southward until August 10 when he concluded to work to the westward along the 53rd parallel of latitude. But he now experienced a succession of head winds and storms and made so little progress on the homeward voyage that on the 27th he again became troubled over the water supply and called a council of the officers. There were but 25 casks of fresh water remaining in the hold, and if the westerly winds continued for any length of time they could not hope to reach Avacha Bay before the water supply was exhausted. According to the reckoning land was about 240 miles[6] distant, and it was agreed “for safety’s sake, to go nearer the land with a view to finding good anchorage where we might take on water enough to last until our return so that in case of head winds we should not suffer extremely.”


It has been stated that Bering named the point Cape St. Hermogenes, but no mention of this is made in any of the ship’s records or in Steller’s diary.

Mr. George Davidson in his “The Tracks and Landfalls of Bering and Chirikof, on the Northwest Coast of America,” San Francisco, 1901, concluded that the St. Peter, after leaving Black Point, passed through Douglas Channel between the Trinity Islands and the southern end of Kodiak Island. There is nothing in the original records to support that conclusion, while there is much evidence to the contrary. After sighting Black Point at 4 a.m., July 26, the St. Peter made 32 miles due south up to noon and was then some 25 miles to the eastward of Douglas Channel. From this point the vessel turned to the westward, and if she did indeed pass through this channel she must have done so between noon and 9 p.m. because at that hour the course was changed to WSW, true. From noon to 1 p.m. the St. Peter made SW by S, true; from 1 to 2 p.m., SW½W, true; from 2 to 3 p.m., W by S, true; and from 3 to 9 p.m., W½S, true, covering from noon until 9 p.m. a distance of 29 miles according to the log. All this time soundings were taken frequently, but no depth less than 35 fathoms is recorded. As the water in Douglas Channel shoals to 7 fathoms, it is clear the ship could not have reached the narrowest part of the channel by 9 p.m. From 9 p.m. to 11 p.m. the course was WSW, true; from 11 p.m. until daylight the course was generally SW, true; and at midnight they sounded in 40 fathoms. If the exact position of the St. Peter at noon on the 26th was such that the courses steered between noon and 9 p.m. carried her in the direction of Douglas Channel, then at 9 p.m. she must have been in the immediate vicinity of the eastern entrance to the channel, because the soundings show she had not passed through the channel up to 9 p.m. Being in that position at 9 p.m., the course steered after that hour would have put the ship ashore on the Trinity Islands.

By plotting on the modern chart the hourly runs of the St. Peter from 4 a.m., July 26, until noon of July 27, making due allowance for the tides and currents and noting at the proper intervals the soundings recorded in the log, it at once becomes apparent that the vessel passed to the southward of the Trinity Islands and at noon of the 27th was about 15 miles south of Tugidak Island. Mr. Davidson states that at night the vessel found herself in shoal water, tossed by heavy current rips. This would indeed have been the case had she passed through Douglas Channel with the SE storm prevailing, but there is no entry in the log indicating any unusual conditions. At 7 and 8 p.m. the log records depths of 35 and 40 fathoms, and at 9 p.m. is the following entry: “Sounded, but no bottom. We are in danger of running on sand banks and therefore cannot keep close to land, hence have kept off a few points.” At that hour the course was changed to WSW, true; and at midnight, having found bottom at 40 fathoms, the vessel was hauled off to SW, true. Waxel makes no mention of unusually shoal water at this time, and Steller, who was an exceptionally keen observer and painstaking recorder of events, makes only the following comment in his diary covering the 26th and 27th: “These gentlemen (the navigators) thought it necessary always to hug the coast, instead of which it might have been better after sailing a hundred versts to try and go north one or two degrees. Their navigation and a small storm drove us during the night of July 27 on a bank 50 fathoms under water, that stretched out from the shore into the sea, but the land itself, to our great fortune, was so distant as not to be seen.” {Transcriber’s Note: The Errata in Vol. 2 states, “The quotation from Steller’s journal is not literally coincident with the same passage in the present volume (p. 61) because it was taken from Dr. Golder’s and not Dr. Stejneger’s translation (see above, p. x).”} Steller apparently seized every opportunity to criticize Bering and the navigators. On more than one occasion he recites that shoal water and other unusual events were kept from the knowledge of the Captain and suppressed from the log, and it is fair to assume that if the St. Peter had passed through Douglas Channel on the stormy night of the 27th, Steller would not have failed to note the unusual conditions and record them in his diary.

“60 German miles.”

LANDING ON THE SHUMAGIN ISLANDS

Accordingly, on August 27, the ship was headed to the northward; on the 29th, shortly after daylight, a group of islands came into view, and on the afternoon of the 30th the St. Peter anchored between Near Island and Nagai Island of the Shumagin group. The following morning the task of filling the empty water casks was begun, and Khitrov was sent ashore to examine the land in the vicinity of a fire which had been seen the night before.[7] Steller went ashore with the water party to pursue his studies, the results of which he has minutely recorded in his diary.

On September 1 the work of filling the water casks was completed, and the sick men were brought on board in the longboat; but the wind had freshened and kicked up a sea, and Khitrov, who had landed in the small boat and extended his explorations some distance along the shores of Nagai Island, was unable to return to the ship. Towards noon of the 2nd the weather moderated {p. 337} somewhat, and the longboat was sent ashore for Khitrov and his party, but, owing to the fog and squally weather, the party did not return until the forenoon of the 3rd. Khitrov reported finding the place where the fire had been and many signs of human beings but had seen no people.

Just before noon of the 3rd the St. Peter got under way, but the wind fell to light airs from the SW, and, being unable to work out to sea, Bering anchored off the north end of Bird Island on the evening of the 4th. The following morning they again attempted to get to sea; but the wind was baffling and the current against them, and in the afternoon of the 5th Bering again anchored close to Bird Island. Scarcely had the anchor been dropped when human voices were heard from the shore; soon two baidarkas, or skin boats, with one man in each, approached the St. Peter, and Bering and his ship’s company had their first glimpse of the people who inhabited the land they had discovered. The longboat was lowered, and a party went ashore to distribute presents and interview the natives. The account of this incident, as given in the log and in Steller’s diary, will be found very interesting.

On the afternoon of the 6th another attempt was made to get to sea; but it was unsuccessful, and the St. Peter was obliged to return to the anchorage off Bird Island. The following morning the St. Peter sailed around the northern end of the island, passed out to sea through Otter Strait between Bird and Chernabura Islands, and by noon was clear of the land, standing to the southward. This course was held until the 8th, when Bering again turned to the westward along the 53rd parallel. The wind still held from the westward and the progress towards Avacha was necessarily slow.


There were now ten of the ship’s company down with the scurvy, and these men were sent ashore for rest and fresh air; but one of the sick seamen, Nikita Shumagin, died just after he was landed. He was buried on shore, and in his memory Bering named the island Shumagin. But the name has come down to us as applied to this entire group, and the particular island which Bering named Shumagin is now known as Nagai Island.

LANDFALL OF ADAK AND ATKA ISLANDS

On September 22 an observation of the sun gave their latitude as 50° 27′, and the vessel was headed more to the northward to work towards the 53rd parallel. On the 24th they got another sight of the sun at noon and found themselves in latitude 51° 30′. {p. 338} A few hours later, 3 p.m. of September 25, land was sighted; one point of land bore W by S, another point bore ENE, and a high snow-covered mountain, which they concluded was on the mainland, bore NW by W½W. They sounded and got no bottom, but nevertheless the ship was put about and pointed off shore. According to our adjustments for errors in reckoning and currents, the St. Peter was in longitude 175° 23′ W, and the snow-covered mountain was the 5,000-foot peak on Great Sitkin Island. The land seen to the westward was the south shore of Adak Island or one of the small islands close by, and to the eastward they saw the shores of Atka Island. No name was given in the log to the land sighted on the 25th.

BESET BY STORMS AND SCURVY

A series of westerly gales now set in which continued with varying violence, driving the ship to the eastward, until October 11. On September 30 a particularly violent gale broke upon the little craft and rendered her all but helpless for two days. Steller records that “We had never experienced the like of it before, and it is hard to even imagine it. We expected to be smashed to pieces any minute; we could neither stand, sit, nor lie down. No one stood his watch, and the storm drove the ship where it willed. Half of our crew were sick and feeble, and the other half were on their feet only because they had to be, but on account of the storm and the violent motion of boat were out of their heads.”

On October 11 the weather moderated and a noon observation of the sun was obtained. The St. Peter was in latitude 48° 15′, longitude 168° 25′ W, having been driven some 350 miles south-east from the landfall of September 25. On October 12 they made fair progress to the westward, but another storm forced them to the northward until the 15th, when the wind again permitted working to the westward. The scurvy was now in full swing; 32 of the ship’s company were ill, several had died, and deaths were occurring almost daily. Bering himself was affected and, although he had found some temporary relief in the antiscorbutic plants gathered by Steller on the Shumagin Islands, he gradually {p. 339} grew worse. On October 18 he was unable to leave his bed and from that date was carried on the sick list.

LANDFALLS OF KISKA AND BULDIR ISLANDS

On October 23 the course was changed more to the northward in order to regain the 53rd parallel; and at 8 a.m. on the 25th a high, rocky, and treeless island was sighted in the northwest which Waxel in his report states they named St. Markiana. This was Kiska Island, the approximate position of the St. Peter being latitude 51° 11′, longitude 178° 23′ E.

Passing to the northward and westward beyond Kiska Island the St. Peter encountered the heavy tide rips frequently met with in that vicinity, and at daylight on October 28 was close to Buldir Island. Steller records in his diary that “it was quite evident we were in a strait because the waves, even in stormy weather, were not so high.” Early in the morning of the 28th signs of land were observed; and, the weather being foggy, the vessel was put under short sail. Shortly after daylight the fog cleared and disclosed a small island directly in the path of the vessel not more than 3 miles distant. The log records that early in the morning one of the ship’s company, Stephen Buldirev, died, and his body was lowered into the sea after land was sighted. Waxel states in his report that they named the island St. Stephen; the modern name is Buldir.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND

The wind was now fair, and the St. Peter steered between W and WNW, true, until 10 a.m. the following morning, October 29, when another island was sighted which they named St. Abraham. This was the eastern of the Semichi Islands. The St. Peter passed to the northward of these islands and the island of Attu, and on the morning of November 4 the eastern island of the Commander group was sighted. At first it was believed the land was Kamchatka, but after rounding the southern point they realized their error.[TN2] By this time conditions on board were pitiful. Twelve of the crew had already died, and of the remaining 65 Waxel reports {p. 340} that there were only eight who, with great pain, could help themselves, and only three of these were able to be on deck. Bering called into consultation such of the officers and men as were able to drag themselves into the cabin; and, being convinced they would not be able to handle the ship in the event of a storm, it was decided immediately to seek an anchorage where they might winter on shore and rid themselves of the dreadful disease that had gripped the ship’s company.

The St. Peter was therefore worked over to Bering Island, and on November 6 a small anchor was dropped in 12 fathoms of water. The cable parted, and another small anchor was let go; but this cable parted also, and by the time the heavy anchor could be got overboard to hold the ship the fresh easterly breeze had carried her into 4½ fathoms, close to the shore. The longboat was lowered, and the task of getting the sick men ashore was begun; but with the very few men who were able to move about this was not completed until the 15th, and meanwhile the scurvy had claimed seven more victims.

A narrow section of sandy beach was discovered near the camp, and it was decided to haul the St. Peter ashore at this place, where they might secure her against the winter storms. It was found, however, that there was no sufficient strength left in the crew even to raise the anchor, and the ship remained where they left her until November 28, when a heavy gale drove her ashore and wrecked her on the very beach where they had planned to lay her up.

Bering was very ill when he was carried ashore on November 8 and realized that he could not last many days; but he retained his mind and power of speech and continued to direct affairs to the end. At 2 o’clock in the morning of December 8, 1741, he passed away, and his comrades reverently interred his remains on the island that bears his name and marked the spot with a cross.

With the fresh water and fresh meat which they were able to procure on shore the health of the men rapidly improved, and by Christmas most of them were on their feet again. As they {p. 341} regained their strength Waxel, who had succeeded to the command, sent out exploring parties, which reported that they were on an island and that the Kamchatka coast was not far distant.


Transcriber’s Note: The Errata in Vol. 2 states, “interpretation of track of St. Peter on approaching Bering Island from the east should be modified according to Fig. 15 and footnote 300a of the present volume.”

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

In the spring they began to break up the St. Peter to build a small craft to carry them to the mainland. On August 10 the boat was launched, and preparations were made to leave the island. This boat was 36 feet long, with a beam of 12 feet and a depth of 5¼ feet, sloop-rigged with a bowsprit. They named her the St. Peter and in this small craft Waxel loaded his 45 men together with food, water, and baggage, and set sail from Bering Island on August 13. On the 15th the hooker began to leak badly; but the carpenter managed to patch up the hole, and they kept on. On August 27 they sailed into the harbor of Petropavlovsk. Of the 77 officers and men who left on the St. Peter fourteen months before only 45 returned, and these had suffered shipwreck and untold hardships; but their misfortunes did not end with their safe return, for they soon learned that they had been given up as lost and that the personal property they had left behind had been appropriated by the inhabitants of Avacha! Truly the lot of those early explorers was not altogether a happy one.

The Separate Voyage of the “St. Paul”

When the weather moderated on the morning of June 21, Chirikov reckoned that the St. Peter was NNE from him and began his search in that direction; but the wind was ahead, and little progress could be made. On the 23rd he gave up the search and resumed the E by N course agreed upon. On July 1, no land having been sighted, Chirikov steered more to the northward. Both vessels had been favored with fair winds since they parted company; but, as Bering had stood south to the 45th parallel before resuming the easterly course, the St. Paul was considerably in advance of the St. Peter, and Chirikov’s noon position on July 1 was within 30 miles of Bering’s noon position on July 8.

{p. 342}

DISCOVERY OF LAND

On July 14 large numbers of shore ducks and gulls indicated that land was not far distant, and at daybreak on the 15th the land to the northward of Dixon’s Entrance was sighted. At 3 a.m. Capes Addington and Bartolome were in plain sight; but, the wind being very light, it was not until noon that the St. Paul could be worked in under the shores of Cape Addington. In the afternoon of the 16th a boat was sent to examine the bay between the two capes; but, finding the anchorage unprotected from the west and south winds, Chirikov stood offshore when the breeze freshened at sundown. At daylight the course was changed to the northward, and the St. Paul passed outside the Hazy Islands, which were sighted at nine o’clock in the forenoon. An hour later the highland of Cape Ommaney loomed up through the mist, and at noon, July 16, the St. Paul was under the hills of Puffin Point. Chirikov now paralleled the coast until 9 p.m. of the 17th, keeping from three to four miles from the shore, and then hauled offshore until 11 p.m. when he hove to until daylight. From noon until 8 p.m. of the 17th the vessel logged a distance of 36 knots; adding to this a favorable current of about one knot per hour would place the St. Paul at 8 p.m. abreast that part of the coast where the land falls away to form the southern shores of Sitka Sound, and the log records that at 8 p.m. the “coast seemed to end in N¾E, distant 8 knots, and in its place appeared low land with sea cliffs, with the high mountains receding in the background.” An hour later the St. Paul’s course was changed to WNW¼W, true, for two hours. At 11 p.m. she was hove to, and at daylight the course parallel to the coast was resumed. All this time the current was setting to the northward along the coast so that the St. Paul passed Sitka Sound in the night and was well north of Cape Edgecumbe at daylight. Indeed the log records at 9 a.m. on the 17th a cape to the SE, which could be no other than Cape Edgecumbe. At the same time another point of land (Cape Cross) loomed up about NNW; Chirikov’s observation on the 17th gave the noon latitude as 57° 39′; the bearings at noon as given in the log and the courses and distances {p. 343} run since the previous noon, augmented by allowance for current, all coincide in fixing the position of the St. Paul at noon, July 17, as abreast Cape Edward, and about ten miles offshore. At 3:30 o’clock in the afternoon of July 18 the longboat was lowered and Fleet Master Dementiev with ten armed men was sent to examine the shore. Comprehensive instructions were given him, which are fully set forth in Chirikov’s report, and Dementiev was to signal with a rocket as soon as he landed.

LOSS OF TWO LANDING PARTIES

In his report Chirikov states “we had no signal of any kind from him. We saw them approach the shore, and that is all.” For five days the St. Paul kept as near the bay as possible, waiting for the boat to return. At first the weather was such that the longboat could have come off without trouble, but later they had strong winds that at times carried the ship a distance of 30 miles. On July 23 the St. Paul returned and upon approaching the bay saw a fire which they thought had been made by Dementiev, because all the time they had followed the coast they had seen no fire, buildings, boats, nor any other signs of human beings and supposed the coast was uninhabited. Upon noting the fire a gun was fired at intervals as a signal, and the St. Paul was sailed close to the shore. As the gun was fired the fire on shore appeared to grow brighter, but there was no sign of the boat. On July 24 Chirikov concluded the longboat had been damaged and was unable to come off, and it was decided to send the small boat ashore with tools for repairing the longboat. Accordingly, boatswain Savelev was sent in the small boat with a carpenter, a calker, and a seaman.

Chirikov reports that when Savelev departed “the weather was very still; we followed him quite close to the shore and saw him approach it. According to our time it was exactly six o’clock in the afternoon. The signals which had been agreed upon he failed to make and at the expected time did not return.” We can well imagine the anxiety with which Chirikov and his ship’s {p. 344} company watched and waited that night and the following day, for their last boat had gone and this left them no means of reaching the shore; but at one o’clock in the afternoon (July 25) two boats were seen coming out of the bay which the St. Paul’s boats had entered. One of the boats was larger than the other, and at first it was thought the ship’s boats were returning; but they soon saw their error, for the small boat approached rapidly and the four men in it used paddles instead of oars. This boat stopped at some distance from the ship; the four occupants stood up and shouted twice “Agai, Agai,” waved their hands, and turned back to the larger boat, which had stopped at a still further distance from the St. Paul. White kerchiefs were waved, and every effort was made to induce the boats to come closer, but to no avail; and the two boats rapidly returned to the bay from which they had come. The actions of the natives and their fear to come close to the ship convinced Chirikov that his men had either been killed or held captive, and the ship’s company began to realize the full extent of the disaster that had overtaken them. They had lost 15 of their shipmates and their only two boats; they could not follow the native boats in the St. Paul and were helpless to avenge or release their comrades, since they had no means of reaching the shore. The remainder of the afternoon the St. Paul kept close to the mouth of the bay but at sundown headed offshore for the night and in the morning coasted along the shore to the northward. At noon of the 26th, being in latitude 58° 21′, Chirikov called a council of the officers, and it was decided that as the remaining water supply was barely sufficient for the return voyage and they had no boats with which to obtain a fresh supply or even to examine the shore, it was the part of wisdom to sail at once for Kamchatka.

IDENTIFICATION OF PLACE WHERE CHIRIKOV’S MEN WERE LOST

At this point it is of interest to discuss the location of the bay where the St. Paul lost her two boats and 15 of her crew, as there appears to have been some doubt on this point. The position of {p. 345} the St. Paul at noon on July 17, checked by her observed latitude, the bearings of the land given in the log, and the traverse table from the previous noon, was latitude 57° 39′, longitude 136° 34′ W, about 10 miles SW by W from Cape Edward. Three hours and a half later (3:30 p.m., July 18) the longboat was sent ashore, and in that time the St. Paul had made good 8 miles N, true, which placed her about 5 miles WSW, true, from the entrance to Lisianski Strait. On the 24th when the small boat was sent ashore the weather was clear, and Chirikov took a noon observation close to the mouth of the bay and found the latitude to be 57° 50′. This is the correct latitude of Lisianski Strait. On other occasions where it has been possible to check Chirikov’s observed latitude with the definitely known position of the ship, his noon sights have proved to be very good, and there is no reason to doubt the general accuracy of his observation on this occasion. Mr. Davidson states[8] that Chirikov designated the place as “a great bay in latitude 57° 15′.” Chirikov in his report simply refers to a bay with nothing to indicate particularly whether it was large or small. The log book which was kept by Chirikov records the latitude as 57° 50′ and gives the impression that the bay was considered small. The entry in the log for July 18 recites that “At 3:30 stood for the land as near as we dared and sent ashore in the boat the Fleet Master Dementiev and ten armed men. . . . He carried a written order which, among other things, told him to make for the opening, which seemed to us a bay, and take its hearings.”

Another entry on the same day recites that “According to the reckoning at 4.30 in the afternoon, taking also into consideration the position of the bay into which Dementiev was sent, we set down the position of the said bay as 57° 23′ N, longitude from Vaua 59° 36′. . . . By correction the latitude is 57° 50′, longitude 58° 54′. The true latitude we got by observation on the 24th.”

Chirikov’s observed latitude, the traverse table, the bearings taken during the several days the St. Paul remained in the vicinity, and the references in the log all point with certainty to {p. 346} Lisianski Strait as the place where the boats of the St. Paul met with disaster.


P. 19 of work cited in footnote 5, p. 334.

BEGINNING OF HOMEWARD VOYAGE

In accordance with the decision of the council the homeward voyage was begun. At noon of the 26th Mt. Fairweather was sighted at a distance of 40 miles, and on the morning of July 27 they made out Ocean Cape where the land falls away to form Yakutat Bay. On August 1 the Kenai Peninsula came into view, and Chirikov hauled to the southward. At noon Cape Elizabeth was 50 miles distant. At noon of August 2, although the St. Paul was keeping well offshore, the northern end of Afognak Island was sighted with Mt. Douglas in the distance, and on the 3rd they caught a glimpse of the high land in the vicinity of Cape Chiniak. Chirikov now worked to the southward and westward until the parallel of 53° was reached on the 12th, when he again hauled to the westward; but a spell of contrary winds and bad weather set in, and between that date and the 30th the St. Paul advanced but 100 miles to the westward. On August 31 the wind was fair, and good progress was made until September 4, when Umnak Island and the Islands of Four Mountains were sighted. At noon the St. Paul was about 25 miles to the southward of the islands, the weather was clear, and as the land seemed to extend to the southward and westward Chirikov stood in that direction for two days before continuing west. On September 8 there were many indications that the ship was again approaching land, and on the 9th they found themselves on soundings. At sundown it was calm with a dense fog; a cast of the lead showing only 30 fathoms of water, Chirikov wisely brought his ship to anchor. During the night they could hear the surf breaking on the beach, and the lifting of the fog the following morning revealed a rocky shore scarcely a quarter of a mile away. The St. Paul had anchored in one of the small bights on the south shore of Adak Island, probably the easternmost one. During the night the tide was running to the westward, and but for Chirikov’s prudence the night before the St. Paul would have drifted upon the rocks in the fog.

{p. 347}

LANDFALLS IN THE ALEUTIAN ISLANDS

Soon after the fog cleared two men were seen on the beach, and in a short time seven baidarkas, each carrying one man, approached the ship. Gifts were distributed by Chirikov, but the natives could not be persuaded to come on board. In the afternoon (September 10) 14 of these skin boats came out to the ship; but none of the natives would come on board, and Chirikov had no boats in which to send a party ashore. The log for September 9 has an interesting account of this meeting. Late in the afternoon of September 10 the wind freshened, heavy squalls came down the hills, the St. Paul began to drag towards the rocks which lined the shore, and Chirikov was obliged to cut the cable and put hastily to sea. For the next four days, until September 14, Chirikov steered to the southward of west to keep clear of the land, but on the latter date, being in latitude 50° 31′ with no signs of land, the course was changed to the northward of west so as to work up to the 53rd parallel. This course took the St. Paul within 20 miles of Kiska Island on the 16th, but the weather was overcast and no land was seen.

In the latter part of August, Chirikov found it necessary to put the crew on short allowance of both food and water, and he reports that the crew had cooked kasha (a buckwheat mush) but once a week and on the other six days lived on cold food, with an allowance of water just sufficient to quench the thirst. These privations soon sapped the vitality of the men, and on September 16 the log records the death of one man from scurvy and the fact that many of the men were very ill, Chirikov among the number.

At sundown of September 21 a cast of the lead indicated 60 fathoms, and Chirikov, with his customary prudence, gave orders to shorten sail and heave to for the night. In the morning land was sighted, and at noon the St. Paul was close under the eastern shores of Agattu Island. The atmosphere was clear, and they made out the Semichi Islands and the peaks of Attu in the distance. By this time all but one of the officers and most of the crew were down with scurvy, and only a few were able to drag themselves on deck to work the ship. Chirikov himself was so {p. 348} ill that after September 21 he never left the cabin until he was carried ashore when they made port. The only officer not confined to his bed was Ivan Elagin, who although affected by the scurvy would not give up and kept the deck almost continuously. Chirikov, lying in his bed, worked out the sights and the reckoning and directed Elagin what courses to steer; when according to their reckoning they had run up their longitude and no land was sighted Chirikov gave directions to keep to the westward close to the 53rd parallel. On October 7 Lieutenant Chikhachev died, and the next day both Lieutenant Plautin and Navigator Vrange passed away.

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

On October 8 they were gladdened by the sight of land, at noon they recognized the familiar outlines of Cape Shipunski, and two days later the St. Paul anchored in Avacha Bay. Professor de la Croyère died just as the anchor was dropped. Chirikov was very low, but he was immediately taken ashore, where he rallied sufficiently to write his report and resume direction of affairs. He never fully regained his health. Thus ended the eventful voyage of the St. Paul. Of her 76 officers and men who sailed from Avacha Harbor June 4 but 54 returned, and all of these were suffering from the scurvy.

The voyages of Bering and Chirikov are events of great importance. These two navigators crossed the Pacific and discovered the northwestern coast of the American continent at a tremendous cost and in the face of untold difficulties; and a seaman reads the details of their struggle with increasing respect and admiration for the men who achieved so great an object with tools so inadequate for the purpose.

Pl. 1—Chart of the Voyage of Bering and Chirikov in the “St. Peter” and the “St. Paul” from Kamchatka to the Alaskan Coast and Return, 1741

Transcriber’s note: This shows the full chart (98 cm long). Following are close-ups of individual sections of the chart.


Part 1


Part 2


Part 3


Part 4


Part 5


Part 6


{p. 349}

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

Manuscript Sources

Golder’s “Guide to Materials for American History in Russian Archives” (Carnegie Instn. Publ. No. 239, Washington, D. C., 1917) lists all the unpublished documents on this subject that are to be found in Petrograd and Moscow.

In the Archives of the Ministry of Marine at Petrograd there are classified under the heading “Captain Commander Bering” 111 bundles of documents, some of which contain between 2,000 and 3,000 pages. In addition there are many other papers in the archives relating to this subject catalogued under different heads, such as “Admiralty College,” “Count Apraksin,” and various other names. These are by no means all the documents. The Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, the Academy of Sciences, the Archives of the State, the Ministry of War, and most of the other archives, both at Petrograd and Moscow, have manuscript material in this field.

This vast amount of material is, however, out of proportion to its importance. Many of the 111 bundles associated with the name of Bering have nothing whatever to do with him, his work, or his period, but deal nearly altogether with purely Siberian affairs of a much later time. In the remaining bundles which do concern the Bering expeditions, much of the material contained is worthless because of duplication. Each undertaking went through the hands of several administrative bodies and bureaus, all of which made copies and comments; by the time a decision was reached a large number of papers had accumulated that were merely repetitions of the same subject. To give concrete illustrations: The trouble between Spanberg and one of his lieutenants fills many bundles of documents—the same charge (a very petty one) being repeated again and again. The petition of {p. 350} Bering’s family, after his death, that the pay due him should be handed over to them makes two or more bundles of affidavits, copies of certificates, comments of various bureaus, etc. The good and the worthless material is all tied up together.

In the archives of the Ministry of Marine at Paris there is a collection of valuable papers as yet unpublished. These are letters, copies of journals, charts, reports of conversation, newspaper clippings, and other such material collected by the members of the Delisle family—all of which throw interesting side lights on the period and the men. The papers which are of special importance for this study are those gathered by Joseph Nicolas Delisle during his twenty-one years’ (1726-1747) residence at the Russian capital as an officer of the Academy. Those of his papers which have recently come to light in the Bibliothèque Nationale have been discussed by Isnard.

The principal materials for the present work are the original log books and other naval papers of the navigators. They have all been preserved except the journal of the St. Peter, which was lost at the time of the wreck of the ship. The documents dealing with Bering’s second expedition have never been published, not even in Russia, and have been used only once before—by Sokolov for his study. But even Sokolov was ignorant of the existence of some of the material. On his return from Petrograd in 1917 the author prided himself on having examined all the documents, but it seems that he was mistaken. His attention has recently been called to a reference by Eugen Büchner (“Die Abbildungen der Nordischen Seekuh,” St. Petersburg, 1891, p. 1) to “eine handsschriftliche Beschreibung der zweiten Bering’schen Expedition . . . die den Schiffs-Capitain Swen Waxell . . . zum Verfasser hat,” which is deposited in the Emperor’s private library in Tsarskoe Selo. Whether this is merely a copy of the document here published or something different it is difficult to say. It cannot be greatly different since the same man wrote both; however, that is an open question for the time being.

{p. 351}

When the officers returned to Kamchatka they had several copies made of their papers and forwarded them to the Admiralty College. These copies occasionally differ from one another, as might be expected, because of the copyists; but it is possible to check up the errors. Many of the expressions then used are now archaic and can be found only in old Russian and Dutch dictionaries.

Published Sources

For the first two decades of the eighteenth century the printed material is found in the “Pamyatniki Sibirskoi Istorii.” The “Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii” contains the instructions to the officers in Siberia and the navigators. Bering’s report to the Empress on his first voyage is printed without comment in Zapiski Voenno-Topograficheskago Depo. Berkh in his “Pervoe Morskoe Puteshestvie Rossiyan” edited the log book of the first voyage which was kept by the midshipman, Peter Chaplin. Vakhtin in “Russkiye Truzheniki Morya” printed additional documents on this voyage. Gvozdev’s report and other material bearing on the sighting of the American coast in 1732 may be found in Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta. Steller’s “Reise von Kamtschatka nach Amerika” is the only original document of importance dealing with the second sea voyage which has up to this time appeared in print.

Müller, Gmelin, and Krasheninnikov were members of Bering’s second expedition though they did not go to sea with him. Their writings may be classed partly as original and partly as contemporary documents, depending altogether on the topics which they discuss. About the middle of the nineteenth century a friendly controversy arose between Karl Ernst von Baer, a German scholar residing at St. Petersburg, and Lieutenant Sokolov of the Russian Navy. In 1848 and 1849 Baer wrote a series of newspaper articles on Peter the Great’s contribution to the advancement of geographical knowledge. These papers were translated into Russian and published in the Proceedings (Zapiski) of the Geographical Society in 1849 and 1850. As soon as they appeared {p. 352} Sokolov replied to them, heading his papers “Bering and Chirikov.” His contention was that Chirikov did not receive all the credit he merited for the part he took in the Bering expeditions. Baer took notice of the attack and defended his position in the St. Petersburger Zeitung (Nos. 114, 115, 116). The controversy had this good in it: it stimulated a study of the original documents, and the results of these researches appeared in the Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta and brought out many points unknown before. In 1872 Baer, then eighty years of age, completed his monograph and summarized the points of the controversy in an admirable way. Towards the end of the nineteenth century Lauridsen, a Dane, took up the cudgels in behalf of Bering.

Secondary Materials

Mezhov’s “Bibliographia Sibirica” is the best published work on the subject but is neither complete nor wholly reliable. A hitherto unpublished card bibliography of Alaska which has been prepared by Judge James Wickersham of Juneau is much better than Mezhov’s for Alaska.

The secondary material is not altogether satisfactory. It is almost two hundred years since Bering received his commission to undertake his first voyage, and during that long period only six men have been sufficiently interested in the subject to give it careful consideration, either in whole or in part. These men are Müller, Coxe, Sokolov, Baer, Bancroft, and Lauridsen. One of these is a Russian, and the two Germans were in the service of Russia at the time of their writing. The most important book in this field is, after all, the third volume of Müller’s “Sammlung Russischer Geschichte,” published in 1758. Soon after its appearance this work was translated into Russian, English, and French. Although since that time much paper and ink have been used up in telling this story, yet very little that is new has been added to our knowledge of the subject. Both Russian and non-Russian scholars have preferred to follow Müller’s version than to consult the originals. Müller’s work, although very valuable, should not be used as a source, but along with the sources. Müller was too {p. 353} much a part of the period to see it in its true proportions. His judgment of the men of his time is not critical; he usually rates their deeds at a higher value than they deserve. His lenient attitude may be partly explained by the fact that many of the men of whom he was writing, or their friends, were yet alive, and it was wise not to say anything which might offend.

“Peter’s des Grossen Verdienste um die Erweiterung der geographischen Kenntnisse,” the monograph by Karl Ernst von Baer referred to above, gives an excellent summary of the Bering voyages. It is scholarly, readable, and fair in its judgments. Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering” has brought to light many interesting facts. Bancroft’s “History of Alaska” is of much value and may be used with profit in connection with the sources. Dall’s “Critical Review of Bering’s First Expedition” is the first really critical discussion in English of the first expedition. There are many helpful papers in the Morskoi Sbornik. Fischer’s “Sibirische Geschichte,” Slovtsov’s “Istoricheskoe Obozryenie Sibiri,” and Pallas’ “Neue Nordische Beiträge” have much important material. The journals of Cook, Lapérouse, Krusenstern, and other navigators in the North Pacific Ocean help in understanding the difficulties and problems which confronted the Russian sailors of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.

In conclusion it should be said that nearly all of the manuscript material used in this work was photostated and is now deposited in the Library of Congress at Washington, D. C., and the library of the University of Washington at Seattle. As far as printed material is concerned, the Yudin Collection of the Library of Congress is richer for the study of this subject than any library in Western Europe and, according to the statements of certain Russian scholars, even than the Imperial Library at Petrograd.

Bibliography

In the following list of references the author’s original entries have been editorially amplified, classified, and commented upon. This amplification includes the addition of a number of {p. 354} entries, especially the papers published during the first half of the nineteenth century by Russian students of the subject. The author has not had occasion to see proofs of the bibliography. The titles are grouped by topics in the natural order of the development of the theme. Within each group the titles are arranged logically, beginning with the more general ones, or chronologically. Comment is often added to characterize the title’s relation to the Bering expeditions. Russian titles are transliterated and translated.

History of Siberia

Mezhov, V. I. [on title page in quasi-French transliteration, Méjow]. Bibliographia sibirica: Bibliographie des livres et articles de journaux russes et étrangers concernant la Sibérie. 4 vols. in three. St. Petersburg, 1891-92. [Vol. 2 deals with geography and voyages.]

Akty istoricheskie (Historical documents). Collected and published by the Archeographical Commission. Vols. 1-5, for 1334-1700. St. Petersburg, 1841-43. Separate index, 1843.

Dopolneniya k aktam istoricheskim (Supplementary historical documents). Collected and published by the Archeographical Commission. Vols. 1-12, for 1150-1700. St. Petersburg, 1846-72. Separate index to Vols. 1-10, 1875.

Pamyatniki Sibirskoi istorii xviii vyeka (Memoirs for Siberian history of the eighteenth century). Edited for the Archeographical Commission by A. I. Timofeev. 2 vols. (Vol. 1, 1700-1713; Vol. 2, 1713-1724). St. Petersburg, 1882-85.

Fischer, J. E. Sibirische Geschichte von der Entdekkung Sibiriens bis auf die Eroberung dieses Landes durch die russischen Waffen. 2 vols. Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1768. [Russian edition was published in 1774. Fischer was one of the scientists who were members of Bering’s second expedition.]

Andryevich, V. K. Istoriya Sibiri (History of Siberia). 2 vols. St. Petersburg, 1889.

Slovtsov, P. A. Istoricheskoe obozryenie Sibiri (Historical survey of Siberia). 2 vols. in one. St. Petersburg, 1886.

Kuznetsov, E. V. Sibirskii lyetopisets. Lyetopis kontsa xvii i nachala xviii stolyetii, vedennaya v Tobolskye (Annals of Siberia. Annals of the seventeenth and beginning of the eighteenth century, recorded in Tobolsk). Tobolsk, 1892.

[Titov, A. A.] Sibir v xvii vyekye. Sbornik starinnykh Russkikh statei o Sibiri i prilezhashchikh k ner zemlyakh. S prilozheniem snimka so {p. 355} starinnoi karty Sibiri. (Siberia in the seventeenth century. A collection of old Russian publications on Siberia and its borderlands, accompanied by a reproduction of an old map of Siberia.) Edited by G. Yudin. Moscow, 1890.

Titov, A. A. Tyumen v xvii stolyetii (Tyumen in the seventeenth century). Published by A. I. Chukmalsina, Moscow, 1903.

Sukachev, V. P., edit. Pervoe stolyetie Irkutska (First century of Irkutsk). St. Petersburg, 1902.

Remezov, S. Chertezhnaya kniga Sibiri (Map book of Siberia). Archeographical Commission, St. Petersburg, 1882. [A modern reproduction of an atlas of Siberia and the accompanying notes made at the request of the tsar by Remezov towards the end of the seventeenth century. The important general map of Siberia in this atlas is reproduced in A. E. Nordenskiöld’s Periplus, Stockholm, 1897, Pl. 37.]

Cahen, Gaston. Les cartes de la Sibérie au xviiie siècle: Essai de bibliographie critique. Paris, 1911.

Popov, M. Pervaya morskaya expeditsiya k ustyu ryeki Obi (First sea expedition to the mouth of the Ob). St. Petersburg, 1907.

Geographical Knowledge of the North Pacific Prior to Bering’s Expeditions

Nachod, Oskar. Ein unentdecktes Goldland: Ein Beitrag zur Geschichte der Entdeckungen im nördlichen Grossen Ocean. Separate from Mitt. der Deutschen Gesell. für Natur und Völkerkunde Ostasiens. [Tokyo, 1900.] [Deals with the voyages of the Spaniard Vizcaíno from Mexico in 1611 and 1612 in search of the rumored gold islands east of Japan.]

Heeres, J. E., edit. Abel Janszoon Tasman’s journal of his discovery of Van Diemens Land and New Zealand in 1642, with documents relating to his exploration of Australia in 1644. Amsterdam, 1898. [Contains a good brief account of Tasman and Quast’s voyage in 1639 in search of the rumored gold islands, on which they reached 42° N 600 Dutch miles east of Japan and discovered the Bonin Islands.]

Leupe, P. A., edit. Reize van Maarten Gerritsz[oon] Vries in 1643 naar het noorden en oosten van Japan, volgens het journaal gehouden door C. J. Coen, op het schip Castricum. Published under the auspices of the Koninklijk Instituut voor Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch Indië. Amsterdam, 1858. [First publication of the journal of Vries’s voyage of 1643.]

Teleki, Paul. Atlas zur Geschichte der Kartographie der Japanischen Inseln, nebst dem holländischen Journal der Reise Mathys Quasts und A. J. Tasmans zur Entdeckung der Goldinseln im Osten von Japan {p. 356} i. d. J. 1639 und dessen deutscher Übersetzung. Budapest, 1909. [Contains the complete journal of Quast on Tasman and Quast’s voyage of 1639 in search of the rumored gold islands east of Japan: also an account of Vries’s voyage of 1643.]

Witsen, Nicolaas. Noord en oost Tartaryen, behelzende eene beschryving van verscheidene Tartersche en nabuurige gewesten, in de noorder en oostelykste deelen van Aziën en Europa. 2 vols. 2nd edit., Amsterdam, 1785. [First edition, 1692.]

Histoire [i.e. Mémoires] de l’Académie des Sciences [de Paris]. Vols. for 1714, 1720, 1725, 1729. [These volumes contain papers by Guillaume and Joseph Delisle. The volume for 1720 has one by Guillaume Delisle, for instance (Détermination géographique de la situation et de l’étendue des différentes parties de la terre), in which he excellently sums up the geographical knowledge of the North Pacific at the time. In this he advances the opinion that Terra de Yezo is a part of the continent of Asia and Japan a peninsula of Yezo. From 1699 to 1789 the title of the Mémoires was Histoire.]

Vaugondy, Robert de. Observations critiques sur les nouvelles découvertes de l’Amiral Fuentes. Paris, 1753. [Bartolomé de Fuentes was a Spanish admiral who made a voyage in the North Pacific in 1640 to discover a northwest passage. See also the paper by J. N. Delisle listed on p. 360-361.]

Kaempfer, Engelbert. The history of Japan, giving an account of the antient and present state and government of that empire. Written in High Dutch by E. Kaempfer . . . and translated from his original manuscript, never before printed, by J. G. Scheuchzer . . . 2 vols. London, 1728. [One of the accompanying maps shows Kamchatka and Terra de Yezo as the same land.]

Strahlenberg, P. J. von. An historico-geographical description of the north and eastern parts of Europe and Asia, but more particularly of Russia, Siberia, and Great Tartary . . . Written originally in High German by Mr. Philip John von Strahlenberg . . . London, 1738. Original edition, Stockholm, 1730. [Strahlenberg was a Swedish officer who was made prisoner by the Russians at the Battle of Pultava. During his captivity in Siberia, where he enjoyed much freedom of movement, he made the observations on which this book is based. The important map of northern Eurasia accompanying the original edition is reproduced in facsimile in A. E. Nordenskiöld’s Periplus, Stockholm, 1897, Pl. 38.]

Bernard, J. F., edit. Recueil de voyages au nord, contenant divers mémoires très utiles au commerce et à la navigation. 10 vols. Amsterdam, 1725-38. [Vol. 4, published 1732, contains account of report by Jesuits in 1566 of body of land north of Nippon called Yezo.]

Charlevoix, [P. F. X.] de. Histoire et description générale du Japon. {p. 357} 2 vols. Paris, 1736. [One of the accompanying maps, by Bellin, “Ingénieur au Dépôt des Cartes de la Marine” (facsimile reproduction as Pl. 15 (1) in Teleki’s atlas, cited above on p. 355), shows Kamchatka as called Terra de Yezo by the Japanese.]

Ruge, Sophus. Fretum Anian. Dresden, 1873.

Minor Expeditions: Shestakov and Gvozdev

Sgibnev, A. S. Materialy dlya istorii Kamchatki, etc. (Materials for the history of Kamchatka: Expedition of Shestakov). Morskoi Sbornik, Vol. 100, Section 2, St. Petersburg, 1869.

Gvozdev, Mikhail Spiridonovich. Report of his voyage of 1732. Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Count Chernishev, 1762-68, No. 367, pp. 46-49. [Manuscript. For published version, see the present work, pp. 22-24.]

P[olonskii], A. [S.]. Pokhod geodezista Mikhaila Gvozdeva, etc. (Journey of the surveyor Mikhail Gvozdev to Bering Strait in 1732). Morskoi Sbornik, Vol. 4, pp. 389-402, St. Petersburg, 1850. [Discusses Gvozdev’s voyage mainly on the basis of a preliminary first report made by him and Skurikhin, another member of the expedition, in 1741.]

Pervyi pokhod Russkikh k Amerikye 1732 goda (First voyage of the Russians to America in 1732). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 9, pp. 78-107, St. Petersburg, 1851. [Publishes (pp. 88-103) Gvozdev’s second report, made to Spanberg in 1743, which is fuller than the first preliminary report of 1741.]

Delisle, Joseph Nicolas. Navigation et découvertes faites par les Russes dans la Mer Orientale entre les deux voiages du Capitaine Beerings vers les années 1731 et 1732: Nouvelles connoissances sur les terres orientales données par Mr. Feodor Ivanitch Soimonof le 1 Mars, 1738. Delisle MSS., No. XXV, 16 and 16K, Archives du Dépôt des Cartes et Plans de la Marine, Paris. [Note, with map, on Gvozdev’s voyage. Published, with translation, in F. A. Golder: Russian Expansion in the Pacific, 1641-1850, Cleveland, O., 1914, Appendix E, pp. 298-301; map on p. 154.]

Bering’s Expeditions: Accounts of Participants or Persons Directly Concerned

(a) Manuscript

(See also entries in F. A. Golder: Guide to Materials for American History in Russian Archives, Carnegie Instn. Publ. No. 239, Washington, D. C., 1917, especially pp. 116-135)

Chaplin, Peter. Journal and log book of Bering’s first expedition. Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, {p. 358} Petrograd: Nautical Journals, 1725-1731, No. 641. [For abridged published version, see book by Berkh, 1832, listed below on p. 363.]

Bering, Vitus. Report on his first expedition. Archives of the General Staff, Petrograd: Section X, No. 566. [For published version, see reference listed below on p. 359 and translation of the report in the present work, pp. 9-20.]

Yushin, Kharlam. Log book of the St. Peter. Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Nautical Journals, 1741, 1742, Nos. 642, 643, 644. [Photostat copies in the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., and the library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

Khitrov, Sofron. Log book of the St. Peter. Archives of the Imperial Academy of Science, Petrograd: MS. No. 120, 32: 16: 19. [Photostat copy in the library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

Khitrov, Sofron. Log book of the St. Peter [another copy]. Archives of State, Petrograd, XXIV, No. 9. [Photostat copy in Library of Congress, Washington, D. C.]

Waxel, Sven. Report on voyage of the St. Peter. Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty College, Bundle No. 2. [Photostat copies in the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., and the library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

Log book of the St. Paul. Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Nautical Journals, 1741-1743, Nos. 645-648.

Journal of the St. Paul. Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty College, Bundle No. 16.

Chirikov, Alexei. Report on the voyage of the St. Paul. Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain Commander Bering, Bundle No. 44. [Photostat copies of all three St. Paul documents are in the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., and the library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

Delisle Manuscripts. Archives du Dépôt des Cartes et Plans de la Marine, Paris. [See under Delisle, J. N., above, p. 357, and below, this page, and, under Isnard, p. 361.]

(b) Published

Maikov, L. N., edit. Razskazy Nartova o Petrye Velikom (Nartov’s narratives about Peter the Great). Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1891. [A. K. Nartov (1683-1756) was almost in constant attendance on the Emperor during his last days, and records his own words concerning his plans for Bering’s first expedition.]

Delisle, Joseph Nicolas. Explication de la carte de la Mer Orientale dressée pour montrer le plus court chemin de l’Asie à l’Amérique. {p. 359} Lue à l’Académie [des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg] l’an 1732. Delisle MSS., No. XXV, 14, Archives du Dépôt des Cartes et Plans de la Marine, Paris. [Memoir explaining the map (Delisle MSS., XXVI, 3B) which was given to Bering on his second expedition; De Gama and Company Lands were indicated on it. Original memoir, with translation, published in F. A. Golder: Russian Expansion in the Pacific, 1641-1850, Cleveland, O., 1914, Appendix F, pp. 302-313.]

Donesenie Flota Kapitana Beringa ob ekspeditsii ego k vostochnym beregam Sibiri (Report of Fleet Captain Bering on his expedition to the eastern coast of Siberia). Zapiski Voenno-Topogyaficheskago Depo, Vol. 10, pp. 69-75 (report) and 77-79 (tables), St. Petersburg, 1847. [For a translation from the original manuscript, see the present work, pp. 9-20.]

Müller, Gerhard Friedrich. Nachrichten von Seereisen und zur See gemachten Entdeckungen, die von Russland aus längs den Küsten des Eismeeres und auf dem östlichen Weltmeere gegen Japan und Amerika geschehen sind, zur Erläuterung einer bei der Academie der Wissenschaften verfertigten Landkarte. In series: Sammlung Russischer Geschichte (9 vols., Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1732-1764), Vol. 3, Parts 1-3, St. Petersburg, 1758. [This is the most important account by a contemporary. Müller was one of the scientists who were members of Bering’s second expedition. He did not go to sea with him, however.]

Müller, Gerhard Friedrich. Voyages from Asia to America for completing the discoveries of the north west coast of America. To which is prefixed a summary of the voyages made by the Russians on the Frozen Sea in search of a north east passage. Serving as an explanation of a map of the Russian discoveries, published by the Academy of Sciences at Petersburgh. Translated from the High Dutch of S. [i.e. G.] Muller . . . By Thomas Jefferys . . . London, 1761. [Translation of the author’s German work.]

Müller, Gerhard Friedrich. Voyages et découvertes faites par les Russes le long des côtes de la Mer Glaciale et sur l’Océan Oriental, tant vers le Japon que vers l’Amérique. Ouvrage traduit de l’allemand de Mr. G. P. [sic] Muller, par C. G. F. Dumas. 2 vols. Amsterdam, 1766. [Translation of the author’s German work. The accompanying map, which shows the results of Bering’s expeditions as well as the tracks of his vessels, is reproduced in facsimile in A. E. Nordenskiöld’s Periplus, Stockholm, 1897, Fig. 42 on p. 98.]

Steller, Georg Wilhelm. Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka, dessen Einwohnern, deren Sitten, Nahmen, Lebensart und verschiedenen Gewohnheiten, hrsg. von J. B. S. . . . Frankfort and Leipzig, 1774.

Steller, Georg Wilhelm. Reise von Kamtschatka nach Amerika {p. 360} mit dem Commandeur-Capitän Bering. Ein Pendant zu dessen Beschreibung von Kamtschatka. St. Petersburg, 1793. Also in P. S. Pallas: Neue Nordische Beiträge, Vol. 5, pp. 129-236; Vol. 6, pp. 1-26, Leipzig, 1793. [Translated in Vol. 2 of the present work.]

Gmelin, Johann Georg. Reise durch Sibirien, von dem Jahr 1733 bis 1743. (In series: Sammlung Neuer und Merkwürdiger Reisen zu Wasser und zu Lande, Parts 4-7). 4 vols. in two. Göttingen, 1751-52. [Gmelin was one of the scientists who were members of Bering’s second expedition. He took part only in the land expedition, and did not go to sea with him.]

Gmelin, Johann Georg. Voyage au Kamtschatka par la Sibérie. In A. F. Prévost: Histoire générale des voyages, Vol. 24, pp. 94-499, The Hague, 1779. [Translation of the author’s German work.]

[Krasheninnikov, Stepan Petrovich.] The history of Kamtschatka and the Kurilski Islands, with the countries adjacent; illustrated with maps and cuts. Published at Petersbourg in the Russian language, by order of Her Imperial Majesty, and translated into English by James Grieve, m.d. London, 1764. [Krasheninnikov was one of the scientists who were members of Bering’s second expedition. He did not go to sea with him, however. An abridged translation from the Russian original, which was published in 1755. A complete translation of the original appeared in French at Amsterdam in 1770. A second Russian edition was published in 1786.]

Pallas, P. S. Nachrichten von den russischen Entdeckungen zwischen Asia und Europa. Büsching’s Magazin für die Neue Historie und Geographie, Vol. 16, pp. 235-286. Halle, 1782.

Delisle, Joseph Nicolas. Explication de la carte des nouvelles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud. Paris, 1752. Accompanied by a map: Carte des nouvelles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud, tant à l’est de la Sibérie et du Kamtchatka, qu’à l’ouest de la Nouvelle France, dressée sur les mémoires de Mr. Del’ Isle . . . par Philippe Buache (facsimile reproduction as Pl. 14 (1) in Teleki’s atlas, cited above on p. 355). [Contains a paper read by J. N. Delisle after his return from his twenty-one years’ stay in St. Petersburg (1726-1747) before the Paris Academy of Sciences on April 8, 1750, entitled “Nouvelles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud.” In this paper Delisle said that Bering was wrecked on an island and had not been in America, while Chirikov and Delisle de la Croyère had touched on the American coast. This statement was probably made in good faith because Delisle did not know the true facts of the voyage of the St. Peter, many of the original journals and charts still being in Siberia and the Admiralty College probably not yet having given out accurate information.]

Delisle, Joseph Nicolas. Nouvelles cartes des découvertes de l’amiral {p. 361} de Fonte et autres navigateurs . . . dans les mers septentrionales, avec leur explication. Paris, 1753. [Accompanied by a map on which the discoveries of Bering and Chirikov, whose tracks are shown, are correlated with the alleged discoveries along the northwestern coast of North America of the Spanish navigator Bartolomé de Fuentes in 1640. A facsimile of this map accompanies A. W. Greely’s paper, listed on p. 367, as Pl. 21, Natl. Geogr. Magaz., Vol. 3, 1891.]

Isnard, Albert. Joseph-Nicolas Delisle: Sa biographie et sa collection de cartes géographiques à la Bibliothèque Nationale. Bull. Section de Géogr., Comité des Travaux Hist. et Sci., Vol. 30, 1915, pp. 34-164. Minist. de l’lnstruction Publ. et des Beaux-Arts, Paris. [Of the collection of manuscripts and maps brought back to Paris by Delisle from his twenty-one years’ stay in St. Petersburg (1726-1747) one part was deposited in the archives of the Dépôt des Cartes et Plans de la Marine. Reference is made to these above, on p. 358. The remaining part was deposited in the Bibliothèque Royale. These, long missing, have recently been found. They are now in the Section Géographique of the Bibliothèque Nationale and are described and listed in the present paper. The collection contains first-hand copies of maps of Bering’s route on his first expedition from Tobolsk to Bering Strait (Nos. 165, 166, 166 bis, 167).]

Omont, H. Lettres de J.-N. Delisle au Comte de Maurepas et à l’Abbé Bignon sur ses travaux géographiques en Russie (1726-1730). Bull. Section du Géogr., Comité des Travaux Hist. et Sci., Vol. 32, 1917, pp. 130-164. Minist. de l’lnstruction Publ. et des Beaux-Arts, Paris. [Seven letters, of which five from Delisle to the then Minister of Marine and to the librarian of the Bibliothèque Royale, informing them of his activities during the first years of his sojourn in Russia. Letters III and VII, on pp. 141-147 and 160-162, deal at first hand with Bering’s first expedition and the state of geographical knowledge of the North Pacific prior to that expedition, including von Strahlenberg’s studies (see above, p. 356). “C’est du capitaine Beerings luy-même, qui est icy de retour depuis quelques mois, que j’ay appris ce que je viens d’en marquer à Votre Grandeur” (Letter VII, dated June 25, 1730).]

Froidevaux, Henri. Les études géographiques de Joseph-Nicolas Delisle sur l’Empire Russe. La Géographie, Vol. 33, 1920, pp. 219-228. Paris. [An abstract of the papers by Isnard and Omont listed above.]

Buache, Philippe. Considérations géographiques et physiques sur les nouvelles découvertes au nord de la grande mer appelée vulgairement la Mer du Sud, avec des cartes qui y sont relatives. Paris, 1753. [Buache, who was “Premier Géographe du Roy” and in close touch with J. N. Delisle, in this memoir discusses the geography of the North Pacific mainly as established by Bering’s expeditions. The {p. 362} memoir is accompanied by 13 maps, of which two are reproduced in facsimile as Figs. 10 and 11 on pp. 140 and 141 of Teleki’s atlas, cited above on p. 355.]

[Waxel, Sven](?). Lettre d’un officier de la marine russienne à un Seigneur de la Cour concernant la carte des nouvelles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud, et la mémoire qui y sert d’explication, publiée par M. de l’Isle à Paris en 1752. Traduit de l’original russe. Berlin, 1753. [In this anonymous pamphlet the origin and inception of the Bering expeditions are discussed and exception is taken to J. N. Delisle’s statement (see entry on p. 360) that Bering had not reached America. From internal evidence A. W. Greely (p. 222 of paper listed on p. 367) concludes that Sven Waxel was the author. Long quotations from the pamphlet are there given in translation. A careless English translation appeared in London in 1754.]

Near-Contemporary Accounts of Bering’s Expeditions, and Compendiums

Du Halde, Jean Baptiste. Description géographique, historique, chronologique, politique, et physique de l’empire de la Chine et de la Tartarie chinoise . . . 4 vols. The Hague, 1736. [Vol. 4, p. 562, contains Bering’s report on his first voyage. In the atlas to accompany Du Halde’s work (J. B. B. d’Anville’s Nouvel atlas de la Chine, de la Tartarie chinoise et du Thibet, The Hague, 1737) is reproduced Bering’s original map of his first voyage. This map, which he made in Moscow in 1731, was presented by the Russian government to the King of Poland, who gave it to the Jesuit father Du Halde. It is from a copy of this map for use in Sweden that our Fig. 5 is reproduced.]

Weber, ——. Das neuveränderte Russland. At least 3 vols. Frankfort and Leipzig, 1744. [Weber, who knew and associated with Bering, in this account follows verbatim a report of Bering’s first expedition which appeared in the Copenhagen periodical Nye Tidende immediately after Bering’s return in March, 1730, and which Lauridsen (work cited on p. 366) ascribes to Bering himself.]

Harris, John, edit. Navigantium atque itinerantium bibliotheca. Or, a complete collection of voyages and travels. Consisting of above six hundred of the most authentic writers . . . Originally published . . . by John Harris . . . 2 vols. London, 1744-1748. [Vol. 2, pp. 1018-1022, contains an account, by John Campbell, based on Bering’s report, of his first expedition and, facing p. 1016, a reproduction of his map.]

Chappe d’Auteroche, Jean. Voyage en Sibérie, fait par ordre du roi en 1761; contenant les mœurs, les usages des Russes, et l’état actual {p. 363} de cette puissance; la description géographique et le nivellement de la route de Paris à Tobolsk. 2 vols. in three, and atlas. Paris, 1768. [Vol. 2 contains a translation of Krasheninnikov’s history of Kamchatka.]

[Scherer, J. B.] (?) Neue Nachrichten von denen neuentdekten Insuln in der See zwischen Asien und Amerika; aus mitgetheilten Urkunden und Auszügen verfasset von J. L. S. ——. Hamburg and Leipzig, 1776. [Attributed to J. B. Scherer, who wrote the introduction to and edited Steller’s “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” 1774.]

Coxe, William. Account of the Russian discoveries between Asia and America. To which are added the conquest of Siberia and the history of the transactions and commerce between Russia and China. With Supplement: A comparative view of the Russian discoveries with those made by Captains Cook and Clerke. 3d edit., London, 1787. [Important book. The author lived in Russia during the second half of the eighteenth century. In his account of the Russian voyages up to and including the Bering period, he follows Müller closely. Earlier edition, 1780.]

Hallager, Morten, comp. Udförlige og troeværdige efterretninger om de fra Rusland af langs med kysterne af Iishavet til söes giorte opdagelser; tilligemed de i russiske tieneste værende danske söe-officerers, commandeur-capitain Vitus Berings og capitain Morten Spangbergs söe-reiser, foretagne i aarene 1728, 1729, 1738, 1741 til 1743, paa det östlige ocean fra Kamtschatka af til Japon og Amerika; samt en beskrivelse over de siden den tid i dette hav fundne öer . . . uddragne af ovenmeldte söefareres dagböger og af Statsraad Müllers, Adjunctus Stellers, Prof. de l’Isle’s, Dr. Pallas’s beretninger og Skrifter . . . Copenhagen, 1784.


Forster, Johann Reinhold. History of the voyages and discoveries made in the North. Translated from the German. London, 1786.

Burney, James. A chronological history of the discoveries in the South Sea or Pacific Ocean . . . 5 vols. London, 1803-17.

Burney, James. A chronological history of north-eastern voyages of discovery; and of the early eastern navigations of the Russians. London, 1819.

Modern Discussions of Bering’s Expeditions

Berkh, Vasili N. Pervoe morskoe puteshestvie Rossiyan, predprinyatoe dlya ryesheniya geograficheskoi zadachi, Soedinyaetsya li Aziya s Amerikoyu? i sovershennoe v 1727, 28 i 29 godakh pod nachalstvom Flota Kapitana 1-go ranga Vitusa Beringa (First sea voyage of the {p. 364} Russians undertaken for settling this geographical problem, Are Asia and America united? and performed in 1727-1729, under the command of Captain of the first rank Vitus Bering). Imp. Acad. of Sci. Press, St. Petersburg, 1823. [The leading discussion of the first expedition, based on a study of the archives. It includes an abridged version of the log book kept by midshipman Peter Chaplin and a map showing the route of the sea voyage, reproduced in Fig. 6 of the present work.]

Polonskii, A. S. Pervaya Kamchatskaya Ekspeditsiya Beringa, 1725-29 goda (First Kamchatka Expedition of Bering, 1725-29). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 8, pp. 535-556, St. Petersburg, 1850. [Contains Spanberg’s and Chirikov’s arguments as to proceeding farther after expedition had reached 65° 30′ N. See the present work, p. 19.]

P[olonskii], A. [S.]. Pervaya Kamchatskaya Ekspeditsiya Beringa, 1725-29 goda (First Kamchatka Expedition of Bering, 1725-29). Otechestveniya Zapiski, 1851, No. 3.

Naznachenie pervoi Beringovoi ekspeditsii (Destination of Bering’s first expedition). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 9, pp. 642-644, St. Petersburg, 1851.

Berkh, Vasili N. Puteshestvie Kap. Komandora Beringa i Kap. Chirikova, etc. (Voyage of Capt. Commander Bering and Capt. Chirikov to the northwest coast of America: Second expedition). Blagonamyerennyi Zhurnal, Vol. 2, 1818, No. 6(?), St. Petersburg.

Baer, Karl Ernst von. Zaslugi Petra Velikago po chasti rasprostraneniya geograficheskikh poznanii o Rossii i pogranichnikh s neyu zemlyakh Azii (The merits of Peter the Great in the extension of geographical knowledge about Russia and her Asiatic frontier regions). Zapiski Russkago Geograficheskago Obshchestva, Vol. 3, 1849, pp. 217-253; Vol. 4, 1850, pp. 260-283. [Read at the meeting of Jan. 14, 1848, of the Russian Geographical Society. This was the paper which led to the friendly controversy between von Baer and Sokolov as to the relative merits of Bering and Chirikov which is reflected in the entries that follow.]

Sokolov, Aleksandr. Bering i Chirikov. Syevernaya Pchela, 1849, No. 98 (May 5), pp. 391-392; No. 99 (May 6), pp. 395-396, St. Petersburg. [In reply to von Baer’s article in Zapiski Russ. Geogr. Obshch., Vols. 3 and 4, 1849-50. Also published separately, 13 pp., St. Petersburg, 1849.]

Baer, Karl Ernst von. [Bering und Tschirikow](?) St. Petersburger Zeitung, 1849, Nos. 114, 115, 116. [Reply to Sokolov’s article in Syevernaya Pchela, 1849, Nos. 98 and 99.]

Baer, Karl Ernst von. Bering i Chirikov. Russkii Invalid ili Voenniya Vyedomosti, 1849, Nos. 121, 122, 123, St. Petersburg. [Russian {p. 365} translation of von Baer’s article in St. Petersburger Zeitung, 1849, Nos. 114-116.]

Sokolov, Aleksandr. [Reply to Mr. Baer of the Academy of Sciences.] Syevernaya Pchela, 1849, No. 133, St. Petersburg. [Reply to von Baer’s translated article in Russkii Invalid, 1849, Nos. 121-123.]

Sokolov, Aleksandr. Syevernaya ekspeditsiya, 1733-43 goda (The northern expeditions, 1733-43). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 9, pp. 190-469, St. Petersburg, 1851. [The leading discussion of the second expedition, based on a study of the archives. It contains a map on Mercator’s projection, equatorial scale 1:17,500,000, showing Bering’s and Chirikov’s tracks according to their own calculations, and Khitrov’s map of Kayak Island, both reproduced by Lauridsen in his “Vitus Bering,” cited on p. 366.]

Sokolov, Aleksandr. Primyechaniya, etc. (Remarks on the ‘Account of the Northern Expeditions, 1733-43,’ published in Vol. 9 of the Journ. of the Hydrographic Department). Morskoi Sbornik, Vol. 25, No. 13, Section 4, pp. 103-105, St. Petersburg, 1856.

Astronomicheskie i geodezicheskie instrumenty Delil-de-la Kroera, vtoroi Kamchatskoi ekspeditsii (Astronomical and geodetic instruments used by Delisle de la Croyère on the second Kamchatka expedition). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 7, pp. 537-542, St. Petersburg, 1849.

Berkh, Vasili N. Biograficheskoe svyedyenie o Kapitan-Komandorye Vitusye Beringye (Biographical sketch of Capt. Commander Vitus Bering). Syevernyi Arkhiv, Vol. 6, No. 8, St. Petersburg, 1823.

Berkh, Vasili N. Zhizneopisaniya pervykh rossiiskikh admiralov, etc. (Biographies of the first Russian admirals, or an attempt at the history of the Russian Navy). 4 vols., St. Petersburg, 1831-36.

Baer, Karl Ernst von. Peter’s des Grossen Verdienste um die Erweiterung der geographischen Kenntnisse. (In series: Beiträge zur Kenntnis des russischen Reiches, Vol. 16.) St. Petersburg, 1872.

Stejneger, Leonhard. Contributions to the history of the Commander Islands, No. 1: Notes on the natural history, including descriptions of new cetaceans. Proc. U. S. Natl. Museum, Vol. 6, 1883, pp. 58-89.

Stejneger, Leonhard. Contributions to the history of the Commander Islands, No. 2: Investigations relating to the date of the extermination of Steller’s sea-cow. Proc. U. S. Natl. Museum, Vol. 7, 1884, pp. 181-189.

Stejneger, Leonhard. Fra det yderste Osten. Naturen, Vol. 8, 1884, pp. 65-69. Christiania.

Stejneger, Leonhard. Eine Umsegelung der Bering’s-Insel, Herbst 1882. Deutsche Geogr. Blätter, Vol. 8, 1885, pp. 225-273. Bremen.

[Dahlgren, E. W.] Berings karta öfver Sibirien. Ymer, Vol. 4, 1884, {p. 366} pp. 93-94. [On copies in Sweden of Bering’s map of his first expedition.]

Nordenskiöld, A. E. Den första på verkliga iakttagelser grundade karta öfver norra Asien. Ymer, Vol. 7, 1887, pp. 133-144. Stockholm.

Bancroft, H. H. Alaska, 1730-1885. (In his “History of the Pacific States of North America,” San Francisco, 1882-90, Vol. 28.) San Francisco, 1886. [Bering’s voyages are treated in Chapters 3-5. There is a valuable but undifferentiated list of “Authorities quoted,” pp. xxiii-xxxviii.]

Lauridsen, Peter. Vitus Jonassen Bering. Geografisk Tidskrift, Vol. 6, 1862, pp. 89-98. Copenhagen. [A study preliminary to Lauridsen’s major work, listed in the next entry. This paper discusses the first expedition only.]

Lauridsen, Peter. Vitus I. Bering og de russiske opdagelsesrejser fra 1725-43. Copenhagen, 1885. [The Danish original of the next entry, which see. Reviewed by A. E. Nordenskiöld in Journ. Amer. Geogr. Soc., Vol. 17, 1885, pp. 285-298.]

Lauridsen, Peter. Vitus Bering, the discoverer of Bering Strait. Revised by the author, and translated from the Danish by Julius E. Olson. . . . With an introduction to the American edition by Frederick Schwatka. . . . Chicago, 1889. [An apologia of Bering. In spite of this bias it is valuable as one of the first West European discussions of the subject taking the Russian sources into consideration. The author had access to the Russian archives in 1883, but even with the assistance received from Admiral Wessalgo, then director of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, and others, the handicap of incomplete familiarity with Russian could not be entirely overcome. Lauridsen reproduces (map III) in quasi-facsimile from Sokolov, Zapiski Hydrogr. Dept., Vol. 9, combined, the tracks of the St. Peter and the St. Paul from the original charts of Waxel and Khitrov and of Chirikov. But, as the accumulated error in longitude of the ship’s position in each case is not prorated but is thrown into one day, the two tracks are not properly related to each other. However, the map is of importance as representing the navigators’ own conception of their tracks. Lauridsen also reproduces (map IV), from the same publication, Khitrov’s map of Kayak Island from his journal.]

Vakhtin, V. Russkiye truzheniki morya. Pervaya morskaya ekspeditsiya Beringa, etc. (Russian self-sacrificing navigators. Bering’s first expedition, etc.). St. Petersburg, 1890. [Publishes documents on the first voyage.]

Dall, W. H. Alaska and its resources. Boston, 1870. [Pp. 297-301 refer to Bering’s voyages.]

Dall, W. H. Notes on an original chart of Bering’s expedition of 1725-1730, and on an original manuscript chart of his second expedition; {p. 367} together with a summary of a journal of the first expedition, kept by Peter Chaplin, and now first rendered into English from Bergh’s Russian version. Appendix No. 19, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept. for 1890, pp. 759-774. Washington, D. C., 1891. [Valuable because it makes easily accessible Chaplin’s journal of Bering’s first expedition. The translation is from the work by Berkh listed above on p. 363. Of the accompanying facsimile of the map of the first expedition the eastern section is reproduced in our Fig. 5. The likewise accompanying map of the second expedition is a facsimile of a manuscript chart by Sven Waxel showing the discoveries of that expedition.]

Dall, W. H. A critical review of Bering’s first expedition, 1725-30, together with a translation of his original report upon it. Natl. Geogr. Mag., Vol. 2, 1890, pp. 111-169. [The first modern discussion in English of Bering’s first expedition based on a critical consideration of the sources available at the time of publication.]

Greely, A. W. The cartography and observations of Bering’s first voyage. Natl. Geogr. Mag., Vol. 3, 1891-92, pp. 205-230. [Important critical remarks on some of the sources, based on copies in the author’s possession.]

Schott, C. A. On the magnetic observations of Bering during his first expedition. Appendix No. 5, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept. for 1891. Washington, D. C., 1892. Reprinted from U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Bull. 20.

Davidson, George. The tracks and landfalls of Bering and Chirikof on the northwest coast of America from the point of their separation in latitude 49° 10′, longitude 176° 40′ west, to their return to the same meridian, June, July, August, September, October, 1741. [San Francisco], 1901. Also published in Trans. and Proc. Geogr. Soc. of the Pacific, Ser. 2, Vol. 1. [Accompanied by an important map showing the tracks of the St. Peter and St. Paul, east of the point of their separation, adjusted to the actual outline of the Alaskan coast. The sources used for plotting the ship’s positions are not indicated in the text.]

Golder, F. A. Russian expansion on the Pacific, 1641-1850: An account of the earliest and later expeditions made by the Russians along the Pacific coast of Asia and North America, including some related expeditions to the Arctic regions. Cleveland, 1914. [Bering’s voyages are dealt with in Chapters VI and VIII, Terra de Yezo in Chapter V, and Gvozdev’s voyage in Chapter VII.]

Later Voyages to the Same Region Which Shed Light on the Conditions Under Which Bering’s Expeditions Were Made

Cook, James. A voyage to the Pacific Ocean. Undertaken, by the {p. 368} command of His Majesty, for making discoveries in the Northern hemisphere, to determine the position and extent of the west side of North America; its distance from Asia; and the practicability of a northern passage to Europe. Performed under the direction of Captains Cook, Clerke, and Gore, in His Majesty’s ships the Resolution and Discovery, in the years 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, and 1780. Vol. I and II written by Captain James Cook, f.r.s. Vol. III by Captain James King, l.l.d. and f.r.s. Published by order of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. 3 vols. and atlas. London, 1784.

Dixon, George. A voyage round the world; but more particularly to the north-west coast of America; performed in 1785, 1786, 1787, and 1788, in the King George and Queen Charlotte, Captains Portlock and Dixon. . . . London, 1789.

Shelekhov, Grigorii. Grigori Schelechof russischen Kaufmanns erste und zweyte Reise von Ochotsk in Siberien durch den östlichen Ocean nach den Küsten von Amerika in den Jahren 1783 bis 1789. Nebst umständlicher Beschreibung der von ihm neuentdeckten Inseln Küktak, Afagnak und mehrerer andrer, zu welchen selbst der berühmte Cap. Cook nicht gekommen und die sich der russischen Herrschaft unterworfen haben. Aus dem Russischen übersetzt von J. Z. Logan. St. Petersburg, 1793.

Lapérouse, Jean François de Galaup, Comte de. Voyage de La Pérouse autour du monde, publié conformément au décrit du 22 avril 1791, et rédigé par M. L. A. Millet-Mureau. 4 vols. and atlas. Paris, 1797.

Sauer, Martin. An account of a geographical and astronomical expedition to the northern parts of Russia, for ascertaining the degrees of latitude and longitude of the mouth of the river Kovima; of the whole coast of the Tshutski, to East Cape; and of the islands in the eastern ocean, stretching to the American coast. Performed . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings, in the years 1785, etc., to 1794. The whole narrated from the original papers. London, 1802. [Reference, p. 194, to a native met with on Billings’ expedition who remembered Bering’s landing on Kayak Island.]

Sarychev, Gavriil. Account of a voyage of discovery to the north-east of Siberia, the Frozen Ocean, and the north-east sea. 2 vols. in one. Translated from the Russian. London, 1806-07. [Gives an account of the meeting, on Billings’ expedition, of a native who remembered Bering’s landing on Kayak Island.]

Vancouver, George. A voyage of discovery to the North Pacific Ocean, and round the world, in which the coast of north-west America has been carefully examined and accurately surveyed. Undertaken by His Majesty’s command, principally with a view to ascertain {p. 369} the existence of any navigable communication between the North Pacific and North Atlantic oceans; and performed in the years 1790, 1791, 1792, 1793, 1794, and 1795, in the Discovery, sloop of war, and armed tender Chatham, under the command of Captain George Vancouver . . . 3 vols. and atlas. London, 1798.

Broughton, W. R. A voyage of discovery to the North Pacific Ocean, in which the coast of Asia, from the lat. of 35° north to the lat. of 52° north, the island of Insu (commonly known under the name of the land of Jesso,) the north, south, and east coasts of Japan, the Lieuchieux and the adjacent isles, as well as the coast of Corea, have been examined and surveyed. Performed in His Majesty’s sloop Providence and her tender, in the years 1795, 1796, 1797, 1798. London, 1804.

Krusenstern, A. J. von. Voyage round the world, in the years 1803, 1804, 1805, and 1806, by order of His Imperial Majesty Alexander the First, on board the ships Nadeshda and Neva, under the command of Captain A. J. von Krusenstern. . . . Translated from the original German, by Hoppner. 2 vols. in one. London, 1813.

Langsdorff, G. H. von. Voyages and travels in various parts of the world, during the years 1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, and 1807. 2 vols. London, 1813-14. [Translation of the author’s “Bemerkungen auf einer Reise um die Welt,” Frankfort, 1812.]

Kotzebue, Otto von. A voyage of discovery, into the South Sea and Beering’s Straits, for the purpose of exploring a north-east passage, undertaken in the years 1815-1818, at the expense of His Highness . . . Count Romanzoff, in the ship Rurick, under the command of the lieutenant in the Russian imperial navy, Otto von Kotzebue . . . 3 vols. London, 1821.

Choris, Louis. Voyage pittoresque autour du monde, avec des portraits de sauvages d’Amérique, d’Asie, d’Afrique, et des îles du Grand Océan. Paris, 1822. [Choris accompanied Kotzebue’s expedition as artist.]

Wrangell, Ferdinand von. Narrative of an expedition to the Polar Sea, in the years 1820, 1821, 1822, and 1823. Edited by Major Edward Sabine. . . . London, 1840. [Translated from G. Engelhardt’s German translation of the then unpublished Russian manuscript.]

Beechey, F. W. Narrative of a voyage to the Pacific and Beering’s Strait, to co-operate with the polar expeditions, performed in His Majesty’s ship Blossom, under the command of Captain F. W. Beechey . . . in the years 1825, 26, 27, 28. 2 vols. London, 1831.

Dobell, Peter. Travels in Kamtchatka and Siberia; with a narrative of a residence in China. 2 vols. London, 1830.

Middendorff, A. T. von. Reise in den äussersten Norden und Osten Sibiriens während der Jahre 1843 und 1844, mit allerhöchster Genehmigung {p. 370} auf Veranstaltung der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu St. Petersburg ausgeführt und in Verbindung mit vielen Gelehrten herausgegeben. 4 vols. in seven, and atlas. Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1847-1875.

Kittlitz, F. H. von. Denkwürdigkeiten einer Reise nach dem russischen Amerika, nach Mikronesien und durch Kamtschatka. 2 vols. Gotha, 1858.

Nordenskiöld, A. E. The voyage of the Vega round Asia and Europe; with a historical review of previous journeys along the north coast of the Old World. Translated [from the Swedish] by Alexander Leslie. 2 vols. London, 1881. [Chapter 13 contains references to Bering’s voyages.]

Guillemard, F. H. H. The cruise of the Marchesa to Kamschatka & New Guinea. With notices of Formosa, Liu-Kiu, and various islands of the Malay archipelago. 2nd edit. London, 1889.


Burney, James. Memoir on the geography of the north-eastern part of Asia. London, 1818. [Paper read before a scientific body in London in which the author, who had been with Cook in Bering Strait, insisted that it was not conclusively proved that the Old World and the New World were two distinct continents.]

Veniaminov, Ivan (Innokentii, metropolitan of Moscow). Zapiski ob ostrovakh Unalashkinskago otdyela. Izdano izhdiveniem Rossiisko-Amerikanskoi Kompanii. (Notes on the islands of the Unalaska district. Published at the expense of the Russian-American Company.) 3 vols. in two. St. Petersburg, 1840.

Holmberg, H. J. Ethnographische Skizzen über die Völker des russischen Amerika. 2 vols. Helsingfors, 1855-[63]. [Vol. 1 reprinted from Vol. 4 of the Acta of Finska Vetenskaps-Societeten; Vol. 2 is a separate (pp. [35]-101) from Vol. 7 of the Acta.]

Dall, W. H., and George Gibbs. Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by W. H. Dall. Tribes of western Washington and northwestern Oregon, by George Gibbs. Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. 1. Bur. of Ethnol., Washington, D. C. 1877.

Slyunin, N. V. Okhotsko-Kamchatkii krai (Okhotsk-Kamchatka region). Vol. 1. St. Petersburg, 1900. [Description of the natural history of the region, with map.]

Ryabushinski, F. P. Kamchatskaya ekspeditsiya. Moscow, 1912. [Account of a scientific expedition to Kamchatka financed by the author, on which Waldemar Jochelson, known for his work on the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, was in charge of ethnology.]

{p. 371}

Official Documents, and Bibliographies

Polnoe sobranie zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii (Complete collection of the laws of the Russian Empire). Vols. 3, 4, 7, 8. Imperial Printing Press, St. Petersburg, ca. 1830.

Obshchii morskoi spisok (General navy list). 13 vols. and 1 vol. of index. St. Petersburg, 1885-1907. [Useful in following the careers of the officers who took part in Bering’s voyages.]

Opisanie dyel arkhiva Morskago Ministerstva s poloviny xvii do nachala xix stolyetiya (Description of the papers in the archives of the Ministry of Marine from the middle of the seventeenth to the beginning of the nineteenth century). 10 vols. Published by direction of the Ministry of Marine, St. Petersburg, 1877-1906.

Dall, W. H., and Marcus Baker. Partial list of charts, maps, and publications relating to Alaska and the adjacent region, from Puget Sound and Hakodadi to the Arctic Ocean, between the Rocky and the Stanovoi Mountains, in: Pacific Coast Pilot: Coasts and Islands of Alaska, Second Series, pp. 163-374, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C., 1879. [Invaluable bibliography. Strong on Russian sources; Russian titles are given in Cyrillic. The contents of periodical series are analyzed. Maps are listed on pp. 167-223, text publications on pp. 225-374.].

Golder, F. A. Guide to materials for American history in Russian archives. Carnegie Instn. Publ. No. 239. Washington, D. C., 1917. [The documents relating to the Bering expeditions are mainly in the archives of the Ministry of Marine (listed on pp. 119-130), of the Hydrographic Section of that Ministry (pp. 130-136), and of the General Staff (pp. 116-119).]

INDEX TO BOTH VOLUMES

Aborigines. See Natives

Academy of Sciences. See St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences

Acknowledgments, I, ix;

  II, xi

Actinia crassicornis, II, 28

Adak Island, landfall of the St. Paul on, I, 303, 317, 320, 346;

  landfall of the St. Peter on, I, 168, 275, 338;

    II, 24, 82, 112

Addington, Cape, discovery by Chirikov, I, 291, 313, 342

Address, Russian form of, II, 149

Admiralty College, I, 11, 29;

  Chirikov’s report to, on the voyage of the St. Paul, I, 312-323;

  Chirikov’s supplementary report, I, 324-327;

  instructions—secret and public, I, 31;

  miscarriage of plans for second expedition, I, 33;

  Waxel’s report to, on the voyage of the St. Peter, I, 270-281

Aerna Turneri, II, 23

Afognak Island, I, 298, 346

Agai, I, 296, 311, 317, 344

Agattu Island, I, 307, 321, 324, 347

Aguilar, Martin, II, 71, 72

Akulev. See Okulov

Aladi, II, 160

Alaska, algae, II, 46;

  card bibliography, I, 352;

  coast sailed along by the St. Peter, I, 101, 272, 332;

  Gulf of, II, 78;

  point first reached by Steller, II, 49;

  Stejneger’s visit, II, 41

Alaska, Gulf of, II, 78

Alaska Peninsula, II, 54;

  mainland, II, 78;

  vegetation, II, 82

Alaskans, I, 96, 97, 98, 99;

  trade with the Chukchis, II, 98

Alavenishkov, Dimitri, I, 235

Albatrosses, II, 23, 75, 108

Alca antiquus, II, 124

Alca arctica, II, 80

Alca cirrata, II, 80

Alca torda Linnaeus, II, 80

Alder, II, 55;

  pointed-leaved, II, 239

Aleksyeev, ——, II, 257

Aleutian Islands, II, 82;

  Alaska Peninsula and, II, 78;

  landfalls of the St. Paul, I, 347;

  mainland of America and, II, 101, 174;

  vegetation, II, 82

Aleuts, I, 148, 275;

  in a baidarka (ill.), I, opp. 149;

  description, II, 96;

  homes on islands or mainland, II, 104;

  language, II, 91;

  man from Unalaska (ill.), I, opp. 304;

  meeting with, II, 90;

  presents received from, II, 102;

  weapons and implements (ills.), I, opp. 304, opp. 305;

  woman from Unalaska (ill.), I, opp. 305

Alexeiev, Luka, I, 235, 242;

  II, 159-160

Alga dentata Raji, II, 27, 28

Alga fontinalis, II, 46

Algae, II, 22;

  Alaskan, II, 46

Algonquian term for water, II, 91

Allen, J. A., II, 263

Allgemeines Polyglotten-Lexicon der Naturgeschichte, II, 85

Almquist, Ernst, II, 260

Alopecurus stejnegeri Vasey, II, 179

Alopex lagopus (Linnaeus), II, 139

Ambars, II, 47, 143, 172

Amchitka Island, I, 199, 200

America, II, 3;

  Asiatic connection, I, 4, 6, 29, 328;

    II, 11, 12, 46, 70, 174, 244;

  Asiatic connection, former, II, 99-100;

  Bering’s plan to stay in, II, 19;

  mainland conceived as close to Asia (St. Petersburg Acad, of Sci. map, 1758), II, opp. 101;

  mainland distance from Kamchatka, II, 101;

  mainland as discovered by Bering, II, 78;

  mainland reached by the St. Peter, II, 35;

  mainland supposed visible from Bering Island, II, 203;

  mountains compared with Asiatic, II, 54;

  northeastern coast, meaning, II, 10;

  plan of exploration lacking, II, 37

American coast, I, 120, 328

American Geographical Society, II, 70, 254

Americans. See Alaskans;

  Aleuts;

  Natives

Amman, Johann, II, 249

Anadyr River, I, 22, 328;

  II, 12, 18

Anadyrsk, II, 198, 249

Anadyrski Cape, I, 22

Anas arctica, II, 108

Anas arcticus Clus., II, 108

Anas histrionica, II, 23

Anchiugov, Timofei, I, 228, 230, 235, 278;

  II, 153, 167

Anchors lost by the St. Peter, II, 135, 136, 137, 168, 181

Andrews, C. L., I, 311

Andromeda polifolia L., II, 239

Andryevich, V. K., I, 354

Angelica, II, 178, 240

Animals, bones found, II, 44;

  hunting and killing, II, 161;

  Kayak Island, II, 58;

  marine, II, 30

Annahootz, Chief, I, 311

Anowik Island, I, 335

Anser bassanus, II, 108

Antimony, I, 320

Antipin, Mark, I, 224, 282

Antiscorbutic herbs, II, 84, 85, 138, 178

Antropov, Maffei, I, 235

Anuchin, D. G., II, 257

Appendix A, II, 189

Appendix B, II, 242

Apraksin, F. M., I, 8, 11

Archangelica officinalis, II, 178

Archdeacon Stephen Island, I, 112, 113

Archeological Commission, St. Petersburg, I, 354

Arches, natural, on Bering Island, II, 197

Archives, Russian, I, 349, 371

Arctic coast, charting, I, 26, 27;

  exploration, I, 29, 328

Arctic foxes, II, 139, 209.

  See also Blue foxes

Arctostaphylos arctica (L.), II, 239

Ari Kamen, II, 203

Arrows, II, 48, 49, 97, 98

Arshin, I, 98;

  II, 8, 48, 95

Artemev, Semen, I, 282

Artemisia vulgaris L., II, 240

Arteriola, II, 236

Aru, I, 291

Asia, American connection, I, 4, 6, 328;

  II, 11, 12, 46, 70, 174;

  American former connection, II, 99-100;

  coast, I, 328;

  Delisle map, II, 71;

  farthest point, II, 19

Asio accipitrinus (Pallas), II, 111

Asio flammeus (Pontoppidan), II, 111

Asterisks, meaning, II, 8

Astronomical day, I, 50, 332;

  II, 33, 35, 107

Atka Island, Chirikov and, I, 329;

  landfall of the St. Peter, I, 168, 275, 338;

    II, 24, 82, 112

Atlantic Ocean, II, 70

Attu Island, I, 307, 329, 347;

  II, 82

Auks, II, 80, 105, 125

Aurelia aurita (Linn.), II, 28

Aurora borealis, II, 207

Avacha Bay, I, 36, 49, 270, 271;

  II, 3, 13, 19, 20, 21, 22, 100, 206;

  arrival of Bering, Oct. 6, 1740, I, 34;

  hooker St. Peter enters, I, 256, 264;

    II, 186;

  mistake of the St. Peter concerning approach on Nov. 4, II, 130, 131;

  return of the St. Paul to, I, 310, 322, 348;

  St. Paul in, I, 313

Avacha Volcano, I, 49, 310

Avechin, Vasili, I, 235

Axes, II, 98;

  stone or bone, II, 46

 

(B), meaning, II, 8

Bachbung, II, 138

Bacillus Welchii, II, 158

Baer, K. E. von, I, 351, 352, 353, 364, 365

Baggage list for each member of the first expedition, I, 235

Baiarkin, Astafei, I, 235

Baidarkas, I, 147, 148, 149, 273, 274, 275, 337, 347;

  Aleut in baidarka (ill.), I, opp. 149;

  Unalaskan in baidarka (ill.), I, opp. 149

Baidars, I, 22, 148, 256;

  II, 12, 186, 222

Baikal, Lake, II, 198

Ball of burned day, II, 53

Ballast, salt water, I, 80

Bancroft, H. H., I, 352, 353, 366

Bannister, H. M., II, 258

Bark, II, 48, 49;

  hats of, II, 102;

  utensils of, II, 48

Barracks, II, 151, 152, 159

Barrel hoops, II, 120

Barrett-Hamilton, G. E. H., II, 262

Bartolome, Cape, I, 342

Baskets, I, 97, 98, 99, 271, opp. 305 (ill.)

Batas, II, 47

Bauhin, Gaspard, II, 2

Bean, B. A., II, 262

Bean, T. H., II, 80, 81, 259, 262

Bearberries, II, 239

Beards, I, 305;

  II, 104

Beaver Field, II, 214

Beaver Sea, II, 31, 217

Beccabunga, II, 178, 240

Beckmann, Johann, II, ix, 189, 252

Beechey, F. W., I, 369

Beer from cedars (nut pine), I, 262

Beklemishev, ——, II, 257

Bellin’s map of 1766, II, 101

Berckhan, J. C., II, 91, 247, 249

Berg, L. S., II, 266

Bering, Vitus Ivanovich, II, 10;

  attempt in 1729 to find land east of Kamchatka, II, 100, 135;

  biography, I, 8;

  biography by Steller, II, 155;

  blamed for delays of second expedition, I, 33;

  brought ashore ill at Bering Island, II, 142;

  burial, II, 159;

  complaint on death bed of lack of support, I, 34;

  cross erected in memory of, I, 243, 340;

    II, 159;

  death, I, 230, 278, 340;

    II, 154, 157, 243;

  discovery of land (Mt. St. Elias), I, 92, 93, 271, 332;

  grave on Bering island (ill.), II, opp. 158;

  interview with Steller in March, 1741, II, 3;

  map in his possession, question of, II, 71, opp. 72;

  monument to, in Petropavlovsk (ill.), II, opp. 186;

  offer to Steller to join second expedition, II, 15;

  property and family, I, 329;

  proposal of a second expedition, I, 25;

  rank, I, 31;

  recommended as commander, I, 7;

  remarks to Steller on the discovery of land, II, 34;

  report of first expedition unsatisfactory, I, 25;

  report to Catherine on his first expedition, I, 9, 358, 359, 362;

  sickness, I, 191, 193, 205, 208, 209, 277, 338;

    II, 86, 118;

  signature, with those of his officers—facsimile, I, 39;

  Steller’s criticism of and conduct toward, II, 6, 17, 40, 155.

  See also Bering’s expeditions;

    Bering’s first expedition;

    Bering’s second expedition

Bering Glacier, II, 36

Bering Island, II, 4, 5, 82, 131;

  birds and fishes, II, 237;

  climate and earthquakes, II, 205;

  deaths from scurvy, II, 146, 154, 155;

  description by Khitrov, I, 236;

  description by Waxel, I, 278;

  discussion with Bering as to its identity, II, 143;

  distance from Kamchatka, II, 101;

  earthquakes, II, 205;

  expedition’s conception of, and of its relations to surroundings as shown by Waxel’s chart (ill.), II, opp. 229;

  fishes, II, 237, 238;

  geology, II, 193;

  land visible from, II, 202;

  landing of the St. Peter, I, 209, 276, 339;

    II, 136, 137;

  life of the crew of the St. Peter on, I, 233, 276;

    II, 148, 244;

  mistaken for Kamchatka, II, 134;

  name, I, 236, 281;

    II, 134, 191;

  plants and roots, list, with identifications, II, 178, 238;

  position and size, II, 191;

  reconnaissances, II, 152, 153, 167, 168, 169;

  track of the St. Peter on approaching (map, reconstructed), II, 130;

  sea lions and fur seals, II, 224;

  site where wrecked expedition wintered and of grave of Bering (ill.), II, opp. 158;

  size, II, 191;

  size in former times, II, 200;

  Stejneger’s studies, II, xi;

  Stejneger’s surveys in 1882-83 (map), II, opp. 208;

  streams, II, 195, 200, 201, 208;

  topographical and physical description (Appendix A), II, 189;

  topography and geology, II, 193;

  weather and climate, II, 153

Bering River, II, 36

Bering Sea, ice, II, 18

Bering Strait, discovery, I, 5

Bering’s Cross, I, 237, 244

Bering’s expeditions, account of participants, etc., references, I, 357;

  II, 264;

  later voyages in the region, references, I, 367;

  modern discussions, references, I, 363;

    II, 266;

  non-contemporary accounts and compendiums, references, I, 362;

    II, 265;

  official documents and bibliographies, references, I, 371

Bering’s first expedition, 1725-1730, I, 6;

  chart made on, II, 100;

  orders from Peter the Great (Dec. 23, 1724) and reports, I, 7;

  report to Catherine, I, 9;

  report, eastern section of map accompanying; facsimile of Swedish copy (map), I, 14-15;

  results, II, 13;

  return route, I, 20;

  route (map), I, 10;

  route from Okhotsk to Bering Strait and return according to Berkh (map), I, opp. 20;

  sea voyage, I, 19;

  towns passed en route, I, 11;

  turning back, I, 18

Bering’s second expedition, advance parties, I, 32;

  chart, with accompanying note, I, 330-348 and opp. 348;

  delays and difficulties, I, 33;

  end, I, 328;

  expenses, I, 33;

  fate of surviving officers, I, 328-329;

  inception, I, 25;

    II, 13;

  instructions from the Admiralty College, secret and public, I, 31;

  land versus sea expedition, I, 27;

  log book of the St. Peter and of the hooker St. Peter, I, 36-269;

  naval preparations, I, 28;

  official order, I, 28;

  pay of participants and rank of officers, I, 31;

  preparation, II, 14;

  preparation for sea voyage, I, 34;

  route, I, 32, opp. 348 (map);

  summary of instructions, I, 29.

  See also Bering;

    Chirikov;

    St. Paul (ship);

    St. Peter (ship)

Berkh, V. N., I, 351, 363, 364, 365;

  II, 100;

  route of Bering’s first voyage from Okhotsk to Bering Strait and return, reconstruction (map), I, opp. 20

Bernard, J. F., I, 356

Berries, II, 57

Bertholf, E. P., II, 131;

  acknowledgments, I, ix;

  chart of the voyage of Bering and Chirikov, I, opp. 348;

  note to accompany the chart of the voyage of Bering and Chirikov, I, 330-348

Betge, Matis, I, 120, 235;

  II, 21, 144, 147, 148, 149, 170

Betula ermani Cham., II, 239

Betula nana, II, 239

Betula nana L., II, 239

Bibliographical note, I, 349

Bibliography, I, 353;

  II, 251

Bidarkas. See Baidarkas

Bidars. See Baidars

Billings, Joseph, I, 98, 328, 368

Birch, II, 55, 239

Bird Island, I, 146, 273, 337;

  II, 17, 89, 102, 105

Bird’s claws and feathers, I, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 92, 95, 102

Birds, II, 23, 50, 81, 106, 112;

  Bering Island, II, 237;

  Kayak Island, II, 59;

  marine, II, 105;

  Steller’s book (i.e. Ray’s Synopsis), II, 108;

  Steller’s drawings, II, 60;

  water birds, II, 80

Birds’ eggs, II, 104

Bistort, II, 178;

  Alpine, II, 240

Bitter cress, II, 179

Black Point, Sitkalidak Island, I, 104, 333, 334

Blackberries, II, 239

Blanco, Cape, I, 328

Blizzards, I, 17

Blue foxes, II, vii, 47, 139;

  detailed description of their ways on Bering Island, II, 209;

  habits, II, 212, 213;

  killing on Bering Island, II, 142, 211;

  pranks, II, 141, 146, 211.

  See also Foxes

Blue jay, II, 59, 60

Boats, Aleutian, II, 90, 95;

  American, and the St. Paul, I, 296, 316, 344;

  skin, I, 148, 320.

  See also Baidarkas;

    Baidars

Bobr, II, 168, 217, 245

Bobrovaya Ryechka, II, 147

Bobrovi Valley, II, 175

Bobrovoe More, II, 217

Bobrovoe Pole, II, 147, 214

Bobrovoe Utes, II, 192, 215

Bogdriev, Stepan, I, 201, 281

Bohea, II, 178, 179

Bohemian earspoons, II, 216

Bolshaya River, I, 16;

  II, 13, 14, 15, 187, 242, 249;

  Bering’s second expedition at, Sept., 1740, I, 34;

  freight boats, I, 34, 35

Bolshaya zemlya, I, 21, 22, 25, 29;

  reports and instructions, I, 30

Bolsheretsk, I, 16, 266, 325;

  II, 2, 3, 20, 187, 249

Bolton, H. C., II, x

Bones of animals, II, 44

Borshch, I, 238

Bosop, II, 245

Botanical documents, manuscript, II, 58, 84

Botanical list, II, 178

Bourguet, Louis, on the marine origin of mountains, II, 198, 199

Box, II, 52

Brandt, Alexander, on the sea cow, II, 230

Brandt, J. F., on the sea cow, II, 230

Brandy, II, 93, 94, 99, 117, 121, 130

Brazil, sea otters in, II, 31, 32, 218, 219

Bread, II, 160, 161

Britannica, name, II, 85

Brooklime, American, II, 138, 179

Brooks, A. H., II, xi, 8, 82

Broughton, W. R., I, 369

Brunnenkresse, II, 240

Buache, Philippe, I, 361

Buache’s map of 1754, II, 19, 72

Büchner, Eugen, I, 350;

  II, opp. 229, 262

Buckwheat mush, I, 308, 318, 347

Buldir Island, I, 199, 201, 339;

  landfall of the St. Peter, I, 201, 275, 339;

  II, 82, 123, 124

Buldirev, Stephen, I, 201, 339

Burhen, Raymond, I, x

Burney, James, I, 363, 370

Burning Volcano, I, 49, 254, 310

Burun, II, 87, 135, 136, 202

Bystra River, I, 17

 

Cabbage eaters, II, 237

Cahen, Gaston, I, 355

Cakes, II, 160

Calamagrostis, II, 111

Calamagrostis arundinacea (Linnaeus), II, 29

Calamagrostis epigejos (L.) Roth, II, 29

Calamagrostis langsdorfii Trin., II, 29

Calamagrostis scabra Presl., II, 29

Calendar, I, 50, 332;

  II, 8, 107

California, I, 312, 314

Callotaria ursina (Linnaeus), II, 224

Campbell, John, I, 362

Canada, II, 25

Canal de Pico, II, 190, 191.

  See also “Channel, The”

Canes galei, II, 64, 117

Canis tundrarum Miller, II, 79

Cannon, I, 110, 128

Cannoneer, II, 146, 150

Canton, II, 25

Cape, II, 36

Card playing, II, 161, 162

Cardamine hirsuta L., II, 138, 179, 240

Cardamine pratensis L., II, 138, 179, 240

Cardamine umbellata Green, II, 138

Cardamines, II, 240

Cardot, J., II, 263

Caribou, II, 44

Caribou horns, II, 53

Cariguebeju, II, 219

Castor and Pollux, II, 116

Catarractes skua, II, 108

Catesby, Mark, II, 59, 60

Catherine I, I, 9;

  Bering’s report to, on his first expedition, I, 9

Caves on Bering Island, II, 172, 173, 198

Cedar (Pinus cembra) as remedy for scurvy, I, 262

Celery, II, 240

Cellar discovered on Kayak Island, II, 48, 49, 51

Cepphus columba Pallas, II, 80

Ceronthe, II, 178

Cerorhinca monocerata (Pallas), II, 80

Chamadoxes, II, 163

Chamaecerasi, II, 57

Chamaemorus, II, 239

Chamaenerion angustifolium (L.), II, 178

Chamaerhododendros laurifolio, flore flavo, II, 239

“Channel, The,” II, 73, 82, 83, 113, 122, 193, 206, 219, 244, 245

Chaplin, Peter, I, 10, 11, 19, opp. 20, 351, 357, 364, 367;

  II, 100

Chappe d’Auteroche, Jean, I, 362

Charcoal, II, 176, 178

Charlevoix, P. F. X. de, I, 356

Charr, II, 81

Chart of the voyage of Bering and Chirikov, I, opp. 348;

  note to accompany the chart, I, 330-348

Chauska Post, I, 20

Chechuev, Michael, I, 235;

  II, 150

Check-List of North American Birds,

  II, 81

Chekalov, Prokofei, I, 235

Chemodan, II, 163

Chentsov, Osip, I, 208, 281

Chernabura Island, I, 337;

  II, 105

Chernishev, Count, I, 22, 357

Chigachiganakh, II, 147

Chiginagak, Mt., I, 113, 335;

  II, 63

Chiginagak Bay, II, 63

Chignik Bay, I, 335

Chikhachev, Lieutenant, I, 297, 306, 308, 312, 317, 324;

  II, 22;

  death, I, 310, 321, 348

Chimaera, II, 66

Chimaera monstrosa Linn., II, 66

Chin piercing, II, 103

Chinese silk, I, 274;

  II, 92

Chinese tobacco (shar log), I, 31, 97, 99, 274, 304, 315

Chiniak, Cape, I, 346

Chirikov, Alexei, I, 7, 8;

  II, 15, 22, 25;

  command of one ship, I, 30;

  command of the St. Paul, I, 283;

  death, I, 310;

  decision to return, I, 297, 317, 324, 344;

  discovery of land (Cape Addington), I, 291, 342;

  fate, I, 328-329;

  instructions to Dementiev, I, 315;

  instructions to Savelev, I, 316, 323;

  landfall at Adak Island, II, 114;

  note on loss of his men, I, 311;

  rank, I, 31;

  report on the voyage of the St. Paul, I, 312-323, 358;

  sickness, I, 306, 308, 311, 322, 324-325, 347, 348;

  supplementary report to the Admiralty College, I, 324-327;

  at Yakutsk, I, 13

Chirikov Island, landfall of the St. Peter, I, 111, 112, 272, 335;

  II, 62

Chitina basin, II, 53

Choris, Louis, I, 369

Christian names, II, 149

Chukchi Cape, I, 30;

  II, 11;

  historical account, II, 104.

  See also Chukotski Cape

Chukchi country, I, 313

Chukchi Peninsula, II, 12, 54

Chukchi Promontory, II, 11, 13, 17, 18, 19;

  conception as extending to the north of and beyond East Cape, II, 11, opp. 101 (map)

Chukchis, I, 18;

  II, 110;

  Cossacks and, I, 21;

  Gvozdev’s report, I, 22;

  Melnikov and, I, 30;

  trade with America, II, 98

Chukotski Cape, I, 19, 22.

  See also Chukchi Cape

Chukotski Nos, II, 134

Chulym River, I, 20

Chytrew. See Khitrov

Citellus nebulicola Osgood, II, 79

Civil day, I, 50, 332;

  II, 33, 35, 63, 107

Cladophora glomerata, II, 46

Clay, II, 194

Claytonia, II, 238

Cleare, Cape, I, 333

Cliffs on Bering Island, II, 197, 200

Climate, Alaska and Kamchatka compared, II, 56;

  American, II, 54, 56;

  Bering Island, II, 153, 205

Clothing, shortage, II, 163, 180

Clouds in rapid flight, II, 116

Clusius, Carolus, II, 228

Clusius’ “Skua hojeri,” II, 108

Cochlearia, II, 84

Cochlearia danica, II, 240

Cochlearia oblongifolia D. C., II, 84

Cochlearia officinalis L., II, 84, 138, 179, 240

Cocks, Richard, I, 1

Codfish, II, 75

Coelopleurum gmelini (D. C.), II, 178, 240

Color of sea water, I, 290, 298, 299, 306, 318

Colymbus (Podiceps), II, 80

Commander Islands, I, 339;

  II, 131;

  flora, II, 29;

  ptarmigan, II, 138;

  publications relating in general to, II, 256;

  seaweed, II, 22

Community of goods, II, 148

Company Land, I, 2, opp. 2, 328;

  II, 18, 19, 244;

  Delisle map, II, 70;

  Gama Land and, II, 73;

  unreality, II, 25

Compass variation, I, 52

Conferva glomerata, II, 46

Conifers, II, 55;

  absence from Alaska Peninsula, II, 83

Conioselinum kamtschaticum Rupr., II, 178, 240

Constantinea Rosa-marina, II, 27

Cook, James, I, 353, 367;

  II, 12, 90, 102;

  on a decoction of pines for scurvy, I, 262;

  on native method of greeting, I, 148;

  on wooden caps of the Aleuts, I, 275

Cooking, in camp, II, 163

Coöperation, lack of, II, 26

Copper, II, 52, 53, 98

Copper (Medni) Island, I, 208, 234, 237, 276;

  II, 82, 126, 129, 131, 174, 184, 204;

  seen from Bering Island (ill.), II, 175

Copper-stained stone, I, 97, 98, 99, 271

Cordova, II, 41

Cormorants, I, 291, 306;

  II, 80, 237

Cornish gannet, II, 108

Cornus herbacea, II, 239

Cornus suecica L., II, 58, 239

Coronation Island, I, 291

Corvus corax principalis Ridgway, II, 59

Corvus stelleri, II, 60

Cossacks, II, 21, 22, 148, 149;

  character, II, 99, 100;

  Chukchis and, I, 21;

  Steller’s servant, II, 141, 172;

  trade with Americans, II, 99

Cottus scorpius, II, 81

Coville, F. V., II, 262, 263

Cow parsnip, II, 45

Coxe, William, I, 352, 363;

  II, ix, 256

Cranberries, II, 58, 239;

  leaves used for tea, II, 240;

  upland, II, 178, 239

Cress, II, 84, 179

Cross, Cape, I, 292, 342

Cross, wooden, II, 159

Croton, II, 238

Crowberries, II, 239;

  black, II, 84

Croyère. See Delisle de la Croyère

Crucifers, II, 138

Cryptoglaux tengmalmi (Gmelin), II, 110

Cummings, C. E., II, 263

Currents, I, 308, 322, 332;

  II, 30, 126

Cutting tools, II, 52, 53, 98

Cyanea capillata (Linn.), II, 28

Cyanocitta cristata (Linn.), II, 60

Cyanocitta stelleri, II, 60

Czaplicka, M. A., II, 47

 

Dagger, II, 47

Dahlgren, E. W., I, 365

Dall, W. H., I, 9, 14, 19, 353, 366, 367, 370, 371;

  II, 80, 100, 106, 113, 175, opp. 229, 258, 259, 260

Dampier, William, on manati, II, 229, 236;

  on sea bears (fur seals), II, 245

Danes, II, 89

Danish sea monkey, II, 66

Darafeev, Fedor, I, 235

Dates, II, 8.

  See also Day

Davidov, Ivan, I, 208, 281

Davidson, George, I, 367;

  II, 33, 113;

  Chirikov’s lost men, I, 311, 345;

  on the St. Peter’s course through Douglas Channel, I, 334, 335

Dawson, G. M., II, 257

Day, civil and astronomical, I, 50, 332;

  II, 33, 35, 63, 107

Dead reckoning. See Reckoning

Deaths, on Bering Island, II, 146, 154, 155;

  on the St. Peter, I, 192, 275, 281-282 (list), 338;

  II, 129

Decorations of the Aleuts, II, 102, 103

Deer, riding on, I, 13, 16

De Gama Land. See Gama Land

Delesseria crassifolia Rupr., II, 28

Delisle, Guillaume, I, 32, 356;

  location of Yezo, I, 3;

  northern hemisphere, section, July, 1714 (map), I, opp. 2

Delisle, J. N., I, 32, 350, 356, 357, 358, 360, 361;

  II, 6, 265;

  manuscript map of 1731, I, 358-359;

    II, 70, opp. 72 (ill.)

Delisle de la Croyère, Louis, I, 29, 32, 312;

  II, 5, 6, 22, 71, 242;

  death, I, 311, 322, 348;

  decision on first course to sail. May 4, 1741, I, 38, 284;

  instruments used, I, 365;

  location of Gama Land, I, 312, 332;

  location of Petropavlovsk, I, 36-37;

  location of Vaua, I, 283;

  sickness, I, 308

Dementiev, Avraam, I, 292, 312, 315, 323, 343, 345;

  II, 22;

  Chirikov’s written instructions to, I, 315, 345;

  failure to return to the St. Paul, I, 295, 316, 343

Dentalium, II, 143

Dentalium rectius Carpenter, II, 143

Derbi River, I, 13

Dergachev, Ilya, I, 219, 281;

  II, 146, 150

Dikaya Bay, II, 173, 197

Dikyi Mys, II, 197

Diomede Islands, II, 98

Diomedea albatrus, II, 75

Diomedea exulans, II, 23

Dippers (hats), I, 305

Divers, II, 80, 124;

  black-and-white, II, 106

Dixon, George, I, 368

Dixon’s Entrance, I, 342

Dobbs, Arthur, II, 265

Dobell, Peter, I, 369

Dock, II, 84

Dogfish, II, 59

Dolgoruki, Prince, I, 8;

  II, 133

Dolphins, II, 63, 64

Doshcheniki, I, 11

Douglas, Mt., I, 298, 346

Douglas Channel, I, 334, 335

Drift ice, II, 206;

  sea otters on, II, 219

Driftwood, I, 83, 87, 88, 94, 211, 279, 290;

  II, 105, 138, 144, 162, 207, 235, 240

Drunkenness, II, 20;

  Steller’s, II, 4

Ducks, I, 290, 291, 292, 298, 300, 301, 302, 317;

  II, 23, 80

Dugong, II, 139

Du Halde, J. B., I, 362

Dutch discoveries, II, 18

Dutch East India Company, efforts to find El Dorado, I, 2

Dutch mile, II, 8, 22

Dwelling discovered on Kayak Island, II, 52

Dybowski, B. I., II, 257, 260

 

Eagles, II, 237

Earpicks, II, 216

Earthquakes on Bering Island, II, 172, 198, 205, 207

East Cape, I, 19, 21, 25;

  II, 11

Edgecumbe, Cape, I, 292, 342

Edward, Cape, I, 292, 343, 345

Efintsov, Prokofei, I, 230, 282

Egermann, ——, II, 257

Ekaterinburg, II, 40

Ekelöf, J. A., II, 10

Elagin, Ivan, I, 297, 312, 317, 324, 348;

  II, 22;

  commendation and promotion, I, 322;

  manuscript map of Petropavlovsk in 1740, facsimile (map), I, opp. 34

Elias. See Kayak Island;

  St. Elias, Cape

Elizabeth, Cape, I, 298, 346

Elizabeth, Empress, II, 187

Emberiza nivalis, II, 81

Emelianov, Ivan, I, 219, 281

Emmons, G. T., on loss of Chirikov’s men, I, 311

Empetrum, II, 239

Empetrum nigrum L., II, 57, 58, 84, 239

Entale, II, 143

Epanchin. See Turinsk

Epilobium angustifolium (L.), II, 178, 240

Errors in longitude, I, 210, 256, 276, 308, 322, 332;

  II, 30, 107, 122, 126, 128

Eselberg. See Hesselberg

Eskimos of Greenland, II, 96

Eudoxia Islands, I, 113

Eumetopias jubata (Schreber), II, 62, 177

Eumetopias stelleri (Lesson), II, 62

Evans, A, W., II, 263

Evreinov, Ivan, death, I, 7;

  mission from Peter the Great, I, 6;

    II, 13

Expeditions, minor, I, 357

Explanatory note, II, 8

Exploration, lack of plan, II, 37

Eye shades, II, 102

 

Face, holes pierced in, II, 103

Face paint, II, 92, 102

Fadiev, Sidor, I, 295, 316

Fair weather, Mt., I, 297, 318, 346

Falco, I, 318

Falco islandus Brünnich, II, 214

Falcon feathers, II, 92, 102

Fallen, II, 236

Fallklappe, II, 236

Fathom, II, 8, 194

Fedorov, Evdokim, I, 326

Fedrowiz, Secretary, II, 249

Fedtschenko, Boris, II, 29, 58, 179, 264

Filipendula kamtschatica (Pallas), II, 240

Finsch, O., II, 259

Fir trees, I, 291, 314

Fire, on one of the Shumagin Islands, I, 141, 142;

  II, 77

Fire drill, II, 45

Fire-making apparatus, II, 45, 46, 49

Fireplace, I, 96, 98, 99, 145, 271, 273;

  II, 44, 45

Fireweed, purple, II, 178, 240

Fischer, J. E., I, 29, 353, 354;

  II, vii, ix, 9, 246, 247

Fish, II, 81;

  Alaska, II, 56;

  Bering Island, II, 237, 238;

  dried, II, 44;

  smoked, II, 48, 49

Fish nets, II, 48

Fistula ani, II, 158

Flatulence, II, 160

Floods on Bering Island, II, 207

Flour, II, 160

Flycatchers, II, 81

Fog, II, 123, 124, 127;

  Bering Island and, II, 194, 195

Foggy Island. See Tumannoi Island

Fonte, Admiral de, I, 360-361;

  II, 265.

  See also Fuentes

Food, Bering Island, I, 238, 279;

  II, 147, 148, 150, 160, 161;

  hooker St. Peter’s supplies, II, 182;

  on the St. Paul, I, 318, 319, 347;

  on the St. Peter, I, 76;

  shortage, I, 276

Footnotes, treatment of, II, 8

Forests, II, 47, 55

Forster, J. R., I, 363

Fortune (ship), I, 16, opp. 20

Fountain moss, II, 45

Four Mountains, Islands of, I, 302, 319, 346

Fox skins, II, 147

Fox tail, II, 53

Fox trap, II, 143, 144

Foxes, I, 96, 99;

  II, 99, 212;

  Arctic, II, 139, 209;

  black and red, II, 59, 79;

  blue, II, 47.

  See also Blue foxes

Fratercula arctica (Linnaeus), II, 108

Fratercula corniculata (Naumann), II, 80, 108

Fritillaria kamtschatcensis (L.), II, 178, 240

Froidevaux, Henri, I, 361

Fruits, II, 57

Fuci membranacei calyciformes, II, 27, 28

Fucus clavae effigie, II, 27, 28

Fucus evanescens, II, 22, 27

Fucus lapathi sanguinei foliis Tournef., II, 27, 28

Fucus vesiculosus Linnaeus, II, 22

Fuentes, Bartolomé de, I, 356, 361

Fulmars, I, 302;

  II, 105

Fulmarus glacialis (Linnaeus), II, 105

Fulmarus rodgersi, II, 109

Fumaria cucularia, II, 238

Funston, Frederick, II, 57, 58, 262

Fur seals, II, 63, 169, 176, 224;

  drawing of an individual by Waxel (ill.), II, opp. 229.

  See also Seals

 

(G), meaning, II, 8

Gabriel (ship). See St. Gabriel

Gadus macrocephalus Tilesius, II, 75

Gadus morrhua Linnaeus, II, 75

Gallois, Lucien, II, xi, 70, 71

Gama, Juan de, I, 2, opp. 2;

  II, 19, 71

Gama Land, I, 3;

  II, 18, 19, 72;

  Bering’s search for in the St. Peter, I, 55, 58, 67, 332;

  Chirikov’s search for in the St. Paul, I, 284;

  Company Land and, II, 73;

  location, I, 71, 312;

  non-existence, I, 328, 332;

  officers’ answer to Steller, about, II, 69, 70;

  search for, I, 313, 332

Gambling, II, 161, 162

Gannet, II, 108

Gardebol. See Hartepol

Gas gangrene, II, 158

Gavan Lake, II, 201

Gavanskoe Ozero, II, 201, 202

Gavia (Urinator), II, 80

Gebert, O. C., II, xi

Gentiana, II, 84, 88

Gentiana acuta Michx., II, 85

Gentiana frigida, II, 85

Geodesists, I, 7, 31, 32

Geology of Bering Island, II, 193;

  of Kayak Island, II, 57

George, Nicholas, II, xi

Gerasimov, A., II, 262

Gerfalcons, II, 213-214

German mile, I, 49;

  II, 8, 11, 22, 53, 101, 184

Gesner’s sea monkey, II, 64, 65, 66

Gibbs, George, I, 370

Gilbert, C. H., II, 263

Gladkovskaya Bay, II, 150

Glass beads, II, 92

Glupyshi, II, 105

Gmelin, Johann Friedrich, II, 28

Gmelin, Johann Georg, I, 29, 351, 360;

  II, 2, 5, 251;

  life and works, brief account, II, 242;

  relations with Steller, II, 246;

  Steller’s letter to, about the voyage (Appendix B), II, 242;

  Steller’s letters to, II, 256

Gmelin, Otto, II, 242, 251, 256, 265

Gmelin, Samuel Gottlieb, II, 27, 28, 67

Gmelina, generic name, II, 246

Gold islands, I, 2, 355

Golder, F. A., I, 349, 357, 359, 367, 371;

  II, ix, 65;

  biographical note on Steller, I, 1;

  “Guide to Materials,” II, 72;

  plants collected, II, 85;

  preface to Steller’s journal, II, vii;

  “Russian Expansion,” II, 70, 72

Golets, II, 81

Golovin, Nikolai, proposal of sea expedition from Russia to Kamchatka, I, 27

Goose grass, II, 240

Gorbea River, I, 13

Gorelaya (Burning) Volcano, I, 49

Gorin, calker, I, 295

Gorlanov, student, II, 247

Graaf’s map, II, 19

Gradmann, Robert, II, 243, 265

Gramen paniculatum, II, 102

Gramen paniculatum arundinaceum, II, 29

Granite on Bering Island, II, 196

Grass, decorations of, II, 102;

  floating, I, 297, 301, 306, 318, 321;

  roots stuffed in the nose, I, 305, 320;

  sea, I, 289, 321.

  See also Sweet grass

Grass mat (ill.), I, opp. 305

Gray, Asa, II, 260

Graywacke, II, 57, 79

Great Sitkin Island, I, 168, 275, 338;

  volcano on, II, 112, 113

Grebnitskii, N. A., II, 257, 258

Greely, A. W., I, 361, 362, 367

Greenland, II, 96

Greenland pigeons, II, 80, 105

Grinnell, Joseph, II, 264

Grisola, II, 81

Guillemard, F. H. H., I, 370;

  II, 257

Gulls, I, 290, 292, 298, 300, 301, 302, 318;

  II, 23, 32, 105, 108, 109;

  black gull, II, 75;

  river gulls, II, 111;

  various kinds, II, 80;

  Wayel, II, 109

Gunfire, I, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 94

Gvozdev, M. S., I, 351, 357;

  II, 12;

  voyage to America in 1732, I, 21

 

Haematopus bachmani (Audubon), II, 105

Hail, II, 121, 122, 123

Hair seals, II, 30, 59, 63.

  See also Seals

Haliaeetus leucocephalus alascanus Townsend, II, 237

Haliaeetus leucocephalus (Linnaeus), II, 237

Hallager, Morten, I, 363

Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. See Petropavlovsk

Harlequin duck, II, 23

Harriman Alaska Expedition, II, 48, 49, 67, 81

Harris, John, I, 362

Hartepol (Gardebol Herdebol), the assayer, I, 320;

  II, 40

Hats, wooden, I, 149, 274, 275, 305, 320;

  II, 102, 103;

  specimen (ill.), I, opp. 304

Hawk, I, 318

Hawser, II, 89

Hazy Islands, I, 292, 342

Head winds on the St. Peter along 53rd parallel, I, 127;

  II, 67, 69

Heeres, J. E., I, 355

Helleborus trifolius, II, 238

Hemilepidotus hemilepidotus (Tilesius), II, 62, 81

Heracleum lanatum Michx., II, 45, 178, 239

Heracleum sphondylium, II, 45

Herba britannica, name, II, 85

Herbs, II, 86.

  See also Antiscorbutic herbs;

    Plants

Herdebol. See Hartepol

Hernández, Francisco, II, 228, 232

Hesselberg, Andreas, I, 312;

  II, 21, 115

  death, I, 226, 282;

    II, 154

Heuchera, II, 238

Hinchinbrook, Cape, I, 98, 100, 333

Histrionicus histrionicus, II, 23

Hitchcock, A. S., II, 29

Hodge, F. W., II, xi, 90, 91, 96, 98

Holmberg, H. J., I, 370

Homann, J. B., I, 3, 314;

  II, 25

Hondo, II, 14

Hooker St. Peter, arrival at Petropavlovsk, I, 257, 280, 341;

  attempt to reach Okhotsk, I, 263, 280;

  beginning of construction, I, 234, 278, 341;

    II, 177;

  crowded quarters, II, 183;

  decision at consultation on Sept. 4, 1742, I, 266;

  decision to build, I, 233, 278;

    II, 174, 175;

  departure from Bering Island homeward, I, 243, 280, 341;

    II, 183;

  dimensions, I, 239, 240, 278, 341;

    II, 181;

  final return to Petropavlovsk, I, 267, 280;

  launching, I, 239, 240, 280, 341;

    II, 181, 182;

  leak, I, 245, 258, 266, 280, 341;

    II, 185;

  log book, I, 239-269;

  preparations for sailing, I, 241, 279;

    II, 181;

  supplies, II, 182

Hoops on barrels, II, 120

Howe, M. A., II, 27, 28, 46

Hoyt, Sam, I, x

Huckleberries, II, 239

Hudson Strait, I, 314

Huts, building for winter quarters on Bering Island, II, 138, 142;

  Kayak Island, I, 97, 98, 99, 271;

  Unalaska (ill.), I, opp. 305;

  underground native, II, 105

Hydrodamalis gigas, II, 139

Hydrolapathum sanguineum (L.) Stackh, II, 28

Hylocichla guttata (Pallas), II, 81

 

Ice, Bering Sea, II, 18;

  Kamchatka coast, II, 17

Icya, II, 219

Ieso. See Yezo

Ignes lambentes, II, 116

Images, ivory, I, 149, 274-275, 305

Impassable Rock, II, 192

Initial signatures, meaning, II, 8

Instructions, secret and public, I, 31

Irkutsk, I, 12, 355;

  II, 2, 3, 4, 248

Iron, II, 49, 52, 53, 97, 143, 144;

  arrow points, II, 98;

  kettle, II, 103;

  ore, American aborigenes and, II, 98

Islands of Four Mountains, I, 302, 319, 346

Isnard, Albert, I, 361

Isopa Cape, I, 49, 310;

  II, 130, 131

Iturup, II, 73

Ivanov, Alexei, I, 235, 281;

  exploration of Bering Island, I, 233, 237;

    II, 168, 173;

  habitation on Bering Island, I, 215;

    II, 146, 159;

  search for anchors, I, 234;

  Waxel’s report sent by, I, 270, 281

Ivanov, Gulakhition, I, 235

Ivanov’s (Alexei) stan, II, 192

Ivonik, Ignatius, I, 235

Izmailov, Grigori, I, 235

Izmailov, Mikhaelo, I, 12

 

(J), meaning, II, 8

Jacob’s mussel, II, 44

Jansen, Nils, I, 212, 281;

  II, 21

Japan, I, 26, 328;

  on Delisle map, II, 71;

  Spanberg’s voyages to, II, 2, 14

Jefferys, Thomas, I, 359;

  II, 11, 71, 91, 101

Jelly fishes, II, 28

Jiya, II, 219

Jochelson, Waldemar, I, 370;

  II, 96

John of Ghent gull, II, 108

Jordan, D. S., II, 224, 263

Journal, use of the word, I, 36

Journal of the St. Paul, I, 283-311, 358;

  facsimile of a page (ill.), I, opp. 290

Journal of G. W. Steller. See Steller’s journal

Juan de Gama Land. See Gama Land

Juan Fernandez Island, II, 229, 236

Julius, Albertus, II, 209

Juniper, II, 239

 

Kachikov, Osip, I, 308

Kaempfer, Engelbert, I, 356

Kaigorodal, Grigori, I, 235

Kalodin, Dimitri, I, 235

Kamchadals, I, 17, 256;

  diet, II, 104;

  grass used as food, II, 45;

  method of catching the starik, II, 125;

  origin of American natives and, II, 46

Kamchatka, II, viii, 1, 10;

  Bering Island mistaken for, by the St. Peter, I, 208, 276, 339;

    II, 133;

  climate, II, 56;

  coastal ice, II, 17;

  discovery, I, 4;

  flood of 1738, II, 207;

  harsh treatment of natives, II, 13;

  instructions about, for Bering’s second expedition, I, 29;

  Luzhin and Evreinov in, I, 6;

    II, 13;

  natives, I, 17;

  sea otters, II, 31, 215;

  sighted from the hooker St. Peter, I, 247;

  snow, II, 206;

  Steller in, II, 2;

  supposed sight of, from Bering Island, II, 204;

  survey of southern part, I, 20

Kamchatka Cape, Gvozdev’s expedition, I, 22

Kamchatka Peninsula, II, 54

Kamchatka River, II, 127, 128, 206, 244;

  Bering’s first voyage from, I, 18;

  Gvozdev’s expedition, I, 22

Kamchatkan sea beaver, II, 31

Kamenushka, II, 23

Kapustnik, II, 237

Karaga, II, 83

Karaginski Island, I, 26

Kasha, I, 308, 318, 347

Katalla, II, 41

Kattch, II, 45

Kayak (St. Elias) Island, I, 96, 98, 271, 332;

  II, 17;

  departure from, I, 97;

    II, 60;

  from the southeast (ill.), II, opp. 44;

  geology, II, 57;

  Khitrov’s sketch map (ill.), II, 42;

  landfall by the St. Peter, I, 97, 271, 332;

    II, 35, 36;

  modern map, II, 43;

  physical geography, summary, II, 55;

  report on, from Khitrov’s journal, I, 99;

  rock (mountain) extending into the sea, II, 49;

  rock fall on western shore, II, opp. 45 (ill.), 49;

  Stejneger’s visit to, II, 41;

  Steller’s route on, identification, II, 41;

  watering place, II, 41, opp. 45 (ills.);

  western shore seen from the west (ill.), II, opp. 44

Keeler, C. A., II, 81, 264

Kenai Peninsula, I, 298, 318, 346;

  II, 44

Kestrel, I, 318

Khakhalcha, I, 309

Kharitonov, Nikita, I, 193, 281;

  II, 120

Khitrov, Sofron, I, 235, 312;

  II, 21, 61, 128;

  on Bering Island, II, 133, 145, 151;

  description of Bering Island, I, 236;

  feeling against, II, 152;

  journal, I, 211;

  Kayak Island, exploration, I, 96;

    II, 37;

  Kayak Island, report, I, 98, 99, 271, 332;

    II, 52;

  Kayak Island, sketch map, I, 99;

    II, 42 (ill.);

  log book of the St. Peter, I, 36, 358;

  log book of St. Peter, facsimile of page, I, opp. 148;

  misadventures and mismanagement, II, 20, 88, 89, 113, 125;

  mistake about Kamchatka, II, 133;

  Nagai Island, I, 141, 142;

    II, 87;

  promotion in 1753, I, 329;

  Shumagin Islands, I, 141, 142, 273, 336;

   II, 87, 89;

  Shumagin Islands, facsimile of map of, I, opp. 148;

    II, 76;

  sickness, I, 226, 229, 277;

    II, 152;

  statement of condition of St. Peter on Bering Island, I, 231, 232;

  Steller’s criticism, II, 20, 88, 152, 243, and passim;

  Wingham Island, I, 96

Khitrov, Cape, II, 194

Khlynov, II, 48

Khotyaintsov, Nikita, I, 120, 230, 282;

  II, 21, 155, 159

Kincaid, J., II, 85

Kirensk Post, II, 14, 15, 248

Kiselev (Kisselov), Alexei, I, 192, 281;

  II, 119

Kishinouye, K., II, 263

Kiska Island, II, 82, 106;

  landfall of the St. Peter, I, 199, 275, 339;

    II, 121, 124;

  St. Paul’s approach, I, 347

Kisselov. See Kiselev

Kitova Ryechka, II, 192, 214

Kittiwake, II, 111

Kittlitz, F. H. von, I, 370

Kjellman, F. R., II, 22, 259, 260, 261

Klementev, Alexei, I, 230, 282

Kletsandek Creek, II, 53

Klinckofström, Baron, I, 15

Klipp-ente, II, 23

Klykov, M. A., II, 257

Knives, I, 304;

  II, 49, 51, 52, 97, 98;

  native (Unalaska) (ills.), I, opp. 305;

  palma, II, 47 (with ill.), 142

Kodiak Island, I, 334;

  II, 106

Kolessov, commander of Kamchatka, II, 20

Kolyma River, I, 19, 20, 25, 29, 328

Kolyuchin Island, I, 328

Komandor Bay, II, 132, 200, 226, 240;

  site where wrecked expedition wintered (ill.), II, opp. 158

Konavalov, Arkhip, I, 235

Korovin Volcano, II, 113

Koryak interpreter, II, 92, 93, 94

Koryaks, I, 18;

  II, 20

Koryatskaya Volcano, I, 49

Koshloki, II, 220

Koslov, Fedor, I, 7

Kostenko, N. M., II, xi

Kot, II, 245

Kotzebue, Otto von, I, 369

Kotzebue Sound, II, 144

Kozelskaya Volcano, I, 49

Kozirevski, Ivan, II, 13

Kozlova Ryechka, II, 214

Kozlovo Pole, II, 176, 214

Kransnoi, Andrei, I, 235

Krasheninnikov, S. P., I, 29, 351, 360, 363;

  II, 28, 91, 99, 100, 209, 222, 265

Krasilnikov, Andrei, I, 32

Krasnaya ryba, II, 48

Krasnoyarsk, II, 3, 242

Kronotski, Cape, I, 247;

  II, 143, 154, 169, 185, 186

Kronotski, Gulf of, II, 134

Kruber, A. A., II, 266

Krusenstern, A. J. von, I, 353, 369

Kuklanka, II, 125

Kukushkin, Maffei, I, 235;

  II, 149

Kuleksa, Dimitri, I, 235

Kuliki, I, 298

Kunashiri, II, 73

Kurile Islands, II, 84, 90, 91;

  confused with Semichi Islands, II, 126, 127;

  discovery, I, 4;

  flood of 1738, II, 207;

  Luzhin and Evreinov among, I, 6;

    II, 13;

  sea-otter hunting, II, 222;

  sea otters, II, 32, 126, 215;

  Spanberg’s voyage to, II, 14;

  Steller’s exploration, II, 3;

  Vries and, I, 2;

    II, 18

Kurile tea, II, 239, 240

Kurils (tribe), I, 17

Kutakhshu, II, 178, 240

Kuznetsov, E. V., I, 354

 

Labrador tea, II, 239

Lagopus, II, 209

Lagopus lagopus (Linnaeus), II, 81

Lagopus ridgwayi Stejneger, II, 138

Lagotis Gärtner, II, 246

Lagotis glauca var. gmelini (Cham. et Schlecht.), II, 246

Lagunov, Ivan, I, 230, 282;

  II, 21, 155

Lahontan, A. L. de, II, 91

Lake River, II, 202

Lakes on Bering Island, II, 195, 201, 202

Lamna cornubica (Gmelin), II, 59, 140

Lamuts, I, 16

Lances, II, 98

Land, first sighted by the St. Peter, July 16, I, 93, 332;

  II, 26, 33;

  imaginary sight from St. Peter on Aug. 18 and 19, II, 69, 73, 74;

  nearness according to Steller, II, 27, 30, 32;

  nearness evidenced by west winds, II, 68, 108, 126;

  sighted on Sept. 24, II, 24

Langsdorff, G. H. von, I, 369

Language of the Aleuts, II, 91

Lapathum, II, 86

Lapathum folio cubitali, II, 84

Lapérouse, J. F. de G., I, 353, 368

Lapis manati, II, 236

Lappo-Danilevski, Professor, I, x

“Large country.” See Bolshaya zemlya

Lari, II, 23

Larus glaucescens Naumann, II, 75, 109

Larus marinus Linnaeus, II, 109

Latax lutris (Linn.), II, 32

Lau, assistant surgeon, II, 22

Lauridsen, Peter, I, 352, 353, 366;

  II, 71, 113

Lazukov, Alexei, I, 235

Leak of the hooker St. Peter, I, 245, 258, 266, 280, 341;

  II, 185

Leathern knapsacks, II, 163

Lécluse, Charles de, II, 228

Ledum, II, 239

Ledum palustre L., II, 239

Lena River, I, 13

Leningrad. See Petrograd;

  St. Petersburg

Lepekhin, Thomas, I, 235;

  II, 40

Lettre d’un officier de la marine russienne, I, 362;

  II, 6, 265

Leupe, P. A., I, 355

Levashev, Ensign, I, 310

Library of Congress, I, 353, 358;

  II, 254

Lice, II, 243

Lighthouse (Mayachni) Cape, I, 49;

  II, 130

Lilies, Kamchatkan brown, II, 240;

  Saranna, II, 178

Lilljeborg, W., II, 261

Lime in water, II, 77

Linnaeus, Carolus, “Critica botanica,” II, 246;

  “Fauna suecica,” II, 28;

  “Systema naturae,” II, 28

Linné, Karl von, II, 246.

  See also Linnaeus, Carolus

Liquor, I, 18, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 48

Lisianski Strait, I, 293, 345, 346

Lissonkovaya Bay, II, 192, 201, 226

Listvennik, I, 18

Litvinov, Mr., II, 58

Lodiya (boat), I, 16

Log book of the hooker St. Peter, I, 239-269

Log book of the St. Paul, I, 283, 330, 358.

  See also Journal of the St. Paul

Log book of the St. Peter, I, 36-239, 358;

  arrangement of columns, I, opp. 52;

  facsimile of a page, I, opp. 52;

  facsimile of a page kept by Khitrov, I, opp. 148;

  method of keeping, I, 50, 332;

  several copies, differences, etc., I, 36;

  symbols, meaning, I, 50

Longitude, errors in, I, 210, 256, 276, 308, 322, 332;

  II, 30, 107, 122, 126, 128

Lonicera coerulea L., II, 57

Lopatka, Cape, II, 11, 13, 18, 127, 134, 206

Lower Kamchatka Post, I, 17;

  II, 3, 249

Lucas, F. A., II, 261, 262

Ludolf, Professor, II, 1

Lukoshka, II, 48

Lunda cirrhata Pallas, II, 80

Lutris Lin., II, 31, 214

Luzhin, Fedor, I, 7;

  II, 13;

  mission from Peter the Great, I, 6

Lycopodium rupestre, II, 238

Lyesnaya Ryechka, II, 147, 150, 169, 169-170, 192

 

Maak, R., II, 47

Mackerel sharks, II, 59

Macrocystis pyrifera (Turner), II, 49

Magpies, II, 59

Maikov, L. N., I, 358

Mainland, II, 78;

  reasons for not landing on, II, 53.

  See also America

Makoai, II, 140

Makovska, I, 12

Maldive Islands, II, 25

Malma, II, 81

Maltsan, Ivan, I, 235;

  II, 149

Manatee (tropical), II, 139, 229, 236

Manati (northern sea cow), II, 139, 140, 228;

  dried and salted meat, II, 182;

  fat, II, 161.

  See also Sea cows

Manati, Cape, I, 236, 244, 278;

  II, 184, opp. 195 (ill.)

Manuscript sources, I, 349;

  II, 253, 264

Map makers, II, 10, 25

Marcasites, II, 57

Marggraf, Georg, II, 31, 32, 218, 219

Marine animals, as indication of near land, II, 30

Markham, C. R., II, 10

Marmots, II, 79

Martes, II, 99

Martin, G. C., II, 57

Masefield, John, II, 229, 236

Mayachni Cape, I, 49

Mayak, II, 130

Measures and weights, II, 8

Medical discussion of Bering’s death, II, 158

Medicines, II, 85, 178

Medni Island. See Copper Island

Mednoi Ostrov, II, 204.

  See also Copper Island

Medvyedki, II, 220

Meeraff, II, 66

Meereiche, II, 22

Megalestri skua (Bruennich), II, 108

Megalocottus platycephalus (Pallas), II, 62

Melnikov, Afanasi, I, 30

Mercator, Gerardus, II, 10

Mergus, II, 106

Merriam, C. H., II, x, 139

Meriensia maritima (L.), II, 178, 240

Messerschmidt, Brigitta, II, 2

Mezhov, V. I., I, 352, 354

Michagatka, II, 80

Michelson, T., II, 47

Middendorff, A. T. von, I, 369;

  II, opp. 229

Mile, German and other, I, 49;

  II, 8, 11, 22, 53, 101, 184

Miller, J. E., II, 255

Miller, Walter, II, 255

Mimulus luteus, II, 238

Mineral resources, II, 40, 57

Ministry of Marine, Paris, I, 350.

  See also Service Hydrographique de la Marine

Ministry of Marine, Petrograd, archives, I, 371;

  manuscripts, I, 349

Mirror, II, 92

Mojave (ship), II, 41

Monkey story of Albertus Julius, II, 209

Montague Island, I, 100, 333

Montessus de Ballore, F. de, II, 205

Moozemleck River, I, 314

Morozewicz, J., II, 175, 258

Morskaya kapusta, II, 237

Morskaya korova, II, 227

Morskaya svinya, II, 64

Morskoi kot, II, 245

Morskoi Sbornik, I, 353, 357

Morskoi volk, II, 140

Mosimont, II, 207

Mouflon, II, 207

Mountain ash, II, 239

Mountains, I, 293, 297, 303, 305, 318, 319, 321;

  American and Asiatic compared, II, 54;

  Bering Island, II, 194;

  marine origin, II, 198, 199;

  seen from Bering Island in the north-east, II, 173, 174;

  sighted on the St. Peter, July 16, II, 33

Muller, Frederik, II, 10

Müller, G. F., I, 29, 351, 352, 359;

  II, x, 2, 14, 71, 91, 101, 113, 190, 242, 247, 249

Murie, James, II, 230

Murrelet, II, 124

Murres, I, 291;

  II, 80

Mus citillus, II, 79

Muscicapa guttata, II, 81

Mussels, II, 44

Myiochanes richardsoni (Swainson), II, 81

Myoxocephalus scorpius (Linnaeus), II, 81

Mytilus californianus Conrad, II, 44

 

Nachod, Oskar, I, 355

Nadezhda (ship), I, 49

Nagai Island, I, 142, 336;

  II, 17, 75, 77, 82, 87, 105;

  Steller’s visit, II, 77

Names of members of the expedition, I, 235, 281, 321

Nartov, A. K., I, 358

Nasturtium officinale, II, 240

Nasturtium palustre (Leysser), II, 240

Nasturtiums, II, 138

Natives (American), Alaskans, I, 96, 97, 98, 99, 272;

  Aleuts, I, 148, 275;

    II, 90, 96;

  attempt to detain interpreter, I, 147, 148, 274;

  first meeting with, I, 147, 273, 303, 320, 337, 347;

    II, 52, 90;

  greeting by shouts, I, 147, 148, 273;

    II, 90, 93;

  origin similar to Kamchadals, II, 46;

  report on bringing them to St. Petersburg, I, 325-326;

  signs of, found by Steller, II, 44.

  See also Aleuts;

    Tlingits

Ne Obkhodimyi Utes, II, 192, 197, 215

Near Island, I, 142, 336;

  II, 75, 89

Nebaranov, Ivan, I, 209, 281;

  II, 136, 159

Needles, I, 304, 315;

  thread and, II, 103

Nelson, E. W., II, 261

Nephritox, II, 158

Nepropusk, II, 192

Nereocystis lutkeanus Mertens, II, 67

Nereocystis priapus (Gmelin), II, 27, 48, 67

Nerka, II, 48

Nettles, II, 48;

  sea, II, 28

Neue Nordische Beyträge, I, 360;

  II, vii, x, 255, 256;

  Pallas’ map, II, 202, 203

New Denmark, II, 96

New Russia, I, 281

Newton, Alfred, II, 23, 109

Nibi, II, 91

Nichi, II, 91

Nikiforov, Stepan, I, 235

Nikolski, II, 201, 205

Nizhegorodok, Vasili, I, 310

Nordenskiöld, A. E., I, 366, 370;

  II, 10, 256, 257, 260

North Pacific Ocean, extent of knowledge at beginning of eighteenth century, I, 1, opp. 2 (Delisle map of 1714);

  navigators, I, 353;

  references on knowledge of, prior to Bering, I, 355;

  Russia’s work in charting coasts, I, 4

North Pacific region, map by the St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences, 1758, showing results of Bering’s two expeditions, II, opp. 101

Northeast passage, I, 328

Northern Cape, Bering Island, II, 192

Nos, II, 36, 134

Nose, piercing, II, 103

Nosok, II, 177

Novaya Zemlya, I, 328

Novgorod, Archbishop of, II, 1

Nuchek, II, 52

Nuremberg map makers, II, 25

Nyctea nyctea (Linnaeus), II, 111

Nystad, Peace of, I, 6

 

Ob River, I, 12, 355

Ocean Cape, I, 346

Odonthalia sp., II, 27

Odonthalia aleutica (Mart.), II, 27

Odonthalia kamtschatica I. G. Ag., II, 27

Officers, behavior to Steller, II, 23, 24, 26;

  criticized by Steller, II, 157;

  haughtiness, II, 99;

  rank and pay, I, 31

Ohlöffel, II, 216

Okalee Channel, II, 36

Okhota River, I, 35;

  II, 20

Okhotsk, I, 13;

  attempt of the hooker St. Peter to reach, I, 263, 280;

    II, 187;

  Chirikov and, I, 280, 325, 329;

  departure of second expedition, June, 1740, I, 34;

  miscarriage of plans for second expedition, I, 32;

  Pisarev and, I, 28, 32;

  shipbuilding, I, 34;

  ships for the second expedition, I, 30, 32;

  Spanberg and, II, 14;

  Steller at, II, 2, 3

Okhotsk (galiot), I, 310;

  II, 187

Okhotsk, Sea of, II, 28

Okulov, Ivan, I, 235, 281;

  II, 169

Oladi, II, 160

Olkhon Island, II, 198

Olor columbianus (Ord), II, 80

Olson, J. E., I, 366

Olyutora, II, 18, 100, 154, 214

Olyutorsk, II, 154

Ommaney, Cape, I, 292, 314, 342

Omont, H., I, 361

Oncorhynchus nerka (Walbaum), II, 48

Osgood, W. H., II, 224, 264

Ostrovnoi Mys, II, 201

Ostyaks, I, 12

Otter Strait, I, 337

Otters. See Sea otters

Ovens, II, 160, 161, 181

Ovis musimon and nivicola, II, 207

Ovtsin, Dimitri, I, 235;

  II, 133, 136;

  counterstatement on condition of St. Peter on Bering Island, I, 231;

  rank in 1757, I, 329

Ovtsin, Nikita, I, 223, 282

Owls, II, 110, 111, 125

Oxycoccos, II, 58

Ozernaya River, II, 202, 208

 

Pacific Ocean. See North Pacific Ocean

Paddles, II, 53, 96

Painting the face, II, 92

Pallas, P. S., I, 353, 360;

  II, 8, 9, 21, 252, and passim;

  map in Vol. 1 of Neue Nordische Beyträge, II, 202, 203;

  omission of Steller’s statement as to American mainland, II, 101;

  Preface to Steller’s description of Bering Island, II, 189;

  publication of Steller’s work, II, vii, x;

  “Zoögraphia rosso-asiatica,” II, 75, 258

Palma, II, 47 (with ill.), 142

Pamyatniki Sibirskoi Istorii, I, 351, 354

Panov, Fedor, I, 230, 282

Paramushir Island, II, 224

Paris, Ministry of Marine at, I, 350.

  See also Service Hydrographique de la Marine

Paris Academy of Sciences, II, 10, 265

Parker, G. H., II, 224

“Particular prayer,” II, 40

Partinyagin, Ivan, I, 235

Pashennoi, Karp, I, 204, 281

Patronymics, II, 149

Pavlov Volcano, II, 73

Pavlutski, Dmitri, I, 21, 30

Pay of members of second expedition, I, 31

Peck, C. H., II, 264

Pecten caurinus Gould, II, 44

Pecten jacobaeus, II, 44

Pekarskii, Petr, II, 6, 60, 91, 209, 222, 237, 247, 249, 252, 253, 258

Pelecani, II, 80, 105

Pelecanus bassanus, II, 108, 237

Peleduye, I, 20

Pennant, Thomas, II, 105, 258

Penzhina, Sea of, II, 28, 56, 247

Peregrebnoi Mys, II, 192

Perfieev, Vasili, I, 235

Peril Strait, I, 311

Perlin, II, 89

Perm, II, 3

Pesci, II, 139

Pesets, II, 139, 213

Peshchera, II, 197

Peter the Great, I, 364;

  II, 10, 13, 187;

  death, I, 8;

  facsimile of orders for Bering’s first expedition with comments in his own handwriting (ill.), I, opp. 7;

  interest in the problem of the relation of Asia and America, I, 4, 6;

  orders (Dec. 23, 1724) for Bering’s first expedition, I, 6

Petrels, II, 108

Petrified wood, II, 207

Petrograd, Ministry of Marine, I, 349, 371;

  Steller’s journal, II, vii.

  See also St. Petersburg

Petropavlovsk, II, 20;

  arrival of Bering, Oct. 6, 1740, I, 34;

  arrival of the hooker St. Peter, I, 257, 280;

    II, 186;

  facsimile of manuscript map by Elagin, 1740 (map), I, opp. 34;

  final return of the hooker St. Peter, I, 267;

  harbor from the north (ill.), II, opp. 186;

  hooker St. Peter enters, I, 256, 267;

  latitude and longitude, I, 36;

  list of men registered, Dec. 9, 1741, I, 327;

  looking south (ill.), I, opp. 35;

  monument to Bering (ill.), II, opp. 186;

  return of the St. Paul to, I, 310, 348

Petrov, Ivan, I, 206, 281

Pewee, II, 81

Phalacrocorax dilophus cincinnatus (Brandt), II, 80

Phalacrocorax pelagicus robustus Ridgway, II, 80

Phalacrocorax perspicillatus Pallas, II, 237

Philophei (Leszczynski), I, 12

Phoca Richardii Gray, II, 59

Phoca ursina and leonina, II, 63

Phocaena, II, 64

Physical geography of Bering Island, II, 189;

  of Kayak Island, II, 55

Pica pica hudsonia (Sabine), II, 59

Pico, Canal de, II, 190, 191.

  See also “Channel, The”

Pierleine, II, 89

Pigeon guillemot, II, 80

Pilcher, J. T., II, xi;

  comment on Bering’s death, II, 158

Pine, I, 94, 291, 314;

  prostrate nut, I, 262

Pinnace, II, 169

Pinnacle Rock, I, 95, 333;

  II, opp. 44 (ills.)

Pinus cembra, I, 262

Piper, C. V., II, xi

Pisarev, Grigori, instructions in relation to Bering’s second expedition, I, 28;

  worthlessness, I, 32

Pits dug on Bering Island, II, 144, 145, 146

Plants, II, 56;

  Bering Island, list of chief plants and roots with identifications, II, 178, 238;

  distribution, II, 55;

  edible, II, 239;

  St. Elias, Cape, II, 238;

  Shumagin Islands, II, 84;

  Steller’s plant catalogues (see under Steller, G. W.);

  Steller’s collection, II, 50

Pla-un, II, 140

Plautin, Michael, I, 297, 308, 312, 317, 324;

  II, 22;

  death, I, 310, 321, 348

Plectrophenax nivalis (Linnaeus), II, 81

Plenisner, Frederic, I, 235;

  II, 21, 34, 86, 137, 138, 142, 147, 148, 149, 171, 244, 249

Plevun (plebun), II, 140

Plieninger, W. H. T., II, 242, 246, 248, 249, 256

Podvods, II, 134, 137

Polecat, II, 99

Polkovnikov, Nariazhev, I, 295

Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, I, 351, 371

Polonskii, A. S., I, 357, 364

Polovina, II, 150, 175, 192, 214;

  Mt. Steller from (ill.), II, opp. 194

Poludennyi Mys, II, 197

Polygonum viviparum L., II, 178, 240

Polypodium fragrans, II, 238

Pood (pud), I, 13, 48;

  II, 8, 20

Popkov, Vasili, I, 219, 218

Popof Island, II, 106

Popov, Alexei, I, 208, 281;

  II, 136, 159

Popov, M., I, 355

Popov, Simeon, I, 32

Porpoises, I, 290, 317;

  II, 64, 111

Port Moller, II, 78

Possession of a new country, mark of, II, 159

Potentilla, II, 238

Potentilla anserina L., II, 240

Potentilla fruticosa L., II, 239

Pound, Russian, II, 8

Povorotni Cape, I, 49;

  II, 130, 131

Prayers, II, 116, 182, 183, 187

Preble, E. A., II, 224

Precious metals, I, 31

Prefaces, I, ix;

  II, vii;

  Pallas’ preface to Steller’s description of Bering Island, II, 189;

  to Steller’s journal, II, 9

Presents for natives, I, 31, 97, 98, 99, 141, 147, 148, 149, 272, 274, 304, 315;

  II, 51, 92, 93, 103

Priapi Lin., II, 28

Pribilof Islands, II, 28, 226

Prikashckik, II, 116

Prince William Sound, I, 98, 333

Prival, II, 223

Procellaria glacialis, II, 105

Promysel, II, 147, 167

Providence, Cape, I, 335

Provisions, list of baggage and, of each member of first expedition, I, 235

Ptarmigans, II, 81, 138, 141, 144, 150

Pteridophytes, II, 179

Pteris pedata, II, 238

Pteronura brasiliensis (Blumenbach), II, 219

Ptychoramphus aleuticus (Pallas), II, 80

Published sources, I, 351

Pud. See Pood

Puffin Point, I, 292, 342

Puffins, II, 80;

  Atlantic puffin, II, 108

Pulmonaria maritima, II, 240

Purga, I, 17

Pustolga, I, 318

Putorius, II, 99

Pyrenees, II, 198

Pyrites, II, 57

Pyrola, II, 240

Pyrola minor L., II, 178, 179, 240

 

Quadus, Matthias, II, 10

Quarrels, Steller’s, II, 6, 7

Quartz on Bering Island, II, 198, 200

Quast, Mathijs, I, 2, 355, 356

Quercus marina, II, 22, 27

 

Rain water, I, 297, 309, 319

Rainbows, II, 117, 118, 119

Rakovaya Bay, I, 47

Ramsha, II, 81

Range Island, II, 106

Rangifer stonei Allen, II, 44

Rank of officers, I, 31;

  of officers and crew of the St. Paul, I, 326, 327;

  of the St. Peter, I, 235

Raspberries, II, 57;

  yellow, II, 239

Ravens, II, 59, 81, 237

Ray, John, II, 2, 218;

  “Synopsis methodica avium et piscium,” II, 108;

  “Synopsis methodica stirpium britannicarum,” II, 247

Ray’s Cornish gannet, II, 108

Ray’s redshank, II, 105

Reckoning, errors, I, 210, 256, 276, 308, 322, 332;

  II, 30, 107, 122, 126, 128

Red-hot stones, II, 44

Redshanks, II, 106

Reed grass, II, 28

Reefs on Bering Island, II, 197, 200

References, I, 353;

  II, 251

Reichard, ——, II, 251

Reindeer bones, II, 44

Relics of Bering’s second expedition recovered on Bering Island in 1882 (ills.), II, opp. 159

Remezov, S., I, 355

Renal calyces, II, 236

Rheum palmatum, II, 84

Rhododendron chrysanthum Pallas, II, 239

Rhubarb, II, 85

Rhumb, two meanings, I, 37

Rhytina gigas or stelleri, II, 139

Ridgway, Robert, II, 259, 262

Rissa brevirostris (Bruch), II, 111

River gulls, II, 111

River otters, II, 217, 219

Robertson, William, II, 265

Rock ducks, II, 23

Rocks, on Bering Island and the sea around, II, 196, 198, 200;

  growing, II, 198

Rodger’s fulmar, II, 109

Roots stuffed in the nose, I, 305, 320

Rosa cinnamomea L., II, 239

Roselius, Boris, I, 214, 225, 229, 235, 241, 242, 277;

  II, 21, 89, 145, 148, 152, 170

Rosemary, wild, II, 239

Roses, wild, II, 239

Routes of Bering’s expeditions (maps), first, I, 10, opp. 20;

  second, I, opp. 348

Rubus arcticus, II, 239

Rubus chamaemorus L., II, 239

Rubus spectabilis Pursh, II, 57

Rubus stellatus Smith, II, 239

Ruge, Sophus, I, 357

Rumex aquaticus, II, 85

Rumex arcticus Trautv., II, 240

Rumex occidentalis S. Wats., II, 84, 85

Russia’s solution of connection between Asia and America, I, 328

Russian Academy of Sciences. See St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences

Russian archives, I, 349, 371

Russian Senate, instructions for Bering’s second expedition, I, 28;

  Steller’s report to, II, 6, 249, 258

Russians, advance in Siberia in early eighteenth century, I, 3

Ryabushinski, F. P., I, 370

 

(S), meaning, II, 8

Saccardo, P. A., II, 264

Sahlberg, John, II, 261

St. Abraham Island, I, 202, 275, 339

St. Antoine (ship), II, 72

St. Aphinogena, I, 92, 93

St. Elias, Cape, I, 95, 271, 332;

  II, 36;

  from the southwest (ill.), II, opp. 44;

  plants, II, 238

St. Elias, Mt., I, 92, 93, 271, 332;

  II, 33, 42 (ill.)

St. Elias Island, II, 36.

  See also Kayak Island

St. Elmo’s fire, II, 116

St. Gabriel (ship), I, 18, opp. 20, 22;

  II, 11, 13

St. Hermogenes, Cape, I, 333

St. John, Mt., II, 113

St. Lawrence Island, I, 18, opp. 20

St. Mariny Point, I, 92, 93

St. Markiana Island, I, 198, 199, 275, 339

St. Paul (ship), II, 21;

  Chirikov’s report on the voyage, I, 312-323;

  complement, I, 326, 348;

    II, 22;

  construction and launching, I, 34;

  course changed after search for Gama Land, I, 284, 313, 341;

  decision to return, I, 297, 317, 324, 344;

  discovery of Land (Cape Addington), I, 291, 313, 342;

  first-hand records, existing, I, 283;

  journal, I, 283-311;

  landfall: Adak Island, II, 114;

  landfall: Agattu Island, I, 307, 321, 347;

  landing in Lisianski Strait, I, 293, 315, 345;

  log book, I, 283, 330;

  loss of men and boats sent ashore, I, 295, 317, 343;

  loss of men and boats—identification of place, I, 344;

  loss of men—question as to their fate, I, 311;

  meeting with natives on Adak Island, I, 303, 320, 347;

  return to Petropavlovsk, I, 310, 323, 348;

  reckoning, I, 283, 284, 308;

  search for Gama Land, I, 284, 313, 330;

  separation from the St. Peter, I, 58, 63, 65, 271, 287, 313, 331, 341;

    II, 23-24;

  start on return voyage, I, 297, 317, 346

St. Peter, hooker (ship). See Hooker St. Peter

St. Peter (ship), I, 34;

  II, vii, 21;

  beginning of voyage, I, 50, 271, 330;

  complement, I, 235, 341;

    II, 21, 22;

  construction and launching, I, 34;

  course changed, after search for Gama Land, for America, I, 58, 71, 270, 331;

  death of Bering, I, 230, 278, 340;

  deaths from scurvy, I, 192, 275, 281-282 (list), 338;

    II, 129;

  decision to break up, I, 233, 278;

    II, 174, 175;

  decision, July 14, 1741, to change to more northerly course, I, 90, 271, 332;

  decision, Aug. 10, 1741, to hasten return, I, 119, 272, 336;

    II, 66, 68;

  discovery of land, July 17, 1741, I, 93, 271, 332;

    II, 35;

  driven back by storms, Sept.-Oct., 1741, I, 170, 275, 338;

    II, 111, 118;

  first meeting with natives, I, 147, 273, 337;

    II, 90;

  head winds along 53rd parallel, I, 121, 273, 336;

    II, 67, 69;

  journal lost, I, 350;

  landfall: Adak and Atka Islands, I, 168, 275, 337;

    II, 112;

  landfall: Buldir Island, I, 201, 275, 339;

    II, 123, 124;

  landfall: Chirikov Island, I, 111, 272, 335;

    II, 62;

  landfall: Kiska Island, I, 199, 275, 339;

    II, 121;

  landfall: Semidi Islands, I, 113, 272, 335;

    II, 63;

  landing on Bering Island, I, 209, 276, 339;

    II, 136, 137;

  landing on Kayak Island, I, 97, 271, 332;

    II, 41;

  landing on Shumagin Islands, I, 141, 273, 336;

    II, 77;

  landward for water, I, 137, 273, 336;

    II, 75;

  last stretch westward, I, 203, 275, 339;

    II, 125;

  log book, I, 36-239;

  materials, supplies, and provisions taken on board, I, 48;

  preparations for sailing, I, 37;

  relics recovered on Bering Island in 1882 (ills.), II, opp. 159;

  report on saving the ship, I, 228, 277;

  saving the ship, vain attempts, I, 227, 277;

  search for Gama Land, I, 55, 58, 67, 270, 330;

  separation from the St. Paul, I, 58, 63, 65, 271, 287, 313, 331, 341;

    II, 23-24;

  skirting the Alaskan coast, I, 101, 272, 333;

  statement and counterstatement of condition after wreck on Bering Island, I, 231, 232;

  Steller’s account of movements on approaching Bering Island, II, 131;

  survivors’ fate, I, 341;

    II, 186;

  track on approaching Bering Island (map, reconstructed), II, 130;

  water supply, I, 90;

    II, 33 (see also Water supply);

  Waxel’s report on the voyage, I, 270-281;

  westward voyage continued, I, 151, 185, 275, 337, 339;

  wrecked on Bering Island, I, 230, 233, 277, 278, 340;

    II, 153, 168

St. Peter and St. Paul, Harbor of. See Petropavlovsk

St. Petersburg. See Petrograd

St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences, II, 250, 251;

  Delisle de la Croyère and, I, 32;

  map of results of Bering’s two expeditions, II, 101, opp, 101, 174;

  members joining Bering’s second expedition, I, 29;

  Steller’s journal, II, vii

St. Stephen Island, I, 199, 201, 275, 339

Salad, II, 138, 240

Salix arctica Pallas, II, 162

Salix sp., II, 162

Salmon, II, 81;

  red, II, 48

Salmon berry, II, 57

Salvelinus malma (Walbaum), II, 81

Sambucus, II, 58

Sammlung Russischer Geschichte, II, 14, 91, 101, 113, 190

Sänd, Boris, II, 148, 151

Sanders, Admiral, proposal of sea expedition from Russia to Kamchatka, I, 27

Sandpipers, I, 298;

  II, 80

Sandstone, II, 79, 198

Sanguisorba canadensis, II, 238

Sannak Island, II, 80

Saranna Lake, II, 202

Saranna lily, II, 178

Sarokin, Denis, I, 235

Sarychev, Gavriil, I, 98, 368;

  II, 52

Saturan, II, 177

Sauer, Martin, I, 98, 368;

  on skin boats, I, 148

Saunders, De Alton, II, 48, 67, 264

Saussurea morozeviczi Fedtsch., II, 179

Savelev, Sidor, I, 295, 316, 343;

 Chirikov’s instructions to, I, 316, 323

Savialov. See Zaviakov

Savich, K. I., II, 257

Saxenburg, II, 209

Sazhen, II, 8, 229

Scallops, II, 44

Scharbocksbeeren, II, 58

Scherer, J. B., I, 363;

  II, viii, 190, 252

Schilfgras, II, 29

Schmidt, A. F. W., II, 216

Schnabel, J. G., II, 209

Schott, C. A., I, 367

Schreber, J. C. D. von, II, 229

Schwatka, Frederick, I, 366

Scolopax nigra Gmelin, II, 105

Scorpii marini (Cottus), II, 62

Sculpins, II, 62, 81

Scurvy, I, 120, 196, 209, 272, 276, 306, 308, 319, 321, 338, 347;

  II, 20, 77, 85, 118, 126, 146;

  Bering Island, I, 237, 238;

    II, 146;

  deaths on the St. Paul, I, 306, 308, 310, 311, 321, 322;

  deaths on the St. Peter, I, 167, 192, 201, 208, 219, 230, 275;

  deaths on the St. Peter—list of names and dates, I, 280, 281;

  effects, I, 325;

  remedies, I, 238, 262;

    II, 84, 85, 86, 138, 178;

  water in which cedar had been boiled as remedy, I, 262

Scurvy berries, II, 57, 58

Scurvy grass, II, 179

Sea animal, strange, II, 64

Sea bears (fur seals), II, 169, 176, 177, 224.

  See also Fur seals

Sea beavers (sea otters), II, 31, 214,

  See also Sea otters

Sea biscuit, I, 319

Sea cabbage, I, 298, 300, 302, 306;

  II, 237

Sea cows, I, 237, 238, 279, 365;

  II, vii;

  drawing of an individual by Waxel (ill.), II, opp. 229;

  hide, II, 230, 233, 234;

  hunting, II, 180, 227;

  measurement by Steller (ill.), 11, opp. 202;

  meat and fat, II, 234;

  Steller’s sea cow, II, 139;

  Steller’s sea cow, detailed description, II, 226;

  structure, II, 229, 233;

  structure, internal, II, 235

Sea eagles, II, 237

Sea grass, I, 289

Sea Lion Bay, II, 192

Sea lions, I, 115, 237, 238, 279, 291, 292, 314, 317;

  II, 62, 63, 75, 177, 224, 226;

  drawing of an individual by Waxel (ill.), II, opp. 229

Sea lungwort, II, 178

Sea monkey, II, 64

Sea nettle, I, 289;

  II, 28

Sea oak, II, 22, 27

Sea Otter Creek, II, 147

Sea Otter Field, II, 147, 214

Sea Otter Rock, II, 192

Sea otters, I, 115, 230, 237, 238, 279;

  II, vii, 31, 63, 99, 112, 126, 245;

  Bering Island, II, 137, 138, 140, 147, 168, 170, 171;

  Brazilian, II, 31, 32, 218, 219;

  description, II, 162;

  detailed description, II, 214;

  as food, II, 147, 150;

  habitat, II, 31, 32, 217;

  habits, II, 220;

  hunting, II, 215, 222;

  Kayak Island, II, 59;

  migration, II, 31, 32, 206, 218;

  skins, II, 148, 161, 181, 217, 219

Sea parrots, II, 80, 105, 108

Sea pigeons, II, 105

Sea pigs, II, 111

Sea ravens, II, 237

Sea water, color, I, 290, 298, 299, 306, 318

Sea wolf, II, 140

Seals, I, 237, 238, 279, 300;

  II, 104, 138, 144, 226;

  blubber, II, 104;

  fur seals, II, 63, 169, 176, 224;

  hair seals, II, 30, 59, 63.

  See also Fur seals;

    Sea bears

Seaweeds, II, 22, 27, 29, 111, 124;

  bottle-shaped weed, II, 65, 67;

  thongs made of, II, 48

Seehunde, II, 59

Seepapageien, II, 108

Seeschwein, II, 64

Selinum benthami Watson, II, 178

Semenov, Ivan, I, 235

Semichi Islands, I, 202, 275, 307, 339, 347;

  II, 82, 84, 125, 126;

  mistaken identification as Kurile Islands, II, 126

Semidi Islands, landfall of the St. Peter, I, 113, 272, 335;

  II, 63, 81

Senate. See Russian Senate

Serdze Kamen, II, 11, 12

Serebrenikova Bay, II, 192

Servants, II, 148, 149

Service Hydrographique de la Marine, Paris, II, 70, 71, 72, opp. 72

Setchel, W. A., II, 46

Severgin, Vasili, I, 235

Seward Peninsula, II, 54

Sgibnev, A. S., I, 357

Shaitany, I, 13

Shalamai, II, 240

Shamans, I, 13

Shar log. See Chinese tobacco

Sharks, II, 59, 64, 117;

  makoai, II, 140

Sheep, wild, II, 207

Sheganov, Andrei, I, 310

Shelekhov, Grigorii, I, 368

Shestakov, Afanasi, I, 21

Shiksha, II, 84

Shinleaves, II, 179

Shipbuilding, instructions for Bering’s second expedition, I, 30, 32;

  Okhotsk, I, 34

Shipunski, Cape, I, 253, 276, 310, 348;

  II, 130, 132, 134

Shoes, II, 163, 180

Shots fired, I, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 94

Shouting, I, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 90, 93

Shovel, I, 97, 98, 99, 271

Shumagin, Nikita, I, 142, 281, 336;

  II, 87

Shumagin Island, (Nagai Island), I, 142, 144, 275, 336;

  II, 82

Shumagin Islands, I, 140, 142, 273, 336;

  II, 73, 75, 87;

  Khitrov’s map, facsimile, I, opp. 148;

    II, 76;

  modern map (ill.), II, 76;

  natives met by the St. Peter, I, 147;

    II, 90;

  plant list, II, 84;

  St. Peter’s landing on, I, 141, 273, 336;

    II, 77

Shumshu Island, II, 224

Siberia, II, 17;

  charting northern coast, I, 26, 27;

  early maps, I, 4;

  exploration of northern coast, I, 29;

  life in, II, 27;

  references on history of, I, 354;

  Russian advance in, early eighteenth century, I, 3;

  Steller in, II, 2, 4;

  ukase to the governor (Jan. 1725) as to Bering’s first expedition, I, 8

Sibucha, II, 245

Sickness, Bering Island, I, 209, 211, 219, 225;

  II, 134, 146, 151;

  on the St. Paul, I, 306, 308, 310, 319;

  on the St. Peter, I, 120, 128, 132, 135, 143, 159, 161, 163, 164, 169, 186, 191, 192, 193, 205, 208, 276;

    II, 106, 119, 121;

  recovery from, II, 160

Sievers, Vice-Admiral, I, 8

Signal code for the St. Peter and St. Paul, I, 42

Signatures, initial, meaning, II, 8

Simia marina danica, II, 64, 66

Sint, Ivan, I, 235;

  II, 21, 151, 170, 171;

  report and list of baggage and provisions, July 1, 1742, I, 234, 235

Sirenians, II, 139

Sitka Sound, I, 292, 311, 342

Sitkalidak Island, I, 104, 272, 333

Sivuch, II, 177, 245

Sivucha Guba, II, 192

Skin boats, I, 148;

  II, 12, 95

Skua, II, 108, 109

Skua hoieri, II, 108

Sladkaya trava, II, 44, 45, 48

Slanets, I, 262

Slate, II, 57, 79

Slovtsov, P. A., I, 353, 354

Sluzhiv, II, 15, 120

Slyunin, N., I, 370;

  II, 258

Smelting, II, 53, 97, 98

Smetanik, Lavrenti, I, 235

Smoke, II, 50

Snipes, II, 80, 112;

  black, II, 105

Snow, II, 122, 123, 144, 162, 206;

  violent storm, II, 170, 171

Snow, H. J., II, 150

Snow rose, yellow-flowered, II, 239

Snowbirds, II, 81

Snowflakes (birds), II, 81

Sokolov, Aleksandr, I, 350, 351, 352, 364, 365;

  II, 42, 71, 72, 113

Solikamsk, II, 3, 4

Somniosus microcephalus (Bloch), II, 140

Sorbus aucuparia, II, 239

Sorbus sambucifolia (Cham. et Schlecht.), II, 239

Sorrel, II, 240

Sounding lead lost by Khitrov, II, 89

Sources, manuscript, I, 349;

  published, I, 351;

  secondary, I, 352

South Rookery, II, 170

Spanberg, Martin, I, 7, 8, 311, 325;

  conduct, II, 27;

  at Okhotsk in 1735, I, 32;

  route from Yudoma Cross to Urak (drawing), I, opp. 13;

  sails for Bolshaya River, I, 16;

  at Ust-Kut, I, 12, 13;

  voyages, I, ix;

    II, 2, 14

Spears (ills.), I, opp. 304

Speedwells, II, 179, 240

Spellings, II, 8, 21

Spermatophytes, II, 179

Sphagnum, II, 46

Sphondylium, II, 45, 178, 239

Splavshikov, Semeon, I, 323

Spoonwort, II, 86

Springs, II, 55, 56;

  Bering Island, II, 196;

  Nagai Island, II, 77, 79

Spruce forest, II, 50

Squalus sucklii (Gerard), II, 59

Starichkov Island, I, 265

Starik, II, 106, 124

Starodubtsov, Sava, I, 235

State Island, I, 2;

  II, 73

Stealing, II, 161

Stejneger, Leonhard, I, 365;

  II, x, 8, 111;

  Bering Island surveys in 1882-83 (map), II, opp. 208;

  reconstructed tract of St. Peter on approaching Bering Island (map), II, 130;

  reconstruction of Steller’s first measurement of a sea cow (ill.), II, opp. 202;

  relics of Bering’s second expedition recovered on Bering Island in 1882 (ills.), II, opp. 159;

  sketch of Bering’s monument in Petropavlovsk (ill.), II, opp. 186;

  sketch of Copper Island in 1883 (ill.), II, 175;

  sketch of Mt. Steller (ill.), II, opp. 194;

  sketch of Yushin’s Valley (ill.), II, opp. 202;

  sketches of Cape Manati and Steller’s Arch (ills.), II, opp. 195;

  on Steller’s sea cow, II, 139;

  translation by, II, x;

  U. S. Natl. Museum Bull. 29, II, 23, 260;

  visit to Kayak Island, II, 41;

  works on botany and zoölogy of Commander Islands, II, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263

Stejneger, Mt., II, 175

Steller, G. W., I, 29, 235;

  acceptance of Bering’s offer to join second expedition, II, 16;

  on Bering Island, I, 233, 238, 279;

    II, 134;

  Bering’s navigation on July 27, 1741, I, 335;

    II, 61;

  Bering’s plan for second sea voyage, I, 35;

  “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” I, 359;

    II, viii, 44, 45, 189, 190, 256;

  “Beschreibung von . . . Meerthieren,” II, 222, 255;

  biographical material on, II, 251;

  biographical note, II, 1;

  books possessed by him, II, 2;

  “Catalogus plantarum in insula Beringii observatarum,” II, 179, 238, 254;

  “Catalogus plantarum . . . iuxta promontorium Eliae observatarum,” II, 57, 58, 84, 239, 254;

  Chirikov Island, I, 334-335;

    II, 62;

  complained of to the Russian Senate, II, 3;

  criticisms of Bering, II, 17;

  “De bestiis marinis,” II, 139, 222, 224, 226, 236, 245, opp. 202, opp. 229, 255;

  death, II, 4;

  discoveries and character, II, 4;

  Gmelin, J. G., and, II, 242, 246;

  handwriting, facsimile, II, 248;

  interview with Bering in March, 1741, II, 3;

  Kamchatka appointment, II, 1;

  on Kayak Island, I, 271;

    II, 36, 37, 40, 51;

  letter to Gmelin about the voyage (Appendix B), II, 242;

  letters to J. G. Gmelin, II, 256;

  measuring a sea cow (ill.). II, opp. 228;

  on Nagai Island, II, 77;

  plant catalogues, II, 254;

  “Reise von Kamtschatka nach Amerika,” I, 351, 359;

  on Shumagin Islands, I, 336;

    II, 77;

  storm of Sept. 30, 1741, I, 338;

   II, 115;

  treatment of Bering and others, II, 6, 40;

  voyage to America, II, 3;

  weaknesses, II, 4, 5;

  work after returning from Amerika, II, 3;

  works in manuscript, II, 253;

  works published, II, 5, 255,

    See also Steller’s journal

Steller, Mt., II, 194, opp. 194 (ill.)

Steller’s Arch, II, opp. 195 (ill.), 197

Steller’s Cave, II, 197, 237

Steller’s Hill, II, opp. 44 (ill.), 49

Steller’s journal, account of voyage, II, 21-187;

  facsimile of fol. 15 of MS found in 1917 (ill.), II, 38;

  facsimile of folios 76 and 77 of MS copy (ills.), II, 165, 166;

  facsimile of pages of Pallas’ edition in German in 1793 (ills.), II, 39, 164;

  first complete English translation, II, ix;

  first publication, II, vii;

  German copies, II, ix;

  manuscript copy, II, vii, 253-254;

  present translation, II, x;

  Russian translation, II, 63, 110, 254;

  title page and introduction, II, 9

Steller’s sea cow, II, 139.

  See also Manati;

    Sea cows

Steller’s sea monkey, II, 64, 65, 66

Stepanov, Savin, I, 220, 281;

  II, 146

Sterna paradisaea, II, 23

Sterna turneri, II, 23

Stibnite, I, 320

Stickleback, I, 309

Sticks with feathers, I, 147, 148, 274;

  II, 92, 95, 102

Stinging jelly fishes, II, 28

Stöller, Augustin, II, 251

Storehouses, II, 47

Storm fishes, II, 63, 111

Storms, American coast, I, 120;

  St. Peter driven back by, Sept.-Oct. 1741, I, 170, 275, 338;

    II, 109-118;

  St. Peter’s approach to Bering Island, II, 132;

  signs of, II, 106, 110, 111;

  snow on Bering Island, II, 170, 171

Strahlenberg, P. J. von, I, 356

Streams on Bering Island, II, 195, 200, 201, 208

Strelechnaya Volcano, I, 49

Streptopus amplexifolius (L.) D. C., II, 58

Stryx passerina Pallas, II, 110

Sturmfisch, II, 63, 64, 111

Subterranean wind, II, 205

Suckling, Cape, I, 92

Sukachev, V. P., I, 355

Sula bassana (Linnaeus), II, 108

Sula hoieri, II, 108

Supplies, disposition on leaving Bering Island, I, 236, 280;

  II, 182

Sutwik Island, I, 335

Suvorov, E, K., II, 45, 159, 258

Svinki, II, 110, 111

Swans, II, 80

Sweet grass, I, 238;

  II, 44, 45, 46, 48, 49, 178, 239

Sych, II, 110, 111

Syevernoi Nos, II, 192

Symbols in log book, meaning, I, 50

Synthliboramphus antiquus (Gmelin), II, 106, 124-125

 

Tabin, Promontorium, II, 10

Tanner, Z. L., II, 262

Tarakanov, Seliverst (Sylvester), I, 219, 281;

  II, 146

Tasman, A. J., I, 2

Tasman and Quast’s voyage, I, 355

Taucher, II, 80, 106

Tea, II, 144, 145, 171, 178;

  black, II, 179;

  herbs used for, II, 240

Tea soup, II, 177

Teleki’s “Atlas” I, 355;

  II, 10, 19, 72, 101

Teneriffe Island, I, 283, 314

Terns, II, 23

Terre de la Compagnie. See Company Land

Tertian fever, II, 158

Tetrao Lagopus, II, 81

Texeira’s map of 1649, I, 2;

  II, 72

Theeboy, II, 179

Theodosius Island, I, 105

Thériot, I., II, 263

Thoma, cossack servant, II, 141

Thongs of seaweed, II, 48, 49

Thread and needles, II, 103

Throwing stick (ill.), I, opp. 304

Thrush, dwarf, II, 81

Thunder, II, 207

Tiarella trifoliata, II, 238

Tigil River, II, 20

Timber, I, 99, 272;

  II, 81, 82, 83

Time, astronomic and civil, I, 50, 332;

  II, 33, 35, 107

Tinder, II, 45, 46, 49

Titov, A. A., I, 354, 355

Tlingits, I, 311

Tobacco, II, 172;

  presented to natives, II, 51

Tobacco pipes, II, 92, 94

Tobolsk, I, 11, 354;

  II, 34

Tolstoi Mys, II, 192

Tomsk, II, 2

Tonkikh, Jeremiah, I, 235

Tools, II, 163, 176, 180

Toothshell, II, 143

Toporkov Island, II, 202, 203

Torda, II, 80

Törnebohm, A. E., II, 257

Toroptsov, Mikhail, I, 215, 281;

  II, 137

Totanus fuscus (Linnaeus), II, 106

Totanus totanus (Linnaeus), II, 106

Tournefort, J. P. de, II, 2, 27, 28

Toy for children, II, 53

Track of the St. Peter and the St. Paul, (map), I, opp. 348

Tracks, animal, II, 79

Trade winds, II, 34

Transehe, N. A., II, xi, opp. 184

Transliteration, II, 8, 21, 133

Trap, II, 143, 144

Trautvetter, E. R., II, 260

Trees, absence of, II, 81, 82;

  cutting down of with blunt tools, II, 46;

  Shumagin Islands, II, 81

Trelease, William, II, 264

Tretyakov, Andrei, I, 167, 281

Tretyakov, Ivan, I, 230, 282;

  II, 112

Trillium erectum, II, 238

Trinity Islands, I, 334, 335

Trubeshin, Grigori, I, 266

Trubitsin, Grigori, I, 291, 314

True, F. W., II, 74, 260

Trumpet blown, II, 40

Trumpeter, II, 21, 136

Tugidak Island, I, 335;

  II, 61

Tulen, I, 279

Tumannoi (Foggy) Island, I, 112, 113, 272, 335

Tungus, I, 13, 16, 28

Tunguska (Upper) River, I, 12

Tura, Upper. See Verkhotura

Turinsk (Epanchin), I, 11

Turner, L. M., II, 261

Turner, William (d. 1568), II, 23

Turner Island, II, 77

Tyumen, I, 11, 355;

  II, 3, 4

 

Uka, II, 18, 100

Ukinski Bay, II, 18

Ulmaria, II, 240

Ulva priapus, II, 67

Umnak Island, I, 346

Unalaska, II, 97;

  hut (ill.), I, opp, 305

Unalaskans, I, 275;

  man (ill.), I, opp. 304;

  native in baidarka (ill.), I, opp. 149;

  weapons and implements (ills.), I, opp. 304, opp. 305;

  woman (ill.), I, opp. 305

Underground huts of island natives, II, 105

Unga Island, II, 73, 81, 106

Unimak Island, II, 78, 97

U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey chart No. 8513, II, 36;

  section (map), II, 43

University of Washington, I, 353, 358;

  II, 254

Upper Kamchatka Post, I, 17

Upper Tura. See Verkhotura

Urak, route to, from Yudoma Cross (drawing), I, opp. 13

Uria, II, 80

Uria senicula, II, 124

Urili, I, 291;

  II, 80, 105

Urtica marina, II, 28

Urup, II, 18, 73

Usachev, Michael, I, 306

Ust-Kut, I, 11, 12, 13

Uva ursi, II, 239

 

Vaccinium ovalifolium Smith, II, 57

Vaccinium uliginosum L., II, 58, 239

Vaccinium vitis idaea L., II, 57, 84, 178, 239

Vakhtin, V., I, 351, 366

Vancouver, George, I, 111, 368

Vasey, George, II, 261

Vasilev, Martin, I, 235

Vaua, landmark, I, 283;

  lighthouse, I, 49, 51, 313;

  St. Paul’s return and, I, 310

Vaugondy, Robert de, I, 356

Vegetation and winds, II, 81, 82, 83

Veniaminov, Ivan, I, 370

Verkhaturov, Peter, I, 235

Verkhotura (Upper Tura), I, 11

Vermin, II, 121

Veronica americana Schwein., II, 138, 179, 240

Veronica aphylla var. grandiflora (Gärtn.) (or kamlschatica L. fil.), II, 179, 240

Veronica beccabunga, L., II, 138

Verst, II, 8

Vich, syllable, II, 149

Vilyuchensk Island, I, 265

Vilyuchensk [Vilynchin] Volcano, I, 49, 253, 255, 310

Visibility, arc of, I, 199-200;

  II, 73

Vitim River, I, 13

Vizcaíno, Sebastian, search for El Dorado, I, 2, 355

Volcanoes, American, I, 272;

  Avacha Bay vicinity, I, 49;

  Kamchatka, I, 279

Voloshinov, Colonel, II, opp. 158

Vow, religious, II, 118

Voyage of Bering and Chirikov, chart by E. P. Bertholf, I, opp. 348

Voyages, bibliography, I, 367

Vrange, Navigator, I, 297, 312, 317;

  death, I, 310, 321, 348

Vries, M. G., I, 2, 355, 356;

  II, 18

Vries Strait, II, 73

Vulpes beringensis, II, 139

Vulpes kenaiensis Merriam, II, 59, 79

Vulpes vulpes or vulgaris, II, 212

Vyatka, II, 48

 

Wagellus cornubiensium, II, 109

Wagner, Hermann, II, 33

Wallfische, II, 74

Walrus, I, 292, 295, 298, 317;

  teeth, II, 103;

  tusk, II, 143, 144

Ward, R. DeC., II, xi, 68

Washington, University of, I, 353, 358;

  II, 254

Water, Algonquian term for, II, 91

Water birds, II, 80

Water cress, II, 84, 240

Water supply, II, 77, 106;

  St. Peter, I, 90;

    II, 33, 37, 60;

  St. Peter at Nagai Island, II, 77;

  shortage on the St. Paul, I, 297, 304, 306, 308, 317, 318, 322, 324;

  shortage on the St. Peter, I, 137, 138, 196, 209, 273, 276, 336;

    II, 74, 120

Watering place on Kayak Island, II, 41, opp. 45 (ills.)

Waves, II, 122, 123

Waxel, Sven, I, 235;

  II, 21, 60, 61, 118, 120, 121, 128, 129, 177, 181, 312;

  anonymous pamphlet, I, 362;

    II, 6, 265;

  chart of results, of expedition, I, 366, 367;

    II, 113, 175, opp. 229 (ill.);

  drawing of an Aleut, I, opp. 149 (ill.);

    II, 95;

  encounter with natives, I, 147, 148;

  fate, I, 329;

  landing on Bering Island, I, 209, 214, 225;

  manuscript account of the expedition, II, 264;

  report on saving the St. Peter, I, 228, 277;

  report on the voyage of the St. Peter, I, 270-281, 358;

  sickness, I, 209;

    II, 137, 152;

  statement of condition of St. Peter on Bering Island, I, 231, 232;

  Steller’s criticism of, II, 243

Waxel, Cape, II, 168, 174, 175, 192, 197

Wayel, II, 109

Weather on Bering Island, II, 153

Weber, ——, I, 362

Weights and measures, II, 8

West wind, II, 68, 108, 126

Westerlund, C. A., II, 261

Western Sea, II, 70

Whale blubber, I, 148, 274;

  II, 93, 94, 104

Whale Creek, II, 192, 214

Whalebones, II, 207

Whales, I, 86, 115, 116, 279, 290, 292, 299, 302, 317;

  II, 59, 74, 104, 106, 109;

  as food, I, 238;

  fresh whale ashore on Bering Island, II, 176;

  sperm whale, II, 140;

  ziphoid whale,

    II, 140

Whetstone, II, 52, 53

White River, II, 53

Whortleberries, II, 57, 84

Wickersham, James, I, 352

Wild roses, II, 239

Williams, R. S., II, 46

Willis, Thomas, II, 2

Willow, II, 55, 162

Willow ptarmigans, II, 81

Winds, Bering Island, II, 205;

  head winds along 53rd parallel and the St. Peter, I, 121;

    II, 67, 69;

  land and sea breeze habitus, II, 74;

  southeast, II, 111, 112;

  subterranean, II, 205;

  vegetation and, II, 81, 82, 83;

  west winds as evidence of land ahead, II, 68, 108, 126

Wine, I, 319

Wingham Island, I, 96, 332;

  II, opp, 45 (ill.)

Wintergreens, II, 179

Witsen, Nicolaas, I, 356;

  II, 10

Woehlcke, Louise, II, 258

Wolves, II, 79

Wood, II, 163, 178, 181;

  on Bering Island, II, 142, 145, 150, 162

Wood Creek, II, 147, 150, 192

Wooded Islands, I, 333

Wooden hats, I, 149, 274, 275, 305, 320;

  II, 102, 103;

  specimen (ill.), I, opp. 304

Wormwood, II, 240

Wrangell, Ferdinand von, I, 328, 369;

  II, 47, 177

Wright, J. K., II, 205

 

Yakutat Bay, I, 92, 346;

  II, 57

Yakuts, I, 13, 16

Yakutsk, I, 12, 29, 31;

  II, 2, 3

Yawl, II, 88, 89, 184

Yedzo. See Yezo

Yellow raspberries, II, 239

Yenisei River, I, 12

Yeniseisk, I, 12;

  II, 2, 242

Yevrashka, II, 79

Yezo, I, 1, 328, 356;

  II, 14, 32;

  on Delisle map, II, 71

Yudin, G., I, 355

Yudin Collection, I, 353

Yudoma Cross, I, 13;

  route from, to Urak (drawing), I, opp. 13

Yudoma River, I, 13

Yukola, II, 44

Yulov, midshipman, I, 323, 324

Yurts, II, 159, 160, 163, 169

Yushin, Kharlam, I, 235;

  II, 21;

  Bering Island reconnaissance, I, 232;

    II, 168, 173, 174;

  description of Bering Island, I, 236;

  journal of the hooker St. Peter, I, 239;

  log book of the St. Peter, I, 36, 211, 358;

    II, 107, 121;

  page of log book, facsimile, I, opp. 52;

  scurvy, I, 196, 206

Yushini Pad, II, 201

Yushin’s Sherlop, II, 198

Yushin’s Valley, II, 201, opp. 202 (ill.), 226

 

Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, I, 351, 352, 357, 364, 365

Zaviakov (Savialov, Zavialov), Luka, I, 195, 281;

  II, 120

Zhegalov, Stepan, I, 235

Zykov, Elizar, I, 235

ERRATA

Vol. I

p. 2, line 12 from bottom: transpose came to beginning of next line.

p. 2, lines 11-9 from bottom: Instead of sentence beginning with “One of these” read: The two southernmost of these, Kunashiri and Itorup, he thought were one island, which he named State Island and the other, Urup (which he thought to be part of the American continent). Company Land.

opp. p. 20, title of Fig. 6, next-to-last line: for August 22-September, 1727 read August 22-September 2, 1727.

p. 22, line 13 from bottom: for baidaras read baidars.

p. 32, large type, line 7 from bottom: for Pizarev read Pisarev.

opp. p. 35, title of Fig. 8: As evident from the description of the St. Peter and the St. Paul on p. 34, the ships in the view are not these vessels. Add to From an old engraving the words practically identical with an engraving in Steller’s “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” 1774, opp. p. 17.

p. 98, two last lines of footnote 38: for 1806, Part II, pp. 52-53 read 1807, Vol. 2, p. 25.

p. 120, line 7 from bottom: for Khatianintsov read Khotyaintsov.

p. 148, line 4 of footnote 91: for Fig. 11 read Fig. 12.

p. 237, line 11: for cape read camp.

p. 256, 11 a.m. entry: for went into read proceeded to.

p. 311, re loss of Chirikov’s men: Pallas says (Neue Nordische Beyträge, Vol. 1, 1781, p. 272) that on Heceta’s expedition of 1775, in lat. 56° near the coast, a party of very white and blond natives in thirty canoes was met with, and he queries whether these might have been descendants of Chirikov’s men.

p. 324, last line: for sleep read deep.

p. 325, lines 12-7 from bottom: The quotation from Steller’s journal is not literally coincident with the same passage in the present volume (p. 61) because it was taken from Dr. Golder’s and not Dr. Stejneger’s translation (see above, p. x).

p. 335, line 8: for Chiginigak read Chiginagak.

p. 339. line 3 from bottom, and Pl. 1: interpretation of track of St. Peter on approaching Bering Island from the east should be modified according to Fig. 15 and footnote 300a of the present volume.

p. 357, line 10: for Mikhael read Mikhail.

p. 360, line 4: for 1795 read 1793.

p. 364, line 13: for 67° 18′ N. read 65° 30′ N.

p. 365, line 2 from bottom: for Vol. 3, 1885, read Vol. 8, 1885.

p. 365, line 23: for svyedenie read svyedyenie.

p. 367, line 8: for Fig. 5 read Fig. 6.

p. 370, line 7 from bottom: for Sluinin read Slyunin.

p. 371, line 7: for dyyl read dyel.

Vol. II

p. 6, line 7 from bottom; p. 60, line 3 from bottom; p. 91, line 6 of footnote 206: for Pekarski read Pekarskii.

p. 38, line 3 of title of Fig. 1: for leaves read pages.

Transcriber’s Notes

The numbering of pages, footnotes, figures and plates are as in the original.

A small number of changes to punctuation were made silently to correct obvious typographic errors.

The name “Safron Khitrov” on pp. 36, 233 was corrected to Sofron Khitrov.

In footnote 5 p. 334, the phrase “9EP.M.” was considered to be a typographic error and was changed to “9 p.m.

All other spellings are as in the original. No attempt has been made to make consistent either transliterations or spellings of names.

The formatting of each of rhumbs, longitude and latitude was made consistent, following the predominant style used in the book. Rhumb lines have no internal spaces, e.g., N89°08′W, while longitudes and latitudes are spaced, as in 5° 31′ 4″ W and 52° 56′.

In the HTML version, clicking on most images will bring up a higher resolution image.

Plate 1 comprised a long fold-out map. It is here presented as a series of overlapping images.

Text in [ ] are insertions or comments by the author or editor, as shown in the original.

An Index and list of Errata for both volumes was found at the end of Vol. 2. Both have been included here at the end of Vol. 1.

The corrections and notes in the Errata have been applied to this volume.

[End of Bering’s Voyages Volume I of II, by Frank Alfred Golder]